Loading...
MARSHALL STREET APCF GENERATOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 - 07-0032-UTQ`? •'a ?5 .,,F,?.' ` C I T Y 0 ? C I. EAR `_ VV A rl LJll PN.4y?4 I , a Mww.,w:...' W, E., ....... .._._. POST Orl'cl- P,; ,N -E 33`78 4- 18 rF .y........ r` ???'a till: `ICm.u, tir avIra T3["ur.,>Nr, tOO 5..r. 171 \h r r1.1.. 1 1:?1'li. S: rrr ?20, (;1.1.ut r:crl lz, Fl.uwn: 3;i,j6 M?f,rr'? `?fi,`rR ,•?Y? Y 76?-4-50 F:?\ (.^ 2~) 562-4 -57 *_O.RECEIVED, l Nc.1Nn-:rl-N(; DEPARTMENT JUN 0 9 2011 Tune 7 2011 "Ji r1CIA1 RECORDS AW), LEGlSLAI'IV€: Si MCS DEPI° Brandes Design-Build, Inc. Attn: Kevin Klaus, President 2151 Coachman Road Clearwater, FL 33765 Re: Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Project (07-0032-UT) Certificate of Final Completion Dear Mr. Klaus: The work of the above referenced project is completed and acceptable as of Tuesday, March 22, 2011. However, if at some later date any defects appear due to construction, you will be expected to accept the responsibility according to the Guarantee of the General Conditions which reads: "The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance." Very yours, (bbert Maue Project Manager City of Clearwater cc: Robert Fahey, PC, Utilities Manager Mitch Chiavaroli. PE. McKim & Creed Susan Chase. City Clerk Specialist, Office of Official Records & Leg. Services Project File #TX %Xf E,i m- F:mpwi w>r wn.?.rruui: ne:1 i,,z Eat,., rr.' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MARSHALL STREET APCF GENERATOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 Project #07-0032-UT Prepared For LL >- I- u ISSUED FOR BID October 2009 . ~l\H<IM&CREED ACORD. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE OP ID L6 I DATE (MMlDDIYYYVI BRAND02 12/22/09 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE Brown & Brown oE Florida, Inc. HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR P. O. Box 15519 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Tampa FL 33684-5519 Phone: 813-226-1300 Fax:813-226-1313 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE HAlC # INSURED INSURER A: Bituminous Casualty Co Brandes Design BuildtInc. INSURER B: Bridgefield ~loyers Ins. 10701 DBA southern Industr al INSURER C Travelers Prop Cas of Amer 25674 Electric 2151 NE Coachman Rd INSURER 0: Clearwater FL 33765 INSURER E: .. COVERAGES T11E POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO T11E INSURED N'WED ABOVE FOR T11E POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWIT11STANDING ANY REQUIREMENT. TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR 0T11ER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS. EXCLUSIONS AND COr-DITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. ~~ lYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER DATE (MMlDDIYY) 11'8jW!(MMIDDIYY) LIMITS GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 - 03/13/09 03/13/10 ~ A ~ COMMERCIAL GENERN. LIABILITY CLP3262215 PREMISES (Ea ocannce) $50,000 - o CLAIMS MADE ~ OCCUR MED EXP (Anyone person) $ 5,000 ~ Contractual Liab PERSONAL & AOV INJ~Y $ 1,000,000 GEr-ERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 - GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMPJOP AGG $2,000,000 I POLICY [Xl r::8i n LOC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT - $1,000,000 A X ANY AUTO CAP3528744 03/13/09 03/13/10 (Ea accident) - ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY - $ SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) - HIRED AUTOS BODIL Y INJURY - $ NO~WNED AUTOS (Per accident) - - PROPERTY OAMI'.GE $ (Per acCident) GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EAACCIDENT $ l ANY AUTO OTHER T11AN EA ACC $ AUTO ONLY: N;G $ EXCESs/UMBRELLA L1ABLITY EACH OCCURRENCE $5,000,000 A ~ OCCUR D CLAIMS MADE CUP2582028 03/13/09 03/13/10 AGGREGATE $5,000,000 $ ~ IDEDUCTIBLE $ X RETENTION $10,000 $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND X TrORY LIMITS T lu~:t B EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY 83031655 03/13/09 03/13/10 ANY PROPRIETORJPARTNERlEXECUTIVE EL EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 OFFICER/MEI'rflER EXCLUDED? EL DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 If yes, descnbe under $1,000,000 SPECIAL PROVISIONS below EL DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT OTHER C Bldrs Risk/Inst Fl QT6609280A712 03/13/09 03/13/10 Max Lmt $3,000,000 Reporting Form Oed $5,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS J VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS RE: Marshall street APCF Generator (07-0032-UT) CITYCLE CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPRATlON DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 010 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. A RilED REPR . CERTIFICATE HOLDER City of Clearwater 100 s. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater FL 33756 @ ACORD COR PORA TION 1988 ACORD 25 (2001/08) .. IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25 (2001/08) I 'I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .. .. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MARSHALL STREET APCF GENERATOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 Project #07-0032-UT prepared for ~ Clearwater - u ISSUED FOR BID October 2009 ~o/31()1 Arthur Anchors Electrical Engineer Florida License No. 39804 Will am Structur Engineer Florida License No. 53355 ~ -;/49- ~~ __, /'//" /'/ v- ./" / ~. c.~ '/~~~_-/-'Y- '" ~ /~ 6 ~. ( - . ~ ')0 /' /c::.J/ ?-c /' v Thomas E. Robinson! PE Instrumentation & Cont~ols Florida License No. 62976 John D. Christie, AlA Architect Florida License No. AR16722 .. ~~&CREED I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MARSHALL STREET APCF GENERATOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 Project #07 -0032-UT prepared for ~ Clearwater - () ISSUED FOR BID October 2009 ...,;; / i/;!) ft~ / j/ t7~Y~ r .\/0-2-2. 60 fJ William J. Egan, PE Structural Engineer Florida License No. 53355 Arthur Anchors . Electrical Engineer , Florida License No. 39804 John D. Christie, AlA Architect Florida License No. AR16722 Thomas E. Robinson, PE Instrumentation & Controls Florida License No. 62976 . ~I\1CKJM&CREED I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MARSHALL STREET APCF GENERATOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 Project #07-0032-UT prepared for ; Clearwater - u ISSUED FOR BID October 2009 William J. Egan, PE Structural Engineer Florida License No. 53355 Arthur Anchors Electrical Engineer Florida License No. 39804 ., Thomas E. Robinson, PE Instrumentation & Controls Florida License No. 62976 D. Architect Florida License No. AR16722 . $rvfCKIM&CREED I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I City of Clearwater, Florida MARSHALL STREET APCF GENERATOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 PROJECT # 07-0032-UT TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION ilia SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS MARSHALL STREET APCF GENERATOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 CONTRACT #07-0032-UT CLEARVVATER,FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.myClearwater.com/citvproiects. ON MONDAY, OCTOBER 12, 2009, until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only, The work for which proposals are invited consists of demolition/removal of existing generator, purchase and installation of a new generator within an existing structure, addition of two (2) load-bank/portable generator connection cabinets, relocation/addition of automatic transfer switches (A TS) and related structural, architectural, electrical, and control system upgrades at the City's Marshall Street Advance Pollution Control Facility (APCF) located at 1605 Harbor Drive, Clearwater, Florida. A MANDATORY Pre-Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on VVEDNESDA Y. OCTOBER 21.2009, at 10:00 AM in MSB-130 Conference Room at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project. Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasinf Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 So. Myrtle Ave., 3r Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520, until 1:30 P.M. on TUESDAY. NOVEMBER 17. 2009, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for Marshall Street APCF Generator Up2rades. Phase 2 (07-0032-UT). A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub-contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are currently City pre-qualified Contractors in the construction category of VVASTEVVATERlVVATER TREATMENT FACILITIES with a minimum pre-qualification amount of $1.000.000. Contractors wanting to pre-qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks/ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida George McKibben, Purchasing Manager (727) 562-4634 4 Sectionl Clw092309.doc - - Page 1 of 1 8/27/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents: SECTION II ................................................................................................................................... i 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS.......................................................................... 1 2 QU ALIFI CA TI 0 N OF BIDDERS .................................................................................. 1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE .................................1 4 INTERPRET A TI 0 NS AND ADDEND A....................................................................... 2 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................... 3 6 CONTRACT TIME.... ........ ....................... ........... .............. ....................... ............ ........... 3 7 LI Q UIDA TED D AMAGES ............................................................................................. 3 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................... 3 9 SUBCONTRACTORS... .............. ....... ......... ..... ................ ........................................... ..... 3 10 BID /PROPOSAL FORM ....... ............. ....... ....... ................ ........... .................................... 4 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS .................................................................................................. 4 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS .................................................... 5 13 REJECTION OF BIDS ....................................................................................................5 14 DISQ U ALIFI CA TI 0 N OF BIDDER.............................................................................. 5 15 OPENING OF BID S .... ........ .......... ...... ......... .... ................ .................................. .............. 5 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ........................................... 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ............................. 6 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT............................................................................................... 7 19 BID PROTEST .................................................................................................................. 7 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT ................................................................................................. 8 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES ....................................................................................... 8 5_ SectionII.doc 7/17/2008 5 Sectionll.doc Page I of9 7/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www.myc1earwater.com/cityproiects.Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non-refundable. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others. 1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre- qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758- 4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14) days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten (10) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. 5 SectionII.doc Page 2 of9 7/17/2008 5 SectionII.doc Page 3 of9 7/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders 4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be . forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid opening. 5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. 6 CONTRACT TIME 6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful. Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The BidlProposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the BidlProposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder must state in the BidIProposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the BidlProposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS ILl Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5"xll" manila envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand comer. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. 5_ SectionII.doc Page 4 of9 7/17/2008 5_ SectionII.doc Page 5 of9 7/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, ifany, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV - Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III - General Conditions. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. 5_ SectionII.doc Page 6 of9 7/17/2008 5_ SectionII.doc Page 7 of9 7/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor ofthe correct sum. 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of hislher complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt ofthe appeal. 19.3 PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F .R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EP A) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction-related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. 5 SectionII.doc Page 8 of9 7/17/2008 I Section II - Instructions to Bidders I B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at -City of Clearwater Engineering Environmental Division and EP A websites to help address construction-related Best Management Practices. References EP A website I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 5 SectionII.doc Page 9 of9 7/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: D EFINITI 0 NS .................................................................................................................. 1 PRELIMINARY MA TTERS........................................................................................... 5 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ............................ 5 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS ............................................................................. ............... 5 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTlCE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT................................................................................................................ 5 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION.......... ............... ............................................. 5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ........................................................................ 6 PROGRES S MEETINGS................................................................................................ 6 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ......................................................................... 7 INTENT .. ............. .......... ...... ................................. .................. ......................................... 7 REPORTING AND RESOL VING DISCREPANCIES .................................................. 7 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS.. ....... ................................. ................. .............................. ........... 8 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS......................................................................................... 8 4.2 . INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ............................................................................8 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ..................................... 8 4 .4 REFERENCE POINTS.................................................................................................... 9 5 BONDS AND INSURAN CE ............................................................................................ 9 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND............................... 9 5.2 INSURAN CE................................................................................................................... 9 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE.................. ....................................... 10 5.2.2 PUBLIC LiABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE............................ 10 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE A UTOMOBILE LIABILITy.................................................... 11 5 .3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS.................................................................................................. 12 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES ..................................................................... 12 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. 12 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 13 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS ..............................................................14 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........ 14 6.5 USE OF PREMISES ......... ............................................................................................. 15 6.5.1 STA GING AREAS......................................................................... ........................... 15 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS..................................................... .......... ................. 15 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYAL TIES AND TAXES ................................... 16 6. 7 LAWS AND REGULA TIONS...................................................................................... 16 6.8 PERMITS .......................... ................................................................. ............................ 16 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION ..................................................................................... 17 6.1 0 EMERGENCIES........................ ....................................................... ............................. 18 6.11 DRAWINGS........................................................................... ....................................... 18 1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 3 3.1 3.2 4 6_ SectionIII.doc 11/17/2008 6 SectionIlLdoc ii 11/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW........................ 18 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRA WINGS............................ ....... .............................................. ........... 19 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS.......... ................................................................ ......... .... ............ 21 6.11.4 D ELIVERABLES: .................................................................................................... 22 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE........................... 22 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK ........ ................................................................................ 23 6.14 INDEMNIFI CATION ................. ............................... ............ ............. .................. ......... 23 7 OTHER WORK ...... ........................ ........................................... ........ ..... ......... ............... 24 7 .1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ........................................................................... ............. 24 7.2 COORD INA TI ON ........... ......................................................... ......................... ............ 24 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITy..... .............................. ........... ...... ....................... ........... 24 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............. 25 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE ............................. ................ ............ ............ .............. 25 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS ........................................................ 25 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................................................ 25 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................. 25 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES ............................................................................... ......... 26 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES............. 26 10 CHAN G ES IN THE WO RK.......................................................................................... 27 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE................................................................... 28 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE.................................................................... 28 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 29 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK .................................................................................................... 29 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME .................................................................... 30 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................. ...... ................................ ............ ........................... 31 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION ..........................................................................................31 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK .......................................................................... ............. 31 13.3 OWNER' S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK....................................... 32 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK......................................... 32 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ...................................................................... 32 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ...................................................................33 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK ....................................................... 33 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 34 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ...........................................................34 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ............................................................... 34 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS................................ 35 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION .................................................................................. .......... 35 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION ............... ................................................... ................................. 36 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ................................................................... 36 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE................................................................... 37 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS ................................................................................................. 37 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 37 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK...................................................................... 37 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE ...................................................................................... 38 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ........................................... 39 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION ............................................................................................. 39 17 MISCELLANEOUS ....................................................................................................... 40 17 .1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS ................................................................. 40 17.2 GIVING NOTICE........................ ................. ............. ........... ..... .................................... 40 17.3 N OTI CE OF CLAIM..................................................................................................... 40 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED..................................... 40 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT ................................................................................. 40 17 .6 RENEWAL OPTION ................................................. ................................................... 40 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK.............................................................. 40 19 MATERIAL USED ......................................................................................................... 41 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................... 41 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION....................................................... 41 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION.......................... 41 22.1 GENERAL ............ ...... ................. ............................ .... .............. .................................... 41 22.2 EXAMPLE..................................................................................................................... 42 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS ............................................................................ 42 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE ................ ................ ........................... .......................... .......... 42 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE ................................................. 42 23.3 FIXED SIGN ................................. ............... .............. .............. ................... ....... ........... 42 23 .4 PORTABLE SIGNS .................... ............... ................................................................... 42 23.5 SI GN COLORING......................................................................................................... 42 23.6 SI GN PLACEMENT..................................................................................................... 42 23.7 SI GN MAINTENANCE................................................................................................ 42 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN ..........................................................................................42 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE .................. 42 6 SectionIII.doc Hi 11/17/2008 6 SectionIII.doc Page I of 45 ll/I? /2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 1 DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Applicationfor Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Construction Coordinator A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and IS responsible for the administration of construction documents. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule-CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. 6_SectionIIl.doc Page 2 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions I I I I I I I Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F.D.o.T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseemg. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. I I I I I I I I Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Person A natural person or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity . Project The total construction of which the Wark to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all theW ork. I 6 SectionIlI.doc Page 3 of 45 11117/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, 6 SectionIII.doc Page 4 of 45 11/17/2008 6 SectionlII.doc Page 5 of 45 11/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor two (2) copies of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction Manager. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of construction stakeout and as-built survey. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification. 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look-ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. The City's Construction Coordinator typically chairs these meetings. 6 SectionIlI.doc Page 6 of 45 11/17/2008 6 SectionIII.doc Page 7 of 45 11117/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shaUbe issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 4 AVAilABiliTY OF lANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 AVAilABILITY OF lANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. 6_ SectionIlLdoc Page 8 of 45 11/17/2008 6 SectionlII.doc Page 9 of 45 11/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE Contract A ward Amount Contract A ward Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000. 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: 6_ SectionIII.doc Page 10 of45 11/17/2008 6 SectionIll.doc Page 11 of45 11/1712008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Contract A ward Amount Contract A ward Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles: Contract A ward Amount Contract A ward Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Loneshore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed 6_ SectionIlI.doc Page 12 of 45 11/17/2008 6 SectionlII.doc Page 13 of 45 11/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retain age shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $60.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, layout and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to payor to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. 6 SectionIII.doc Page 14 of 45 11/17/2008 6_ SectionIII.doc Page 15 of45 III I 7 /2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Contractor shall not payor employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right-of-ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: . Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. · Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. . All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. . Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (IS) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions . Sod must be restored with ten (10) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right-of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. 6 SectionIlI.doc Page 16 of45 11/17/2008 6 SectionIII.doc Page 17of45 11117/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. Ifthe Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFls, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty-one (21) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFls shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's 6_ SectionIII.doc Page 18 of45 11/17/2008 6 SectionIII.doc Page 19 of45 WI 7/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not conform to the "As-Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As-Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 61G17-6, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As-Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 61G17-6.002 Definition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also know as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As-Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, I-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6_ SectionlII.doc Page 20 of 45 ll/I? /2008 6 SectionIII.doc Page 21 of45 11/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 6.11.2.6 Standards The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61 G 17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7 Other The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1 Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text - use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11 3 1 2 L . . . a' er ammg e 1m Ions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANIT AR Y sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs N OfT I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEA WALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 00, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.50, and a text height of .010 times the plot scale. 6.11.4 DELlVERABLES: The as-built survey shall be produced on vellum or bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 "=20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format. Acceptable file formats include: DWG, DXF of a shape file. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail address Thomas.Mahony@myclearwater.com. 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, 6_ SectionIII.doc Page 22 of 45 1111 7/2008 6_SectionIII.doc Page 23 of 45 11/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release .of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify C;ontractor, who I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. 7 OTHER WORK 7 .1 RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2 COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. 6_ SectionIlI.doc Page 24 of 45 11/17/2008 6_ SectionIII.doc Page 25 of 45 11/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Dependant of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only,. in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall 6 SectionIII.doc Page 26 of 45 11/17/2008 6 SectionIlI.doc Page 27 of 45 ll/I7/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes 6 SectionIII.doc Page 28 of 45 11/17/2008 Section III - General Conditions I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full-unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor-owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand-by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to 6_ SectionIII.doc Page 29 of 45 11/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid ifnot submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. 6_ SectionIII.doc Page 30 of 45 11/17/2008 6 SectionIlLdoc Page 31 of45 11/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory.to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or pa.rt thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. Ifit is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Ownerto exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK Ifrequired by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and 6_SectionIII.doc Page 32 of 45 11/17/2008 6 SectionIlI.doc Page 33 of 45 11/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as-built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site marked up as-built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owenr's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the 6 SectionIII.doc Page 34 of 45 11/1712008 6 SectionIlI.doc Page 35 of 45 11/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) days after receipt of each Application for payment, either indicate a recommendation of payment and present Application to the Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating Owner Representative's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. Owner's Representative may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set- off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor immediate notice of refusal to pay with a copy to the Owner's Representative, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list and assign a date for this work to be completed. Contractor shall. immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As-builtlRecord Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (I) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien. 6 SectionlII.doc Page 36 of 45 11/17/2008 6 SectionIlI.doc Page 37 of 45 11/1712008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 111- General Conditions Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution ofthe Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat arid presentable condition. 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of anyone or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, constr~ction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): 6 SectionIII.doc Page 38 of 45 11/17/2008 6 SectionIII.doc Page 39 of 45 11/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2 GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the ContractorN endor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 6_ SectionlII.doc Page 40 of 45 11/1712008 6_ SectionIII.doc Page 41 of45 11/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 19 MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding process as part of the project's documents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. The Owner purchasing of construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. See SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION for ODP items included in the Contract Documents and the APPENDIX for ODP Documents. 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500-foot radius, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-Y4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period. to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. 22.2 EXAMPLE CITY SEAL Of CITY OF CLEAR WATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / --- PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. Weare available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Superintendent at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at alllocation(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1- SCOPE DESCRIPTION. 6_ SectionIII.doc Page 42 of 45 ll/17/2008 6 SectionIII.doc Page 43 of 45 11/17/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 23.3 FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4-foot by 6-foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of II2-inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4-inch by 4-inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24-inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24-inches by 30-inches (24"x30") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080- inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 23.5 SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black. 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of- way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 6' .1 I 'n ~ PROJECT NAME (CbNTRACT NUMBER) 5?EPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT N CONTRACTOR: T COMPLETION DATE: FUNDING: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: ~I.~~ U~ ".q- 2'~3" ~ L: U> ill L: 4"x4" P. T. Post (Typ.) E CJ E .~ E N 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar davs as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, SuIldays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee 6 SectionIII.doc Page 44 of 45 11/17/2008 6_SectionIII.doc Page 45 of 45 ll/17!2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Holidays, that in the OpiniOn of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION ilia SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS The General Conditions of the Construction Contract; Articles 1 through 24 inclusive; are a part of this contract. The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the General Conditions of the Construction Contract. Where any article of the General Conditions is modified or any paragraph, subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of that article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect. MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 2 - PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME; NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT 2.3.1 The Contract shall be substantially completed within 330 calendar days after the date when the Contract Time commences to run as provided in paragraph 2.3 of the General Conditions. 2.3.2 Substantial completion is defined as having all components of the system installed and ready for daily operation. Substantial completion includes start-up, operation, testing, manufacturer's checks and services, operator training, and similar items. The following items need not be completed for Substantial Completion: a. Final clean-up and restoration. b. Final application for payment and final acceptance. 2.3.3 All work in the Contract shall be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with paragraph 14.6 of the General Conditions within 360 calendar days after the date when the Contract Time commences to run. 2.7 HURRICANE PROTECTION PLAN Within two weeks of the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a Hurricane Preparation Plan that outlines the measures that will be completed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner in the event of a hurricane warning. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section ilia Supplementary General Conditions ilia - 1 0992-0197 Section ilia Supplementary General Conditions lIIa-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I In the event of inclement weather, or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor will protect the Work and materials from weather related damage. In the event that, in the opinion of the Owner, the Work or materials have been damaged due to failure on the part of the Contractor to protect the Work and materials, the Wark and materials shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. ARTICLE 6 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.8 PERMITS The City has obtained, or will obtain, the appropriate permits from the City of Clearwater (Building Department). These permits are required prior to the commencement of any work. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining a copy of these permits and for complying with any provisions or requirements which may relate to the conduct of construction activities ARTICLE 9 - OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE The Owner's Representative during the Bidding Phase is listed below. Robert Maue, PE City of Clearwater Engineering 100 S. Myrtle Avenue, Room 220 Clearwater, Florida 33756 Phone: 727-562-4827 Fax: 727-562-4755 Email: robert.maue@myclearwater.com ARTICLE 20 - CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Notes on the Structural Drawings only shall take precedence over the Technical Specifications. END OF SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I. I I I I I I I I I SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: 1 SC OPE OF WORK ........ ....................... ............ .......... ....... ................... ...... ................. ..... 3 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION .................... .......... ................. ......... ......................................... 3 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST .................................................................................. 3 2 FIELD ENGINEERING ... ...... ......................... ...... .... ............. ................... ...................... 3 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR ............... 3 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS.............................................................................3 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA....................................................................................................... 3 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITy................................. 3 3 DE FIN IT I 0 N OF TERMS ............................................................................................... 3 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS ......... ............ ...................... .............................................. 3 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS ...........................................................................3 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ................................................................ 3 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK .......................................................... 3 6 CO N CRE TE ........... ......... ........... ....................... .......... ....... ............. .................................. 3 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK .......................................... 3 7.1 EX CA V ATI ON................................................................................................................ 3 .7.2 FORMS........................................................................................................................... 3 8 REINFORCEMENT....... ........... ................... .... .......... .................... ............ ........... ........... 3 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................... 3 9 OBSTRUCTION S .. ........ ....... ............................. ................. ...... .................. ...................... 3 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT ............................................................................................ 3 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS .................................................................. 3 12 DEW ATE RING ...... ....... ........... .................... ................. ................... ........ ......................... 3 12.1 GENERAL...................................................................................................................... 3 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................................................3 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL..................................................................................... 3 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITy............................ 3 13 SANITARY MANHOLE S ............. ........................ ........................................................... 3 13 .1 BUILT UP TypE.................................................................................. .......................... 3 13.2 PRECAST TYPE .............................. .............................................................................. 3 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) .......................................... 3 13.3 DROP MANHOLES ........................................................................................ ............... 3 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS .......... ........ .......... ......................................... ......................... 3 8_SectionIV _081709.doc 10/13/2008 8_ SectionIV _ 08 I 709.doc ii lOll 3/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13 .5 MANHOLE COATINGS ................... ........ .......................... .......... ..... ........... ................. 3 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ............................................................................... 3 14 BA CKFILL........................................................................................................................ 3 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. ......................................................................................... 3 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE S TR U CTURE S ....................... ........... ........... ................. .............. ......... ............ ................. 3 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ...................................................................................................3 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL ....................................................................... 3 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT... ...................... ..................................... ..... ........ ............. 3 17.2 BAS I S OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................... 3 18 UND ERD RAINS ............................. ......... .............. ......... ...... ............ ............ ........ ............ 3 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ..... ..................................... .............. .............. .................. 3 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................... 3 19 STORM SEWERS ................ ........... .......... ................... ......... ....... ......... .......... ................. 3 19.1 AS BUILT INFO RMATI ON.......... .................................... ............... .............................. 3 19 .2 TESTING....................................................................................................................... . 3 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................... 3 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS................................................................ 3 20.1 MATERIALS ................................................. ............. ......... ....... .... ..................... ............ 3 20.1.1 GRA VITY SEWER PIPE....... ..................... ................... .................. .............. ........... 3 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE ........... .................... ............. ......... ............... ........... ................ 3 20.2 INS T ALLATI ON ............................................................................................................ 3 20.2.1 GRA VITY SEWER PIPE.......................................................................................... 3 20.2. 2 FORCE MAIN PIPE............................................................................................... 3 20.3 AS B UILT DRAWINGS ........................ ...................... ........................ ........... ................ 3 20.4 TESTIN G ............................................... ......................................................................... 3 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRA VITY SEWERS....... ................ ........ ................. .............. ............ 3 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS................................................................................ 3 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT ...................................................................................................3 20.5.1 GRA VITY SEWER PIPE.......................................................................................... 3 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE............................................................................................... 3 21 DRAINAGE ....... ......... .......... ........... .................................... ................ .............. ................ 3 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE............................................................................ 3 22.1 BASE....... .......................... ............................................................................................. 3 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ..................... 3 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE................................. 3 22.2 S UBGRAD E ................................................................................................................... 3 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT.................................................................................. 3 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAyMENT................................................ ...................... ............ ............ 3 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS .....................................................................3 23 .1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE .............. ............................... ................................................ 3 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 23.1.1 A GG REGA TE.......................................................................................................... 3 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS................................................................................... 3 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY AS S URAN CE .............................................................................................. 3 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TyPES...................................................................... 3 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS ................................. 3 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ...................................................... 3 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION ................................................................ 3 23.6.1 CRACKS.................................................................................................................. 3 23.6.2 POTHOLES......... ....... .............. .... .......... ...... ....... ... ................ ........ ........ .......... ....... 3 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES .................................. .......................................... ..... 3 23.8 ADD ITI ONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS.............. ................................... ............. 3 23.9 S UPERPA VE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE.... ............ ...................................................... 3 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT....... ................ ........... ......... ............. ................................ 3 23.11 BASI S OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................... 3 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................... 3 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................ 3 25.1 IRRl GA TI ON.................................................................................................................. 3 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION....... ....... ............................ ........... ..................... ........ ..................... 3 25.1.2 PRODUCTS ............ ....... ................. ......... ................ .................. ....... ...................... 3 25.1.3 EXEC'UTION... ....... ....... ................. ..... ..... ....... ..... ............... ................................... 3 25.2 LANDSCAPE................................................................................................................. 3 25.2.1 GENERAL.................................................................................;............................. 3 25.2.2 PRODUCTS.. .......... ............... .............. ................. ................. ............................ ..... 3 25.2.3 EXECUTION.... ......... ........... .......... ...... .................. ................ ............................. .... 3 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING..................................................... 3 26.1 INTENT .... ............ ........... ..... ...................... ..... ........ ..... ......................... ... ...................... 3 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITy.......................... 3 26.3 MATERIALS.................................................................................................................. 3 26.4 CLEANIN G/SURF ACE PRE PARAT I ON...... ............... ................................................. 3 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ...................... ...... ........ ... ........... ............................. .......... 3 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION. ........... ............... .... .............. ............. ................. ........... ......... 3 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION .......... ........ ..... .............. .............................. .................... 3 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ..... ....... ........ ..... .............. ............ .................... ........... ....... 3 26. 9 PAyMENT...................................................................................................................... 3 27 PLANT MIX DRIVE WAYS .......................... ........... ....... ................................................. 3 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT........... ........ ................... ............ ...... ................................ 3 27.2 BASI S OF PAYMENT ............................................................................................ ....... 3 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS .................................. 3 2 9 CONCRETE CURBS ............. .............. ............ .............. .................................................. 3 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .................... .................................................................... 3 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ...................................................................................................3 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAyS........................................................... 3 8_ SectionIV _081709 .doc iii 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc iv 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS ........... ... ........................................... ...... ................. ............ 3 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS .............. ........................................... ............... ................... 3 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT.................. ................... ................... .............. ....... ........... 3 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT ...................................................................................................3 31 SODDING ................. .... ....... .............. ...................... .............. ................... .... ........ ............. 3 32 SE ED IN G. ................. ........... ....... ................................. .......... ........ ........ ............. .......... ..... 3 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES..................................................................................................................3 33 .1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES.... ............ ................................ ................. ................. 3 33.2 PRECAS T TyPE............................................................................................................ 3 33.3 BA SI S OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................... 3 34 MATERIAL USED .......... ........ ........... ........... .......... ...................................... ........ ........... 3 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ........................................ 3 36 STREET SIGN S .... ................ .............. ................. ..... ........................................ ................ 3 37 AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS .................................................... 3 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING.................................. 3 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING ..................................................... 3 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VID EOGRAPHERS ....... .......................... ........................ ................ 3 37.4 EQUIPMENT ...... ............ ................. .................................. ... ..... ......... ............ ............... 3 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO .................................................,'...................... 3 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO .........................................................................3 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION ................. ............. ............. ...... ......... ....... ............. ........ ........ 3 37.8 LIGHTING .... .... .............. ............. ... ........... ...................... ............. ............... .................. 3 37.9 SPEED 0 F TRAVEL...................................................................................................... 3 37.1 0 VIDEO LOG/INDEX............................................. ........................................................ 3 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE... ............ .............. ........................................ ......... ........ ........... 3 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES ..................................................................................... 3 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ..................................................................... 3 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS................................................................... 3 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ...............................3 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SySTEMS...................................... 3 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES..........................................................................3 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS .. ..... ............. .................... ........................ ......................... 3 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ........................ 3 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS ...................................................................... 3 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION .........................................................3 38.9 MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................................... 3 38.10 CO MPLIAN C E............................................................................................................... 3 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING ................................................................... 3 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE...................... 3 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES .........................................................................................................3 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 41.1 SCOPE............................................................................................................................ 3 41.2 MATERIALS ......... ............. .......................................... ....... ............................. ...... ........ 3 41.2.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................... 3 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS .......... ............ ........ ................................. ........ 3 41.2.3 GA TE VAL VES ........................................................................................................ 3 41. 2. 4 VAL VE BOXES........................................................................................................ 3 41.2.5 HyDRANTS...... ........... .................... ................. ............ .............. ................... .......... 3 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES... ............. ........ ................. ... ...... ......................................... ..... 3 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS.................................................................... 3 41.2.8 BACKFLOW P REVENTERS ......... ................ ................... ............. ............ ............. 3 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES............................................................................................... 3 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS ................ ............... .......... ......... ............. ....... ...... ............ 3 41.3 CONSTR U CTI ON.......................................................................................................... 3 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING......................................................................................... 3 41.3. 2 PIPE LAyING......................................................................................................... 3 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS........................................... 3 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES ................................................................. 3 41.4 TESTS............................................................................................................................. 3 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS....... ..... ......... ............... ........ ............ ..................... ....... ....... 3 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST.................................................................................................. 3 41.5 S TERILIZATI ON ........................................................................................................... 3 41.5.1 STERILIZING A GENT............................................................................................ 3 41.5.2 FLUSHING SySTEM..... .............. ................ .... ........ ............ .......... .... ... ..... ...... ....... 3 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE ..... .............. .......... .......... ............ ........... ....... ....... 3 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS...... ............ ............. ................. ......... ........... .......... 3 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS.. ....... ........ ....... ......................... .................................... ........... 3 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .............................................................................3 41. 6.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................... 3 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS............................................................. 3 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS ....................... ................................ ..... ......... 3 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS..... ....... ............ .... ... ........ ............... ..... ........ ....... ............................. ........... 3 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HyDRANTS......................................................... 3 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................ 3 43 TENNIS COURTS .............. ...... ......... ....... ..................... ...... ................ .................. ........... 3 43 .1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS ..................... ................. .......................................... ............ 3 43.1.1 SOIL TREAIMENTS................................................................................................ 3 43.1.2 BASE COURSE....................................................................................................... 3 43.1.3 PRIME COAT......................................................................................................... 3 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE..................... ............. .... .......... ........... ....................... ............ 3 43.1.5 SURFACE CO URSE ............................................................................................... 3 43.1.6 COLOR COAT........................................................................................................ 3 43 .2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS ............................................... ............................. .................. 3 43.2.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................... 3 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION.............................................................................................. 3 43.2.3 SLOPE..................................................................................................................... 3 43.2.4 BASE CONSTR UCTION......................................................................................... 3 8 SectionlV 08I709.doc - - v 10/13/2008 8_ SectionIV _ 081709 .doc vi 10/1312008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING............. ........................................ ................. ...... ..... ........ 3 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE ...................... ....................... ............... ....... ... ... ........ ..... ......... 3 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER ........ ....................... ............ ........... ..... ....... .......... ........... .............. 3 43.2.8 FENCING .... ......... .... .... ...................... ....... ....... .............. ................. ....................... 3 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS...................................................................................................... 3 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT...... ................... ...... ........................ .............. ....................... 3 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE..... ..................... ......... ............. ...... ................ ........... ..... ....... 3 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable)............... ............. ..... .............. ......... ............. .... ........... 3 43.2.13 CONCRETE ........ .............. ............................................... ................. .......... ............ 3 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING ..................................................3 43.2.15 WATER COOLER ............... ............................ ................... .............. ........... ............ 3 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION..... ....... ............................ .................. ............... ........... ............ 3 43.2.17 WARRANTy....... .................. .......................... ................... ............. ... ........... ........... 3 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ........................................................................... 3 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ...........3 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN ................................................................ 3 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETy........................................................................................... 3 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES ......................... ................................. ..... .......... 3 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAyS....... ......... ................... .......... ............ ..... ................ ........ ..... .......... 3 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS................... 3 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS ........................................................... 3 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS... ........................ ........... ............. ..... ..... ......... ............ ....... ...... 3 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN..................................... 3 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION ...................... 3 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ............................................... 3 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR.............. 3 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LININ G................................................................................ 3 45.1 INTENT .. ............... ............. ...... ............................................. ...... ............ ....................... 3 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITy.......................... 3 45.3 MATERIALS.................................................................................................................. 3 45.4 CLEANIN G/SURF ACE PREPARATION ..................... ........... .............. ............ ............ 3 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ................. ........................ ......................... ............. .......... 3 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION ..................... ..................................... ......... ........ ..... ............... 3 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION .......................................................................................3 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION.... .............................................. ............... ............. ........... 3 45.9 PAYMENT ...................................................................................................................... 3 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING....................................... 3 46.1 MATERIALS..... ............................................................................................................. 3 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS............................................................................................. 3 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL............................................................................................. 3 46.1.3 SAMPLES.................... ...................... .................. ... .......................... ........... ............ 3 46.1.4 REJECTION............................................................................................................ 3 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS....................................................................................................... 3 46.3 CONSTR U cn ON PRA CTI CES ................ ................................................................... 3 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE............................................................................................. 3 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS............. .......... ..................... .......................... 3 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 46.3. 3 PIPE JOINING....................................................................................................... 3 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE............................................................................... 3 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE ........................................... .................................. ............. 3 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS........................................................ 3 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION............................................................................. 3 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS ............................................................3 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER.................................................................................. 3 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES ........................................................................3 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED.................................................. 3 46.4.7 BACKFILLING .......... ........ ........ .......... ...... ............ ... .................... .......................... 3 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR....................................................................................................... 3 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS..................................................................................... 3 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE........................ 3 47.1 SCOPE............................................................................................................................ 3 47.2 MATERIALS ........... ........................................... ......... ... ........ .......................... .............. 3 47.3 PIPE......................................................................................... ......... .............................. 3 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM ..... ........ ......... ............. ....... ............. .... ........................... .................. 3 47.5 FITTINGS ................... ..................... .... ............. ................ ........................... ........... ........ 3 48 G UNITE SPECIFI CATIONS.. ...................... ........ ............ ................ ................... ........... 3 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT ....................... ............ ................................ .......... ..... 3 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE................... 3 48.3 COMPOSITION ....... ............. ............................. ................................... ......................... 3 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................... 3 48.5 MATERIALS.......................................................... ........................................................ 3 48.6 WATER........................................................................................................................... 3 48.7 REINFORCEMENT .... .... .... .... .............. ........... .............................................................. 3 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS .... .... ................... ................................ .............................. 3 48.9 . SURFACE PREPARATION .. ............. ............................................ .................. ........... ... 3 48.1 0 PROPORTIONING... ........................................... ............ ............................... ........... ..... 3 48.11 MIXING ...... .............. .......................................... ............. ............................... ........... ..... 3 48.12 APPLI CATION............ ................................................................................................... 3 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS .... ............. ........................................ ................ .................. 3 48.14 SURFACE FINISH......................................................................................................... 3 48 .15 CURING......................................................................................................................... 3 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ....................................................................... 3 48.1 7 INSPECTION.......................................................................... ....................................... 3 48.18 EQUIPMENT ........ .......... .... ........................................... ................................................ 3 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION ............................. 3 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT ...................................................................................................3 49 .2 PAyMENT..... ................................................................................................................. 3 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS ....................................................................... ....... 3 49.3.1 MATERIALS............................................................................................................ 3 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION...................................................................... 3 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM .................................................. 3 49.4.1 MATERIALS............................................................................................................ 3 49.5 INFIL TRATI ON CONTROL.......................................................................................... 3 8_SectionIV _081709.dqc vii 10/1312008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc viii 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 49.6 GRO UTIN G MIX........................................................................................................... 3 49.7 LINER MIX.................................................................................................................... 3 49. 8 WATER........................................................................................................................... 3 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS ............. ........... .... ...... ............................"................ ......... ............ 3 49.10 EQUIPMENT................................................................................................................. 3 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ........................................................................... 3 49.11.1 PREPARATION............. .......... ..... ....................................................... ............ ........ 3 49.11.2 MIXING................................................................................................................... 3 49.11.3 SPRAyING.............................................................................................................. 3 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING............................................................................................. 3 49.11.5 CURING.................................................................................................................. 3 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE .......................................................... 3 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ........... 3 49.12.1 SCOPE.................................................................................................................... 3 49.12.2 MATERIALS............................... ... ............ .... ...................................... ............... ...... 3 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION.... ..... ........................ ............................... ...... 3 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS .............................................................................. 3 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM ................................................................ 3 51.1 SCOPE........................................................................................ ...... .............................. 3 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS .............. .......... .......................................................... ....... 3 51.2.1 ASPHALT................................................................................................................ 3 51.2.2 CONCRETE............................................................................................................ 3 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX............................................................................... 3 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT............................................................. 3 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE.............................................................. 3 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION .......... ................................ ......................... ............. ........ 3 51.6 PLAYING LINES........................................................................................................... 3 51.7 GENERAL.. ......................................... ............ ................. ....................... ............ ........... 3 51.8 LIMITATIONS............................................................................................................... 3 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ............................. 3 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES .....................................................................................3 53.1 MATERIAL.................................................................................................................... 3 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL...................................................... 3 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL:.................................................. 3 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE................................................................................................... 3 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC..... .......... ........... .......... ................................................... .... 3 53.2 PERF ORMAN CE ........................................................ ................... ............... ...........,..... 3 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 3 54 .1 SCOPE........................................................................................................................ .... 3 54 .2 SCHEDULING OF WORK............................................................................................ 3 54 .3 WORK METHODS.... ............................ ....................... .................... ............ ................. 3 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING ............................. .............................................. 3 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT............................ .............. ..................................... 3 54.4 LITTER........................................................................................................................... 3 54 .5 VISUAL CHECK........................................................................................................... 3 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING .............................................................. 3 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)......... 3 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL .... .............................. .......... ............ ............. ................................. 3 54. 9 TRAFFIC CONTROL.................................................................................................... 3 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY ................................................................................................3 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION.............................................................................................. 3 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA............................................................. 3 54.13 MULCH CONDITION .............. .................................................. ................................... 3 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR ........................................................................ 3 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL......................................................... 3 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION ................... ................................. ......... ................ ............ ....... 3 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION ............ ........................................ ......... ..... ....................... ....... 3 54.18 LEVEL OF S ERVI CE..................................................................................................... 3 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ........................................................................................... 3 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL .............. ...... ................. ........................... .................. 3 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS............................................................................................... 3 55 MILLING OPERATIONS ........... ...... ........... .......... ........... ........... .................. ...... ........... 3 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE .......................................... 3 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS ......................~....................................... 3 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS ..................................... ..... ........... ................................ 3 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS. ................................. .................................... ................... 3 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES ...................... 3 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ................................................................3 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING.................................................................................................... 3 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS .............. ............................................................... ..... 3 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT........................................................................................ 3 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................... 3 56 CLEARlN G AND GR UBBIN G ....................................................................................... 3 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ........................................ ..... ............. ....................... ....... 3 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................... 3 57 RIPRAP ............................................................................................................................. 3 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT................ .......... .... .......................... .............. .......... ........ 3 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ...................................................................................................3 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY ....................................................................................3 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL................................................................................................. 3 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ....................................................................3 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS............................................... 3 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAyMENT........................................................... 3 60 SI G NIN G AND MARKING.. .................... ....................................................................... 3 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT........................................................... 3 61 ROAD WAY LI G HTIN G ........................................ .......................................................... 3 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ........................................................... 3 8_ SectionIV _081709 .doc ix 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc x 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 62 TREE PR OTECTI ON ........ .................................... ............... ......................... ........... ....... 3 62.1 TREE BARRICADES ................... ................................ ..:........... ..... ........... ........... ........ 3 62.2 ROOT PRUNING .......................:..................................... ........................... ........ ........... 3 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING............................................................................................3 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES ............................... ......... ............. ....................... .... .................. 3 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN ........................................ ..............:. ....... .... ........... .........~........... 3 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ...... .............................................. ..................... 3 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ........................................................... 3 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS ............. ..... ................ ............................ ............. .;.......... ........ 3 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS............................................................. ...........:.... ..............;.... 3 63 .6 POSTING........................................................................................................................ 3 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES ...................................... .......................... ................................ 3 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: Marshall St. APCF Generator Upgrades Phase 2 Project Number: 07-0032-UT Scope of Work: The work for which proposals are invited consists of demolition/removal of existing generator, purchase and installation of a new generator within an existing structure, addition of two (2) load-bank/portable generator connection cabinets, relocation/addition of automatic transfer switches (ATS) and related structural, architectural, electrical, and control system upgrades at the City's Marshall Street Advance Pollution Control Facility (APCF). The following list of equipment shall be owner direct purchased (ODP): Dewatering Building Generator Dewatering Building ATS Blower MCC Building ATS The Contractor shall provide one (1) fixed project sign as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required above the indicated amount due to the Contractor's schedule of work, which will be provide at no additional cost to the Owner. CONTRACT PERIOD: 360 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS 8_SectionIV _08l709.doc Page 1 of 127 10/1312008 8_SectionlV _081709.doc Page 2 of 127 10113/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST Project Name: Marshall St. APCF Generator Upgrades Phase 2 Project Number: 07-0032-UT The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown below: 1 ~ Scope Of Work 2.1 ~ Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Contractor 2.2 D Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The City 3 ~ Definition Of Terms 4 ~ Order And Location Of The Work 5 ~ Excavation For Underground Work 6 D Concrete 7 D Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 D Reinforcement 9 ~ Obstructions 10 ~ Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement 11 D Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 ~ Dewatering 13 D Sanitary Manholes 14 ~ Backfill 15 D Street Crossings, Etc. 16 D Raising Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures 17 D Unsuitable Material Removal 18 D Underdrains 19 D Storm Sewers 20 D Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains 21 D Drainage 22 ~ Roadway Base And Sub grade 23 ~ Asphaltic Concrete Materials 24 ~ Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt 25 D General Planting Specifications 26 D Hdpe Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining 27 D Plant Mix Driveways 28 D Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials 29 ~ Concrete Curbs 30 ~ Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways 31 ~ Sodding 32 D Seeding 33 D Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 ~ Material Used 35 ~ Conflict Between Plans And Specifications 36 D Street Signs 37 ~ AudioNideo Recording Of Work Areas 38 ~ Erosion And Siltation Control 39 D Utility Tie In Location Marking I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 40 [gJ Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee 41 D Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appurtenances 42 D Gas System Specifications 43 D Tennis Courts 44 D Work Zone Traffic Control 45 D Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining 46 D Specifications for Polyethylene Sliplining 47 D Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe 48 D Gunite Specifications 49 D Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration 50 [gJ Project Information Signs 51 D In-Line Skating Surfacing System 52 D Resident Notification of Start of Construction 53 D Gabions and Mattresses 54 D Lawn Maintenance Specifications 55 D Milling Operations 56 [gJ Clearing and Grubbing 57 D Riprap 58 D Treatment Plant Safety 59 D Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials 60 D Signing And Marking 61 D Roadway Lighting 62 [gJ Tree Protection 63 D Project Web Pages 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and layout site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As- built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property comers or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the 8_ SectionIV _ 081709.doc Page 3 of 127 10/1312008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 4 of 127 10113/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida. 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III, ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows: AA AAMA AASHTO ACI AISI AMA AMCA ANSI Aluminum Association, Inc. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials American Concrete Institute American Iron and Steel Institute Acoustical Materials Association Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. American National Standards Institute I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I APA ASAE ASCE ASHRAE ASME ASSE ASTM AWG AWMA AWS AWWA CFR CISPI CRSI CS DEP DOT EPA FAC FBC FFPC FGC FMC FPC FedSpec HI IBBM IEEE IPS MIL NAAMM NBFU NEC NEMA NFPA NPT NWMA PCA PCI SBC SBCCI SDI SFPC SGC SJI SMACCNA 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Section IV - Technical Specifications American Plywood Association American Society of Agricultural Engineers American Society of Civil Engineers American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning American Society of Mechanical Engineers American Society of Sanitary Engineering American Society for Testing and Materials American Wire Gauge Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association American Welding Society American Water Works Association Code of Federal Regulations Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards Department of Environmental Protection (Florida) Department of Transportation (Florida) Environmental Protection Agency Florida Administrative Code Florida Building Code Florida Fire Prevention Code Florida Gas Code Florida Mechanical Code Florida Plumbing Code Federal Specifications Standards of Hydraulic Institute Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Iron Pipe Size Military Specification National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers National Board of Fire Underwriters National Electrical Code National Electrical Manufacturers Association National Fire Protection Association National Pipe Thread National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association Portland Cement Association Prestressed Concrete Institute Standard Building Code (SBCCI) Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. Steel Door Institute Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI) Standard Gas Code (SBCCI) Steel Joist Institute Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association Page 5 of 127 10/13/2008 SMC SPC SPIB SSPC TCA UL Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI) Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) Southern Pine Inspection Bureau Steel Structures Painting Council Title Council of America Underwriters' Laboratories I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 - ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid 8_SectionIV _08] 709.doc Page 6 of ]27 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry". 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or sprmgmg. 8 REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the 8__SectionIV _081709.doc Page 7 of 127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 8 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM AI85). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements. 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/1 0 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre- construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 12 DEWATERING 12.1 GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 9 of 127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 10 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non-Contaminated Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY Citv Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: 1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results 2) A copy of the FDEP Notification Failure to follow the above procedure will result in a Violation and a Stop Work Order will be placed on the project. Depending on the severity of the Violation, the City's Engineering Department may be required to notify the Department of Environmental Protection for enforcement action. The following procedure will be followed: 1 st occurrence - Stop Work Order 2nd occurrence - Notification to FDEP It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have any questions. You may contact the City at 562-4750 for direction or further assistance. STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON-CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non-contaminated site activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62- 620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists. Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The eftluent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1. TABLE 1 Screening Values for Discharges into: Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/l 10.0 mg/l PH, standard units 6.0-8.5 6.5-8.5 Total Recoverable Mercury - by Method 1631E 0.012 ~g/l 0.025 ~g/l Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 ~g/l 9.3 ~g/l Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 ~g/l 2.9 ~g/l Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/l 5.6 ~g/l Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 ~g/l 86.0 ~g/l Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 ~g/l 50.0 ~g/l Benzene 1.0 ~g/l 1.0 ~g/l Naphthalene 1 00.0 ~g/l 1 00.0 ~g/l If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit or hv the City of Clearwater. (a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: 1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude) ; 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page II of 127 10/13/2008 8_ SectionIV _ 08l709.doc Page 12 of127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (I) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (I) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration of less than 1500 mg/l, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than 1500 mg/I. In accordance with Rule 62-302.500(l)(a-c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters. If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to. surface waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit. If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office within one (I) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62-621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches. Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 13.2 PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "a" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Detail #302 Sheet 2 of 3. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A I or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 - Asphaltic Concrete - Adjustment of Manholes. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 8_ SectionIV _ 081709.doc Page 13 of127 10/13/2008 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 14 ofl27 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2-inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry thickness of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite. 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Plo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. 15 STREET CROSSINGS. ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER. STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off- site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall either be shown on the plans, or determined in the field by the Engineer in conjunction with the City's Materials Tester. 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly-chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 15 of127 10/13/2008 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 16 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted. 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 19 STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941 of the current FOOT Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) 19.2 TESTING The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 20.1 MATERIALS 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20- feet. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior "poly lined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 8_SectionlV _081709.doc Page 17 of 127 10/1312008 8_ SectionIV _ 081709.doc Page 18 of127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 20.2 INSTAllATION 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM 0 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe 00 plus 8 to 12-inch on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 20.3 AS BUilT DRAWINGS The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes. 20.4 TESTING 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 114- inches shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shorin'g and dewatering, backfill and grading. 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22.1 BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 19 of127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 20 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 ofFDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 6 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330-11, and for soil cement per Section 270-5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, sub grade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 22.2 SUBGRADE All sub grade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 9 I 4 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 9 11 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract 8_ SectionIV _081709 .doc Page 21 of127 101l3/200S 8_ SectionIV _081709 .doc Page 22 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade. 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per FDOT Section 160-7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition). 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S- Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 919 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Pavment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined bv the following: 1. Density per Section 330-11 of FOOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FOOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of l!4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of FOOT's Standard Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of l!4" or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notifv the Proiect Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FOOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. NO RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (RAP) MATERIAL SHALL BE ALLOWED IN THE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXES. 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) THICKNESS (Inches) Type S-I Type S-I with Type S-IIl FC-3 Type S-IIl Type S-I Type S-III with FC-3 with FC- 3 Top Layer Top Layer Top Layer 1st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1 1 1 lY2 lY2 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 23 of 127 IO/I312008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 24 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV ~ Technical Specifications 2 1Y4 % * 1 1 2Y:z 1Y4 1Y4 1Y:z 1 1Y:z 1 3 1Y:z 1Y:z 2 1 2 1 * At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-III is acceptable for use on residential streets Additional Notes: 1. Type S-III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only). 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design detail. 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S-III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000, and all residential streets. 6. An FC-3 friction course per section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of 3000 or greater. 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 23.6.1 CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturers specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each flser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over, It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 8_ SectionIV _ 08 I 709 .doc Page 25 ofI27 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 26 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom Tractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FOOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FOOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FOOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be W' above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections A through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FOOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 and 902 of FOOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FOOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FOOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FOOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FOOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FOOT's internet site. The address is: http://wwwl1.myflorida.com.Itis under the section "Doing Business with FOOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For additional information, call FOOT @ 850-414-4000. 3. The FOOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FOOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FOOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 25.1 IRRIGATION 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 27 of127 10/13/2008 8 SectionlV 081709.doc - - Page 28 of 127 10/1312008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified IrrIgation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED. SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and addressees) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. 25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FOOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FOOT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM 02665 and 01785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM 02466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 29 of 127 10/13/2008 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 30 of 127 101l3/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non-Shock Safe- T-Shear Stem 5. Safe- T-Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2%" IN. AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA-C-509 2. 200 lb. O.W.o. 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. 25.1.2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemicallUV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a I" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal J.D. tags numbered to match drawings. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36- T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (0.0.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (1.0.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self- flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (OPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7". B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3' -5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 25.1.2.10.4 AIRNACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an AirNacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 8_SectionIV _08I709.doc Page 3 I of 127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 32 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within =/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high- impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 25.1.2.1 0.6 FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, ofEFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.3 EXECUTION 25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 33 of127 10113/2008 8_SectionIV _08I709.doc Page 34 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFilLING 25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 25.1.3.2.2 BACKFilLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than 12 in. C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FOOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 25.1.3.3 INSTAllATION 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure IS on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees E, allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - -. Page 35 of127 10/13/2008 8_ SectionIV _08 I 709 .doc Page 36 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any eXistmg pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. I. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. 25.2 LANDSCAPE 25.2.1 GENERAL 25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions when required. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 8_ SectionIV _081709 .doc Page 37 of 127 10/13/2008 8_ SectionlV _081709 .doc Page 38 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. 25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS o.A. or HT.: The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. c.T.: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. c.w: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST. TR.: Straight trunk. MIN: Minimum. GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., I gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. o.c.: On center, distance between plant centers. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications DIA.: Diameter. L Vs. : Leaves. D.B.H: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade. CAL. : Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. B&B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. PPP: Plants per pot. FG: Field grown. STD.: Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner s Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. 8_SectionlV _081709.doc Page 39 of 127 10/13/2008 8_ SectionIV _ 081709.doc Page 40 of127 10/1312008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV ~ Technical Specifications C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS 25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida # 1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). 8_SectionIV _08] 709.doc Page 4] of127 ] 0/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 42 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area. E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction. 25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composItIOn; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1: 1 or 2: 1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than Y4 the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). 25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two - %" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1". C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 - 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots andtoxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 43 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under I gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil. 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4 - Y:z feet above grade. 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 44 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or "Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - !Ii inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub- grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil. 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 4S of 127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 46 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 25.2.3.2 INSTAllATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well- drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 25.2.3.2.2 lAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about I inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each Yz" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7 - 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. 1. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. 8_SectionIV _08l709.doc Page 47 of127 10/13/2008 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 48 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .1 I Section IV - Technical Specifications E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes steeper than 2: 1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum 0[2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two % inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals.. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 49 of 127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 50 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor. 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E=113,000 psi 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 51 of127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 52 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications HDPE Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-Ib/in Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 26.6 LINER INSTAllATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 26.7 lATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving. 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 53 of 127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 54 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replace ment shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS This Article deleted. 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical.Specifications more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 x 10/1 0 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 55 of127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 56 ofl27 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 33 STORM MANHOLES. INLETS. CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 33.2 PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using 0 ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 - MATERIAL USED. 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 - CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 37 AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre-construction conditions. 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 57 of 127 10/13/2008 8_ SectionIV _081709 .doc Page 58 ofl27 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video recording documentation. 37.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 37.8 LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute. 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering surveyor coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at anyone time. 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 59 of 127 10/1312008 8_ SectionIV _ 08 I 709 .doc Page60ofI27 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of contain-ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at anyone time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. 38.10 COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order". City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 60 I and 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. 8_ SectionlV _ 08 I 709.doc Page 61 of 127 10/1 3/2008 I Section IV - Technical Specifications I I I City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: 1 st occurrence Warning 2nd occurrence $32 reinspection fee 3rd occurrence $80 reinspecion fee 4th occurrence Stop work order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction Services at 462-6126 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562-4750. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 8_ SectionIV _ 081709.doc Page 62 of127 10/13/2008 I ------------------- Section IV - Technical Specifications CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF EROSION VIOLATION UNDER SECTION 3-701 (DIVISION 7 - EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE. Warning $32.00 Reinspection Fee $80.00 Reinspection Fee Stop Work Order CITY OF CLEARWATER PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562-4741 & PUBLIC SERVICES/CONSTRUCTION 727 462-6126 DATE POSTED: Inspector's Name: Received by: (Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt or concurrence with findings of the inspector.) Inspector's Signature: IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 63 of 127 10/1312008 8_ SectionIV _ 081709.doc Page 64 of127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6-inch x 3-inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4-inch X 2-inch and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT. WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 - AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE. 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS. RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.2 MATERIALS 41.2.1 GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA CI51/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness Rated Water Working Pressure (In.) (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSII A WW A C 151 / A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSIIAWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest reVISIOn. 41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVe) Pipe 4-inch through 8-inch shall be in accordance with ANSIIAWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same 0.0. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 65 of 127 10/13/2008 Section IV - Technical Specifications Size Dimension Ratio Rated Water Working Pressure Laying Length (ODrrhick.) (PSI) (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8-inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4-inch through 8-inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4-inch and larger PYC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM 0 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18-inches between each piece oftape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2-inch PYC pipe to 12-inches minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The 2-inch PYC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2-inch PYC pipe shall be plugged with a 2-inch removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from 4-inch through 16-inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSI! A WWA C 1 04/ A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSI! A WW A C 111/ A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI! A WW A Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. 8_ SectionIV _ 08 I 709 .doc Page 66 of 127 IOIl 3/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 41.2.3 GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4-inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2-inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16-inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509-515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistent bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0 ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body.. Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16-inch shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI! A WWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by-pass. 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be 3- piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 67 of 127 10/13/2008 8_ SectionlV _ 081709 .doc Page 68 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.2.5 HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: · Kennedy Guardian #K 810 Fire Hydrant, · Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant · AVK Nostalgic 2780. . American Darling B-84-B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C-502 latest revision and must be ULIFM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an O-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately 2-inch above the ground line. Breakaway bolts not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 (l-1I2-inch) pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with O-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a 6-inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a 5-1I4-inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2-112-inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4-112-inch pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with A WWA standard C-502-85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest A WWA Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4-inch P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on 4-inch main shall be 1-l/2-inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2- inch service connections to 6-inch and larger mains. Service saddles (lCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest reVISIOn. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed are: 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 69 of 127 10/13/2008 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 70 of127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV ~ Technical Specifications 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith-Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 314-inch bronze test plug. 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30-inches and a maximum of 42- inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 71 of 127 I0/l3/2008 8_ SectionIV _081709 .doc Page 72 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed I8-inches from the main line. The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet I of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet I of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located IO-feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6-inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division. 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to A WWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48-hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 41.5 STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with A WWA C651. 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron". 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. 8_ SectionIV _ 081709.doc Page 73 of 127 10/13/2008 8_ SectionlV _08 I 709 .doc Page 74 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with A WW A C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on .the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: · Clearing and grubbing · Excavation, including necessary pavement removal · Shoring and/or dewatering · Structural fill . Backfill · Grading · Tracer wire · Refill materials . Joints materials . Tests and sterilization · Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANS II A WW A C 110/ A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 75 ofl27 10/13/2008 8_ SectionIV _ 081709.doc Page 76 of127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications anchorage, 6-inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000 square foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned into the Engineer's Office. 43.1.2 BASE COURSE Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. 43.1.3 PRIME COAT The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction". 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-lII Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FOOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. If a deficiency of more than W' exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FOOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications be approved. If a deficiency of more than W' exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials. Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use. After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix. No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured. 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required. Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for all other others. The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. 8_SectionlV _081709.doc Page 77 of 127 1011312008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 78 of127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 Degree's F and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and lor the construction drawings. The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four comers of each battery and shall layout the courts in conformance with the specifications and drawings. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed." 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (l0) foot high fence surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. 43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (l) inch of the final sub-grade elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum. standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (l) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (l) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings. 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 79 of127 1011312008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 80 ofl27 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.1 LINER Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one-quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade. 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system. 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 43.2.5.1 CURB Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one-quarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation. 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The AqualHydroblend material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch. 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis courts. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT-25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification. 43.2.8.2 POSTS All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar HT-25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT-25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1-314" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with pye coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges - Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, and offset to permit l80-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high- density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles court. 43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven- eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support 8_SectionIV _08] 709.doc Page 8] of ]27 10/] 3/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 82 ofl27 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation. 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each comer. Basis of Design - Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchor. 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 - 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA. 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: 1. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 3. Tow drag brooms (l each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction " Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels. 8. Court Rake (l each) - six-foot length aluminum. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" - 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute for each court. 43.2.13 CONCRETE Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., I-inch maximum size aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP The Contractor shall re-Iamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation ofthe electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 83 of 127 10/13/2008 8_ SectionIV _ 081709.doc Page 84 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Pole Tl existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T5 new pole wlexisting sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 circuits Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan relocation light poles accordingly. 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits. New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles. 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series - water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materials and lor workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: . Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. . Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. . Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. . Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. . Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). . Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. . Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate signs". 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction 8_SectionIV _081 709.doc Page 85 of 127 10/13/2008 8_SectionlV _081709.doc Page 86 of 127 10/1312008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pine lias County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of 7-day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C- View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562-4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal form. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING 45.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand 8_ SectionIV _081709 .doc Page 87 of 127 10/13/2008 8_ SectionlV _081709 .doc Page 88 of 127 10/1312008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following properties: Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 psi Flexural Strength ASTM D790 4,500 psi Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F 1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 45.6 LINER INSTAllATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 45.7 lATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 45.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 8_ SectionlV _08 I 709 .doc Page 89 ofl27 10/13/2008 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 90 of127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 46.1 MATERIALS 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied. 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 46.1.3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) a.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLlPLlNING PROCEDURE 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: I2-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into IS-inch existing sewer. I6-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into I8-inch existing sewer. I8-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer. 21 Yz-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer. 28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer. 34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer. 42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to inserting the liner. 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 91 of 127 10/13/2008 8_ SectionIV _08 I 709 .doc Page 92 of 127 IO/I3/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the specifying engineer or his representative. Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. An entry slope grade of2 112:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself. The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates. After the l2-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and installation of the liner. 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFilLING All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PYC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter". The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic. 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. 8_SectionlV _081709.doc Page 93 of127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 94 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of 1.5 (one and one halt) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C 150 for Portland Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi. 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation Cl50 for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong, durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits: Passing No. 3/8 Sieve Passing No.4 Sieve Passing No.8 Sieve Passing No. 16 Sieve Passing No. 30 Sieve Passing No. 50 Sieve Passing No.1 00 Sieve 100% 95% to 100% 80% to 100% 50% to 85% 25% to 60% 10% to 30% 2% to 10% 48.6 WATER Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. 8 SectionIV 08I709.doc - - Page 95 of 127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 96 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets, shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a air/water blast to remove all particles from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. 48.10 PROPORTIONING Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required. If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the drum at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water contained in the aggregate. Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Comers shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzle man shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if: 1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle. 2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing reinforcement. The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air jet. 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed comers by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit. 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 97 of 127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 98 ofl27 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 48.17 INSPECTION Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. 48.18 EQUIPMENT Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts. Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose: Compo Cap Max. Hose Dia. Max. Size Nozzle Min. Air Press. (cfm) (In.) (In.) (psi) 365 1 5/8 1 5/8 60 600 2 2 80 750 2 1/2 2 1/2 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 49.2 PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM 0 3753. 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No.8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. 8_SectionlV _081709.doc Page 99 ofl27 10113/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 100 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II surface. 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. 49.4.1 MATERIALS 49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-l 09) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105+1-5pcf 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-l 09) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 49.6 GROUTING MIX Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi. 49.7 LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.B. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight. 8 SectionIV 08I709.doc - - Page 101 of 127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 102 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 49.8 WATER Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 49.11 INSTAllATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 103 of 127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _08I709.doc Page 104ofl27 10/1312008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12 INNERLlNE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.1 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 1-3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86 Bonding Strength 250-300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density 8.75-9.171bs/gal Tensile Strength 150 psi Elongation 250% Shrinkage Less than 4% Toxicity Non Toxic ASTM D-3574 ASTM D- 412 ASTM D-3574 ASTM D-I042 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength 380 psi (2.62 MPa) (7 day cure) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) ASTM C 190 at 100% RH at 50% RH Permeability (3 day cure) CRD 48 55 8.1xlO llcm/sec to 7.6xlO cm/sec 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 8 Section IV 08] 709.doc - - Page ]05 of ]27 ] 0/13/2008 8_ SectionIV _ 081709.doc Page 106 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11 000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength . 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4-5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPOXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume Color (other colors available on request) Pot Life, hrs Tensile Strength, psi, min Tensile Elongation, % Water Extractable Substances, mg.lsq. in., max Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1: 1 Light Gray 1 2,000 10-20 5 1,800 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Com Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others. 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines (where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproo fing/ crystallizati on. 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stifibrush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (l) hour to cure before applying cement lining. 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 107 ofl27 10/13/2008 8_ SectionIV _ 081709.doc Page 108 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPOXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 - PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS. 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex System. 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. 4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System . 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer . 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave . 2 Coats of Plexiflor . Plexicolor Line Paint 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation). 51.2.2 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement. 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons Water (Clean and Potable) 20-40 gallons Sand (60-80 mesh) 600-900 pounds Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix 8_SectionIV _08I709.doc Page 1090fl27 10/13/2008 8_ SectionIV _081709 .doc Page 110 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons Plexichrome 20 gallons Water 20 gallons 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 1. Plexitlor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with one (l ) part water to six (6) parts Plexitlor to improve tlowability and provide uniform application. 2. Apply two coats of Plexitlor at a rate of .04-.05 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexitlor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexitlor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line Hockey Association. 51.7 GENERAL 1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. 2. Materials specified for the Plexitlor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. 51.8 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 500F or more than 1 40oF. 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to I hour at 700F with 60% relative humidity. II. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION. 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 53.1 MATERIAL 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ- W-46 1 H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-64I. The weight of zinc coating shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four I-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239. The PYC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PYC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 Yz inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PYC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PYC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PYC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 Yz), coated with PYC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PYC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 Ibs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger- Tite 8 SectionlV 08 I 709.doc - - Page III of 127 10/1 3/2008 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 112 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTMA-641. 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. 1. Specific Gravity: a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34. 2. Tensile Strength: a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: a. According to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B). 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. 7. Creeping Corrosion: a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HCl (hydrochloric acid 12 Be). 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests: 1. Salt Spray Test: a. According to ASTM B-117 b. Period of test = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test = 3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287. 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following properties: 1. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in color. 2. Specific Gravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 8. Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade. b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than + 18 degrees centigrade. 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: . Absorption, maximum 5% . Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45% . Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM I-TI04), maximum loss 12% 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 113 of 127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 114 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications · Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows: 1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. 2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.1 06 wire used for selvedge. 3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 54.1 SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including: . Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; . Trash and debris removal from the job site; . Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; . Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; . Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); . Irrigation service and repair; . Mulch replacement; . Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the . Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 115 of127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 116 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I Section IV - Technical Specifications 54.3 WORK METHODS 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, according to the following specifications: 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at his/her expense. 54.13 MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to the monthly maintenance fee. 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 117 of 127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _08 I 709.doc Page 118 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11 :00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5 :00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. -7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. - 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 55 MilLING OPERATIONS 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling. 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications for S- Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 119 of127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 120 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge - This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width - This will consist of milling the entire roadway (Le. curb line/edge of pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 55.8 MilLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 57 RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (lastest edition). 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand- cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. 8_SectionIV _08] 709.doc Page ]2] of 127 ] 0/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 122 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap. 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: · An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe bums to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of these documents. 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include: · Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas. . The date of the training, and . The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 60 SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 8 SectionIV 081709.doc - - Page 123 of 127 10/1312008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 124 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 62 TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full drip line of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer speCIes. 3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full drip line of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 62.2 ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Public Works projects for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18". H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations - Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300. 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 125 of 127 10/13/2008 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 126 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/ http://www.section508.gov/ In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public Communications. This is for internal use only. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I, I Section IV - Technical Specifications 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 63.6 POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Web master for resolving all accessibility and conformity Issues. 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. 8_SectionIV _081709.doc Page 127 of 127 10/13/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS The Technical Specifications of the Construction Contract; Articles I through 63 inclusive; are a part of this contract. The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the Technical Specifications of the Construction Contract. Where any article of the Technical Specifications is modified or any paragraph, subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of that article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect. MODIFICATIONS TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ARTICLES 1-63 Basis for measurement and payment for all Articles shall be superseded by Division 1630 in Section IVa Supplemental Technical Specifications. ARTICLE 3 - DEFINITION OF TERMS 3 Add to the definition of "Estimated Quantities" the following statement: The basis of payment for work and materials will be the actual amount of work done and materials furnished. Contractor agrees that he will make no claim for damages, anticipated profits, or otherwise on account of any difference between the amounts of work actually performed and materials actually furnished and the estimated amounts thereof. ARTICLE 6 - CONCRETE 6 Article 6 shall be superseded by Division 3300 in Section IVa Supplemental Technical Specifications. ARTICLE 7 - EXCA VA TION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7 Article 7 shall be superseded by Division 3300 in Section IVa Supplemental Technical Specifications. ARTICLE 8 - REINFORCEMENT 8 Article 8 shall be superseded by Division 3300 in Section IVa Supplemental Technical Specifications. ARTICLE 9 - OBSTRUCTIONS Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Supplementary Technical Specifications IVa - 1 0992-0197 Section IVa Supplementary Technical Specifications IVa - 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 9 Add the following statement- "Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a Florida registered Professional Surveyor and Mapper (PSM)" . ARTICLE 14 - BACKFILL 14 Replace the third paragraph with- "Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 6" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by AASHTO T 180 (Modified Proctor Density Test) to the bottom of pavement." Replace the fourth paragraph with- "Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction as determined by AASHTO T 180 (Modified Proctor Density Test)." Add the following statement, "Backfill for structures shall be in accordance with Division 02200 IVa Supplemental Technical Specifications." ARTICLE 38 - EROSION AND SILT A nON CONTROL 38 Add the following statement- "See Sedimentation and Erosion Control Notes and Details drawing, which states "Contractor shall prepare and submit a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit in accordance with FDEP criteria for an NPDES construction activities permit. Visit www.dep.state.f1.us/water/stormwater/npdes for more information. Contractor shall obtain a FDEP generic permit for the discharge of produced groundwater. All soil erosion and sediment control measures shall be installed prior to disturbance and maintained through project completion." 38.9 Add the following statement- "No additional payment will be made to the Contractor for the re-establishment of erosion control devices which may become damaged, destroyed, or otherwise rendered unsuitable for their intended function during the construction of the Project. Near completion of the project, when directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall dismantle and remove the temporary devices used for sediment control during construction. All erosion control devices in seeded areas shall be left in place until the grass is established. Seed areas around devices, and mulch after removing or filling temporary control devices. Cleanup all areas." Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ARTICLE 56 - CLEARING AND GRUBBING 56 Add the following statement, "Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered, in manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass before stripping. Where trees are indicated to be left standing, stop topsoil stripping sufficient distance from such trees to prevent damage to main root system. Stockpile topsoil where directed. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water and seed or cover storage piles to prevent erosion. Do not strip topsoil in wooded areas where no change in grade occurs. Borrow topsoil to be reasonably free of subsoil, objects over 2 IN diameter, weeds and roots." Add the following statement, "Disposal of waste materials shall require the removal of all waste materials from site. Do not bum combustible materials on site or bury organic matter on site. All drill cuttings, water or other waste materials caused by the drilling operations which are not required to complete the work shall be removed by the Contractor and disposed of at a location and in a manner in accordance with all Laws and Regulations." The following divisions are included as part of supplemental technical specifications. DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01040 01045 01050 01300 01380 01420 01500 01505 01600 01630 01640 01650 01660 01670 01690 01700 01800 Coordination............................................................................................... 01040-1 - 1 Cutting and Patching ......................... ..........................................................0 1 045-1 - 2 Field Engineering........................................................................................O 1 050-1 - 2 Submittals ........................... ........................................................................0 1300-1 - 7 Construction Photographic Record... ...................................... ....................0 1380-1 - 2 General Equipment Stipulations ..... ............ ....................................... .........0 1420-1 - 4 Temporary Facilities...................................................................................O 1500-1 - 2 Mobilization ......... .................................................................... ...................0 1505-1 - 2 Material and Equipment..................................... .........................................0 1600-1 - 4 Measurement and Payment .............. ............ ...............................................0 1630-1 - 4 Quality Control........................................................... ................................01640-1 - 3 Testing Laboratory Services ....................................... ................................0 1650-1 - 3 Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing ................................................01660-1 - 3 Substitutions and Product Options ...... ........................................................0 1670-1 - 4 Starting Process Systems ..........................,........... ......................................0 1690-1 - 1 Contract Closeout................................................................ ........... ............01700-1 - 2 Openings and Penetrations in Construction................................................01800-1 - 6 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK 02050 Demolition and Removal............................................................................02050-1 - 3 0992-0197 Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 - Section IVa Supplementary Technical Specifications IVa - 3 0992-0197 ... Section IVa Supplementary Technical Specifications IVa - 4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 Cast- in-Place Concrete ............. ..................................................................03 3 00-1- 20 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 041 00 Unit Masonry ............................ ................................................................. 04100-1 - 8 DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 Structural Steel........................................................................................... .05120-1 - 10 05500 Miscellaneous Metal Items .........................................................................05500-1 - 5 05520 Handrails and Guardrails ............................................................................05520-1 - 4 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS (Not Used) DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim...................................................................07620-1 - 7 07900 Joint Sealers ................................................................................... .............07900-1 - 4 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08255 FRP Doors and Frames ...............................................................................08255-1 - 9 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09220 Portland Cement Plaster..............................................................................09220-1 - 9 09900 Painting and Coatings .................................................................................09900-1 - 14 DIVISION 10 - SPECIAL TIES 10200 Louvers and Vents ......................................................................................1 0200-1 - 5 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT (Not Used) DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS (Not Used) DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13330 Programming Services ........................... ................................................... ..13330-1 - 2 Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS (Not Used) DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL (Not Used) DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16010 16050 16106 16111 16115 16120 16130 16140 16163 16231 16415 16430 16450 16460 16470 16475 16500 16671 Electrical - Basic Requirements ................... ............................................ ..160 1 0-1 - 15 Materials and Methods.............................................. ..................................16050-1 - 5 480 Volt Switchboard Service Entrance Rated A TS ..................................16106-1 - 7 Conduit and Raceway.................... .......................... .................................. .16111-1 - 13 Underground Conduit Manholes and Handholes........................................16115-1 - 13 Wire and Cable: 600 V oIt and Below....................................... ............... ...16120-1 - 8 Outlet Pull and Junction Boxes...................................................................16130-1 - 4 Wiring Devices.. ........................................................................................ .16140-1 - 6 Distribution Switchboards ..........................................................................16163-1 - 5 Generator Sets................................................................. ................... ....... ..16231-1 - 15 Automatic Transfer Switches...................................................................... 16415-1 - 10 Generator Quick Connect Enclosure Assemblies .......................................16430-1 - 4 Grounding and Bonding.................. ........ ....................................................16450-1 - 4 Dry Type Transformers........................................................ .......................16460-1 - 5 Panelboards ...................................................................... .......................... .16470-1 - 7 Safety Disconnect Switches ..................................................................... ...16475-1 - 3 Lighting ............................................................................... ..................... ...16500-1 - 6 Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) 1 kV or Less......................16671-1 - 8 END OF SUPPLEMENTARY TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 0992-0197 Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Supplementary Technical Specifications IVa - 5 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01040 - COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PROJECT COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall provide for the complete coordination of the construction efforts. This shall include but not necessarily be limited to coordination of the following: 1. The work of subcontractors. 2. The flow of material and equipment from suppliers. 3. The effort of equipment manufacturers for testing, training and startup services. 4. The interrelated work with public and private utilities companies. 5. The interrelated work with the Owner where tie-ins to existing facilities are required and where existing equipment must remain in operation. 6. The effort of independent testing agencies. 7. Coordination of training, final testing and certification for operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 0992-0197 Section IVa Coordination 01040-1 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 ' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I- I SECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Section establishes general requirements pertaining to cutting (including excavating), fitting, and patching of the Work required to: B. Make the several parts fit properly. C. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contact Documents. D. Rework existing items to provide for new construction. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform all cutting and patching in strict accordance with pertinent requirements of these Specifications and, in the event no such requirements are determined, in conformance with the Engineer's written direction. B. Codes and standards for work of this section shall be the same as for the pertinent sections of this specification. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Request for Engineer's Consent: 1. Prior to cutting which affects structural safety, submit written request to the Engineer for permission to proceed with cutting. 2. Should conditions of the Work, or schedule, indicate a required change of materials or methods for cutting and patching, so notify the Engineer and secure his written permission prior to proceeding. B. Notice to the Engineer: Submit written notice to the Engineer designating time the Work will be uncovered, to provide for the Engineer's observation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials used in the replacement of existing work and the construction of work in conjunction with cutting and patching shall be new unless prior approval from the Engineer has been obtained to re-use existing materials. . .Marshal/Street A/?CF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 -- Section IVa Cutting and Patching 01045-1 0992-0197 0992-0197 Section IVa Cutting and Patching 01045-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.2 FABRICATION A. The materials and methods used in the fabrication of items required under this section shall comply with the individual sections of this specification that have to do with new construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDITIONS A. Examination: 1. Examine existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting, excavating, backfilling, and patching. 2. After uncovering the Work, inspect conditions affecting installation of the new Work. B. Discrepancies: 1. If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, immediately notify the Engineer and secure needed directions. 2. Do not proceed in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.2 PREPARATION PRIOR TO CUTTING A. Provide all required protection including, but not necessarily limited to, shoring, bracing, and support to maintain structural integrity of the Work. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. Perform all required excavating and backfilling as required under pertinent Sections of these Specifications. Perform cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the Work and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repair and new work. Perform fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes. END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase. 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01050 - FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and grades and to locate and layout site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state where the project is located. 1.2 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markers. Survey monuments, benchmarks or other reference points, which must be disturbed by construction operations, shall be witnessed, removed and replaced by a Professional Surveyor and Mapper (PSM), registered in the State of Florida. 1.3 LAYOUT DATA A. The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Owner with the record drawings for the project. 1.4 EXISTING STRUCTURES A. The locations for existing underground piping and structures shown on the Drawings were taken from the available records. The actual locations of the existing underground piping and structures may differ from that shown on the Drawings. B. The Drawings may not show existing underground electrical conduits, small piping, or other piping and structures. Prior to starting excavations for structures or the installation of underground piping, conduits, and other facilities the Contractor shall thoroughly examine the proposed locations and routes for possible conflict. C. The Contractor shall excavate and expose all existing underground piping, conduit, or other structures which may conflict with the new facilities or other improvements. The locations, both horizontally and vertically, of all such existing facilities shall be shown on the record drawings. Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Field Engineering 01050-1 0992-0197 Section IVa . Field Engineering 01050-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I. 1 D. After completion of the subsurface investigations the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any possible conflicts between the existing and new facilities. The Contractor, Owner, and the Engineer will then confer and resolve the potential conflicts prior to the start of the installation of the new facilities. 1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall keep one set of Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Modifications and Shop Drawings at the site in good order, and annotated to show all changes made during the construction process. Record drawings shall be up-to-date as the project progresses, will be subject to review on a monthly basis by the Owner, and, subject to the review, be a basis for monthly payments. B. These documents shall be available at any time to the Owner and, together with copies of all survey notes, be delivered in final form to the Owner upon completion of the project. C. The location, both horizontally and vertically, of all underground piping, conduit, and other structures shall be shown on the record drawings. All fittings, valves, and other appurtenances shall be located and shown on the record drawings in accordance with Section III Article 6.11.2 "As-Built Drawings" in the General Conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Marshal/. Street APCF Generator Upgrades,.Phase 2 ... I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. At or before the preconstruction conference, Contractor shall submit for review a preliminary schedule of the proposed construction operations. The construction schedule shall indicate the sequence of the Work, the time of starting and completion of each part, and the installation date for each major item of equipment, and the time for making connections to existing piping, structures, or facilities. Within 10 days after receipt of the Owner's comments, the Contractor shall submit an updated Construction Progress Schedule. B. An updated schedule shall be submitted with each application for progress payment, or at least every 30 days, to reflect changes in the progress of the work. C. If the progress of the work falls behind schedule, the Contractor shall submit a report which includes sufficient narrative to describe current and anticipated delaying factors, the factors' effect on the construction schedule and the Contractor's proposed corrective actions. Any work reported complete, but which is not readily apparent to Owner, must be substantiated with satisfactory evidence. The Owner may require the Contractor to add to his equipment, or construction forces, as well as increase the working hours, if operations fall behind schedule at any time during the construction period. 1.2 PROGRESS REPORTS A. A progress report shall be furnished to Owner with each application for progress payment. If the Work falls behind schedule, Contractor shall submit additional progress reports at such intervals as Owner may request. B. Each progress report shall include sufficient narrative to describe current and anticipated delaying factors, their effect on the construction schedule, and proposed corrective actions. Any Work reported complete, but which is not readily apparent to Owner, must be substantiated with satisfactory evidence. C. Each progress report shall also include three prints of the accepted graphic schedule marked to indicate actual progress. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. After review of the tentative schedule at the preconstruction conference, and before submission of the first application for pavment, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner a schedule of values covering each lump sum item. The schedule of values, showing the value of each kind of work, shall be acceptable to Owner before any application for payment is prepared. B. The sum of the lump sum items, plus the extended unit price items listed in the schedule of values shall equal the contract price. Such items as Bond premium, temporary construction facilities, may be listed separately in the schedule of Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Submittals 01300-1 0992-0197 , Section IVa Submittals 01300-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I", I values, provided the amounts can be substantiated. Overhead and profit shall not be listed as separate items. C. An unbalanced schedule of values providing for overpayment to the Contractor on items of work which would be performed first will not be accepted. The schedule of values shall be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to Owner. Final acceptance by Owner shall indicate only consent to the schedule of values as a basis for preparation of applications for progress payments and shall not constitute an agreement as to the value of each indicated item. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF PAYMENT A. Within 30 days after award of contract, the Contractor shall furnish to Owner a schedule of estimated monthly payments. The schedule shall be revised and resubmitted each time an application for payment varies more than 10 percent from the estimated payment schedule. 1.5 SURVEY DATA A. All field books, notes, and other data developed by the Contractor in performing surveys required as part of the work shall be available to Owner for examination throughout the construction period. All such data shall be submitted to Owner with the other documentation required for final acceptance of the Work. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING DATA A. Engineering data covering all equipment and fabricated materials that will become a permanent part of the work under this Contract shall be submitted to Owner, or the Owner's Project Representative, for review. These data shall include drawings and descriptive information in sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and operation of component materials and devices; the external connections, anchorages, and supports required; performance characteristics; and dimensions needed for installation and correlation with other materials and equipment. B. All submittals regardless of origin, shall be reviewed, dated, stamped, approved, sealed (if required) and signed by the Contractor prior to submission. Each submittal shall be identified with the name and number of this Contract, the Contractor's name, and references to applicable specification paragraphs and/or Contract Drawings. Each submittal shall indicate the intended use of the item in the work. When catalog pages are submitted, applicable items shall be clearly identified. The current revision, issue number, and date shall be indicated on all drawings and other descriptive data. C. Contractor's stamp of approval is a representation to the Owner and the Engineer that the Contractor accepts full responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that he has reviewed and coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the work and the Contract Documents. D. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified on each submittal and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal. Such submittals shall, as pertinent to the deviation, indicate essential details of all changes proposed by Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I the Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that may be a result of the deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams. E. The Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each submission, and, in the case of a resubmission, shall verify that all exceptions previously noted by the Owner and/or the Engineer have been addressed. In the event that more than one resubmission is required because of failure of Contractor to account for exceptions previously noted, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the charges of the Engineer for review of the additional resubmissions. F. Resubmittals shall be made within 30 days of the date of the letter returning the material to be modified or corrected, unless within 14 days the Contractor submits an acceptable request for an extension of the stipulated time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed within that time. G. Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining the Owner's and/or the Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the Contract Time unless delay of the Work is directly caused by a change in the work authorized by a Change Order or by failure of the Engineer to return any submittal within 21 days after its receipt in Engineer's office. H. The Contractor's letter of resubmittal shall list the date of his original submittal letter, the date of the Engineer's letter returning the submittal, and the dates of submission and return of any previous resubmittals. In addition, the Contractor shall reimburse the Engineer in the amount of $200.00 for review of the second resubmittal and each of any subsequent resubmittals. I. The Engineer's review of drawings and data submitted by the Contractor will cover only general conformity to the drawings and specifications. The Engineer's review does not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details of the material, equipment, device or item shown. The Engineer's review of submittals shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors, omissions, or deviations, nor responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. J. Eight (8) copies of each drawing and necessary data shall be submitted to Engineer. Engineer will not accept submittals from anyone but Contractor. Submittals shall be consecutively numbered in direct sequence of submittal and without division by subcontracts or trades. Resubmittals shall bear the number of the first submittal followed by a letter (A, B, etc.), to indicate the Sequence of the resubmittal. K. When the drawings and data are returned marked AMEND AND RESUBMIT or REJECTED, the corrections shall be made as noted thereon and as instructed by the Engineer and eight (8) corrected copies resubmitted. L. When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall in writing direct specific attention to all revisions and shall list separately any revisions made other than those called for by Engineer on previous submissions. M. When the drawings and data are returned marked NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN, or MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED, no additional copies need be furnished. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 , Section IVa Submittals 01300-3 0992-0197 Section IVa Submittals 01300-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I"" I 1.7 MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Included in Bid shall be the cost of furnishing competent and experienced manufacturer's representatives who shall represent the manufacturer on products furnished, assist the Contractor to install products in conformity with the Contract Documents, and provide owner training and maintenance instruction. See Section 01660. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Arrange for a trained representative of the equipment manufacturer for equipment that requires continuing maintenance or operation to meet with the operating personnel at the project site to provide basic instruction needed for proper operation and maintenance of the entire work. Provide two (2) copies of any manufacturer prepared training videos used during the instruction period. B. Review maintenance manuals, record documentation, tools, spare parts and materials, lubricants, fuels, identification system, control sequences, hazards, cleaning and similar procedures and facilities. For operational equipment, demonstrate start-up, shutdown, emergency operations, noise and vibration adjustments, safety, economy/efficiency adjustments, and similar operations. Review maintenance and operations in relation to applicable guarantees, warranties, agreements to maintain, bonds, and similar continuing commitments. 1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide data for: 1. Mechanical equipment. 2. Electrical equipment. 3. Controls and instrumentation. B. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following: 1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions. 3. Lubrication and maintenance instructions. 4. Guide to "troubleshooting". 5. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear. C. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered, or which may be required by Contractor. D. Submit three (3) sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8% x 11-inch three-ring side binders with durable plastic covers. E. Provide a separate volume for each system, with a table of contents and index tabs for each volume. F. Part 1: Directory: listing names, addresses and telephone numbers of: Consultant and Contractor. . Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I G. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions arranged by system. The systems are defined by the process and instrumentation diagrams included with the Contract Drawings. For each system, give names, addresses, and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers including but not limited to the following: 1. Appropriate design criteria. 2. List of equipment. 3. Parts list. 4. Operating instructions. 5. Maintenance instructions, equipment. 6. Maintenance instructions, finishes. 7. Shop drawings and product data. 8. Warranties. 9. Wiring diagrams. 10. Inspection procedures. 11. Programming logic and instructions. H. Submit three complete sets of all the information requested above on electronic media. The preferred form of media is CD's in compatible format as directed by the Owner's Representative. Generally, text shall be Word for Windows (latest version); drawings shall be AutoCAD (latest version or as otherwise requested by the Owner's Representative). 1.10 MANUAL FORMAT AND ORGANIZATION A. Use drawings and pictorial to illustrate the printed text as necessary to fully present the information. B. Where information covers a family of similar items of equipment, identify the applicable portions by heavy weighted arrows, boxes or circles, or strike-out the inapplicable information. Non-conforming data are not acceptable and will be returned for rework and resubmittal. All information shall be original manufacturer's literature, duplicator copies are not acceptable. C. Contractor shall incorporate into books all manufacturers' equipment manuals including those specified in pertinent sections of the Specifications. These books shall be organized by equipment class in the same manner and sequence as the Specifications, i.e. Mechanical, Electrical, Instrumentation, etc. Book size and quantity shall be sufficient for inclusion of all data, and be of type and quality hereinafter specified in paragraph G. D. Within each book of manuals, provide a Table of Contents for that book. If more than one book is necessary for a class of equipment, place a complete Table of Contents for that class of equipment within each book of that class. E. In addition, an overall Index of Contents shall be prepared in ten sets and submitted separately to the Owner for his insertion in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. F. When a manufacturer's manual exceeds one inch in thickness and is bound as specified in paragraph G, it need not be rebound within another book, but the Overall Index shall refer to it by title and indicate that it is bound separately. MarshaU.5.treet APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 , Section IVa Submittals 01300-5 0992-0197 Section IVa Submittals 01300-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I G. Manual Binding 1. Bind all books in sturdy hard covers fastened to provide full view of contents on each page, and ease of making content additions or replacements. No book shall be more than three (3) inches thick. Manuals shall be bound in substantial three-ring loose leaf binders. 2. Permanently label face of cover and bound edge of each book "MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTION MANUAL", and indicate calls of equipment, i.e., Mechanical, Electrical Instrumentation, etc., or name specific equipment if a single unit is contained. Where more than one book is needed for a class of equipment or a single specific equipment unit, number books consecutively BOOK I, BOOK II, etc. 3. If more than one class of equipment is contained in a book, separate each class with a tabbed stiff divider insert page. 4. Prior to purchase or delivery, submit samples of each intended type of binder. H. Manual Submittals. Submittals shall include four (4) draft copies of each manual, two of which will be returned to the Contractor marked to show the required corrections or approval. When review is complete and accepted, the Contractor shall deliver two final copies to the Resident Project Representative. I. Submittal Schedule. All draft equipment instruction manuals shall be submitted at the time of equipment shipment. No equipment start-up and training shall be permitted until 21 days after instruction manual submittal. Final instruction manuals shall be submitted no later than two weeks prior to equipment startup and instruction. 1.11 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in quantities specified in each section, in addition to that used for construction of work. Coordinate with Owner, deliver to project site and obtain receipt prior to final payment. 1.12 LAYOUT DATA A. Contractor shall keep neat and legible notes of measurements and calculations made by him in connection with the layout of the Work. Copies of such data shall be furnished to the Owner's Project Representative for use in checking Contractor's layout as provided under Lines and Grades. All such data considered of value to Owner will be transmitted to Owner with other records upon completion of the Work. 1.13 SUBMITTAL AND RFI LOGS A. Contractor will be responsible for the preparation of Submittal and RFI Logs. These logs are due no later than two (2) weeks from the Preconstruction Conference and are to be updated and brought to each Progress Meeting. The Submittal log should be a complete list of all proposed submittals required for the .Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I project. The RFI log will serve to ensure timely response to all Requests for Information. 1.14 SUBMITTALS FOR COLOR SELECTION A. The following is a list of items which must be submitted together for color selection. No single item on this list will be approved without the submittal of all other items. 1. Exterior Package: a. Doors and Frames b. Louvers c. Paint d. Lighting Systems 2. Interior Package: a. Paint PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION . . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Submittals 01300-7 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01380 - CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Employ a competent photographer to take construction record photographs during course of the work. 1.2 PHOTOGRAPHY REQUIRED A. Provide photographs taken on cutoff date for each scheduled monthly payment. B. Provide photographs taken at each major stage of construction: 1. Prior to demolition 2. Completion of demolition 3. Completion of excavations 4. Rebar reinforcement prior to pouring of concrete or placing shotcrete. 5. Completion of sub base and/or foundations 6. Completion of equipment, buried and exposed piping, conduit and wiring installation. C. Views and Quantities Required: 1. At each specified time, photograph Project from multiple different views, as approved by the Owner. 2. Provide three prints of each view. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRINTS A. Color Prints: 1. Paper: Double weight. 2. Finish: Smooth surface, glossy. 3. Size: 8 in. X 10 in. B. Identify each print on back, listing: 1. Name of project. 2. Name of site. 3. Orientation of view. 4. Date and time of exposure. 5. Name and address of photographer. 6. Include negative in negative-envelope for each print. . Marshall Str.eet APCFGenerator Upgrades, Pbase2 0992-0197 . Section IVa Construction Photographic Record 01380-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Construction Photographic Record 01380-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1-- I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TECHNIQUE A. Factual presentation. B. Correct exposure and focus. C. High resolution and sharpness. D. Maximum depth-of-field. E. Minimum distortion. 3.2 VIEWS REQUIRED A. Photograph from locations to adequately illustrate condition of construction and state of progress. B. Where applicable, for successive periods of photography, take at least one photograph from the same overall view as previously taken. Consult with the Owner at each period of photography for instructions concerning views required. 3.3 DELIVERY OF PRINTS A. Deliver prints to Owner to accompany each Application for Payment. END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades,Ehase 2... I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01420 - GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. All equipment furnished and installed under this Contract shall conform to the general stipulations set forth in this Section except as otherwise specified in other Sections. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall coordinate all details of the equipment with other related parts of the Work, including verification that all structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are compatible. Contractor shall be responsible for all structural and other alterations in the Work required to accommodate equipment differing in dimensions or other characteristics from that contemplated in the Contract Drawings or Specifications. 1.3 MANUFACTURER'S EXPERIENCE A. Unless specifically named in the Specifications, a manufacturer shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified which has been in successful operation for not less than the past 5 years. 1.4 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS A. Contractor shall guarantee all eqlfipment "against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. B. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gages so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests. C. Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in equipment shall conform to AISC standards. All structural members shall be designed for shock or vibratory loads. Unless otherwise specified, all steel which will be submerged, all or in part, during normal operation of the equipment shall be at least 1/4 inch thick. 1.5 LUBRICATION A. Equipment shall be adequately lubricated by systems which require attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. Lubrication systems shall not require attention during start-up or shutdown and shall not waste lubricants. . Marshall Street. APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 SectionlVa General Equipment Stipulations 01420-1 0992-0197 Section IVa General Equipment Stipulations 01420-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I B. Lubricants of the type recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be provided in sufficient quantity to fill all lubricant reservoirs and to replace all consumption during testing, start-up, and operation prior to acceptance of equipment by Owner. Unless otherwise specified or permitted, the use of synthetic lubricants will not be acceptable. C. Lubrication facilities shall be convenient and accessible. Oil drains and fill openings shall be easily accessible from the normal operating area or platform. Drains shall allow for convenient collection of waste oil in containers from the normal operating area or platform without removing the unit from its normal installed position. 1.6 SAFETY GUARDS A. All belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, and other moving or rotating parts shall be covered on all sides by a OSHA approved safety guard. Safety guards shall be fabricated from 16 USS gage or heavier galvanized or aluminum-clad sheet steel or 1/2 inch mesh galvanized expanded metal. Each guard shall be designed for easy installation and removal. All necessary supports and accessories shall be provided for each guard. Supports and accessories, including bolts, shall be galvanized. All safety guards in outdoor locations shall be designed to prevent the entrance of rain and dripping water. 1.7 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Equipment suppliers shall furnish suitable anchor bolts for each item of equipment. Anchor bolts, together with templates or setting drawings, shall be delivered sufficiently early to permit setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed. Anchor bolts shall comply with the anchor bolts section and, unless otherwise specified shall be manufactured from 316 stainless steel and shall have a minimum diameter of 3/4 inch. B. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, anchor bolts for items of equipment mounted on baseplates shall be long enough to permit 1-1/2 inches of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate anchorage into structural concrete. 1.8 SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES A. Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper maintenance. Equipment requiring special devices for lifting or handling shall be furnished complete with those devices. 1.9 SHOP PAINTING A. All steel and iron surfaces shall be protected by suitable paint or coatings applied in the shop. Surfaces which will be inaccessible after assembly shall be finished smooth, thoroughly cleaned, and filled as necessary to provide a smooth uniform base for painting. Electric motors, speed reducers, starters, and other self- contained or enclosed components shall be shop primed or finished with a high- grade oil-resistant enamel suitable for coating in the field with an alkyd enamel. Coatings shall be suitable for the environment where the equipment is installed. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 .' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. Surfaces to be painted after installation shall be prepared for painting as recommended by paint manufacturer for the intended service, and then shop painted with one or more coats of the specified primer. Unless otherwise specified, the shop primer for steel and iron surfaces shall be Cook "391-N-167 Barrier Coat", Koppers "No. 10 inhibitive Primer", Tnemec "77 Chem-Prime", or Valspar "13-R-28 Chromox Primer". Machine, polished, and nonferrous surfaces which are not to be painted shall be coated with rust-preventive compound, Houghton "Rust Veto 344" or Rust-Oleum "R-9". 1.10 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT A. All equipment shall be suitably packaged to facilitate handling and protect against damage during transit and storage. All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements and shall be kept thoroughly dry at all times. B. Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. All painted surfaces which are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of Engineer. C. Grease and lubricating oil shall be applied to all bearings and similar items. D. Each item of equipment shall be tagged or marked as identified in the delivery schedule or on the Shop Drawings. Complete packing lists and bills of material shall be included with each shipment. 1.11 STORAGE A. Upon delivery, all equipment and materials shall immediately be stored and protected in accordance with Section 1600 until installed in the Work. 1.12 INSTAllATION AND OPERATION A. Equipment shall not be installed or operated except by, or with the guidance of qualified personnel having the knowledge and experience necessary for proper results. When so specified, or when employees of Contractor or his Subcontractors are not qualified, such personnel shall be field representatives of the manufacturer of the equipment or materials being installed. 1.13 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY A. The manufacturer of each unit of equipment in this project shall warrant each unit to the Owner in writing against defects in workmanship and material covering parts and labor for a period of 12 months from date of acceptance of the work by the Owner. If individual equipment specifications require a longer warranty period than stated above, they shall have precedence for that specific unit of equipment. B. In the event that a component fails to perform as specified or is proven defective in service during the warranty period, the manufacturer shall provide and install a replacement part without cost to the Owner. Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa General Equipment Stipulations 01420-3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION ...._". ..".SectionIVa General Equipment Stipulations 01420-4 I I 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 I I 1 1 1 1 I... 1 . Marsha/l.Street APCF GeneratorUpgrades"Phase2" 0992-0197 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SANITARY FACILITIES A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain sanitary accommodations (to include portable toilets) for employees and official site visitors, to comply with the requirements and regulations of the State of Florida, the County Health Department and/or other regulatory agencies. B. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained throughout the construction period, and obscured from public view to the greatest practical extent. If toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at least one toilet will be furnished for each 20 men. Contractor shall enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the site. 1.2 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS A. All streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares which are closed to traffic shall be protected by effective barricades on which shall be placed acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section. B. All open trenches and other excavations shall have suitable barricades, signs, and lights to provide adequate protection to the public. Obstructions such as material piles and equipment shall be provided with similar warning signs and lights. Contractor shall be responsible for public safety within the construction area. C. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated with warning lights from sunset to sunrise. Material storage and conduct of the Work on or alongside public streets and highways shall cause the minimum obstruction and inconvenience to the traveling public. All barricades, signs, lights and other protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity with applicable statutory requirements and, where within railroad and highway rights-of-way, as required by the authority having jurisdiction thereover. D. Open trenches and other excavations shall not be left open over weekends and holidays, or greater than one calendar day, except during adverse weather conditions. 1.3 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY A. Contractor shall protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain all underground pipes, conduits, drains, and other underground construction uncovered or otherwise affected by his construction operations. All pavement, surfacing, driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, utility poles, guy wires, fences, and other surface structures affected by construction operations, together with all sod and shrubs in yards and parkings, shall be restored to their original condition, whether within or outside the easement. All replacements shall be made with new materials. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Temporary Facilities 01500-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Temporary Facilities 01500-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.4 PARKING A. Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services in connection with the Project, as required to avoid any need for parking personal vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic, Owner's operations, or construction activities. 1.5 DUST CONTROL A. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust. Earth surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water. Dusty materials in piles or in transit shall be covered when practicable to prevent blowing. B. Buildings or operating facilities which may be affected adversely by dust shall be adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors, instrument panels or similar equipment, shall be protected by suitable dust screens. Proper ventilation shall be included with dust screens. C. Contractor shall employ best management practices as specified in Section IV Article 38. 1.6 SWEEPING A. The Contractor shall sweep loose material from the pavement at the end of each workday. 1.7 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Contractor shall prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary wastes, sediment, debris and other substances resulting from construction activities. No sanitary wastes will be permitted to enter any drain or watercourse other than sanitary sewers. No sediment, debris or other substance will be permitted to enter sanitary sewers and reasonable measures will be taken to prevent such materials form entering any drain or watercourse. 1.8 PROJECT SIGN A. Provide sign(s) for the Contract identifying the project and identifying the participants in the development of the project The Project Sign shall be provided and erected in accordance with Section III Article 23. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01505 - MOBILIZATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITION AND SCOPE A. Mobilization shall include, but not be limited to, compliance with the General Conditions outlined in Section III and the following principle items: 1. Indemnification 2. Preconstruction meeting 3. Move onto the site all Contractor's plant and equipment required for first month operations. 4. Install temporary construction power, water supply, wiring, and lighting facilities. 5. Establish fire protection plan and safety program. 6. Provide on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities as specified. 7. Arrange for, and erect, Contractor's work and storage yard and employees' parking facilities. 8. Submit all required insurance certificates and bonds. 9. Obtain all required permits. 10. Post all OSHA, Environmental Protection Agency, SWFWMD, Department of Labor, and all other required notices. 11. Have Contractor's superintendent at the job site full time. 12. Erect project sign(s) as specified in Section III Article 23. 13. Submit storm water management/dewatering plan, schedule of values, list of shop drawings, and detailed construction schedule acceptable to Owner. 14. Provide audio-video recording of existing conditions in accordance with Section IV Article 37. 15. Construct, maintain, and restore any temporary access and haul roads. 16. Submit a finalized schedule of submittals. 17. Demobilization . Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Mobilization 01505-1 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2,... 0992-0197 Section IVa Mobilization 01505-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I" I PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01600 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Material and equipment incorporated into the work: 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. 2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by the Engineer. 3. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: a. Design, fabricate and assemble in accordance with the best engineering and shop practices. b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages, to be interchangeable. c. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical by the same manufacturer. d. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. e. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. 4. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is specified. 5. All material and equipment incorporated into the project shall be new. 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.3 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including two copies to Engineer. 1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion. Marshall Street.APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 . Section IVa Material and Equipment 01600-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Material and Equipment 01600-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for further instructions. 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. C. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. 1.4 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals and that products are properly protected and undamaged. B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. 1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather-tight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. B. Exterior Storage 1. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids; prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings; provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 2. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. C. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions and free from damage or deterioration. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Rhase 2 .. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I D. Protection After Installation: Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove when no longer needed. E. Pumps, motors, electrical equipment, and all equipment with antifriction or sleeve bearings shall be stored in weather tight structures maintained at a temperature above 60oF. Equipment, controls, and insulation shall be protected against moisture and water damage. All space heaters furnished in equipment shall be connected and operated continuously. F. Equipment and materials shall not show any pitting, rust, decay, or other deleterious effects of storage when installed in the Work. 1.6 MAINTENANCE OF STORAGE A. Maintain periodic system of inspection of stored products on scheduled basis to assure that: 1. State of storage facilities is adequate to provide required conditions. 2. Required environmental conditions are maintained on continuing basis. 3. Surfaces of products exposed to elements are not adversely affected. a. Any weathering of products, coatings and finishes is not acceptable under requirements of these Contract Documents. B. Mechanical and electrical equipment which requires servicing during long term storage shall have complete manufacturer's instructions for servicing accompanying each item, with notice of enclosed instructions shown on exterior of package. 1. Equipment shall not be shipped until approved by the Engineer. The intent of this requirement is to reduce on-site storage time prior to installation and/or operation. Under no circumstances shall equipment be delivered to the site more than one month prior to installation without written authorization from the Engineer. 2. Manufacturer's storage instructions shall be carefully studied by the Contractor and reviewed with the Engineer. These instructions shall be carefully followed. 3. Prior to acceptance of the equipment, the Contractor shall have the manufacturer inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been detrimentally affected by the long storage period. Such certifications by the manufacturer shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged by the manufacturer to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has been shipped, installed, tested and accepted in a minimum time period. As such, the manufacturer will guaranty the equipment equally in both instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment shall be judged to be defective. It shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 0992-0197 Section IVa Material and Equipment 01600-3 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Material and Equipment 01600-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products List: Within 30 days after contract date, submit to Owner a complete list of major products proposed to be used. B. Contractor's Options 1. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard. 2. For products specified by naming one or more products or manufacturers and "or equal", Contractor must submit a request for substitutions of any product or manufacturer not specifically named. Substitutions of products and "or equal" by the Contractor shall be submitted in a timely manner so as not to adversely affect the construction schedule. See Section III Article 6.3. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I "" I SECTION 01630 - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This section covers methods of measurement and payment for items of Work under this Contract. 1.2 GENERAL A. The total Bid Price shall cover all Work required by the Contract Documents. All costs in connection with the proper and successful completion of the Work, including furnishing all materials, equipment, supplies, and appurtenances; providing all construction equipment and tools; and performing all necessary labor and supervision to fully complete the Work, shall be included in the lump sum and unit prices bid. All Work not specifically set forth as a pay item in the Bid Form shall be considered a subsidiary obligation of Contractor and all costs in connection therewith shall be included in the prices bid. 1.3 ESTIMATED QUANTITIES A. See Section IV, Article 3 - Definition of Terms 1.4 EXCAVATION A. Except where otherwise specified, the lump sum price bid for each item of Work which involves excavation or trenching shall include all costs for such Work. No direct payment shall be made for excavation or trenching. All excavation is unclassified and there shall be no separate payment for excavation of rock or for backfill where rock is excavated below subgrade. 1.5 TAXES AND PERMITS A. The Bidder's attention is directed to the fact that the tax laws of the State of Florida, including but not limited to Chapter 212, Florida Statutes, apply to this bid matter and that all applicable taxes and fees shall be deemed to have been included in Bidder's proposal. 1.6 RETAINAGE A. Refer to Agreement. 1.7 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Also see Section III Article 14 for other requirements. B. Schedule of Bid Items 1. Lump Sum Bid Items "" Marshal/Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 " Section IVa Measurement and Payment 01630-1 0992-0197 0992-0197 Section IVa Measurement and Payment 01630-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I... I a. The work for each Lump Sum bid item shall be constructed as shown and described on the Drawings and Specifications. b. Payment shall be made at the lump sum price stated in the Bid for each item and shall be pro-rated for the actual work completed based on an approved schedule of values detailing work to be completed under the specific item. c. Each lump sum price shall include all of the contractors' costs to complete the construction exclusive of payment items provided for elsewhere in the bid form. d. Each lump sum price shall include but not be limited to the following: 1) Demolition and removal 2) Excavation 3) Shoring and bracing 4) Dewatering 5) Backfill 6) Compaction 7) Maintaining traffic 8) Appurtenant work and materials as required for a complete and operable system 9) Testing, balancing, and adjusting including any material and equipment required for the tests 10) Submittals 11) Equipment Startup 12) Operation and Maintenance Training by Manufacturers' Representative 13) Painting 14) Restoration 15) Cleanup 2. Unit Cost Bid Items a. The work for each Unit Cost bid item shall be constructed as shown and described on the Drawings and Specifications. b. Payment for Unit Cost bid items shall be paid for each unit installed and accepted by the Owner. c. See Section III Article 11.3. 3. The Contractor shall not make a claim for an item not identified within the bid item descriptions but should include this cost within the most appropriate Bid Item. Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 . . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. Description of Bid Items GENERATOR UPGRADES 1. Bid Item NO.1: Mobilization/Demobilization a. This bid item describes measurement and payment for the mobilization/demobilization related to the installation of the generator and power distribution upgrades and related ancillaries. b. The lump sum Bid Price for mobilization/demobilization shall include the items noted in Section 01505 as required for the proper performance and completion of the work. c. Payment for mobilization/demobilization will be made on an incremental basis in accordance with the following: Percent of Original Contract Amount Earned 5 10 25 50 100 Allowable Percent of the Lump Sum Price for the Item 25 50 75 90 100 d. Bid price for mobilization/demobilization shall not exceed 3.5% of the total amount for all the bid items. 2. Bid Item NO.2: Dewatering Building Upgrades a. The lump sum amount for this item shall be for furnishing all, labor, materials and equipment necessary to construct the improvements at the Dewatering Building, including all demolition work, electrical, instrumentation and controls, structural, and architectural system components as shown on the drawings and specified. This item shall also include all labor, warranty, and start- up costs associated with the Dewatering Building Generator (ODP, Bid Item 3) and Dewatering Building ATS (ODP, Bid Item 4.) 3. Bid Item NO.3: Dewatering Building Generator (ODP) a. The lump sum amount for this item shall be for furnishing the Dewatering Building Generator Set and all related ancillary components purchased as a package, as shown on the drawings and specified. This item excludes: related sales tax (to be included in Bid Item 3a) and related labor, warranty, and start-up costs (to be included in Bid Item 2.) Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Measurement and Payment 01630-3 0992-0197 Section IVa Measurement and Payment 01630-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 4. Bid Item No. 3a: Dewatering Building Generator (ODP S~les Tax Savings) a. The lump sum amount for this item shall be for the total sales tax related to the purchase of the equipment included in Bid Item 3. 5. Bid Item NO.4: Dewatering Building A TS (ODP) a. The lump sum amount for this item shall be for furnishing the Dewatering Building A TS and all related ancillary components purchased as a package, as shown on the drawings and specified. This item excludes: related sales tax (to be included in Bid Item 4a) and related labor, warranty, and start-up costs (to be included in Bid Item 2.) 6. Bid Item No. 4a: Dewatering Building ATS (ODP Sales Tax Savings) a. The lump sum amount for this item shall be for the total sales tax related to the purchase of the equipment included in Bid Item 4. 7. Bid Item NO.5: Influent Pump Station Upgrades a. The lump sum amount for this item shall be for furnishing all, labor, materials and equipment necessary to construct the improvements at the Influent Pump Station, including all demolition work, electrical, instrumentation and controls, structural, and architectural system components as shown on the drawings and specified. 8. Bid Item NO.6: Control Building/Blower MCC Building/ MCC-9 Upgrades a. The lump sum amount for this item shall be for furnishing all, labor, materials and equipment necessary to construct the improvements at the Control Building, Blower MCC Building, and MCC-9, including all demolition work, electrical, instrumentation and controls, structural, and architectural system components as shown on the drawings and specified. This item shall also include all labor, warranty, and start-up costs associated with the Blower MCC Building ATS (ODP, Bid Item 7.) 9. Bid Item NO.7: Blower MCC Building A TS (ODP) a. The lump sum amount for this item shall be for furnishing the Blower MCC Building A TS and all related ancillary components purchased as a package, as shown on the drawings and specified. This item excludes: related sales tax (to be included in Bid Item 7a) and related labor, warranty, and start-up costs (to be included in Bid Item 6.) Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades,Phase 2, " I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 10. Bid Item No. 7a: Blower MCC Building ATS (ODP Sales Tax Savings) a. The lump sum amount for this item shall be for the total sales tax related to the purchase of the equipment included in Bid Item 7. 11. . Bid Item NO.8: Programming Services Allowance a. This bid item refers to payment for PLC/SCADA programming services as identified in Section 13330 - Software Services. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of the work. Receipt of payment by Contractor will be required for reimbursement by the City. No contractor markup will be paid for under this bid item. 12. Bid Item NO.9: Owner's Contingency a. Description: The work covered by this item consists of unforeseen items of work not included in other bid items but necessary for accomplishing the work and shall apply only to extra work as approved by the Owner, or additional items over and above those specified or shown on the drawings. The cost of this additional work shall be agreed upon in writing and approved by the Owner's Project Representative prior to starting this additional work. b. The lump sum bid for contingency shall equal ten percent (10%) of the following: 1) The subtotal of the Bid Items 1 through 8 rounded up to the nearest cent. In case of mathematical error on the bidder's part, the Contingency Bid Item will be adjusted up or down to equate to 10% of this subtotal. AMERICAN RECOVERY AND REINVESTMENT ACT FUNDING ADMINISTRATION 13. Bid Item NO.1 0: ARRA Funding Administration a. This Bid Item describes measurement and payment for the necessary administration to comply with all the requirements of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act (ARRA) in order for the project to receive federal funding assistance. b. The work included in this item shall include all the Contractor's efforts to research, complete, and submit on a timely basis, the appropriate forms and to implement the policies that are required for the project to be considered for funding under the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act (ARRA). Such Policies include, but are not limited to: 1) Inclusion I utilization of Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE) including all the required reporting as outlined in the documents provided in the Appendix to the Contract Documents and Technical Specifications. .MarshalJ Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Measurement and Payment 01630-5 0992-0197 .. ... . ...... co . Section IVa Measurement and Payment 01630-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I.... I 2) Meeting and reporting of Federal Labor Standard Provisions (Davis-Bacon Act), as outlined in the documents provided in the Appendix to the Contract Documents and Technical Specifications, 3) Utilizing iron, steel and manufactured goods that are produced in the United States of America and comply with the Buy American Certification as outlined in the Appendix to the Contract Documents and Technical Specifications. c. Payment will be lump sum for complying with the ARRA. The Contractor's attention is called to the fact that all costs, including, but not limited to; researching, processing, administration, submittals, correspondence, procurement, documentation, material and product changes, and other tasks/items necessary to comply with the ARRA requirements for the bid items in this contract shall be quantified and included in this lump sum cost. 14. Bid Item No. 11: Owner's Contingency a. Same as Bid Item No. 9 except that this Bid Item applies to the items associated with ARRA Funding Administration (Bid Item 10). PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Marshal/Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 c I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01640 - QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance and control of installation. B. References. C. Field samples. D. Mock-up. E. Inspection and testing laboratory services. F. Manufacturers' field services and reports. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Section 01650 - Testing Laboratory Services. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality. F. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Owner Bids. B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Project Representative before proceeding. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section /Va Quality Control 01640-1 0992-0197 0992-0197 Section IVa Quality Control 01640-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Ie> I C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.5 FIELD SAMPLES A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections for review. B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work. C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area atter field sample has been accepted by Project Representative. 1.6 MOCK-UP A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section. B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. C. Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area atter mock-up has been accepted by Project Representative. 1.7 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES A. Contractor will appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform inspection and testing. B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Owner. C. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Owner, Contractor, and the Engineer, in duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. 1. Notify Owner and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests required for Contractor's use. E. Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the Owner. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase, 2 ' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.8 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A. Submit qualifications of observer to Project Representative 30 days in advance of required observations. Observer subject to approval of Owner. B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Owner's Project Representative for review. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Quality Control 01640-3 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01650 - TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selection and payment. B. Laboratory responsibilities. C. Laboratory reports. D. Limits on testing laboratory authority. E. Contractor responsibilities. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required, and standards for testing. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. B. ANSIIASTM E329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction. 1.4 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A. The Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform specified inspection and testing. B. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of ANSIIASTM E329 and ANSI/ASTM D3740. B. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the state in which Project is located. C. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. D. Submittals: A contractor shall submit name, address and qualifications of selected laboratory for owners approval prior to application for first payment. Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Testing Laboratory Services 01650-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Testing Laboratory Services 01650-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I., I E. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards (NBS) Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. 1.6 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. B. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Owner and Contractor in performance of services. C. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards. D. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Promptly notify Owner and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or Products. F. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Owner's Project Representative. 1. 7 LABORATORY REPORTS A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit two copies of laboratory report to Owner and to Contractor. B. Include: 1. Date issued, 2. Project title and number, 3. Name of inspector, 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection, 5. Identification of product and Specifications Section, 6. Location in the Project, 7. Type of inspection or test, 8. Date of test, 9. Results of tests, 10. Conformance with Contract Documents. C. When requested by Owner, provide interpretation of test results. 1.8 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of the Contractor. D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.9 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. B. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples. C. Notify Owner and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. D. Employ services of a separate qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, .Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Testing Laboratory Services 01650-3 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01660 - SYSTEMS TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the testing, adjusting and balancing of all systems prior to placing them in service. B. The operation, testing, adjustment and balancing shall be as required to prove that the equipment is left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions specified. 1.2 TESTING PRIOR TO SHIPMENT A. Where individual sections require certain items of equipment to be tested prior to shipment from the manufacturer's plant, these items shall be operated to the extent necessary to generate certified performance data over the entire operating range of the equipment. The testing shall be conducted on the units which will be shipped to and installed at the construction site. 1.3 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The Contractor shall arrange for a qualified service representative from each company manufacturing or supplying certain equipment, as identified on the Drawings, or in the Specifications, to perform the duties described. B. After installation of the equipment identified to have the services of a manufacturer's representative has been completed, and the equipment is presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the representative shall inspect, operate, test, adjust and balance the equipment. The inspection shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following points as applicable: 1. Soundness (without cracked or otherwise damaged parts). 2. Completeness in all details, as specified. 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various parts. 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing and lubricants. C. On completion of his work, the manufacturer's or supplier's representative shall submit in triplicate to the Engineer a complete signed report of the result of his inspection, operation, adjustments, and tests. The report shall include detailed descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained if such are specified, and suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance. The report also shall include a certificate that the equipment conforms to the requirements of the Contract and is ready for permanent operation and that nothing in the installation will render the manufacturer's warranty null and void. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 01660-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 01660-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I D. After the Engineer has reviewed the reports from the manufacturer's representatives, the Contractor shall make arrangements to have the manufacturer's representatives present when the field acceptance tests are made. E. The manufacturer's representative shall remain on the job to instruct the Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance and shall remain until the equipment is operating in a satisfactory manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTS A. Tests shall be conducted in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and of authorities having jurisdiction over the work. No less than three days notice shall be given prior to start of tests. B. Field pressure and leakage tests shall be conducted on the following: 1. Process, instrumentation, sampling, chemical, fuel, and plumbing 2. Gravity pipelines 3. Valves 4. Pressure pipelines C. Plant pressure piping, except air pressure piping, shall be hydrostatically tested for two hours at 1 % times operating pressure or 150 psi which ever is less. All joints and other potential leak sources shall be painted with powdered blue chalk and water mixture prior to testing. Leak sources shall be examined during and at the end of the test period. D. Chemical feed lines shall be tested for two hours at 150 psi unless operating pressure is specifically identified. If operating pressure is identified, then chemical feed lines will be tested at 1 % times the operating pressure. E. Plant Air Pressure Piping and Exhaust Air Lines: Plant air pressure piping and exhaust air lines shall be tested at 1-1/2 times operating pressure. Test pressure shall be maintained for four hours and potential leak sources shall be checked at one-hour intervals by applying a coating of soap suds. F. Plumbing Systems: Soil and sanitary piping in plumbing systems shall be tested at the completion of the roughing-in installation. The piping shall be filled with water through the highest stack and be allowed to stand for two hours during which time there shall be no loss of water. G. Ductile Iron Pressure Mains shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C600. H. PVC Pressure Mains, including chemical process lines, shall be testing in accordance with AWWA C605. I. HOPE Pressure Mains shall be testing in accordance with its Technical Specification. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I J. Pressure mains shall be cleaned during flushing by using a polyurethane plug manufactured of eight Ib/cubic foot density blown elastomer with open cell construction. The plug shall have resilient surface that engages the inner surface of the main with a sliding seal. The plug shall be able to reduce itself a minimum of 35 percent of its original cross-sectional area, negotiate mitered bends, short radius elbows, pass through tees, crosses, multiple pipe sizes and valves and shall be abrasion resistant and capable of traveling in either direction. K. Valves: Valves shall be tested by applying the test pressure upstream of the closed valve with the downstream at zero pressure. The test pressure shall hold for a period of one hour after the source of pressure has been removed. 3.2 TESTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. After completion and prior to being energized, all electrical systems shall be tested as specified in Division 16 to the extent necessary to demonstrate that all systems are complete and ready for operation. Motors shall be checked for proper direction of rotation. Circuits shall be checked for proper voltages and currents. 3.3 TESTING PROCESS SYSTEMS A. Hydraulic and Leakage Testing: Field leakage tests shall be conducted on tanks, channels, and miscellaneous structures. They shall be leak tested by filling with water to the operating level. The water shall remain standing in the structure for a period of 24 hours. The structure shall be carefully examined for leaks at three-hour intervals during the working day. Water level shall be measured at these intervals and at the end of the test interval. B. In sewage treatment plants, sewage effluent may be used for hydraulic testing of tankage and initial adjustment of process systems. Raw sewage will not be introduced into the new facility until these tests and adjustments have been completed. Temporary pumping facilities to direct the effluent into the facility shall be provided by the Contractor. The Owner shall provide reclaimed water for hydraulic testing to the Contractor at no charge. 3.4 ENGINEER'S RIGHT TO RETESTING A. Should the Contractor refuse or neglect to make any tests necessary to demonstrate the integrity of the completed system, the Engineer may retain the services of an outside consultant to make all such tests and their resulting adjustments and balance. B. The costs for such tests shall be deducted from amounts owing to the Contractor and shall not be borne by the Owner. END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 ." Section IVa Systems Testing, Adjusting and Balancing 01660-3 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01670 - SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: 1. This section covers furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and performing all work and services for furnishing, submission, processing and handling of requests for substitution and product options. See items as indicated on drawings and as specified. Any substitution or option shall be in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents, and completely coordinated with work of other trades. 2. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. 3. See appropriate sections for specific items specified. See General Conditions for additional information. B. Procedure. 1. For equipment and materials which are listed in the proposal, observe procedures outlined in Information for Bidders. 2. For products, equipment, and materials which are named in drawings or specifications for which a request for substitution is made, observe procedures outlined in these specifications. C. Costs: Cost incurred by requester in providing information, catalogs, and samples - including but not limited to labor, materials, freight postage, and transportation - are sole cost of "Requestor" with no cost assessed Owner or Engineer. D. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation. E. Address for submission: City of Clearwater Attention: Robert Maue, PE Project Manager 100 S. Mrytle Ave. Room 220 Clearwater, FL 33756 Phone: 727-562-4827 Fax: 727-562-4755 E-Mail: Robert.Maue@mvclearwater.com - Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Substitutions and Product Options 01670-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Substitutions and Product Options 01670-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1,.- I 1.2 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION - GENERAL: A. Base all bids on materials, equipment and procedures specified. B. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in specifications by means of trade names and catalog numbers and/or manufacturer's names. Where this occurs, it was not intended to exclude from consideration such types of equipment and kinds of material bearing other trade names, catalog numbers and/or manufacturer's names, capable of accomplishing purpose of types of equipment or kinds of material specifically indicated, unless specifically noted as such. C. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. D. Types of equipment, kinds of material and methods of construction, if not specifically indicated must be approved in writing by Engineer and be agreed upon by Owner prior to letting of Contract. E. Conditional bids will not be accepted. 1.3 SUBMISSION OF REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION: A. After the bid date and prior to award of the Contract, the Engineer will consider requests for substitutions of products, materials, systems or other items. Requests must be received by Engineer within ten calendar days after the date of bid opening. All requests for substitution shall be completed as specified below. B. Substitute items must comply with color and pattern of base specified items unless specifically approved otherwise. C. Submit two (2) copies of request for substitution. Include in request: 1. Name of product located by Drawing No. or Specification No., followed by a detail or line number the particular item(s) for which request for substitution is initiated. 2. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 3. For products: a. Product identification by schedule or tag no., including manufacturer's name. b. Manufacturer's literature, marked to indicate specific model, type, size, and options to be considered: 1) Product Description. 2) Performance and test data. 3) Reference standards. 4) Difference in power demand. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades,Phase 2.". I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I 5) Dimensional differences for specified unit. c. Submit samples, full size if so required. Engineer reserves right to impound sample until physical units are installed on project for comparison purposes. All costs of furnishing and return of samples shall be paid by requester. Engineer is not responsible for loss of or damage to samples. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used, date of installation, and field performance data on installation. 4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product, materials, systems or other items specified. 5. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 6. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product, materials, systems or other items specified. 7. Include with any request a specific statement defining changes in contract time or amount. D. In making request for substitution, or in using an approved substitute item, Supplier/Manufacturer represents: 1. He has personally investigated proposed product, materials, systems or other items, and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified, and that it will perform function for which it is intended. 2. Will provide same or better warranty for substitute item as for product, materials, systems or other items specified. 3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, to include but not be limited to the following: a. Building and structure modifications as necessary; b. Additional ancillary equipment to accommodate change; c. Piping, valving, mechanical, electrical, or instrumentation changes, and, d. All other changes required for work to be complete in all respects to permit incorporation of substitution into project. 4. Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution, which subsequently become apparent. E. Written acceptance or rejection of items presented for alternative consideration will be given within two weeks after request is received. F. In the event the acceptance of an alternate results in a change in contract price or time, or is a deviation from the Contract Documents, a change order will be issued to reflect such change. In the event the acceptance of an alternate does not result in a change in Contract price or time, a field order shall be issued. MarshallStreet.APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Substitutions and Product Options 01670-3 0992-0197 Section IVa Substitutions and Product Options 01670-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I G. Rejection of alternates: 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents or building spaces. 2. If they are in Engineer's opinion, not equal to base product specified, or will not adequately perform function for which intended. 3. If request is not initiated by the Contractor in accordance with this specification section. 1.4 SUBSTITUTION AFTER CONTRACT AWARD A. Unavailability of specified item due to strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy, discontinuance of production, proven shortage, or similar occurrences are only reasons for substitution after Contract award. B. Notify Owner in writing, as soon as condition of unavailability becomes apparent; include substantiating data. Submit request for substitution sufficiently in advance to avoid delays. C. Submit data as required in paragraph 1.3 C above. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01690 - STARTING PROCESS SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 PLAN SUBMITTAL A. Prior to attaining 75 percent completion of the improvements, the Contractor shall submit his plan for placing the facility into operation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 START UP PLAN A. The plan shall include but not necessarily be limited to: 1. Procedures for inspection of systems, equipment, instrumentation and controls to be carried out prior to their being energized; 2. Schedule for on-site inspections, supervision of installation and start-up by manufacturer's personnel; 3. List of equipment and controls for which a manufacturer's certificate of proper installation shall be submitted prior to energizing; 4. Schedule for training by manufacturer's personnel; and 5. Sequence of start-up of each system. 3.2 MATERIALS, SUPPLIES AND ENERGY A. In conjunction with start-up, testing, and up to the time of acceptance of the facility by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish all required materials, supplies and energy. B. The above requirement applies to all expendable items required to operate and test the facility including: chemicals, electric power, oils and lubricants. END OF SECTION , . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Starting Process Systems 01690-1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Final cleaning B. Adjusting C. Project record documents D. Warranties 1.2 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. 1.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Provide duplicate notarized copies of all applicable warranties and guarantees. B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three 0 side ring binder with durable plastic cloth cover. D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Record information concurrent with construction progress as indicated in specifications. See Section III Article 6.11.2 for As-Built requirements. .Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Contract Closeout 01700-1 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase ,2 ^ 0992-0197 Section IVa Contract Closeout 01700-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I, I PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01800 - OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. General: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for all openings and penetrations in construction as indicated in accord with provisions of the Contract Documents. 2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades. 3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. 4. See Division 1 for General Requirements. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference standards: 1. American Welding Society (AWS) Structural Welding Code DI.I 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI) ACI 318-77, Chapter 6 on Embedding of Pipes 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA 90A, Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems 4. Standard Building Code (SBC) 5. N.E.C. Article 501 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300. B. Where an opening is required but is not shown on drawings, submit shop drawing, showing location of opening, size, and method to be used for making opening. C. Submit drawings verifying coordination of openings and penetrations, sizes and locations. D. Submit details of required seals verifying compliance of methods and materials. Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Openings and Penetrations in Construction 0992-0197 01800-1 b. Mark opening and drill small 3/4 IN or/less holes through structure following opening outline. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS - GENERAL A. Examine drawings to coordinate sizes and locations of openings and penetrations. B. Set sleeves with ends flush with finished surfaces, unless otherwise specified or indicated. C. Where pipes or ducts pass through floors in locations where floors can be washed or wetted, set sleeves with top 4 IN above finish floors. D. For insulated piping or ducts, size sleeves large enough to accommodate full thickness of insulation. E. Set sleeves or framed openings in advance in order to avoid conflict with other trades. F. Contractor shall verify location of all existing rebar prior to cutting or core drilling. Contractor shall adjust his penetration to avoid cutting rebar. At locations where cutting rebar cannot be avoided, submit sketch indicating the penetration, the rebar to remain intact and the rebar that will be compromised. G. Comply with following for cast-in-place concrete construction unless specifically otherwise approved: 1. Do not cut into nor core drill any beams, joists, or columns. 2. Do not install sleeves in beams, joists or columns. 3. Do not install recesses in beams, joists, columns or slabs. 4. Utilize one of the following installation methods: a. Core drill with non impact type equipment (preferred). c. Sawcut opening outline on both surfaces then knock out within sawcuts using impact type equipment using extreme caution not to chop or spall face of surface to remain intact. 5. When any opening larger than 10 IN must be made in completed structure, secure approval before starting work. H. Comply with following for precast-prestressed concrete construction unless specifically otherwise approved: Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades,.Phase 2 . . Section IVa Openings and Penetrations in Construction 0992-0197 01800-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Do not cut openings nor core drill vertically or horizontally through stems of members. 2. Do not locate or install sleeves or recess sleeves vertically or horizontally through or in stems of members. 3. Openings and sleeves to be cast into flanges of units. 4. Openings larger than 6 IN in diameter or 6 IN maximum dimension shall be cast in units at time of manufacture. Openings smaller than 6 IN in diameter or 6 IN maximum dimensions may be cast in flanges of units at time of manufacture or may be field cut. I. Where alterations are necessary of where new and old work join, restore adjacent surfaces to their condition prior to start of work. J. Furnish to precast manufacturer complete information concerning location and placement of openings and penetrations for inclusion in the calculations and shop drawings. Show coordination with work of all other trades. K. Hot dip galvanize all steel sleeves installed. 3.2 GENERAL SCHEDULE OF PENETRATIONS THROUGH FLOORS, ROOFS, FOUNDATION BASE SLABS, FOUNDATION WALLS, FOUNDATION FOOTINGS, PARTITIONS AND WALLS FOR EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK, PIPING AND CONDUIT. A. Provide openings and penetrations in construction where shown on drawings and as described in following listing: 1. Type A - Block out 1 IN larger than outside dimensions of duct or pipe. Dimension to allow for insulation to pass through opening where insulation is required. 2. Type B - Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeve with wall anchor. 3. Type C - 12 gauge sheet metal sleeve with welded seams integrally incorporated into construction. 4. Type D - Commercial type casting wall sleeve. 5. Type E - Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeve with combination anchor and water stop plate. 6. Type F - Cast in place pipe or conduit. 7. Type G - Cast in place with (combination anchor and water stop plate) welded to pipe or ductwork. 8. Type H - Core drill after structure is in place. B. Provide seals of material and method described as follows unless otherwise noted on drawings. Assure seal material and method are compatible with location and service of seal. Marshal/Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Openings and Penetrations in Construction 0992-0197 01800-3 1. Category 1 - Link - Seal 2. Category 2 - Not Used 3. Category 3 - Safing material and sealant. Refer to Specification Section 07900 for sealant types. 4. Category 4 - Backer rod and sealant. Refer to specification Section 07900 for sealant types. 5. Category 5 - Backer rod and sealant and escutcheons on both sides of opening. 6. Category 6 - Backer rod and sealant and flanges on both sides of opening. Flanges constructed of same material as duct, fastened to duct and minimum 1/2 IN larger than opening. 7. Category 7 - Safing material and sealant and escutcheons on both sides of opening. 8. Category 8 - Roof curb and flashing according to SMACNA specifications unless otherwise noted on drawings. 9. Category 9 - Not used. 10. Category 10 - Fire rated sealant - Refer to Section 07900. 11. Category 11 - Conduit seals. C. Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, furnish openings and sealing material in full accordance with drawings and the following schedule: Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 .. Section IVa Openings and Penetrations in Construction 0992-0197 01800-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Location Media Opening Sealing Material Type Cateaorv I Through floor Duct C 4 with bottom side a hazardous Pipes E, 4 I area. Conduits F 11 I Through floors Ducts F not required on grade above water table Pipes E 4 I Conduits F not required Through slabs Pipes D or E 1 I on grade below water table Conduits F not required Through floors Ducts C 6 I in areas with floor drains or hose bibs Pipes I (wet areas) 21N A, H or C 5 or 6 at areas and smaller subject to wash down I Larger E 5 or 6 at areas than 2 IN subject to wash down I Conduits F not required Through fire Ducts A 3 or 1 0 I rated walls Pipe I 21N B or H 7 or 10 and smaller I Larger B 3 or 10 than 21N I Conduits F not required Through walls Duct (Round) D or E 1 I where one side is a hazardous area Pipe D or E 1 Conduit F 11 I I Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2.. Section IVa Openings and Penetrations in Construction 0992-0197 01800-5 I Location Media Opening Sealing Material Type CateQorv Through exterior Duct D or E 1 wall below grade Pipe D or E 1 H 1 F not required Conduits F not required Through wall Pipes D or E 1 from wet well to F not required dry well Through exterior Duct A or F 6 wall above grade Pipe B,D 1 or 4 or E Conduits F not required Roof Duct A 8 penetration Pipes A 8 Conduits A 8 F not required Through interior Ducts A orC 4 walls unless specifically Pipes AorC 4 covered above Conduits F not required END OF SECTION . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2. . Section IVa Openings and Penetrations in Construction 0992-0197 01800-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 02050 - DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work under this section includes furnishing labor, equipment and materials for demolition, removal and proper disposal of certain structures, piping, equipment, all stripping, trees, steps and existing asphalt and concrete surfaces, existing sidewalk and curb and gutter as indicated or specified. Do not begin demolition until authorization is received from the Engineer, refer to paragraph "Title to Materials", hereinafter. Remove rubbish and debris daily, unless otherwise directed; do not allow accumulations. Store materials that cannot be removed daily in areas approved by the Engineer. The demolition and removal of materials containing asbestos shall be in accordance with State and Federal regulations. B. Structure demolition shall include removal of existing wooden, concrete and masonry structures, and cutting through or into existing reinforced concrete walls and masonry walls. C. Pipe demolition shall consist of cutting, plugging, and removal of piping as required. D. Pavement demolition shall consist of cutting and removing existing asphalt pavement, concrete pavement, and concrete curb and gutter. 1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS A. B. Clearing and Grubbing Electrical: Section IV Article 56 Section 16010 1.3 REQUIREMENTS A. Dust Control: Take appropriate action to check the spread of dust to occupied portions of any nearby buildings and avoid the creation of a nuisance in the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, or pollution. Comply with all dust regulations imposed by local air pollution agencies. B. Protection: Protect existing work which is to remain in place, that is to be reused, or which is to remain the property of Owner by temporary covers, shoring, bracing and supports. Items which are to remain and which are damaged during performance of the work shall be repaired to their original condition or replaced. Do not overload structural elements. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing construction weakened by demolition or removal work. C. Facilities: Protect all electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities. D. Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted. 0992-0197 Section IVa Demolition and Removal 02050-1 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2s 0992-0197 Section IVa < Demolition and Removal 02050-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I E Burnina: Burning will not be permitted. F. Reaulations: Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposed demolition and removal procedures to the Engineer for approval before work is started. Procedures shall provide for coordination with other work in progress, a disconnection schedule of utility services, a detailed description of methods and equipment to be used for each operation of the sequence of operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall review the demolition plans and the construction notes pertaining to the existing buildings and structures prior to submittal of the demolition plan to the Engineer. 3.2 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED Concrete and masonry structures which are in the way of new work shall be cut off to a point at least 12" below finished grade level and backfilled and covered with unclassified excavation unless indicated to be completely removed. Compaction shall be 95% of Standard Proctor at optimum moisture content. A. Existing concrete and masonry structures to be cut for installation of conduit and piping shall be neatly cut using core drills. After installation of conduit or pipe the annular space shall be filled with non-shrink grout. B. Items such as concrete sidewalk, stairs, curb and gutter and asphalt pavements shall be removed as necessary to complete the project as shown on the plans. All concrete and asphalt items to be removed shall be saw cut with a neat clean line then removed. The Contractor shall take care as to not damage adjacent structures during removal. Any damage to adjacent facilities will be the Contractor's responsibility. C. The Owner has drawings available for reviewing for the structure and buildings indicated to be abandoned. The Contractor may review these drawings in the office of the County or inspect these structures during a site visit. 3.3 UTILITIES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED Remove all existing utilities and related equipment uncovered by work and terminate in a manner conforming to the nationally recognized code covering the specific utility. Equipment to be removed shall be removed with as little damage to the equipment as possible. Any anchor bolts or plates shall be removed by cutting and holes shall be grouted over flush with surface. Remove lights and stanchion and related equipment and deliver to a location in accordance with instruction of the Owner or his representative without additional cost. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades"Phase 2s. . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I A. Piping shown on the plans to be removed shall be disassembled where possible (and cut where required) and removed. All piping stub-outs indicated to remain shall be blind flanged, covered with a threaded cap or closed with a permanent mechanical plug, as appropriate. 3.4 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL Title to Materials - Except where indicated otherwise or specifically specified otherwise in other sections or as indicated on the plans, all materials and equipment removed, and not reused, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the property. Title to all materials resulting from demolition, and all materials and equipment to be removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the demolition and removal procedures, and authorization by the Engineer to begin demolition. The Owner will not be responsible for the condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after Notice to Proceed. Materials and equipment shall not be viewed by prospective purchasers or sold on the site. A. Reuse of materials and equipment - Carefully remove and store materials and equipment to be reused or relocated to prevent damage, and reinstall as the work progresses. B. Salvaged materials and equipment as specified by the Owner - Carefully remove materials that are to be removed by the Contractor and that are to remain the property of the Owner, and deliver to a storage site as directed within 15 miles of the work site. 3.5 CLEANUP A. Remove and transport debris and rubbish in a manner that will prevent spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Cleanup any spillage from streets and adjacent areas that occur during transportation operations. The site shall have all debris removed and shall be graded to conform to the adjacent area in such a manner to provide proper drainage. The site shall be properly seeded and mulched after completion of demolition operations. END OF SECTION 0992-0197 Section IVa Demolition and Removal 02050-3 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2s I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following: a. Foundations and footings. b. Slabs-on-grade. c. Equipment pads and bases. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others if requested by Engineer. 2. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing concrete reinforcement. Shop drawings to show proposed location of all construction joints. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings through concrete structures. Engineer's review is for general compliance only. The Contractor will be responsible for size, number and lengths of rei nforci ng. 3. Shop drawings for formwork indicating fabrication and erection of forms for specific finished concrete surfaces. Show form construction including jointing, special form joints or reveals, location and pattern of form tie placement, and other items that affect exposed concrete visually. Engineer's review is for general applications and features only. Designing formwork for structural stability and efficiency is Contractor's responsibility. . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section /Va Cast-tn-Place Concrete 03300-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 4. The testing laboratory shall submit three copies of results of concrete cylinder tests to Engineer together with one copy each to Owner, Contractor, and Concrete Supplier. 5. Ready-mixed concrete delivered shall be accompanied by delivery tickets showing the following: a. Date and time leaving the plant b. Type of cement and weight c. Quanity of water and time added d. Aggregate moisture correction factor e. Admixtures and weight f. Site arrival time g. Site leaving time h. Type of fly ash and weight i. Mix Number 6. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test. Contractor shall submit three (3) copies. 7. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by Engineer. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements. 8. Hot weather and cold weather concreting plan shall include curing method and specific curing plan, ready mixed supplier plan, contingency plans, and materials list as a minimum. All hot weather plans shall meet requirements of ACI 305. All cold weather plans shall meet requirements of ACI 306. 9. A pouring plan will be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval showing the location of all construction joints and sawed contraction joints. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provIsions of the latest revIsion of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 211 "Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete." 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." 3. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 4. ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork." 5. ACI 350 "Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures." 6. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice." 7. ASTM C 94 Standard Specifications for Ready-Mix Concrete Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades,. Phase 2. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 8. Florida Building Code 9. ACI 305 and 306 B. Concrete Testing Service: Contractor will engage a testing agency to perform material evaluation tests. C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of Work. Any retesting of rejected materials for installed Work, shall be done at Contractor's expense. D. Review requirements for submittals, status of coordinating work, and availability of materials. Establish preliminary work progress schedule and procedures for materials inspection, testing, and certifications. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend conference, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Contractor's superintendent. 2. Agency responsible for concrete design mixes. 3. Agency responsible for field quality control. 4. Ready-mix concrete producer. 5. Concrete subcontractor. 6. Primary admixture manufacturers. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. B. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "8-8 (Concrete Form) Plywood," Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill-oiled and edge-sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark. C. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. D. Forms for Cylindrical Columns and Supports: Metal, glass-tiber-reinforced plastic, or paper or fiber tubes that will produce smooth surfaces without joint indications. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist wet concrete loads without deformation. E. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 ' 0992-0197 Section IVa Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-3 0992-0197 Section IVa Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. G. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch and no smaller than % inch in diameter in the concrete surface. Form ties for exposed concrete shall be of the cone-washer type. The cones shall be made of approved wood or plastic. Ties for liquid containment structures shall have an integral waterstop that is tightly welded to the tie. Common wire will not be allowed for form ties. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 Grade 60 deformed. B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric. D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. E. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. F. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs that are protected by plastic (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel (CRSI, Class 2). 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F 1. Use one brand of cement and fly ash throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer. C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 2.4 WATER A. Mixing water shall meet specified requirements of ASTM C 94-00, Section 5. 2.5 ADMIXTURES, GENERAL A. Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades,Phase 2 .. I I I I I I I I I I I I. I I I I I I I 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Monex Air or Monex NVR, Monex Resources, Inc. b. Air- Tite, Cormix Construction Chemicals. c. Air-Mix or Perma-Air, Euclid Chemical Co. d. Darex AEA or Daravair, W.R. Grace & Co. e. MB-VR or Micro-Air, Master Builders, Inc. f. Sealtight AEA, W.R. Meadows, Inc. g. Sika AER, Sika Corp. C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A or D. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following a. Monex Resources, Inc b. Chemtard, ChemMasters Corp. c. PSI N, Cormix Construction Chemicals. d. Eucon WR-75, Euclid Chemical Co. e. WRDA, W.R. Grace & Co. f. Pozzolith Normal or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc. g. Metco W.R., Metalcrete Industries. h. Prokrete-N, Prokrete Industries. i. Plastocrete 161, Sika Corp. D. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Monex SP or Mighty RD, Monex Resources, Inc. b. Super P, Anti-Hydro Company, Inc. c. Eucon 37, Euclid Chemical Company. d. WRDA 19 or Daracem, W.R. Grace and Company. e. Rheobuild or Polyheed, Master Builders, Inc. f. Superslump, Metalcrete Industries. g. PSP, Prokrete Industries h. Sikament 300, Sika Corp. 2.6 CALCIUM CHLORIDE A. The use of calcium chloride will not be permitted. 2. 7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Reglets: Where sheet flashing or bituminous membranes are terminated in reglets, provide reglets of not less than 0.0217- inch-thick galvanized sheet steel. Fill reglet or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. Marshall Street APCF Generator .Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-5 0992-0197 Section IVa Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I B. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized sheet steel, not less than 0.0336 inch thick with bent tab anchors. Fill slot with temporary filler or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. C. Waterstops: Provide ribbed or dumbbell-type waterstops at construction joints exposed to water pressure, including groundwater pressure, and other joints as indicated. Provide ribbed or dumbbell type with centerbulb waterstops at expansion joints. In general waterstops shall be 9" wide. Install 6" wide waterstops at intersections with reinforced sections with 3" of clear cover. All waterstops shall be a minimum of 3/8" thick. All waterstops shall be provided with either metal grommets or intergal tie wires located along the top and bottom of the waterstop spaced at 12". Other styles or sizes of waterstops may be considered based on their specific application. D. Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BoMetals, Inc. b. The Burke Co. c. Greenstreak Plastic Products Co. d. Meadows, Inc. e. Progress Unlimited. f. Schlegel Corp. g. Vinylex Corp. E. Sand Cushion: Clean, manufactured or natural sand. F. Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder that is resistant to deterioration when tested according to ASTM E 154, as follows: 1. Polyethylene sheet not less than 8 mils thick. G. Water-resistant barrier consisting of heavy kraft papers laminated together with glass-fiber reinforcement and overcoated with black polyethylene on each side. H. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. I. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap. J. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project requirements. Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 .. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Burke Epoxy M.V., The Burke Co. b. Spec-Bond 100, Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. c. Resi-Bond (J-58), Dayton Superior. d. Euco Epoxy System #452 or #620, Euclid Chemical Co. e. Epoxtite Binder 2390, A.C. Horn, Inc. f. Epabond, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. g. Concresive Standard Liquid, Master Builders, Inc. h. Rezi-Weld 1000, W.R. Meadows, Inc. i. Metco Hi-Mod Epoxy, Metalcrete Industries. j. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod, Sika Corp. k. Stonset LV5, Stonhard, Inc. I. Series, Symons Corp. K. Monofilament Concrete Fibers: Manufactured from 100% homopolymer, polypropylene resin, containing no reprocessed olefin materials, and in compliance with ASTM C-1116 "Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete." Monofilament concrete fibers shall be added to all concrete slabs at a rate of one pound of fibers per cubic yard of concrete (1.0 Ib/cy). Fibers shall also be added to concrete as called for on project drawings. 2.8 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES: A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301, ACI 211, and ACI 350. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing agency acceptable to Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. B. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing. C. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of the total cementitious content by weight. Fly ash shall be used either as an admixture or as a partial cement replacement. Fly ash may be used in all structural concrete. D. Submit written reports to Engineer of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Engineer. E. Monofilament concrete fibers shall be added to all concrete slabs at a rate of one pound of fibers per cubic yard of concrete (1.0 Ib/cy). Fibers shall also be added to concrete as called for on project drawings. Marshall Street APCF Generator.Upgrades, Phase 2 . . Section lVa Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-7 0992-0197 2.9 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTHS Design mixes to provide concrete with the following properties as indicated on schedules: CLASS MAXIMUM WATER 7 DAY 28 DAY - CEMENTITIOUS RATIO MINIMUM CEMENTITIOUS MATERIAL (LBS/CY) 564 470 650 Structural Non-Structural Structural, High Density 2670 2000 3000 4000 3000 4500 0.44 0.50 0.40 2.10 STRUCTURAL HIGH DENSITY CONCRETE Structural, High Density Concrete shall be used in all structures where concrete is intended to be watertight in service. 2.11 SLUMP LIMITS Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as follows: A. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches. B. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3 inches. C. Concrete containing high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not more than 8 inches after adding admixture to site-verified 2 - 3 inch slump concrete. 2.12 CONCRETE MIX ADJUSTMENTS A. Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Engineer. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Engineer before using in Work. 2.13 ADMIXTURES A. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with water-cement ratios below 0.50. B. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content of 5% with a tolerance of plus or minus 1.0 percent. . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades,.P.hase 2 Section/Va Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-8 0992-0197 I I I 1 I I 1 1 I I 1 I I 1 I I 1 I", I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.14 READY-MIXED CONCRETE A. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2.15 WATERPROOFING A. Provide below-grade surface applied waterproofing. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Sonneborn 128 Spray Mastic or Semi-Mastic. b. Thoroseal/Acryl 60. 2.16 CRACK INJECTION MATERIALS A. Hydrophilic Resin: 1. Hydrophilic resin shall be an acrylic-ester based resin with a maximum viscosity of 50 cps. It shall cure into a flexible rubber-like material that has the potential for unrestrained increase in volume in excess of 100 percent in the presence of water. 2. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Duroseallnject, as manufactured by BBZ USA, Inc. b. Sika Injection 29, by Sika Corporation. c. Or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. B. FORMS 1. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347 limits: Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 . 0992-0197 Section IVa . Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-9 0992-0197 Section IVa Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I.. I a. Provide Class A tolerances for concrete surfaces exposed to view. b. Provide Class C tolerances for other concrete surfaces. C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reg lets, recesses, and the like for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer all exposed corners and edges, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. Chamfer edges to be %" unless otherwise approved by Engineer. G. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. H. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified. B. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete. C. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Engineer. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I E. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. F. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.3 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints so they do not impair strength or appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Engineer. B. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements. C. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. D. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of Work. Field-fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturer's printed instructions. E. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints in slabs-on-grade at points of contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. F. Joint fillers and sealants shall be as follows: 1. Joint Fillers a. Self-expanding Cork Joint Filler: with ASTM D 1752 for Type III. Preformed strips complying b. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752 for Type II. c. Sponge Rubber Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752 for Type I. d. Bituminous Fiber Joint Filler: Performed strips complying with ASTM D 1751: Granulated cork with asphalt binder encased between 2 layers of saturated felt of glass-fiber felt of width and thickness indicated. 2. Joint Sealers shall be appropriate for their intended use and installations. Follow manufactures instruction for use and installation. All joint sealants shall be in accordance with ACI 504R. Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 . Section IVa . Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-11 0992-0197 Section/Va Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-12 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I IUUH I 3.4 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached. B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. 3.5 PREPARING FORM SURFACES A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, non-residual, low- vac, form-coating compound before placing reinforcement. B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. E. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309. F. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of Marshall StreetAPCF GeneratorUpgradesrPhase2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate. A spare vibrator will be on-site for emergency use at all times. G. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints or expansion joints, until completing placement of a panel or section. H. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners. I. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. J. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement. K. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. L. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F) at point of placement. M. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. N. Do not use salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. Calcium chloride will not be allowed. O. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified. P. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to be in accordance with ACI. Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Ice can not be used to replace more than half of the design total water content. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. Q. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. R. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas. S. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Engineer. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, . Phase. 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-13 0992-0197 Section IVa Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-14 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: Provide a rough-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. Finish shall be a Class C in accordance with ACI 347. B. Smooth-Formed Finish: Provide a smooth-formed finish on formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or another similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and smoothed. Finish shall be a Class A in accordance with ACI 347. C. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Provide grout-cleaned finish on scheduled concrete surfaces that have received smooth-formed finish treatment. 1. Combine one part portland cement to one and one-half parts fine sand by volume, and a 50:50 mixture of acrylic or styrene butadiene-based bonding admixture and water to form the consistency of thick paint. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. 2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. E. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and where indicated. 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 25 (floor flatness) and F(L) 20 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M). Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. Class of surface shall be a class C surface in accordance with 347 R. F. Non-slip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip light broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Engineer before application. G. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work. All grout shall be non-shrinking. H. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. I. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. J. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items. Cast-in safety inserts and accessories as shown on drawings. Screed, tamp, and non-slip broom concrete surfaces. K. Below Grade Concrete: Waterproof the exterior (grade) side of tank and building walls. Prepare surface based upon manufacturer's recommendations. Material may be spray, brush or roller applied. Conform to manufacturers recommendations for chosen application. 3.8 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation- control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Keep continuously moist for not less than 14 days as required due to weather. C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, or by combining these methods, as specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by the following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-15 0992-0197 Section IVa Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-16 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I" I b. Use continuous water-fog spray. c, Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a 4 inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive, Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the full curing period or until forms are removed. As soon as initial set has occurred, place a soil soaker hose along the tops of all walls to keep concrete forms wet during the curing period. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable, for the remainder of the curing period. If forms are removed before the end of the curing period, then the concrete shall be continuously moist for the remainder of the curing period by fog spraying or covering with moist burlap. 4. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method. 5. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture- retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.9 SHORES AND SUPPORTS A. General: Comply with ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring in multistory construction, and as specified, B. Extend shoring from ground to roof for structures four stories or less, unless otherwise permitted. C, Remove shores and reshore in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially cured concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support work without excessive stress or deflection. 0, Keep reshores in place a minimum of 15 days after placing upper tier, or longer, if required, until concrete has attained its required 28-day strength and heavy loads due to construction operations have been removed. 3.10 REMOVING FORMS A. Formwork, such as beam soffits, joists, walls, and other structural elements, may not be removed until concrete has attained at least seventy percent (70%) of '. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. No earth loads or live loads will be structurally placed against or on any poured structurally reinforced concrete until the concrete has reached its 28 day compressive strength or otherwise approved by the Engineer. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. B. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. 3.11 REUSING FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Engineer. 3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removing forms, when acceptable to Engineer. B. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Engineer. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry-pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. C. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope. E. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa ' Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-17 0992-0197 .. . - Section IVa Cast-In-Place Concrete 03300-18 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I.. I F. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. G. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Engineer. H. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. I. Additional repair of concrete cracks in formed and unformed surfaces: All concrete for liquid retaining structures, elevated slabs subject to rainfall and washdown, below grade members and all concrete in contact with earth, water or exposed directly to the elements shall be watertight. All leaks through concrete that exhibit any dampness or flowing water and any cracks, holes or other defective concrete in areas of potential leakage, shall be repaired and made watertight by CONTRACTOR. Where it is not possible to verify that a crack is not leaking, it shall be repaired. Determination of leakage and / or dampness shall be made by Engineer. Repair, removal, and replacement of defective concrete as directed by ENGINEER shall be at no additional cost to the OWNER. 1. Method of Repair: Cracks shall be pressure grouted using hydrophilic resin. Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's directions and recommendations. 3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. General: The Contractor will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test reports. The cost of initial testing is included in the contract as an allowance. See Section 01021 - Allowances. The testing agency shall be approved by the Engineer. Any retesting due to non-acceptable work or materials shall be at the Contractors expense. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the following, as directed by Engineer. C. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. D. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each compressive strength test; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed or as directed by the Engineer. E. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each compressive strength test. " Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 ' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I F. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below, when 90 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens. G. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required. H. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first 25 cu. yd. of each concrete class placed in anyone day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. I. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. J. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. K. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. L. Test results will be reported in writing to Engineer, ready-mix producer, and Owner within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7 -day tests and 28-day tests. M. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. N. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Engineer. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. These additional tests shall be at the Contractor's expense. 3.14 TEST FOR WATERTIGHTNESS (HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES) A. All concrete tanks designed to contain liquid shall be tested for water tightness in accordance with Section 01711 - HYDRAULICS STRUCTURES TESTING. END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section iVa Cast-in-Place Concrete 03300-19 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 04100 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Work under this section includes furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment for the installation of unit masonry in a first class condition. 8. The types of masonry required include concrete masonry (split face and normal) and brick masonry. C. The extent of each type of masonry work is as shown on the drawings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials 2. ASTM C 91, Masonry Cement 3. ASTM C 144, Aggregate for Masonry Mortar 4. ASTM C 150, Portland Cement 5. ASTM C 207, Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes 6. ASTM C 270, Mortar for Unit Masonry 7. ASTM C 387, Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete 8. ASTM C 467, Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry 9. ASTM C 595, Blended Hydraulic Cements' B. Variation from Plumb: For vertical walls and arises, do not exceed 1/4" in 10' or 3/8" in a story height. For external corners, expansion joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not vary more than 1/4" in 10'. C. Variation from Level: For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40' or more. D. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan and related portion of walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40' or more. E. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed -1/4" nor +1/2". F. Mortar shall meet the requirements of the Florida Building Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and other data for each type of masonry and accessories used. Include certification that products meet or exceed specifications. u .. MarshallStreetAf'CF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Unit Masonry 04100-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Unit Masonry 04100-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.4 PRODUCT, DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store manufactured products in original unopened containers. B. Store cementitious ingredients in weather-tight enclosures and protect against contamination and warehouse set. C. Stock pile and handle aggregated to' prevent contamination from foreign materials. D. Store admixtures to prevent contamination or damage from excessive temperature changes. E. Keep water free of harmful materials 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Heat mixing water when air temperature is below 400F (40C) and heat aggregates when air temperature is below 320F (ooC) to assure mortar temperatures between 400F (40C) and 1200F (500C) until used. B. Produce subsequent mortar batches within::!: 100F (::!: 60) of first batch. C. Do not heat water or sand above 1200F (500C). 1.6 PROTECTION OF WORK A. During erection, cover top of walls with heavy waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 24" down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 1. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls or columns. 2. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. 3. Staining: Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from dropping or mortar. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Obtain masonry units from a single manufacturer for each type required. Manufacturers of concrete masonry will be members of the National Concrete Masonry Association (NMCA) or approved equal. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.2 MORTAR A. ASTM C 270, 1 part cement (ASTM C 150 and C 91, Type II) 1/4 part by volume lime (ASTM C 207), not less than 2-1/4 nor more than 3 times the sum of volumes of cement and lime used, (sand) aggregate (ASTM 144); type M. B. Maximum Air Content: 12% C. Water: Clean, potable water, free of deleterious materials, such as acids, alkalies, or organic materials. D. Mixing Procedures: 1. Measure materials by volume or equivalent weight. 2. Do not measure by shovel. 3. Mix ingredients in clean mechanical batcher for 5 minutes. 4. Use minimum amount of water to produce workable consistency. 5. Retempering of mortar will not be permitted. Mortar allowed to stand more then 1-1/2 hours after initial mixing shall not be used. 2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Size: Manufacturer's standard normal and split face units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" height (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual), unless otherwise indicated. Width of units will be as indicated on drawings. B. ASTM C 90, Grade N-II C. Provide standard weight hollow load-bearing units unless otherwise indicated. D. Aggregate weight shall conform to ASTM C 331 providing a dry net unit weight of not more than 128 Ibs. per cubic foot unless otherwise indicated. E. Curing: 1. Cure units by autoclave treatment at a minimum temperature of 3500F (1760C), and a minimum pressure of 125 psi. Limit moisture absorption to 25% of saturation during delivery and until time of installation. 2. Cure units in a moisture controlled atmosphere or in an autoclave at normal pressure and temperature to comply with ASTM C 90, Type 1., Limit moisture absorption during delivery and until time of installation to the maximum percentage specified for Type 1 units for the average annual relative humidity as reported by the U. S. Weather Bureau Station nearest the project site. 3. Exposed Faces: Provide from manufacturer's standard colors and textures as selected by Owner's Project Representative, unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Continuous Wire Reinforcing and Ties for Masonry: Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10', with matching corner and tee units. Fabricate from cold-drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82, with Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2. . 0992-0197 Section IVa Unit Masonry 04100-3 0992-0197 Section IVa Unit Masonry 04100-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I, I deformed continuous side rods and plain cross-rods, and a unit width of 1-1/2" to 2" less than thickness of wall or partition. 1. Provide units fabricated as follows: a. Ladder Type: Fabricated with single pair of 9 gage side rods and 9 gage perpendicular cross-rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. b. Truss Type: Fabricated with single pair of 9 gage continuous diagonal cross-rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. For multi- wythed or cavity exterior walls with concrete masonry back-up, fabricate units with additional side rods spaced for embedment in inside face of backup wythe. 2. For exterior and interior, hot-dip galvanize after fabrication with 1.5 oz. zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class B2. 3. Individual Wire Ties for Masonry: Fabricate from 3/16" cold-drawn steel wire, ASTM A 82, unless otherwise indicated, of the length required for proper embedment in wythes of masonry. Maximum spacing shall be 16" o.c. vertical and 24" o.c. horizontally. 4. For exterior walls, fabricate from steel wire with 1.5 oz. hot-dip zinc coating ASTM A 153, Class B2, or fabricate from steel wire with not less than 7-mil. copper coating, ASTM B 227, Grade 30 HS. B. Anchors and Ties: 1. Provide straps, bars, bolts, and rods fabricated from not less than 16 gage sheet metal or 3/8" diameter rod stock, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For devices which extend into exterior wythe, fabricate from steel with hot-dip galvanized coating, ASTM A 153, Class B1, 82, or B3. C. Flashing for Masonry: 1. Provide concealed flashings on exterior walls above lintels, bond beams, above weeps and other locations shown on the Drawings as built into masonry. 2. Provide concealed flashings as follows: Virgin polyvinyl chloride with plasticizer and other modifiers, formed into uniform flexible sheet not less than 20 mils. thick and black in color, unless otherwise indicated. D. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 of the sizes shown. E. Bond Breaker Strips: 15 pound asphalt roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, or 15 pound coal-tar roofing felt complying with ASTM D 227. F. Premolded Control Joint Strips: Solid rubber strips with a Shore A durometer hardness of 60 to 80, designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral stability in masonry wall, size and configuration as required at vertical control joints. G. Plastic Weepholes: Unless otherwise indicated, proved 1/4" round X 4" long medium density polyethylene plastic tubes to form weepholes. Provide at 48" olc maximum horizontal spacing at bottom of wall or flashing, as required. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I H. Insulation: Foam Plastic Thermal Insulation: "Core-Fill 500" as manufactured by Tailored Chemical Products, Inc. Hickory, NC (Tailored Foam of Florida, Longwood, FL, 407/332-0333) or approved equal. I. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. 2.5 GROUT FOR UNIT MASONRY A. Comply with ASTM c 476. B. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. C. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143. D. For bond beams, engineered masonry and lintels, provide grout of 3,000 psi compressive strength at 28 days, 8-10 inches slump, mixed according to ACI 318. Mixed according to ASTM C 94 with NO.8 aggregate size. E. Mix grout according to ASTM C 94. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Installation: Thickness: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified. B. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean sharp, unchipped edges. Butt units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. C. Do not wet concrete masonry units. D. Frozen Materials and Work: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. For masonry which is specified to be wetted, comply with the BIA recommendations. Do not build on frozen work. Remove and replace masonry work damaged by frost or freezing. E. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or antifreeze agents. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. F. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in running bond pattern. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners, unless otherwise shown. G. Avoid the use of less-than-half size units at corners, jambs, and wherever possible at other locations. ." . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 .Section IVa . Unit Masonry 04100-5 0992-0197 Section IVa Unit Masonry 04100-6 I I I I I I 1 I I 1 1 I I 1 I 1 1 I.. I H. Lay-up walls plumb and true and with course level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. I. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2 masonry unit length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if specified to be wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. J. Built-In Work: As the work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. K. Intersecting Load-Bearing Walls: If carried up separately, block vertical joint with 8" maximum offsets and provide rigid steel anchors spaced not more than 4'_0" o.c. vertically, or omit blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2'_0" o.c. vertically. Form anchors of galvanized steel not less than 1-1/2" X 1/4" X 2'-0" long with ends turned up not less than 2" or with cross-pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed ends in mortar filled cores. 3.2 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Batch Control: Measure and batch materials either by volume or weight, such that the required proportions for mortar can be accurately controlled and maintained. Measurement of sand exclusively by shovel will not be permitted. B. Mix mortars with the minimum amount of water consistent with workability to provide minimum tensile bond strength within the capacity of the mortar. C. Mix mortar ingredients for a minimum of 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer. Use water clean and free of deleterious materials which would impair the work. Do not use mortar which has begun to set, or if more than 1-1/2 hours has elapsed since initial mixing. D. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells; also bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and foundation walls and in all courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or to be filled with concrete or grout. E. Joints: Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with 1/2" joints for brick masonry and 3/8" joints for concrete masonry. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Tool exposed joints. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or silents where shown. F. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.3 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING A. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lay reinforcement a minimum of 6" at ends of units. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing, unless otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, . column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. Space continuous horizontal reinforcing as follows: 1. For single-wythe walls, space reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, both immediately above the lintel and below the sill. Extend reinforcing a minimum of 2'-0" beyond jambs of the openings, bridging control joints where provided. B. Anchoring Masonry Work: 1. Provide anchoring devices of the type shown and specified. If not shown or specified, provide standard type for facing and back-up involved. 2. Anchorage of masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such members shall comply with the following: a. Provide an open space not less than 1" in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar or other rigid materials. b. Anchor masonry to structural members with metal ties embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie section, unless otherwise indicated. c. Space anchors as shown, but not more than 24" o.c. vertically and 36" o.c. horizontally. C. Lintels: 1. Install loose lintels of steel and other materials as shown on the Drawings. D. Control and Expansion Joints: 1. Provide vertical expansion, control, and isolation joints in masonry where shown. Build-in related masonry accessories as the masonry work progresses. a. See Section 07920 for "Joint Sealers". b. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4" in direction of flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints, if any. Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Unit Masonry 04100-7 0992-0197 0992-0197 . Section IVa Unit Masonry 04100-8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. Build-in flanges of factory-fabricated expansion joint units, specified in Section 07920. 3. Build-in joint fillers where shown. 2.2 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1 1 ASCE 6fTMS 602. B. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6fTMS 602 for c1eanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. Fill cells of concrete masonry indicated to be reinforced with 3000 psi grout. Vibrate grout to ensure that cells are completely filled. Reinforce walls as indicated on the structural drawings. 2.3 FLASHING OF MASONRY WORK A. Provide concealed flashing in masonry work at, or above, all shelf angles, bond beams, lintels, ledges, and other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall so as to divert such water to the exterior. Prepare masonry surfaces smooth and free from projections which could puncture flashing. Place through wall flashing on bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with mastic before covering with mortar. B. Extend flashings the full lengths of lintels and shelf angles and minimum of 4" into masonry each end. Extend flashing from a line 1/2" in from exterior face of outer wythe of masonry, through the outer wythe, turned up a minimum of 4", and through the inner wythe to within 1/2" of the interior surface of inner wythe. If inner wythe is concealed by furring, carry flashing completely through the inner wythe and turn up approximately 2". C. Provide weepholes in the head joints of the same course of masonry bedded in the flashing mortar. D. Interlock end joints of deformed metal flashings by overlapping deformations not less than 1-1/2" and seal lap with elastic sealant. E. Install flashings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2.4 REPAIR, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints at corners, openings, and adjacent work, to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds. ..MarshaIlStreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 .' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. Clean exposed CMU masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 .Section IVa Unit Masonry 04100-9 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes structural steel. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 01300 "Submittals" for shop drawings. 2. Section 01640 "Quality Control" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 3. Section 05310 "Steel Deck" for field installation of shear connectors. 4. Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for loose steel bearing plates and miscellaneous steel framing. 5. Section 09900 "Painting" for surface preparation and priming requirements. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Engineer structural steel connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by the fabricator to withstand design loadings indicated. B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who utilizes a qualified professional engineer to prepare calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data for structural steel connections. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of product specified. C. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Marshal/Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase. 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Structural Steel 05120-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Structural Steel 05120-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify high-strength bolted slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections. 4. Include Shop Drawings signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Mill test reports signed by manufacturers certifying that their products, including the following, comply with requirements. 1. Structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers, including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Direct-tension indicators. 4. Shop primers. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed structural steel work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work. 1. Fabricator must participate in the AISC Quality Certification Program and be designated an AISC-Certified Plant as follows: a) Category: Category I, conventional steel structures. b) Category: Category II, complex steel building structures. c) Fabricator shall be registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings--Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." 2. AISC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design (LFRD) Specification for Structural Steel Buildings." Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase.2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single-Angle Members." 4. AISC's "Specification for Load and Resistance Factor Design of Single- Angle Members." 5. ASTM A 6 "Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use." 6. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 7. Research Council on Structural Connections' (RCSC) "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for projects with structural steel framing that are similar to that indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. E. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 1. Present evidence that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver structural steel to Project site in such quantities and at such times to ensure continuity of installation. B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.7 SEQUENCING A. Supply anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation. Marshal/Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Structural Steel 05120-3 0992-0197 . Section IVa Structural Steel 05120-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: Carbon Steel: ASTM A 36. B. Structural Steel Shapes, Carbon Steel: ASTM A 572. C. Cold-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. D. Hot-Formed Structural Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Weight Class: Standard. 2. Weight Class: Extra strong. 3. Weight Class: Double extra strong. 4. Finish: Black. 5. Finish: Galvanized. 6. Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized. F. Anchor Rods, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: As follows: 1. ASTM F1554 - GRADE 55 G. Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A; carbon- steel, hex-head bolts; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. 1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc-coating, ASTM A 153, Class C H. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts, heavy hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc-coating, ASTM A 153, Class C 2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325. a) Finish: Plain, uncoated. b) Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50. c) Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50, epoxy coated. I. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase. 2 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I J. Headed Steel Anchors (HSA) as manufactured by TRW Nelson Division type [H4L] or approved equal conforming to ASTM A108, grade 1015 forged steel headed, uncoated, size as shown on Drawings. 2.2 PRIMER A. Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer with good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds and repair painting galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 93 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035A or SSPC- Paint 20. 2.3 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application, and a 30-minute working time. (Minimum compressive strength of 7000 psi after 28 days) 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate structural steel according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section and in Shop Drawings. 1. Camber structural steel members where indicated. 2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 and maintain markings until steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 4. Fabricate for delivery a sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of structural steel. 5. Complete structural steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming operations. 6. Comply with fabrication tolerance limits of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for structural steel. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded. C. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members transmitting loads in bearing. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Structural Steel 05120-5 0992-0197 Section IVa Structural Steel 05120-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I D. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on Shop Drawings. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not f1ame- cut holes or enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates. 2. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. 2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. Shop install and tighten non-high-strength bolts, except where high-strength bolts are indicated. B. Shop install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without warp. 2. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of backside welding on exposed steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds. 2.6 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. 5. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to SSPC specifications as follows: 1. SSPC-SP 5 "White Metal Blast Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply 2 coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. D. Painting: Apply a 1-coat, non-asphaltic primer complying with SSPC's "Painting System Guide No. 7.00" to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 2.7 GALVANIZING A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel indicated for galvanizing according to ASTM A 123. (2.0 oz per square foot) 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop inspections and tests and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens comply with or deviate from requirements. 2. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural steel Work is being fabricated or produced so required inspection and testing can be accom plished. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. D. Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." E. Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1. Direct-tension indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F 959, Table 2. F. In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be inspected and tested according to AWS D1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below, at testing agency's option. 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Structural Steel 05120-7 0992-0197 Section IVa Structural Steel 05120-8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I 3. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level "2-2T." 4. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Before erection proceeds, and with the steel erector present, verify elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchorages for compliance with requirements. B. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond- reducing materials and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout. 3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. a) Comply with manufacturer's instructions for proprietary grout materials. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1. Maintain erection tolerances of architecturally exposed structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection. G. Finish sections thermally cut during erection equal to a sheared appearance. H. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. Install and tighten strength-strength bolts, except where high-strength bolts are indicated. B. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSCts "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Install and tighten high-strength bolts according to RCSCts "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1. Bolts: ASTM A 325 high-strength bolts, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connection Type: Snug tightened, unless indicated as slip-critical, direct- tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections. 3. Connection Type: Slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections as indicated. D. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS 01.1 for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC specifications referenced in this Section for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without warp. 3. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent surface bleeding of backside welding on exposed Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Structural Steel 05120-9 0992-0197 Section IVa Structural Steel 05120-10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.- I steel surfaces. Grind smooth exposed fillet welds 1/2 inch and larger. Grind flush butt welds. Dress exposed welds. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field inspections and tests and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether tested Work complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace structural steel that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. D. Field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." E. Field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 1. Direct-tension indicator gaps will be verified to comply with ASTM F 959, Table 2. F. In addition to visual inspection, field-welded connections will be inspected and tested according to AWS D1.1 and the inspection procedures listed below, at testing agency's option. 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspectron: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94 and ASTM E 142; minimum quality level "2-2T." 4. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 3.6 CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on structural steel are included in Division 9 Section "Painting." Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint according to ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section'Va Structural Steel 05120-11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Metal fabrications include items made from iron, steel or aluminum shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not specified elsewhere. B. Extent of metal fabrications is indicated on the drawings or as required to complete the work. 1.2 WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Reinforcing steel bars and welded wire fabric are specified in Section 03300 - Cast- in-Place Concrete. B. Painting metal items is specified in Section 09900 - Painting and Coatings. 1.3 TYPES OF WORK A. Types of work in this section include metal fabrication for: 1. Miscellaneous framing and supports 2. Miscellaneous castings 3. Floor drains 4. Fasteners 5. Grating 6. Handrails 7. Floor Hatches 8. Monorail Beams 1.4 SHOP ASSEMBLY A. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and installation instructions for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint products and grout. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal fabrications including but not limited to rain diverters and prefabricated steel tank cradles. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchor and bolt installation by others. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 - Section/Va. Miscellaneous Meta//tems 05500-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Miscellaneous Metal Items 05500-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I- I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ALUMINUM FABRICATIONS A. Bar screen and other structural aluminum members shall be fabricated of 6061-T6 aluminum as shown. 2.2 ALUMINUM HANDRAIL A. Pipe railing shall be aluminum with 215-R4, clear anodizing after fabrication, 42 inches high, rails and posts 1-1/2 inch Schedule 40, 6061-T6 aluminum pipe. Standard handrail fittings shall be used throughout for screwed or welded connections. Four-inch high kick plate shall be provided. B. Handrails shall be 1-1/2 inch diameter schedule 80 pipe made of aluminum 6063-t6 pre-engineered prefabricated assemblies. The mounting and assembly of the handrails shall utilize the standard pre-engineered fittings which are designed to resist a 200 pound load at any point and acting in any direction or a 50 pound linear load applied along the rails acting in any direction or as indicated on the drawings. 2.3 ALUMINUM STAIRS A. Stairs in dry well shall be of aluminum construction with stringers and treads as shown. Treads shall have non-skid surface with abrasive nosing. 2.4 ALUMINUM HATCHES A. Pump removal hatch shall be flush aluminum pit access doors, Bilco Type Q-AL, or approved equal. Wet well access hatches shall be Bilco Type J with channel frame and drain. Frames shall be 1/4" aluminum with strap anchors. Cover shall be 1/4" aluminum diamond pattern plate reinforced to withstand a live load of 150 pounds per square foot with stainless steel hinges bolted to the underside and torsion rods or spring operators for ease of operation. The cover shall open to 90 degrees and lock automatically in the position. A vinyl grip handle shall be provided to release the cover for closing. A snap lock and removable handle shall be provided. Also provide locking hasp. Hardware shall be stainless steel. Factory finish shall be a mill finish with bituminous coating applied to exterior of the frame. Manufacturer shall guarantee against defects in material or workmanship for a period of five years. 2.5 PLATFORM GRATING A. Grating shall be aluminum bar grating comprised of 1-1/4 inch x 3/16 inch serrated bearing bars on 1 3/16 inch centers with cross bars on 4 in centers. The bearing bars shall be 6063-t6 aluminum and the cross bars shall be 6063-T5 aluminum. B. Grating sections shall be removable and the individual sections shall be limited to a maximum weight of 30 pounds. C. Grating shall be used only over pits with a maximum depth of 4 ft. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.6 FERROUS METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled names and roughness. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. (Hot Dipped Galvanized - 2 Oz. Per SF) C. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed, ASTM A 500; or hot-rolled, ASTM A 501. D. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30. 2.7 ALUMINUM METALS A. Miscellaneous Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063. Plate And Sheet ASTM B209 Extruded Shapes ASTM B221 Castings ASTM B108 6061-T6 6061-T6 T6510 Alloy T6510 Alloy 214 Alloy B. Aluminum Bar Gratings: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063 for bearing and cross bars. Grating to be Type IB as manufactured by Borden Gratings or equal. C. Fasteners for Aluminum Gratings: Use stainless steel or aluminum fasteners. 2.8 FASTENERS A. Provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for all exterior and interior work unless otherwise shown or specified. B. Bolting: Either Bolts - ASTM A 193 Grade B8 Nuts - ASTM A 194 Grade 8 Or Bolts - ASTM 276 Type 316 Stainless Steel Nuts - ASTM 276 Type 316 Stainless Steel 2.9 GALVANIZING A. Galvanizing Shapes Hardware ASTM A-123 2.0 OZlSF ASTM A-153 2.0 OZlSF 2.10 STAINLESS STEEL A. Stainless Shapes ASTM A276 Type 316 B. Stainless Plate ASTM A240 Type 316 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Miscellaneous Metal Items 05500-3 0992-0197 . Section IVa Miscellaneous Metal Items 05500-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.11 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness indicated, or if not indicated, as required to produce strength and durability in finished product for use intended. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of work. B. Aluminum fabrication shall be in conformance with the Aluminum Association, Inc., "Specifications for Aluminum Structures". C. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners whenever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts. E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinated with supported structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. F. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware and similar items. G. Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Surface Preparation: Prepare ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications, unless otherwise specified. 1. Exterior (SSPC Zone 1 B): SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning". I. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. 3.2 Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2... . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.3 TOUCH-UP PAINTING A. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paints, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 3.4 All aluminum surfaces to come in contact with concrete or dissimilar metals shall be coated with two coats of aluminum pigmented bituminous paint. END OF SECTION . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Miscellaneous Metal Items 05500-5 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 05520 - HANDRAILS AND GUARDRAILS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Section includes providing handrails and guard rails as shown on the Drawings and includes miscellaneous handrails and guardrails not included in other metal systems in other sections of these specifications. B. Height for stair rails, handrails, and guardrails shall conform to applicable codes, including ANSI. 1.2 QUALITY OF ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. Florida Building Code 2. ANSI A117.1 3. OSHA Part 1920.23 and 1910.24 4. Life Safety Code 101 5. AWS "Structural Welding Code" B. Qualification for Welding Work: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure". C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of the work. However, do not delay job process; allow for trimming and fitting wherever the taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay the work. D. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field splicing and assembly of units at the project site. Disassemble units only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinate installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit Certificates of Compliance with specified requirements. Obtain shop drawings for fabrication and erection. After verifying details and dimensions provide three sets of final drawings and installation instructions to Engineer for use in observing installation and for Record Drawings. PART 2 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221-76; alloy 6061-T6, T6510; except alloy 6061-T6 for pipe; unless otherwise indicated. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Handrails and Guardrails 05520-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Handrails and Guardrails 05520-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B108-76; alloy 214 unless otherwise indicated. C. Aluminum Sheet or Plate: ASTM B209-76; alloy 6061-T6, unless otherwise indicated. D. Finish: Anodized. E. Non-shrink, Nonferrous Grout: CE CRD C588. 2.2 FABRICATION A. The Contractor shall provide a "manufacturer's system" using welded connections. B. Exposed work shall be formed true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32-inch, unless otherwise shown. D. Use bent-metal corners formed to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work. E. Welded Connections: Cope intersections of rails and posts, weld joints and grind smooth. Butt-weld end-to-end joints of railings or use welding connectors, at fabricator's option. F. Weld corners and seams continuously and in accordance with the recommendations of AWS. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. Discoloration of finished surfaces will not be acceptable. G. Form exposed connections with flush, smooth, hairline joints, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of the type shown, or if not shown, use Phillips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts. H. Provide anchorage of the type shown, coordinated with the supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices as shown and as required to provide support as required by prevailing codes. I. Toe Boards: Fabricate toe boards to the dimensions and details shown. If not shown, use 1/4-inch thick x 4-inch plate secured to each post of railing. J. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Provide brackets, flanges, and anchors for railing posts and for handrail supports. Furnish inserts and sleeves as required for anchorage masonry work. K. Furnish cast metal brackets, flanges, and exposed anchors of the same material and finish as rail supports, unless otherwise indicated. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase. 2 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which handrails and guardrails are to be installed and correct any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Furnish setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for the installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate the delivery of such items to the project site. 3.3 INSTAllATION A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrails and guard rail items to in-place construction; including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts and other connectors as required. B. Use railing manufacturer's standard methods of installation when acceptable to the Engineer. C. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation. Set the work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surface of units which have been coated or finished after fabrication, and are intended for field connections. Adjust railings prior to securing in place to ensure proper matching at butting joints and correct alignment throughout their length. Space posts not more than 6-feet on centers, unless otherwise shown. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows: E. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves set and anchored into the concrete. Provide sleeves of galvanized, steel pipe, not less than 6-inches long and having an inside diameter not less than 1I2-inch greater than the outside diameter of the inserted pipe post. Provide steel plate closure secured to the bottom of the sleeve and of width and length not less than 1-inch greater than the outside diameter of the sleeve. After the posts have been inserted into the sleeves, fill the annular space between post and sleeve solid with non-shrink, nonferrous grout. Cover anchorage joint with a round metal flange finished to match post. F. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into the wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Handrails and Guardrails 05520-3 0992-0197 Section IVa Handrails and Guardrails 05520-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I.. I G. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for the procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, the appearance and quality of welds made, and the methods used in correcting the work. H. Dissimilar Materials: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or there is a condition such as aluminum against concrete, they shall be protected from each other with a pressure sensitive tape, bitumastic coating or other protective method. I. Toe Boards: Provide toe boards where shown and as required by code. J. Toe boards shall be provided wherever people can pass or work beneath the open sides or wherever falling material could create a hazard to moving machinery or equipment. END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Pbase.2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provIsions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes sheet metal flashing and trim in the following categories: 1. Roof-drainage systems. 2. Exposed trim, gravel stops, and fascia. 3. Copings. 4. Metal flashing. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing. B. Fabricate and install flashings at roof edges to comply with recommendations of 2004 Florida Building Code with 2007 Supplements. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product. C. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details. D. Samples of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory items, in the specified finish. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected. 1. 12-inch-long Samples of factory-fabricated products exposed as finished Work. Provide complete with specified factory finish. E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I- I 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experience Installer who has completed sheet metal flashing and trim work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of materials and finishes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated and with not less than the strength and durability of alloy and temper designated below: 1. Anodized Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, 5005-H14, with a minimum thickness of 0.050 inch. 2. Factory-Painted Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, 3003-H14, with a minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated, commercial-quality steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 755, G 90 coating designation, coil coated with high-performance fluoropolymer coating as specified in "Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet Finish" Article; not less than 0.0336 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, used with an acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer; use a noncorrosive rosin flux over tinned surfaces. B. Asphalt Mastic: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type asphalt mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil (O.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. C. Fasteners: Same metal as sheet metal flashing or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. D. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning,nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. E. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by sheet metal manufacturer and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants. F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior and interior . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. G. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal. H. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed; noncorrosive; size and thickness required for performance. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Sheet Metal Fabrication Standard: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. B. Comply with details shown to fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. D. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. F. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). G. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. H. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. I. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view. J. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as sheet metal component being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by sheet metal manufacturer. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 . 0992-0197 Section IVa Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-3 0992-0197 Section IVa Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .1 I 1. Size: As recommended by SMACNA manual or sheet metal manufacturer for application but never less than thickness of metal being secu red. K. Match material and finish to adjacent metal siding or other metal assembly unless noted otherwise on the drawings. 2.4 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. General: Fabricate sheet metal items in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than that listed below for each application and metal. B. Gutters & Downspouts: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick. C. Exposed Trim, Gravel Stops, and Fasciae: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. D. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. 3. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch thick. E. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. 3. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch thick. F. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch thick. G. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch thick. 3. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch thick. H. Equipment Support Flashing: Other than preengineering roofing specialties fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. I. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. ..Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades,.Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.5 ALUMINUM EXTRUSION FABRICATIONS A. Aluminum Extrusion Units: Fabricate extruded-aluminum running units with formed or extruded-aluminum joint covers for installation behind main members where possible. Fabricate mitered and welded corner units. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid chromate-f1uoride- phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions. B. Colors: 1. Downspouts, Gutters, & Trim: To be selected by Owner Tuffclad Kynar 500 from manufacturer's color charts to match the roof color. 2.7 COIL-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISH A. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: Apply the following system by coil- coating process on galvanized steel sheet as recommended by coating manufacturers and applicator. 1. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. a) Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of choices for color and gloss. b) Resin Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide f1uoropolymer coating systems containing resins produced by one of the following manufacturers: (1) Ausimont USA, Inc. (Hylar 5000) (2) Elf Atochem North America, Inc. (Kynar 500) 2. Coil-Coated Steel Sheet Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a) Atlas Aluminum Corporation. b) Copper Sales, Inc. c) MM Systems Corporation. d) Petersen Aluminum Corporation. e) Vincent Metals. Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 . Section IVa Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-5 0992-0197 Section IVa Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .1 I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install Work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. C. Roof-Edge Flashings: Secure metal flashings at roof edges according to FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone. D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal Work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). E. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Do not solder the following metals: a) Aluminum. b) Coil-coated galvanized steel sheet. 2. Pretinning is not required for the following metals: a) Lead. b) Lead-coated copper. c) Terne-coated stainless steel. 3. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades"Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I F. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. 1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. H. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Underlayment: Where installing stainless steel or aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red-rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. 2. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. I. Counterflashings: Coordinate installation of counterflashings with installation of assemblies to be protected by counterflashing. Install counterflashings in reglets or receivers. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant, lead wedges and sealant, interlocking folded seam, or blind rivets and sealant. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 2 inches and bed with sealant. J. Roof-Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives, and anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the most efficient manner. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for roof edges with roofing installation. K. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate equipment support flashing installation with roofing and equipment installation. Weld or seal flashing to equipment support member. L. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing and installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07620-7 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. Sealant and backing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM 01056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. B. ANSI/ASTM 01565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam). C. ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants. O. ASTM C920 - Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. E. FS TT-S-01657 - Sealing Compound: Butyl Type. F. SWI (Sealing and Waterproofers Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, color availability and intended use. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and installation. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. 00 not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Joint Sealers 07900-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Joint Sealers 07900-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty. B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. C. In addition, the warranty shall state that all exposed sealants will be guaranteed against any crazing developing on the surface of the material for five years of outdoor exposure, any staining of the adjacent surfaces, by sealant or by primer (yellowing, etc.) caulking, or color change on surface of cured sealant. 1.8 DEFINITIONS A. Regardless of the terminology used on the drawings the following definitions shall be used to identify and clarify the use of materials specified. 1. "Caulking" may apply only to oil based and other organic materials and work in connection with them. Use in the filling or closing of interior joints where expansion or contraction are of no consideration, and where filling and closing of these interior joints is primarily for appearance, or painting. 2. "Sealant" shall apply to all other conditions, interior and exterior, where expansion, contraction, resiliency, and waterproof or weather tight construction are a consideration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS A. Sealant for Exterior Work including perimeter of exterior doors and glazing (except as specified otherwise) Single component polyurethane, ASTM C-920 type W, grade NS, class 25, use NT, M, A: 1. Sonneborn: "Sonolastic" NP1 2. Tremco: "Dymonic" 3. Pecora: "Dynatrol" I B. Polyurethane Sealant for use in concrete control joints and expansion joints: ASTM C920, Class A, single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, self-leveling type; limestone color; manufactured by: 1. Sonneborn: "Sonolastic" SL 1. 2. Pecora: "Urexpan" NR-200 C. Butyl Sealant for threshold setting bed: Single component, solvent release, non- skinning, non-sagging, TT-S-01657 type I, manufactured by: 1. Tremco: "Butyl Sealant". Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades" Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. Pecora: "BC158" D. Color: Match adjacent surfaces where not painted, or as otherwise selected by the Owner's Project Representative from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 2.3 JOINT BACKING A. Closed cell polyethylene rod, circular or rectangular dimension as indicated or required; or bond-breaking type coated open cell polyurethane rod similar to "Polytite B" by Sandell Manufacturing. Materials shall be free of oil or other staining elements. Oakum and other types of absorptive materials shall not be used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces, and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces & substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release, C790 for latex base sealants. E. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Joint Sealers 07900-3 0992-0197 Section IVa Joint Sealers 07900-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Tool joints as detailed. 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect finished installation under provisions of the Supplemental General Conditions. B. Protect sealants until cured. END OF SECTION . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08255 - FRP FLUSH DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP) flush doors with aluminum frames. 1.2 REFERENCES A. AAMA 1503-98 - Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections. B. ANSI A250A - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcings. C. ASTM B 117 - Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. D. ASTM B 209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. E. ASTM B 221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. F. ASTM D 256 - Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of Notched Specimens of Plastics. G. ASTM D 543 - Evaluating the Resistance of Plastics to Chemical Reagents. H. ASTM D 570 - Water Absorption of Plastics. I. ASTM D 638 - Tensile Properties of Plastics. J. ASTM D 790 - Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. K. ASTM D 1308 - Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. L. ASTM D 1621 - Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. M. ASTM D 1623 - Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. N. ASTM D 2126 - Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging. O. ASTM D 2583 - Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol lmpressor. P. ASTM D 5420 - Impact Resistance of Flat Rigid Plastic Specimens by Means of a Falling Weight. Q. ASTM D 6670-01 - Standard Practice for Full-Scale Chamber Determination of Volatile Organic Emissions from Indoor Materials/Products. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 . Section/Va FRP F/ush Doors 08255-1 0992-0197 R. ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. S. ASTM E 90 - Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. T. ASTM E 283 - Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. U. ASTM E 330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. V. ASTM E 331 - Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. W. ASTM F 476 - Security of Swinging Door Assemblies. X. NWWDA T.M. 7-90 - Cycle Slam Test Method Y. SFBC PA 201 - Impact Test Procedures. Z. SFBC PA 203 - Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading. AA. SFBC 3603.2 (b)(5) - Forced Entry Resistance Test. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide door assemblies that have been designed and fabricated to comply with specified performance requirements, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding standard systems. B. Air Infiltration: For a single door 3'-0" x 7'-0", test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at pressure differential of 6.24 psf. Door shall not exceed 0.90 cfm per linear foot of perimeter crack. C. Water Resistance: For a single door 3'-0" x 7'-0", test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at pressure differential of 7.50 psf. Door shall not have water leakage. D. Indoor air quality testing per ASTM D 6670-01: GREENGUARD Environmental Institute Certified including GREENGUARD for Children and Schools Certification. E. Hurricane Test Standards, Single Door with Single-Point Latching: 1. Uniform Static Load, ASTM E 330: Plus or minus 75 pounds per square foot. 2. Forced Entry Test, 300 Pound Load Applied, SFBC 3603.2 (b)(5): Passed. 3. Cyclic Load Test, SFBC PA 203: Plus or minus 53 pounds per square foot. 4. Large Missile Impact Test, SFBC PA 201: Passed. . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa FRP Flush Doors 08255-2 0992-0197 I I I 1 I I 1 1 I 1 1 I I 1 1 1 1 I" 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I F. Swinging Door Cycle Test, Doors and Frames, ANSI A250.4: Minimum of 25,000,000 cycles. G. Cycle Slam Test Method, NWWDA T.M. 7-90: Minimum 5,000,000 Cycles. H. Swinging Security Door Assembly, Doors and Frames, ASTM F 476: Grade 40. I. Salt Spray, Exterior Doors and Frames, ASTM B 117: Minimum of 500 hours. J. Sound Transmission, Exterior Doors, STC, ASTM E 90: Minimum of 25. K. Thermal Transmission, Exterior Doors, U-Value, AAMA 1503-98: Maximum of 0.29 BTU/hr x sf x degrees F. Minimum of 55 CRF value. L. Surface Burning Characteristics, FRP Doors and Panels, ASTM E 84: 1. Flame Spread: Maximum of 200, Class C. 2. Smoke Developed: Maximum of 450, Class C. M. Surface Burning Characteristics, Class A Option On Interior Faces of FRP Exterior Panels and Both Faces of FRP Interior Panels, ASTM E 84: 1. Flame Spread: Maximum of 25. 2. Smoke Developed: Maximum of 450. N. Impact Strength, FRP Doors and Panels, Nominal Value, ASTM D 256: 15.0 foot-pounds per inch of notch. Tensile Strength, FRP Doors and Panels, Nominal Value, ASTM D 638: 14,000 psi. Flexural Strength, FRP Doors and Panels, Nominal Value, ASTM D 790: 21,000 psi. o. P. Q. Water Absorption, FRP Doors and Panels, Nominal Value, ASTM D 570: 0.20 percent after 24 hours. R. Indentation Hardness, FRP Doors and Panels, Nominal Value, ASTM D 2583: 55. S. Gardner Impact Strength, FRP Doors and Panels, Nominal Value, ASTM D 5420: 120 in-lb. 1. Abrasion Resistance, Face Sheet, Taber Abrasion Test, 25 Cycles at 1,000 Gram Weight with CS-17 Wheel: Maximum of 0.029 average weight loss percentage. U. Stain Resistance, ASTM D 1308: Face sheet unaffected after exposure to red cabbage, tea, and tomato acid. Stain removed easily with mild abrasive or FRP cleaner when exposed to crayon and crankcase oil. V. Chemical Resistance, ASTM D 543. Excellent rating. 1. Acetic acid, Concentrated. . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 . Section IVa FRP Flush Doors 08255-3 0992-0197 Section IVa FRP Flush Doors 08255-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. Ammonium Hydroxide, Concentrated. 3. Citric Acid, 10%. 4. Formaldehyde. 5. Hydrochloric Acid, 10% 6. Sodium hypochlorite, 4 to 6 percent solution. W. Compressive Strength, Foam Core, Nominal Value, ASTM D 1621: 79.9 psi. X. Compressive Modulus, Foam Core, Nominal Value, ASTM D 1621: 370 psi. Y. Tensile Adhesion, Foam Core, Nominal Value, ASTM D 1623: 45.3 psi. Z. Thermal and Humid Aging, Foam Core, Nominal Value, 158 Degrees F and 100 Percent Humidity for 14 Days, ASTM D 2126: Minus 5.14 percent volume change. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including description of materials, components, fabrication, finishes, and installation. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and details, indicating dimensions, tolerances, materials, fabrication, doors, panels, framing, hardware schedule, and finish. D. Samples: 1. Door: Submit manufacturer's sample of door showing face sheets, core, framing, and finish. 2. Color: Submit manufacturer's samples of standard colors of doors and frames. E. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from qualified independent testing agency indicating doors comply with specified performance requirements. F. Manufacturer's Project References: Submit list of successfully completed projects including project name and location, name of architect, and type and quantity of doors manufactured. G. Maintenance Manual: Submit manufacturer's maintenance and cleaning instructions for doors, including maintenance and operating instructions for hardware. H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty. I. Provide Florida Product Approval number. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Continuously engaged in manufacturing of doors of similar type to that specified, with a minimum of 15 years successful experience. 2. Door and frame components from same manufacturer. 3. Evidence of a compliant documented quality management system. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying opening door mark and manufacturer. B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warrant doors, frames, and factory hardware against failure in materials and workmanship, including excessive deflection, faulty operation, defects in hardware installation, and deterioration of finish or construction in excess of normal weathering. B. Warranty Period: Ten years starting on date of shipment. In addition, a limited lifetime (while the door is in its specified application in its original installation) warranty covering: failure of corner joinery, core deterioration, delamination or bubbling of door skin. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BASIS OF DESIGN MANUFACTURER A. Special-Lite, Inc., PO Box 6, Decatur, Michigan 49045. Toll Free (800) 821- 6531. Phone (269) 423-7068. Fax (800) 423-7610. Web Site www.special- Iite.com. E-Mail info@special-Iite.com. 2.2 FRP FLUSH DOORS A. Model: SL-17 Flush Doors with SpecLite3 fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP) face sheets. B. Door Opening Size: As indicated on the Drawings. C. Construction: 1. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Stiles and Rails: Aluminum Alloy 6063-T5, minimum of 2-5/16-inch depth. 3. Corners: Mitered. 4. Provide joinery of 3/8-inch diameter full-width tie rods through extruded splines top and bottom integral to standard tubular shaped stiles and rails reinforced to accept hardware as specified. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 . Section IVa FRP Flush Doors 08255-5 0992-0197 5. Securing Internal Door Extrusions: 3/16-inch angle blocks and locking hex nuts for joinery. Welds, glue, or other methods are not acceptable. 6. Furnish extruded stiles and rails with integral reg lets to accept face sheets. Lock face sheets into place to permit flush appearance. 7. Rail caps or other face sheet capture methods are not acceptable. 8. Extrude top and bottom rail legs for interlocking continuous weather bar. 9. Meeting Stiles: Pile brush weatherseals. Extrude meeting stile to include integral pocket to accept pile brush weatherseals. 10. Bottom of Door: Install bottom weather bar with nylon brush weatherstripping into extruded interlocking edge of bottom rail. 11. Glue: Use of glue to bond sheet to core or extrusions is not acceptable. D. Face Sheet: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. E. Core: 1. 2. 3. Material: SpecLite3 FRP, 0.120-inch thickness, finish color throughout. Protective coating: Abuse-resistant engineered surface. Provide FRP with SpecLite3 protective coating, or equal. Texture: Pebble. Color: To be selected by Owner's Project Representative from manufacturer's standard colors. Adhesion: The use of glue to bond face sheet to foam core is prohibited. Material: Poured-in-place polyurethane foam. Density: Minimum of 5 pounds per cubic foot. R-Value: Minimum of 9. F. Cutouts: 1. Manufacture doors with cutouts for required vision lites, louvers, and panels. 2. Factory install vision lites, louvers, and panels. G. Hardware: 1. Pre-machine doors in accordance with templates from specified hardware manufacturers and hardware schedule. 2. Factory install hardware. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members: 1. Extrusions: ASTM B 221. 2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 3. Alloy and Temper: As required by manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, application of required finish, and control of color. B. Components: Door and frame components from same manufacturer. C. Fasteners: Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2. .. Section IVa FRP Flush Doors 08255-6 0992-0197 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Material: Aluminum, 18-8 stainless steel, or other noncorrosive metal. 2. Compatibility: Compatible with items to be fastened. 3. Exposed Fasteners: Screws with finish matching items to be fastened. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Sizes and Profiles: Required sizes for door and frame units, and profile requirements shall be as indicated on the Drawings. B. Coordination of Fabrication: Field measure before fabrication and show recorded measurements on shop drawings. C. Assembly: 1. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling, and grinding of metal before assembly. 2. Remove burrs from cut edges. D. Welding: Welding of doors or frames is not acceptable. E. Fit: 1. Maintain continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. 2. Secure attachments and support at mechanical joints with hairline fit at contacting members. 2.5 ALUMINUM DOOR FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Tubular Framing: 1. Size and Type: As indicated on the Drawings. 2. Materials: Aluminum Alloy 6063-T5, 1/8-inch minimum wall thickness. 3. Applied Door Stops: 0.625-inch high, with screws and weatherstripping. Door stop shall incorporate pressure gasketing for weathering seal. Counterpunch fastener holes in door stop to preserve full metal thickness under fastener head. 4. Frame Members: Box type with 4 enclosed sides. Open-back framing is not acceptable. 5. Caulking: Caulk joints before assembling frame members. 6. Joints: a. Secure joints with fasteners. b. Provide hairline butt joint appearance. 7. Field Fabrication: Field fabrication of framing using stick material is not acceptable. 8. Applied Stops: For side, transom, and borrowed lites and panels. Applied stops shall incorporate pressure gasketing for weathering seal. Reinforce with solid bar stock fill for frame hardware attachments. 9. Hardware: Marshal/StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa FRP Flush Doors 08255-7 0992-0197 Section IVa FRP Flush Doors 08255-8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I.... I a. Premachine and reinforce frame members for hardware in accordance with manufacturer's standards and hardware schedule. b. Factory install hardware. 10. Anchors: a. Anchors appropriate for wall conditions to anchor framing to wall materials. b. Door Jamb and Header Mounting Holes: Maximum of 24-inch centers. c. Secure head and sill members of transom, side lites, and similar conditions. 2.6 HARDWARE A. Premachine doors in accordance with templates from specified hardware manufacturers and hardware schedule. B. Factory install hardware. C. Hardware Schedule: As follows. No. Item Hanging Devices Securing Devices (inactive leaf) Securing Devices (active leaf) Description SL-11 HD Continuous Hinges Head and Foot Bolt Set Manufacturer Finish Special-Lite Operating Trim Accessories for Pairs of Doors Closing Devices (active leaf) Accessory Accessory Accessory Lockset, Grade 1, Series - 4000 Lever Astragal Closer with Hold Open Threshold Weatherstripping Kit Door Sweep D. Finish: Clear. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Anodized Finish: Class I finish, 0.7 mils thick. 1. Clear 215 R 1, AA-M 1 OC12C22A41, Class I, 0.7 mils thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install doors plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack. C. Anchor frames securely in place. D. Separate aluminum from other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings. E. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and backseal. F. Install exterior doors to be weathertight in closed position. G. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by the Owner's Project Representative. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors, hinges, and locksets for smooth operation without binding. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed doors to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa FRP Flush Doors 08255-9 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple- mentary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal framing and furring. 2. Metal lath and accessories. 3. Plastic accessories. 4. Portland cement plaster. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Con- tract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each product specified. C. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units at least 12 inches square showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of finish indicated. 1. Where finish involves normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets composed of 2 or more units showing the full range of variations expected. 2. Include similar Samples of material for joints and accessories involving color selection. D. Material Certificates: Submit certificate signed by manufacturer for each kind of plaster aggregate certifying that materials comply with requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver cementitious materials to Project site in original packages, containers, or bundles, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name, and lot number. B. Store materials inside, under cover, and dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other causes. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after plaster application. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 . Section IVa Portland Cement Plaster 09220-1 0992-0197 0992-0197 Section IVa Porl~ndCementP~smr 09220-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 1 I, 1 B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Provide heat and protection, temporary or perma- nent, as required to protect each coat of plaster from freezing for at least 24 hours after application. Distribute heat uniformly to prevent concentration of heat on plaster near heat sources; provide deflection or protective screens. C. Warm-Weather Requirements: Protect plaster against uneven and excessive evaporation and from strong flows of dry air, both natural and artificial. Apply and cure plaster as required by climatic and job conditions to prevent dry out during cure period. Provide suitable coverings, moist curing, barriers to deflect sunlight and wind, or combinations of these, as required. D. Exterior Plaster Work: Do not apply plaster when ambient temperature is below 40 deg F. E. Protect contiguous work from soiling and moisture deterioration caused by plas- tering. Provide temporary covering and other provisions necessary to minimize harmful spattering of plaster on other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufactur- ers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Metal Framing and Supports: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO). b. American Studco, Inc. c. Dale/llncor Industries, Inc. d. Dietrich Industries, Inc. e. Marino-Ware Industries. f. National Gypsum Co. g. Or Approved Equal 2. Expanded-Metal Lath: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO). b. Dalelllncor Industries, Inc. c. Dietrich Industries, Inc. d. National Gypsum Co. e. Unimast, Inc. f. United States Gypsum Co. 3. Metal Accessories: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO). b. Dalelllncor Industries, Inc. c. Delta Star, Inc. d. Flannery, Inc. e. Fry Reglet Corporation. f. Gordon, Inc. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I g. Metalex (Keene Products). h. MM Systems Corp. i. National Gypsum Co. j. Pittcon Industries. k. Stockton Products. I. Unimast, Inc. m. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 VERTICAL METAL FURRING A. General: Provide vertical furring complying with the following requirements: 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G40 hot-dip galvanized coating. B. Channel Furring and Braces: Cold-rolled steel, minimum 0.0598-inch-thick base (uncoated) metal and 3/4-inch-deep-by-7/16-inch-wide flanges, 300 Ib/1000 feet. C. Hat Channels: Hat-shaped screwable furring channels, 7/8 inch deep, formed from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, minimum 0.0179 inch thick, Grade 33. D. Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard screw-type Z-shaped furring mem- bers formed from minimum 0.0179-inch-thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet designed for mechanical attachment of insulation boards or blankets to monolithic concrete and masonry walls. E. Furring Brackets: Serrated-arm type, minimum 0.0329-inch-thick base (uncoated) metal, adjustable from 1/4- to 2-1/4-inch wall clearance for channel furring. 2.3 LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Comply with ASTM C 847 for material, type, configura- tion, and other characteristics indicated below. 1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Comply with the following requirements: a. Configuration: Flat. 1) Weight: 2.5 Ib/sq. yd. 2) Weight: 3.4 Ib/sq. yd. b. Configuration: Self-furring. 1) Weight: 2.5 Ib/sq. yd. 2) Weight: 3.4 Ib/sq. yd. B. Paper Backing: Where paper-backed lath is indicated, provide the following ma- terial factory bonded to back of lath. Comply with FS UU-B-790, Type I, grade and style as indicated below: 1. Vapor-Retardant Paper: Grade B, Style 1 with flame-spread rating of 25 per ASTM E 84. Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Portland Cement Plaster 09220-3 0992-0197 Section IVa PortmndCementPmsrer 09220-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063 and the requirements indicated below; coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. 1. Aluminum Components: Alloy, temper, and finish recommended by manufacturer with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 for alloy and temper 6063-T5. 2. Galvanized Steel Components: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G40 minimum coating designation. 3. Zinc-Alloy Components: ASTM B 69, 99 percent pure zinc. B. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large-mesh, diamond-metal lath fabri- cated from zinc-alloy or welded-wire mesh fabricated from 0.0475-inch-diameter, zinc-coated (galvanized) wire and specially formed to reinforce external corners of portland cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster en- casement. C. Cornerbeads: Small nose cornerbeads fabricated from the following metal, with expanded flanges of large-mesh diamond-metal lath allowing full plaster en- casement. 1. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch thick. 3. Aluminum: Minimum 0.050 inch thick. 4. Material: Any material above. D. Casing Beads: Square-edged style, with expanded flanges of the following material: 1. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch thick. 3. Aluminum: Minimum 0.050 inch thick. 4. Material: Any material above. E. Curved Casing Beads: Square-edged style, fabricated from aluminum coated with clear plastic, preformed into curve of radius indicated. F. Control Joints: Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below: 1. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch thick. 2. Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch thick. 3. Aluminum: Minimum 0.050 inch thick. 4. Material: Any material above. 5. Two-Piece Type: Pair of casing beads with back flanges formed to provide slip-joint action, adjustable for joint widths from 1/8 to 5/8 inch. a. Provide removable protective tape on plaster face of control joints. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I G. Foundation Sill (Weep) Screed: Manufacturer's standard profile designed for use at sill plate line to form plaster stop and prevent plaster from contacting damp earth, fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. H. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for instal- lations indicated. 2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Base-Coat Cements: Type as indicated below: 1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Cement: Material and color as indicated below: 1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I. C. Cement Color: Gray. D. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 206, Type S; or special hydrated lime for masonry purposes, ASTM C 207, Type S. E. Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C 897. F. Aggregate for Finish Coats: ASTM C 897 system and as indicated below: 1. Manufactured or natural sand, in color matching Architect's sample. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminates, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. B. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable. C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932. D. Acid-Etching Solution: Muriatic acid (10 percent solution of commercial hydro- chloric acid) mixed 1 part to not less than 6 nor more than 10 parts water. E. Dash-Coat Material: 2 parts portland cement to 3 parts fine sand, mixed with wa- ter to a mushy-paste consistency. F. Line Wire: 0.0475-inch- diameter, zinc-coated (galvanized), soft, annealed steel wire. G. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for fastening metal lath to wood or steel members less than 0.033 inch thick. H. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening metal lath to steel members 0.033 to 0.112 inch (84 to 2.84 mm) thick. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa . Po~andCementPms~r 09220-5 0992-0197 Section IVa Portland Cement Plaster 09220-6 1 I 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I I I 1 1...- 1 2.7 PLASTER MIXES AND COMPOSITIONS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for base- and finish-coat mixes as applicable to plaster bases, materials, and other requirements indicated. B. Base-Coat Mixes and Compositions: Proportion materials for respective base coats in parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials for aggregates to comply with the following requirements for each method of application and pias- ter base indicated. Adjust mix proportions below within limits specified to attain workability. C. Fiber Content: Add fiber to following mixes after ingredients have mixed at least 2 minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions but do not ex- ceed 1 Ib/cu. ft. of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accord- ingly to maintain workability. D. Three-Coat Work over Metal Lath: Base-coat proportions as indicated below: 1. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate. 2. Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts aggregate. E. Job-Mixed Finish Coats: Proportion materials for finish coats in parts by volume for cementitious materials and parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials to comply with the following requirements: 1. Proportions using sand aggregates as indicated below: a. 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 parts sand. 2.8 MIXING A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTAllATION OF lATH AND FURRING, GENERAL A. Standards: Comply with MLlSFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," and with requirements of ASTM C 1063. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, handrails, fur- nishings, and similar work to comply with details indicated or, if not otherwise in- dicated, to comply with applicable written instructions of lath and furring manufac- turer. C. Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure hori- zontally and where partition or wall abuts overhead structure, sufficiently isolate from structural movement to prevent transfer of loading from building structure. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Install slip- or cushion-type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral sup- port. 1. Frame both sides of control joints independently and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or accessories. D. Install additional framing, furring, runners, lath, and beads, as required to form openings and frames for other work as indicated. Coordinate support system for proper support of framed work that is not indicated to be supported independ- ently of metal furring and lathing system. 3.2 INSTAllATION OF VERTICAL METAL FURRING A. Install vertical metal furring components of sizes and spacings indicated, but not in smaller sizes or greater spacings than those required by referenced MLlSFA standard. B. For furring on interior side of exterior walls, provide furring brackets, unless oth- erwise indicated. C. Metal Furring to Receive Metal Lath: Comply with requirements of MLlSFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring," applicable to each installa- tion condition indicated. 3.3 lATHING A. Install metal lath for the following applications where plaster base coats are re- quired. Provide appropriate type, configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from materials indicated that comply with referenced MLlSFA specifications and ASTM lathing installation standards. 1. Vertical metal framing and furring using 3.4-lb/sq. yd. minimum weight, diamond-mesh lath and cold-rolled channel stud framing. 2. Exterior sheathed wall surfaces using 3.4-lb/sq. yd. minimum weight, self- furring, diamond-mesh lath. 3. Monolithic surfaces (concrete masonry units) using 3.4-lb/sq. yd. minimum weight, self-furring, diamond-mesh lath or vertical metal framing and furring as required for plaster thickness. 3.4 PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING A. Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of plaster, removing loose material and substances that may impair the Work. B. Install temporary grounds and screeds to ensure accurate rodding of plaster to true surfaces; coordinate with scratch-coat work. C. Refer to Division 6 Sections for installing permanent wood grounds, if any. D. Flashing: Refer to Division 7 Sections for installing flashing as indicated. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 ,Section IVa Portland Cement Plaster 09220-7 0992-0197 " Section IVa Portland Cement Plaster 09220-8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.5 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope ac- cessories at corners; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and in alignment during plastering. Install accessories of type indicated at following locations: 1. External Corners: Install corner reinforcement at external corners. 2. External Corners: Bend lath around external angles without using cornerbeads or reinforcement. 3. Terminations of Plaster: Install casing beads, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Control Joints: Install at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying with the following criteria and approved by Architect: a. Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in surface of construction directly behind plaster membrane. b. Distance between Control Joints: Not to exceed 18 feet in either direction or a length-to-width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1. c. Wall Areas: Not more than 144 sq. ft. d. Horizontal Surfaces: Not more than 100 sq. ft. in area. e. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of plaster membrane. 3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION A. Plaster Application Standard: Apply plaster materials, composition, and mixes to comply with ASTM C 926. B. Do not use materials that are frozen, caked, lumpy, dirty, or contaminated by for- eign materials. C. Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials. D. Flat Surface Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 1 a-foot straightedge placed at any location on surface. E. Grout hollow-metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base-coat plaster material, and before lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is indicated or required for fire-resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches at each jamb anchor. F. Sequence plasters application with installation and protection of other work so that neither will be damaged by installation of other. G. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where interior plaster is not terminated at metal frame by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I H. Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external corners flush with corner beads on interior work, square and true with plaster faces on exterior work. I. Number of Coats: Apply plaster of composition indicated, to comply with the fol- lowing requirements: 1. Three Coats: Over the following plaster base: a. Metal lath over sheathing. b. Metal lath over concrete masonry units. J. Finish Coats: Apply finish coats to comply with the following requirements: 1. Float Finish: Apply finish coat to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch to completely cover base coat, uniformly floated to a true even plane with fine-textured finish matching Architect's sample. K. Moist-cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including written instructions for time between coats and curing in "Annex A2 Design Con- siderations. " 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up plaster as necessary to accommodate other work. Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point-up finish plaster sur- faces around items that are built into or penetrate plaster surfaces. Repair or re- place work to eliminate blisters, buckles, check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or replace work as necessary to comply with required visual effects. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of plaster on other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not to be plastered. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering work. When plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, equipment, and plaster debris. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure plasterwork is without damage or deterio- ration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Portland Cement Plaster 09220-9 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09900 - PAINTING AND COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work includes furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment required to complete the painting and coatings as indicated on the Drawings and in these specifications. B. Surface preparation, paint and coatings materials, and their application shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall take all health and safety precautions necessary to prevent accidents during the storage, handling, application, and drying of any of the coatings described. C. Paints and coatings used to furnish the surfaces of structures or vessels which come into contact with potable water shall meet the applicable requirements of the County Health Department and the State Department of Environmental Protection or other regulatory agencies having jurisdiction. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor is responsible for a satisfactory paint application which will adhere without peeling, flaking, blistering or discoloration. Before application of any painting materials, the Contractor shall submit a letter of Certification from the manufacturer of the materials selected for the application proposed. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are limited to the following: 1. Ameron - Corrosion Control Division 2. Carboline Company 3. Glidden - Durkee Division of SCM Corporation 4. Induron Protective Coatings, Inc. 5. Koppers Company, Inc. 6. Mobil Chemical Company 7. Porter Coatings - Division of Porter Paint Company 8. Royston Laboratories, Inc. 9. Rust-Oleum Corporation 10. Tnemec Company, Inc. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Data Sheets and Color Charts: 1. The full name of each product and descriptive literature shall be submitted along with a list of water and wastewater plants in Florida where the product has been used. 2. Within a minimum of 30 days prior to application of paints and coatings, the Contractor shall submit six sets of color charts and data sheets for Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Painting and Coatings 09900-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Painting and Coatings 09900-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I selection by the Owner. Before work is commenced, the Contractor shall prepare samples as required until the color and textures are satisfactory to the Owner. 3. Resubmit samples as requested until required sheen, color and texture is achieved. a. On 12-inch x 12-inch hardboard, provide two samples of each color and material, with texture to simulate finish conditions. On actual wood surfaces, provide two 4-inch x a-inch samples for stained wood finish. On concrete Masonry, provide two 4-inch square samples of masonry for each type of finish and color, defining filler, prime and finish coats. On actual wall surfaces and other building components, duplicate painted finish of acceptable samples, as directed by the Engineer. 1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials to job site in new, original, and unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name, trade name, and label analysis. Store where directed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. All paint materials used on the job shall be kept in a single place which shall be kept neat and clean. All oily rags, waste or debris shall be removed every night and all precautions taken to avoid the danger of fire. B. Extra Stock: At the conclusion of the project, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with a minimum of one quart from each 50 gallons or fraction thereof for each paint system used on the project. The paint or coating container shall indicate the applicable paint system as indicated in these specifications. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS A. Painting or coating and finishing of interior and exterior items and surfaces, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Paint all new construction and portions of existing facilities disturbed by new construction. 2. Paint all exposed surfaces, except as otherwise indicated, whether or not colors are designated. If not designated, colors will be selected by the Engineer from standard colors available for the coatings required. 3. Includes field painting of bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), and hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical and electrical work. 4. Painting shall be done at such times as the Contractor and Engineer may agree upon in order that dust-free and neat work be obtained. Painting shall be done strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and shall be performed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 5. "Shop" painting as referred to defines the paint coat which shall be applied in the shop or plant immediately after manufacturer, fabrication or assembly and prior to shipment to the site of installation. "Field" painting defines the paint coats to be applied at the project site where the structure or equipment is completed, erected, or installed in place as specified. B. Materials and Application: 1. Obtain painting materials from one manufacturer. Painting materials not obtainable from the prime manufacturer shall be obtained from a second source recommended by the prime manufacturer. 2. There shall be a perceptible difference in shades of successive coats of paint so that the application of successive coats of paint can be properly and uniformly spread and inspected. Pipes, sheet metal ducts and other metal items which are to be installed in inaccessible locations shall be painted prior to installation. 3. Each coat shall be allowed to dry for the period of time recommended by the manufacturer before the next coat is applied. C. Equipment, Machinery, and Shop Fabricated Items: 1. Pumps, motors, machinery, equipment and other manufactured items shall have surfaces prepared, primed and finish-coated in accordance with the standard practice of the manufacturer. Finish coat colors shall be as approved by the Engineer. 2. Shop-fabricated items and components for field assembly shall have surfaces prepared and shop-primed. Finish coat colors shall be as approved by the Engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - ALL SYSTEMS A. The film thickness designated and/or the number of coats to be applied shall not be decreased and shall be increased where required to meet other manufacturer's recommendations. B. There shall not be a change from the generic type of coating specified. C. Manufacturer's recommendations as to which finish coat should be used with a particular primer shall be observed. In all cases, the prime coat and finish coat shall be from the same manufacturer. All paint shall be mildew resistant. D. Tnemec products are given as examples of painting and coating systems identified in the following paragraphs. The products of other manufacturer's (listed in Paragraph 1.2.B.) may be used as long as they are of the same quality. Marshall StreetAPCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Painting and Coatings 09900-3 0992-0197 Section IVa ' Painting and Coatings 09900-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.2 GROUP A - CONCRETE AND MASONRY A. System A-1: For use on above grade interior walls and ceilings and architectural surfaces not subject to high moisture, corrosion, splashing or fumes. 1. Surface Preparation: Level protrusions and remove mortar splatter from all surfaces. Allow new concrete to cure 28 days. 2. First Coat: a) Concrete and dense block - Acrylic latex coating, matte finish, 2-3 mils of Tnemec 6 Tneme - Cryl, or Equal. b) Lightweight or porous concrete block surfaces - acrylic latex block filler of sufficient thickness to fill pores and voids, 60-80 S.F./Gal., Tnemec 54-562 Masonry Filler, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: a) Concrete and dense block - Acrylic latex coating, semi-gloss type, minimum 2 mils dry thickness of Tnemec 29 Tuf - Cryl, or Equal. b) Lightweight or porous concrete block surfaces - acrylic latex coating, matte finish, 2-3 mils OFT, Tnemec 6 Tneme - Cryl, or Equal. 4. Third Coat: a) Concrete and dense block - None. b) Lightweight or porous concrete block surfaces - acrylic latex coating, semi-gloss type, 2-3 mils OFT, Tnemec 29 Tuf - Cryl SG, or Equal. B. System A-2: For use on above and below grade - interior walls, inside surfaces of tanks, ceilings, and non-traffic slabs, and subject to high moisture, corrosion, splashing or fumes. Use for immersion and non-immersion exposures. 1. Surface Preparation: a) Concrete - Brush off blast (if the exposure is severe). Allow new concrete to cure 28 days. b) Concrete Block Surfaces - Clean and dry, level protrusions and remove mortar splatter from all surfaces. 2. First Coat: a) Concrete - Two-component, polyamide cured epoxy, semi-gloss 4- 6 mils OFT - Tnemec 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. b) Concrete Block Surfaces - two component, polyamide cured epoxy masonry filler, 60-80 SF/Gal - Tnemec Masonry Filler 54- 600, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: a) Concrete - Two-component, epoxy filler and surfacer used to fill Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades,< Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I the voids created by brush-off blasting as required - Tnemec 63- 1500 Filler & Surfacer, or Equal. b) Concrete Block Surfaces - High performance two component polyamide epoxy coating, 4-6 mils OFT - Tnemec 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 4. Third Coat: Concrete and Concrete Block Surfaces - high performance . two component polyamide epoxy coating, 4-6 mils OFT - Tnemec 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. C. System A-3: For use on exterior walls above grade to a point six inches below finish grade. 1. Surface Preparation. Fill voids with grout; remove loose protrusions and mortar splatter. Allow new concrete to cure 28 days. 2. First Coat: a) Concrete: Acrylic latex coating, matte finish, 2-3 mils dry thickness of Tnemec 6 Tneme - Cryl, or Equal. b) Concrete Block: Acrylic latex block filler of sufficient thickness to fill pores and voids, 60-80 S.F./Gal., Tnemec 54-562 Masonry Filler, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: a) Concrete: Acrylic latex coating, semi-gloss type, 2-3 mils OFT of Tnemec 29 Tuf - Cryl SG, or Equal. b) Concrete Block: Acrylic latex coating, matte finish, 2-3 mils OFT - Tnemec 6 Tneme - Cryl, or Equal. 4. Third Coat: a) Concrete: None. b) Concrete Block: Acrylic latex coating, semi-gloss type, 2-3 mils OFT-Tnemec 29 Tuf - Cryl SG, or Equal. O. System A-4: For use on exterior walls below a point six inches below finish grade. 1. Surface Preparation: Brush-off blast. 2. First Coat: Asphalt base high build coal tar epoxy foundation coating, 8-10 mils OFT Tnemec 46H-413 hi-Build Tneme - Tar, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: Asphalt base high build coal tar epoxy foundation coating applied at right angles to First Coat, 8-10 mils OFT Tnemec 46H-413 hi- Build Tneme - Tar, or Equal. E. System A-5: For use on interior concrete block walls. 1. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry, level protrusions and remove mortar splatter from all surfaces. 2. First Coat: High performance block filler used with acrylic epoxy systems, 60-80 S.F./Gal- Tnemec 130 Enviro fill, or Equal. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Painting and Coatings 09900-5 0992-0197 Section IVa Painting and Coatings 09900-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I, 1 3. Second Coat: High performance acrylic epoxy, 4-6 mils DFT - Tnemec Series 113 H.B. Tneme-Tufcoat, or Equal. 2.3 GROUP B - STRUCTURAL STEEL; CONCRETE AND STEEL TANKS; EQUIPMENT AND PIPING A. System B-1: For use on exposed structural and miscellaneous steel, both interior and exterior - not exposed to corrosion, splash, fumes, or immersion conditions. 1. Surface Preparation: Commercial blast clean per SSPC SP-6. 2. First Coat: One coat of polyamide epoxy, 3.0-5.0 mils DFT-Tnemec Series 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. If shop coat is damaged, re-prime base areas in field, Tnemec Series 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: One coat of polyamide epoxy, 4.0-6.0 mils DFT-Tnemec Series 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 4. Third Coat: Interior: One coat of polyamide epoxy, 3.0-5.0 mils DFT- Tnemec Series 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. Exterior Exposure: One coat of semi-gloss acrylic polyurethane, 2.0-4.0 mils DFT-Tnemec Series 73 Endurashield, or Equal. B. System B-2 (1): For use on piping, equipment and tanks - non-submerged, not exposed to splash, spray or corrosive atmosphere. 1. Surface Preparation: Commercial blast bare metal per SSPC SP-6. 2. First Coat: One coat of polyamide epoxy, 3.0-5.0 mils DFT-Tnemec Series 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. If shop coat is damaged, re-prime base areas in field, Tnemec Series 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: One coat of polyamide epoxy, 3.0-5.0 mils DFT-Tnemec Series 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 4. Third Coat: Interior: One coat of polyamide epoxy, 3.0-5.0 mils DFT- Tnemec Series 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. Exterior Exposure: One coat of semi-gloss acrylic polyurethane, 2.0-4.0 mils DFT-Tnemec Series 73 Endurashield, or Equal. C. System B-2 (2): For use on bituminous coated cast iron or steel pipe. 1. Surface Preparation: Hand or power tool clean, scarify or wire brush per SSPC SP-2 and SP-3. 2. First Coat: One coat of polyamide epoxy, 3-5 mils DFT - Tnemec 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: Same as first coat. 4. Third Coat (exterior exposure only): One coat of semi-gloss acrylic polyurethane finish, 2-3 mils DFT - Tnemec 73 Endura - Shield, or Equal. D. System B-3.(1): For use on interior walls of steel tanks, piping and equipment, submerged or non-submerged, exposed to spray, splash or corrosive atmosphere, excluding chains and sprockets and similar items. This system shall be used for all materials submerged or in contact with wastewater. 1. Surface Preparation. FIELD sandblast to a near white metal blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP1 O. Marshal/Street APCF Generator Upgrades" Phase 2 '. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. First Coat: One coat of polyamide epoxy, 3-5 mils OFT - Tnemec 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: One coat of high solids coal-tar epoxy coating, 8-10 mils OFT - Tnemec 46H-413, Hi-Build Tneme- Tar, or Equal. 4. Third Coat: Same as second coat. E. System B-3.(2): For use on interior walls of concrete tanks, submerged or non- submerged, exposed to spray, splash or corrosive atmosphere, and/or in contact with wastewater. 1. Surface Preparation. Brush-off blast. 2. First Coat: One coat of polyamide epoxy, 4-6 mils OFT - Tnemec 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 3. Second and Third Coats: Two coats of high solids coal-tar epoxy coating, 8-10 mils OFT each coat - Tnemec 46H-413, Hi-Build Tneme-Tar, or Equal. F. System B-3.(3): For all other submerged metals. 1. Surface Preparation. Field sandblast to a near white metal blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP10. 2. First Coat: One coat of high performance polyamide epoxy, 3-5 mils OFT - Tneme 66 HB Epoxoline or Equal. If shop coat is damaged, re-prime bare areas in field. 3. Second Coat: One coat of high performance polyamide epoxy coating, 4-6 mils OFT - Tnemec 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 4. Third Coat: Same as second coat. G. System B-4: For use on structural steel, tanks, equipment and piping subject to severe abrasion, corrosive atmosphere, splash or spray, not in contact with wastewater or where a color finish is desired. 1. Surface Preparation: Submerged surfaces, near white metal blast according to SSPC-SP 10. Non-submerged surfaces, commercial blast according to SSPC-SP 6. 2. First Coat: One coat of high performance polyamide epoxy, 3-5 mils OFT Tnemec 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. If shop coat is damaged, re-prime bare areas in field. . 3. Second Coat: One coat of high performance polyamide epoxy coating, 4-6 mils OFT - Tnemec 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 4. Third Coat: Interior - Same as second coat. Exterior Exposure - One coat of semi-glass polyurethane, 2-4 mils OFT - Tnemec 73 Endura - Shield, or Equal. H. System B-5: For use on hollow metal (steel) doors and frames, steel embedments, and steel lintels: 1. Surface Preparation: Pre-primed with alkyd primer. 2. First Coat (touch-up only): Universal alkyd primer, 2-4 mils OFT, Tnemec 73H Chem-Prime HS, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: One coat of high-gloss alkyd finish, 1.5-2.5 mils OFT - Tnemec 2H Hi-Build Tneme-gloss, or Equal. 4. Third Coat: Same as second coat. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 . . . Section IVa Painting and Coatings 09900-7 0992-0197 .. Section IVa Painting and Coatings 09900-8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. System B-6: For use on interior walls and ceiling of concrete wetwells, submerged or non-submerged, exposed to spray, splash or corrosive atmosphere, and in contact with wastewater. 1. Surface Preparation: Per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. First Coat: One coat of epoxy liner, 3lB-inch minimum thickness, trowel applied Sauereisen No. 210 FOSROC epoxy liner, or Equal. Application shall be by manufacturer's certified applicator (letter of certification from the manufacturer shall be required). 3. Testing: Coating shall be spark tested. 2.4 GROUP C - GALVANIZED AND NON-FERROUS METALS A. System C-1: For use in interior corrosive areas, submerged or non-submerged surfaces, non-potable water applications, galvanized steel and aluminum, including ductwork. 1. Surface Preparation: Solvent cleaning followed by brush-off blast to provide a 1 to 2 mil profile suitable for mechanical adhesion per SSPC- SP1. 2. First Coat: One coat of high performance two component polyamide epoxy, 2.5-3.5 mils OFT, Tnemec 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: Same as first coat, except 2.5-4 mils OFT. B. System C-2: For use in interior dry galvanized steel and aluminum, including ductwork. 1. Surface Preparation: Solvent clean per SSPC-SP1. 2. First Coat: One coat of high performance two compartment polyamide epoxy, 2-3 mils OFT, Tnemec 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: Same as first coat. C. System C-3: For use in exterior non-corrosive areas, galvanized steel and aluminum materials, including ductwork. 1. Surface Preparation: Solvent cleaning followed by brush-off blast to provide a 1 to 2 mil profile suitable for mechanical adhesion per SSPC- SP7. 2. First Coat: One coat of polyamide epoxy, 2.5-3.5 mils OFT, Tnemec 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: One coat of polyurethane finish, 2.5-3.5 mils OFT - Tnemec 73 Endura - Shield, or Equal. 2.5 GROUP E - WOOD A. System E-2: For use on interior surfaces not exposed to moisture or corrosive conditions. 1. Surface Preparation: Sand smooth, seal knots with white shellac (fill holes with vinyl putty after prime). 2. First Coat: One coat of white pigmented, non penetrating alkyd-based primer, 2-3 mils OFT - Tnemec 36 Undercoater, or Equal. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3. Second Coat: One coat of matte finished acrylic coating, 2-3 mils OFT - Tnemec 6 Tneme - Cryl, or Equal. 4. Third Coat: One coat of semi-gloss acrylic, 2-3 mils OFT, Tnemec 29 Tuf - Cryl SG, or Equal. B. System E-3: For use on interior surfaces exposed to moisture or corrosive conditions, exterior wood, and exterior wood surfaces. 1. Surface Preparation: Sand smooth, seal knots with white shellac (fill holes with vinyl putty after prime). 2. First Coat: One coat of high performance polyamide epoxy, 2.5-3.5 mils OFT, Tnemec 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: Same as first coat. C. System E-5: For use on interior wood paneling and trim. 1. Surface Preparation: Sand smooth, seal knots with white shellac (fill holes with vinyl putty after prime). 2. First Coat: One coat of white pigmented non-penetrating alkyd based primer, 2-3 mils OFT, Tnemec 36 Undercoater, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: One coat of semi-gloss acrylic finish, 1.5-2.5 mils OFT, Tnemec 23 Endurtone, or Equal. 4. Third Coat: Same as second coat. 2.6 GROUP J - WATER TANKS AND SURFACES IN CONTACT WITH POTABLE WATER A. The interior tank paint system shall be certified in accordance with ANSI/NSF Standard 61, and shall meet USDA, FDA and Florida Department of Environmental Protection health standards for use in potable water service. A letter of acceptance by the FDEP shall be furnished to the Engineer for the system selected prior to paint application. B. System J-1: For use on steel, cast iron and ductile iron (interior and exterior exposed, immersion service, below ground) in contact with potable water. 1. Surface Preparation: a. Steel, Cast or Ductile Iron Surfaces: SSPC-SP10 near white metal blast cleaning. 2. First Coat (Steel, Cast or Ductile Iron): One coat polyamidoamine epoxy primer, 3 to 5 mils dry film thickness, Tnemec Pota Pox Plus Series N 140 (ANSI/NSF Std. 61 certified by UL), or Equal. 3. Second Coat (Steel, Cast or Ductile Iron): One coat polyamide epoxy, 3 to 5 mils dry film thickness, Tnemec Pota-Pox Series 20 (NSF International certified in accordance with ANSI/NSF Std. 61), or Equal. 4. Third Coat (Steel, Cast or Ductile Iron): Same as Second Coat. 5. Total Dry Film Thickness: 9 to 15 mils. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Painting and Coatings 09900-9 0992-0197 . Section IVa Painting and Coatings 09900-10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I... I 2.7 GROUP K - METAL EXPOSED TO CORROSIVE ATMOSPHERE (EXTERIOR OF NEW STEEL TANKS); EXPOSED INTERIOR OF OPEN TOP STEEL TANKS; STRUCTURAL STEEL, EQUIPMENT AND PIPING A. System K-1: For use on the exterior of new steel tanks and support structures; interior of open top steel tank surfaces - above a point six inches below the water line; and other exposed structural steel, equipment and piping subject to a corrosive atmosphere. 1. Surface Preparation: Commercial blast according to SSPC-SP-6 and clean. 2. First Coat: One coat of high performance two component polyamide epoxy, 3-5 mils OFT, Tnemec 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: Same as first coat, except 4-6 mils OFT. 4. Third Coat: One coat of high gloss polyurethane finish, 2.5-3.5 mils OFT - Tnemec 74 (gloss) Endura - Shield. 2.8 GROUP L - WALLS OF CONCRETE TANKS A. System L-1: For use on exterior of concrete tank walls below a point 6 inches below finish grade. 1. Surface Preparation: Fill voids with grout, remove loose protrusions and mortar splatter, brush-off blast. 2. One coat of high build coal tar epoxy, 14-20 mils OFT, Tnemec 46 H-413 Hi-Build Tneme-Tar, or Equal. B. System L-2: For use on the interior of open top concrete tanks to a point 6- inches below liquid level and similarly exposed concrete or masonry surfaces in a corrosive atmosphere. 1. Surface Preparation: Level protrusions, fill tie rod holes with grout, brush blast to 6-inches below water line (if required), hose wash and let dry. 2. First Coat: One coat of high performance two component polyamide epoxy, 4-6 mils OFT, Tnemec 66 HB Epoxoline, or Equal. 3. Second Coat: Same as first coat. 2.9 GROUP M - SPECIAL COATINGS A. System M-1: For use as barrier between dissimilar materials and metals. 1. Prime: None 2. Finish: Asphaltic varnish applied at a rate of at least 2.0 mils dry film thickness B. System M-2: For use as a primer - sealer for coloring asphaltic and tar surfaces. 1. Prime: None. 2. Finish: Tnemec Series 66 for the prevention of discoloring of the finish coat. Apply at a rate of 3.0-5.0 mils dry film thickness. .MarsballStreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Pbase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. System M-3: For sealing concrete floors where concrete is shown as natural in the Finish Schedules and on all exposed concrete floors where no finish has been shown. 1. Surface Preparation: Mechanically abrade floor to achieve a medium grip sandpaper profile. 2. First Coat: One coat of clear epoxy floor sealer, 8-10 mils OFT, Tnemec 201 Epoxoprime, or Equal. 2.10 GROUP S - SECONDARY CONTAINMENT COATINGS A. System S-1: For use on interior concrete floors and walls and miscellaneous steel items in secondary containment areas in contact with 15% sodium hypochlorite, submerged or non-submerged, exposed to spray, splash, or corrosive atmosphere, suitable for continuous contact with 15% sodium hypochlorite for up to 72 hours. 1. Concrete Surfaces a) Surface Preparation (1) Brush off blast. Allow new concrete to cure 28 days. b) First Coat: One coat of Cycloaliphatic Amine Epoxy, 8 to 12 mils OFT, Tnemec Series 61 Tneme-Liner, or Equal. c) Second Coat: One coat of Cycloaliphatic Amine Epoxy, 8 to 12 mils OFT, Tnemec Series 61 Tneme-Liner, or Equal. d) Total Thickness: 16 to 24 mils OFT. 2. Steel Surfaces: a) Surface Preparation (1) Field sandblast to a near white metal blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP10. b) First Coat: One coat of Cycloaliphatic Amine Epoxy, 8 to 10 mils OFT, Tnemec Series 61 Tneme-Liner, or Equal. c) Second Coat: One coat of Cycloaliphatic Amine Epoxy, 8 to 10 mils OFT, Tnemec Series 61 Tneme-Liner, or Equal. d) Total Thickness: 16 to 20 mils OFT. 2.11 FINISH COAT OVER EXISTING FINISH A. The required painting shall consist of one coat of the system "Finish Coat" to provide continuity of texture and color over previously painted surfaces. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 . Section IVa Painting and Coatings 09900-11 0992-0197 Section IVa Painting and Coatings 09900-12 ' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.12 THINNING A. Where thinning is necessary, only the products for the particular purpose and by the manufacturer furnishing the paint shall be allowed. All thinning shall be done strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and with the full knowledge and approval of the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SHOP PAINTING A. All ferrous and non-ferrous surfaces shall be solvent cleaned before priming. Primer shall be applied in the shop to protect surfaces from rust during shipment and storage. B. Apply two coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or erection. 3.2 FIELD PREPARATION A. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared in a workmanlike manner with the objective of obtaining a smooth, clean and dry surface. No painting shall be done before the prepared surfaces are approved by the Engineer. B. Surface preparation for miscellaneous surfaces to be painted, not specifically covered in these specifications, shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the paint selected for use and as approved by the Engineer. C. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions for each substrate condition. D. Remove hardware and accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide surface-applied protection. Reinstall removed items after painting is completed. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes to masonry walls unless moisture content of surfaces are below 12 percent. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Mix, prepare, and store painting and finishing materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. B. Apply painting and finishing materials in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for the material and surfaces to which applied. C. Workmanship for applying paint shall be of professional quality. The painter shall apply each coat at the rate recommended by the manufacturer smoothly without runs, sags, or holidays. If the material has thickened or must be diluted for use with a spray gun, the coating shall be built up to the same thickness as achieved with undiluted materials. In other words, one gallon of paint as originally furnished by the manufacturer shall not cover a great square foot area when Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I applied by spray gun than when applied by brush. Deficiencies in film thickness shall be corrected by the application of additional coat or coats of paint. On masonry, application rates will vary according to the surface texture; however, in no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint. Before succeeding coats are applied to a surface, the preceding coat shall have been approved by the Engineer. D. Drying time shall be construed to mean "under normal conditions". Where conditions are other than normal because of the weather or because painting must be done in confined spaces, longer drying times will be necessary. Additional coats of paint shall not be applied, nor shall units be placed in service, until paints are thoroughly dry. 0992-0197 Section IVa Painting and Coatings 09900-13 Marshall.Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 TABLE 09900-1 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Existing RCW Control Building 1. I nterior masonry walls - System A-1. 2. Exterior masonry/stucco walls, above grade - System A-3. 3. Exterior masonry and concrete walls, below grade - System A-4. 4. Interior exposed wood, including ceilings - System E-2. 5. Exterior exposed wood - System E-3. 6. Interior concrete slab and housekeeping pads - System M-3. 7. Exterior concrete slab - System M-3. 8. Galvanized Conduit - System C-2. 9. Motor Control Centers Steel Cabinets - System 8-2 (1). B. Existing Dewatering Building Section IVa Painting and Coatings 09900-14 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I, I 1. Interior masonry walls - System A-2. 2. Exterior masonry walls above grade - System A-3. 3. Exterior masonry and concrete walls below grade - System A-4. 4. Interior concrete slab and housekeeping pads - System M-3. 5. Exterior concrete slab - System M-3. 6. Miscellaneous steel- System 8-1. 7. Above ground ductile iron pipe, valves, fittings and supports - System 8-4. 8. Galvanized conduit - System C-2. C. Exterior Pipe and Valves 1. Exterior above ground exposed ductile iron pipe, valves, fittings, supports, f1owmeters, valve box covers and meter box covers - System 8-4. D. Emergency Generator 1. Steel Enclosure - System 8-1. 2. Concrete Equipment Pad - System M-3. 3. Galvanized conduit - System C-3. E. Diesel Fuel Storage Tank 1. Exterior concrete walls, top and bottom - System A-3. 2. Steel fuel pipe and supports - System 8-4. 3. Concrete support pad - System M-3 END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fixed and adjustable extruded-aluminum louvers. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 07900 - Joint Sealants, for sealants installed in perimeter joints between louver frames and adjoining construction. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section, unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver designed to collect and drain water to exterior at sill by means of gutters in front edges of blades and channels in jambs and mullions. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide exterior metal louvers capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses from wind and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of louver components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) as shown on the drawings, acting inward or outward. 2. Thermal Movements: Movements resulting from 100 deg F change in ambient and 180 deg F change in surface temperatures. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the louver manufacturer required for this project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain all louvers, Architectural and Mechanical, through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of louvers certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements and are licensed to bear the AMCA seal based on tests made according to AMCA 500 and complying with AMCA's Certified Ratings Program. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 B. 0992-0197 Section IVa Louvers and Vents 10200-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Louvers and Vents 10200-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Ie.. I C. Shop Drawings: For louver units and accessories not completely described in Product Data. D. Provide Florida Product Approval number. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Arrow United Industries. 2. Pottorff. 3. Ruskin Company. 4. Or approved equal. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Louver Schedule on the Drawings. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5 or T-52. B. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 series stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with joined materials. 1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 2. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. C. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for loading and installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as needed for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimiZe field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance. C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining materials' tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Frame Type: Channel type, extended sill. D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades,< Phase 2. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I E. Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers to prevent water penetrating to interior. F. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view, unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.4 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Louver Construction: Provide fixed-blade louvers with extruded-aluminum frames and drainable blades with hidden downspouts at jambs and mullions. Full head and sills with blades and jamb contained within. B. Horizontal, Drainable-Head Louvers: As follows: 1. Louver Depth: 4 inches. 2. Frame Thickness: 0.081 inch. 3. Blade Thickness: 0.081 inch. 4. Blade Angle and Spacing: 37 degrees and 6 inches o.c. 2.5 ADJUSTABLE EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Louver Construction: Provide fixed-blade louvers with extruded-aluminum frames and drainable blades with hidden downspouts at jambs and mullions. Full head and sills with blades and jamb contained within. B. %" diameter extruded aluminum axles of Pinlock design with double-sealed bearings. C. Operating linkage concealed in channel and out of air stream. 2.6 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide exterior louver with louver screen complying with the following requirements: 1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type for Intake Louvers: Insect. B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c. C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate screen frames with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated and to comply with the following requirements: 1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. a. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips. 2. Finish: Mill finish, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert for securing screen mesh. 0992-0197 Section lVa Louvers and Vents 10200-3 Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Louvers and Vents 10200-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: As follows: 1. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 mesh, O.012-inch wire. 2. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch-square mesh, O.063-inch wire. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Factory finish louvers after assembly. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Provide clear anodized finish from manufacturer's standard system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate Setting Drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louver units level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. All fasteners shall be stainless steel or aluminum. Provide a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secu red. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation, as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation. 3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers that are not protected by temporary covering to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. Protect louvers from damage during construction. Use temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove protective covering at the time of Substantial Completion. D. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. END OF SECTION 0992-0197 Section IVa Louvers and Vents 10200-5 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 13330 - PROGRAMMING SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. As an allowance item to this project the Engineer shall provide software services to the Owner as described herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Section 16231 - Generator Sets 1.3 GENERATOR SCADA INTERFACE, PLC PROGRAMMING A. Per specification section 16231, gen-set shall be provided with all options required to support MODBUS communication with an external PLC. Gen-set supplier shall fully-configure the equipment to support this functionality. B. Contractor shall provide all PLC communication hardware and interconnect wiring, as shown on the Contract drawings. PLC hardware shall be turned over to the Engineer for integration on the project. C. Contractor shall provide, to Engineer, a listing of all MODBUS memory registers, for all accessible parameters, available from the gen-set equipment. D. The Engineer shall provide the installation, software configuration, and programming for the new MODBUS communication PLC module. New module will be installed in Owner's existing PLC. E. The Engineer shall provide PLC programming to interface the existing PLC with the new generator equipment. Interface will be via MODBUS communication, and generator information will be mapped to/from PLC memory, to provide a link with the plant SCADA system. 1.4 GENERATOR SCADA INTERFACE, EXISTING SCADA SYSTEM PROGRAMMING A. The Engineer shall provide software modifications to the existing plant SCADA system (Citect), to integrate the new information available from the gen-set. Modifications shall include the development of screen graphics, SCADA system 1-0 database modifications, addition of system alarms, and integration of new gen-set 1-0 into historical data collection and system trends. B. Software development will following existing Owner software standards. 1.5 TRAINING A. A one (1) hour training session will be provided at the plant. This session will cover the software modifications implemented as part of this scope, and will review the new SCADA system functionality. B. All training activities will be coordinated with the Owner, and will accommodate the Owner's staff schedules. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades" Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Programming Services 13330-1 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2. . 0992-0197 Section IVa Programming Services 13330-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16010 - ELECTRICAL BASIC REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for a complete electrical installation for the Work associated with the Contract Documents, as hereinafter specified and shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Provide functioning systems in compliance with manufacturer's instructions, performance requirements specified or shown on the Contract Drawings and modifications resulting from reviewed shop drawings and field coordinated drawings. C. The work, apparatus and materials which shall be furnished under these Specifications and accompanying Contract Drawings shall include all items listed hereinafter and/or shown on the Contract Drawings. Certain equipment will be furnished as specified in other sections of these Specifications which will require wiring thereto and/or complete installation as indicated. All materials necessary for the complete installation shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor to provide complete power, lighting, communication systems, instrumentation, wiring, and control systems as indicated on the Contract Drawings and/or as specified herein. D. Provide complete grounding systems for all equipment as specified herein, shown on the contract documents, and as required for specific pieces of equipment per manufacturer. E. The Contractor shall furnish and install the necessary cables, transformers, motor control centers, protective devices, conductors, exterior electrical system, etc., to serve motor loads, lighting loads and miscellaneous electrical loads as indicated on the Contract Drawings and/or as specified hereinafter. F. The work shall include complete testing of all equipment and wiring at the completion of the work and making any connection changes or adjustments necessary for the proper functioning of the system and equipment. G. Mount and wire control panels and process instruments furnished under other Divisions of these Specifications unless specifically stated otherwise. Mount and make all field connections to process instrument panels and other control panels furnished under other Divisions of these Specifications. For process instrumentation, furnish and install all conduit, wire and interconnections between primary elements, transmitters, local indicators, surge protection devices and receivers. H. Mount and wire isolation transformers, operator's stations, and power conversion equipment for all variable speed drive systems furnished under other Divisions of these specifications. I. Install and wire all thermostats, aqua-stats and other devices furnished under other Divisions of this Specification directly controlling HV AC equipment or fan motors. 0992-0197 Section IVa Electrical Basic Requirements 16010-1 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Electrical Basic Requirements 16010-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I J. Mount and wire electric heaters, and heat tracing furnished under other Divisions of this Specification. K. All power interruptions to existing equipment shall be at the Owner's convenience. Each interruption shall have prior approval. L. It is the intent of these Specifications that the electrical system shall be suitable in every way for the service required. All material and all work which may be reasonably implied as being incidental to the work of this Section shall be furnished at no extra cost. M. Provide all temporary power as required to facilitate the Contract phased construction plan. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding, Contract and Conditions. 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 3. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 4. Section 13300 - Special Construction 1.3 AREA CLASSIFICATIONS A. Outdoor locations may contain wet, corrosive and hazardous areas: 1. Corrosive and hazardous areas are identified on the Contract Drawings. Areas not identified as such shall be considered wet. B. Indoor locations may contain unclassified, damp, wet, corrosive and hazardous areas: 1. Damp, wet, corrosive and hazardous areas are identified on the Contract Drawings. Areas not identified as such, but provided with heating shall be considered unclassified. Areas not identified as such, but provided without heating shall be considered damp. C. Hazardous Locations: 1. Hazardous locations shall be as defined in NFPA 70 NEC, NFPA 820 Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities, and other applicable standards or codes governing the classification of a particular type of facility or location. In addition, areas are classified as shown on Contract Drawings and as follows: a. Class I Division 1 b. Class I Division 2 c. Class /I Division 1 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 ' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I d. Class II Division 2 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Outdoor Areas: 1. Those locations on the Project site where the equipment is normally exposed to wind, dust, rain, snow, etc. Outdoor areas include areas protected by a roof or rain/sun shields but not enclosed within a structure. B. Indoor Areas: 1. Those locations on the Project site where the equipment is normally protected from wind, dust, rain, snow, etc. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): a. Steel Products Manual - Stainless and Heat Resisting Steel. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. C2, National Electrical Safety Code. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A36, Specification for Structural Steel. b. A 153, Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. c. D698, The Moisture-Density Relations of Soils using a 5.5LB Rammer and a 121N Drop. 4. Factory Mutual System (FM): a. A Guide to Equipment, Materials and Services. 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. 141, Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Distribution for Industrial Plants. b. 242, Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. 6. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): a. NECA 1, Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction. b. NECA 200, Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Temporary Electrical Power at Construction Sites. 0992-0197 Section IVa Electrical Basic Requirements 16010-3 Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 . 0992-0197 Section IVa Electrical Basic Requirements 16010-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum) b. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 70E, Standard for Electric Safety in the Workplace c. 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery d. 820, Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities 9. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL): a. 508, Industrial Control Equipment b. 508A, Industrial Control c. 698, Industrial Control Equipment for Use in Hazardous Locations. B. When a specific code or standard has not been cited, the applicable codes and standards of the following code-making authorities and standards organizations shall apply: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 3. American National Standard Institute (ANSI). 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 5. ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc (ETL). 6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 7. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 8. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IES). 9. Instrument Society of America (ISA). 10. Lightning Protection Institute (LPI). 11. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). . MarsbaJ/ StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2... I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13. Occupational, Health and Safety Administration (OSHA). 14. Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL). C. In case of conflict or disagreement between codes, standards, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, drawings and specifications, or within either document itself, the more stringent condition shall govern. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop drawings shall be arranged and labeled according to specification section and Contract Drawing. 2. Submit shop drawings prior to purchase or fabrication of equipment. See individual Division 16 sections for additional specific requirements. 3. Prior to submittals of shop drawings, coordinate electrical equipment, particularly motor control equipment, control panels, and instrumentation, with all applicable equipment and systems interfacing with that equipment. 4. Submittals shall be made in the following combinations: a. Conduits, raceways, cable trays, ductbank details, wire and cable 600V and below, medium voltage cable, boxes and fittings. b. Medium voltage switchgear, medium voltage motor starters, distribution transformers and secondary substations. c. Motor control centers and control equipment, low voltage switchboards, safety switches, dry-type (specialty) transformers, panelboards, power factor correction capacitors, grounding. d. Lamps, interior lighting, exterior building lighting, site lighting. e. Wiring devices. f. Alarm systems, communication systems and telephone systems. g. Provide a wire or cable identification schedule for all power, control, signal, process and protective circuits. The schedule shall be submitted in an electronic spreadsheet type Excel compatible file format and include the following information: 1) Wire or Cable tag number. 2) Number of conductors. 3) Conductor size and type. 4) Wire or Cable usage description. 0992-0197 Section IVa Electrical Basic Requirements 16010-5 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section/Va Electrical Basic Requirements 16010-6 I I 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 I I I I 1 I I I.. 1 5) Conduit tag number 6) Conduit routing (to and from). 7) Conduit size and type. 8) Additional notes 5. For each product, clearly identify manufacturer by name. When general data sheets are provided as part of the submittal, specifically identify the products to be used on this Project. Provide manufacturer's technical information on products to be used, including: a. Product descriptive bulletin. b. Electrical data pertinent to the Project and necessary to assure compliance with Specifications and Contract Drawings. c. Equipment dimensions, where applicable. d. Evidence that the products submitted meet the requirements of the standards referenced. e. Specify part number with explanation of options selected. 6. Ensure that all submittals clearly indicate the equipment is UL or ETL listed. 7. For all equipment, provide manufacturer's installation instructions. B. When a quality standard has been established by identification of a specific manufacturer or catalog number, submittals for proposed alternates and substitutions shall include: 1. Alternate and substitute equipment cross-referenced to the equipment it is replacing. Submittal shall be marked to show how differences will be accommodated. 2. Calculations and other detail data to allow determination of alternate and substitute equipment equivalency to the equipment it is replacing. Data supplied shall allow detailed comparison of all significant characteristics upon which the design equipment is based. 3. Dimensioned drawings, of the same or larger scale as the Contract Drawings, for all alternate and substitute equipment, which differs in size, configuration, service accessibility or in any significant way from the equipment it is replacing. a. Complete system layout, except that portion which is identical to the Contract Drawings. b. Redesign and modifications to all work required by the alternate or substitute equipment. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall unload and handle materials using methods, rigging, and equipment that will prevent damage to the materials. Care shall be used to . prevent damage to painted and galvanized surfaces. 1. Bare wire rope slings shall not be used for unloading and handling materials and equipment, except with the specific written permission of the Engineer. B. Equipment and materials, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, shall be stored, supported and protected to prevent damage. 1. Stored materials and equipment shall not be allowed to contact the ground. 2. Equipment and materials which incorporate electrical equipment or which have finished painted surfaces, and other items which would be damaged by outdoor exposure, shall be stored indoors. a. Provide covering and shielding for all equipment to protect from damage. b. When such storage would present an unreasonable building space or volume requirement, the equipment or materials may, when acceptable to the Engineer, be stored under weatherproof coverings on shoring or platforms. 3. All small loose items that could be easily lost, stolen, broken, or misused shall not be stored on open platforms or shoring. 4. All storage methods and schedules shall be acceptable to the Engineer. C. Ensure that equipment is not used as steps, ladders, scaffolds, platforms, or for storage-either inside or on top of enclosures. D. Protect nameplates on electrical equipment to prevent defacing. E. Repair, restore or replace damaged, corroded and rejected items at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Record Drawings: 1. The Contractor shall maintain a marked up set of Document Drawings showing actual installed circuit numbers, conduit sizes, cable tray routing, number of conductors, conductor sizes (other than #12AWG) and all other deviations from the design drawings. 2. All underground conduit and concealed items shall be dimensioned on the Document Drawings from permanent, visible, building features. 0992-0197 Section IVa Electrical Basic Requirements 16010-7 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Electrical Basic Requirements 16010-8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .1, I 3. Provide actual motor size, starter size, and heater size, along with all other protective equipment for all motor circuits as part of the one-line record drawings. 4. Revise all wire/cable identification schedules to indicate as installed conditions. 5. Revise all panelboard schedules to indicate as installed conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to related Division 16 sections. All equipment of a similar type shall be by one manufacturer unless otherwise noted in the Specifications. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Trade names and catalog numbers may be used in the Contract Drawings or Specifications to establish quality standards and basics of design. 1. Other listed manufacturers in the applicable specification sections with equal equipment may be acceptable. 2. If no other manufacturer is listed then any manufacturer of equal equipment may be acceptable. B. Listed: Where Ul test procedures have been established for the product type, electrical equipment shall be approved by Ul or ETl and shall be provided with the Ul or ETl label. 2.3 FABRICATION A. When equipment is shop fabricated for the Project, the electrical devices and enclosures utilized shall be Ul or ETl listed and labeled or shall be Ul recognized. B. Shop or Factory Finishes: Interiors of other painted equipment shall be white. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the NEC. B. Enclosures for Use with Electrical Equipment unless specifically shown or specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents: 1. NEMA 1/12: a. Acceptable in unclassified indoor locations. 2. NEMA 3/3R: Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I a. Acceptable in damp or wet indoor/outdoor non-corrosive locations. 3. NEMA 4X: a. Use in wet indoor/outdoor corrosive locations. b. Enclosures shall be 304-Stainless-Steel minimum. Enclosures constructed of 316-Stainless Steel may be required in extremely corrosive areas as shown on the Contract Drawings. c. Nonmetallic enclosures shall not be used in areas subject to physical damage or sunlight. Nonmetallic enclosures may be used in interior locations. 4. NEMA 6P: a. Use in "Accidental Submergence" locations. 5. NEMA 7: a. Use in all Class I, Division 1,2, Group A, S, C, D locations. b. Unless other enclosures are approved and UL listed for the application. 6. NEMA 9: a. Use in all Class II, Division 1, 2, Group E, F, G and Class III, Division 1, 2 locations. b. Unless other enclosures are approved and UL listed for the application. 7. Exceptions: a. As modified in other Division 16 sections. b. As otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings. C. Coordinate the installation of electrical equipment with other trades. 1. Arrange for the building in of equipment during structure construction. 2. Where equipment cannot be built-in during construction, arrange for sleeves, box-outs, openings, etc., as required to allow installation of equipment after structure construction is complete. D. Verify that equipment will fit support layouts indicated. E. Equipment Dimensions and Clearances: 1. Equipment shall fit in the locations shown on the Contract Drawings. 0992-0197 Section IVa Electrical Basic Requirements 16010-9 MarshallStreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Electrical Basic Requirements 16010-10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. Do not use equipment or arrangements of equipment that reduce required clearances or exceed the space allocation. F. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. G. Equipment Access: 1. Install equipment so it is readily accessible for operation and maintenance. 2. Equipment shall not be blocked or concealed. 3. Do not install electrical equipment such that it interferes with normal maintenance requirements of other equipment. H. Equipment shall be installed plumbed, square and true with the building construction and shall be securely fastened. I. Outdoor wall-mounted equipment and indoor equipment mounted on earth or water bearing walls shall be provided with corrosion-resistant spacers to maintain 1/4 IN separation between the equipment and the wall. J. Screen or seal all openings into outdoor equipment to prevent the entrance of rodents and insects. K. Equipment fabricated from aluminum shall not be placed in direct contact with earth or concrete. L. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports. 1. Use supports as detailed on the Drawings and as specified. Where not detailed on the Drawings or specified, use supports and anchoring devices rated for the equipment load and as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Supports and anchoring devices shall be rated and sized based on dimensions and weights verified from approved equipment submittals. 3. Hardware shall be malleable type, corrosion resistant and shall be supported by heavily plated machine screws or brass, bronze or stainless steel bolts. 4. Do not cut, or weld to, building structural members without written approval by the Engineer. 5. Do not mount safety switches and external equipment to other equipment enclosures, unless enclosure-mounting surface is properly braced to accept mounting of external equipment. M. Contractor shall verify exact rough-in location and dimensions for connection to electrical items to be installed under this Contract. 1. Shop drawings shall be secured from those furnishing the equipment. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase. 2 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. Proceeding without proper information may require the Contractor to remove and replace work that does not meet the conditions imposed by the equipment supplied. 3. Provide sleeves wherever openings are required through new concrete or masonry members. Place sleeves accurately and coordinate locations with the Engineer. 4. Should any cutting and patching be required on account of failure of the Contractor to coordinate penetrations, such cutting and patching shall be done at the expense of the Contractor. a. Contractor shall not endanger the stability of any structural member by cutting, digging, chasing, or drilling and shall not, at any time, cut or alter the work without the Engineer's written consent. 1) Provide additional reinforcing if required. 2) Cutting shall be done neatly using proper tools and methods. b. Subsequent patching to restore walls, ceilings, or floors to their original condition shall be done by workmen skilled in their particular field. N. Provide concrete foundations or pads required for electrical equipment as indicated or specified. 1. Floor-mounted equipment shall be mounted on a 41N high concrete housekeeping pad. Pad shall be poured on top of the finished floor or slab. O. Material that may cause rusting or streaking on a building surface shall not be used. P. Perform excavation and backfill in accordance with Section 02210. Q. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of the conduit and wire associated with the HVAC equipment supplied under this Contract. R. Enclosed electronic equipment located outdoors shall be provided with sun/rain shields and oriented to minimize sun exposure. S. Device Mounting: 1. Dimensions are to top of item unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mounting heights as indicated below unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings: a. Light switch: 481N. b. Receptacle in offices and other finished areas: 161N. . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Electrical Basic Requirements 16010-11 0992-0197 0992-0197 Section IVa Electrical Basic Requirements 16010-12 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I c. Receptacle in all other locations: 481N. d. Telephone outlet for desk-mounted phone: 161N. e. Telephone outlet for wall-mounted phone: 641N. f. Bracket light above lavatory: 80lN to bottom of fixture. g. Disconnect / Safety-Switch: 641N to top of enclosure. h. Panelboard: 72IN to top of enclosure. i. Motor starter: 641N to top of enclosure. j. Pushbutton motor control station: 481N to top of enclosure. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify all major items of equipment including controls, panels, switches, contactors, motor starters/controllers, junction boxes and metering by permanent nameplates, with wording approved by the Engineer. Secure nameplates to equipment with stainless-steel screws or rivets. Adhesives may be used in conjunction with mechanical fasteners. B. Nameplates after installation shall be easily visible and shall bear notations corresponding to those shown on the Record Drawings. C. All conduits shall be identified with a stamped stainless-steel tag system. Conduit tags shall be permanently attached to each exposed end of conduit runs such as in man-holes, pull-boxes, panels, motor control centers, junction boxes, etc., and at each point of entry into a structure or building. Each tag shall be stamped with the appropriate conduit number per the conduit and cable schedules. D. Each instrument shall be identified with a stamped stainless-steel tag system. Instrument tags shall be permanently attached to each individual instrument and stamped with the appropriate tag number per the instrument specification section. E. Each cable shall be identified with a heat-shrinkable polyolefin label printing system. Instrumentation cables shall be labeled with the appropriate instrument tag (Example: FIT-200-1). Multiplex cables, power and control cables shall be labeled with the appropriate cable tag number per the equipment tag number (Example: PP1-CKT-9). F. All motor control centers, power panels, lighting panels, control panels, control cabinets, etc., shall be identified with permanently mounted nameplates. G. All power and lighting panels shall have typed schedules mounted on panel doors. H. Identification Types: 1. Equipment Nameplates: . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I a. Phenolic Resin or Thermoplastic Elastomer 1) Thickness: 3/321N minimum. 2) Size: As required by text. 3) Letters: White letters on Black background. 4) Mount with stainless-steel screws. 2. Wire and Cable Labels: a. Heat shrinkable Polyolefin 1) Size: As required by wire or cable. 2) Letters: Black letters on White background. 3) Heat-shrink after termination. 4) Replace damaged or illegible labels. 3. Raceway Tags: a. Material: Stainless-Steel b. Size: As required by text. c. Attach with stainless-steel wire and permanent crimp sleeve. 4. Instrument Tags: a. Material: Stainless-Steel b. Size: As required by text. c. Attach with stainless-steel wire and permanent crimp sleeve. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not remove or damage fireproofing materials. 1. Install hangers, inserts, supports, and anchors prior to installation of fireproofing. 2. Repair or replace fireproofing removed or damaged. B. Make all penetrations through roofs prior to installation of roofing. C. All penetrations required after installation of roofing, shall be completed by an authorized roofer to maintain the roof warranty. D. Make all penetrations of electrical work through walls water and weather-tight. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 SectionlVa Electrical Basic Requirements 16010-13 0992-0197 ,Section IVa Electrical Basic Requirements 16010-14 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I E. Equipment furnished under this Contract for use on future work and all concealed equipment, including conduits, shall be dimensioned, on the Record Drawings, from visible and permanent building features. F. After installation, all equipment shall be tested as recommended by the manufacturer. G. Verify all components are operational. H. Perform ground-fault performance testing as required by NEC Article 230-95(c). I. Test Equipment Interface: 1. Verify systems coordination and operation. J. Set all adjustable trip protective devices as required for system protection and coordination. K. Verify all system and equipment ground continuity. L. Adjust installed equipment for proper operation of all electrical and mechanical components. M. Replace equipment and systems found inoperative or defective and re-test. 1. If equipment or system fails re-test, replace it with products that conform to Contract Documents. 2. Continue remedial measures and re-tests until satisfactory results are obtained. 3. Remedial measures and re-tests will be done at no cost to the Owner. N. The Engineer shall be notified of tests and Engineer may witness individual tests. O. Required certificates of testing and test reports shall be presented to the Engineer upon completion of the tests. P. At Completion of Installation: 1. Test to ensure all equipment is free of short circuits and improper grounds. 2. Test to ensure all equipment is operational. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from all interior and exterior surfaces. B. Apply touch-up paint as required to repair scratches, etc. C. Replace nameplates or wire and cable markers damaged during installation. MarshallStreetAPCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I D. Thoroughly vacuum the interior of all enclosures to remove dirt and debris. Do NOT use pressurized air systems to blowout dirt and debris. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate equipment in accordance with Contract Requirements. END OF SECTION MarshaJlStreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Electrical Basic Requirements 16010-15 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I- I SECTION 16050 - MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. In addition to the requirements specified in this section, the requirements of specification Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements and the sections referenced therein shall be applied. B. Specification Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the Contract requirements, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and suomit shop drawings. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification Section. B. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. Equipment specifications and product data sheets identifying all materials used and methods of fabrication. 2. Complete assembly, layout, installation, and foundation drawings with clearly marked dimensions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of products for electrical related work of sizes, types, ratings, and materials required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protect property from any and all damage that might result from excavating and backfilling. B. Protect persons from injury at excavations, by barricades, warnings and illumination. C. Coordinate excavations with weather conditions, to minimize possibility of washouts, settlements and other damages and hazards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATING FOR ELECTRICAL WORK A. General: Do not excavate for electrical work until the work is ready to proceed without delay, so that total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling will be minimized. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Materials and Methods 16050-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Materials and Methods 16050-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. Excavate with vertical-sided excavations to greatest extent possible, except where otherwise indicated. Where necessary, provide sheeting and cross-bracing to sustain sides of excavations. Remove sheeting and cross-bracing during backfilling wherever such removal would not endanger the work or other property. Where not removed, cut sheeting off at sufficient distance below finished grade to not interfere with other work. C. Depth for sub-base Support: Unless otherwise noted, provide installation of sub- base material(s). Excavate for installation of sub-base material in depth indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, 6 IN below bottom of work to be supported. D. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and cross-braces, in good serviceable condition. 1. Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as excavation progresses. E. Excavate trenches to the uniform dimensions required for the particular item(s) to be installed and provide sufficient working clearances. Dig trenches to approximate depth and hand grade bottom to accurate elevation as required. F. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 61N below required elevation and backfill with a 6 IN layer of sand prior to installation of conduit. G. Where soil conditions at bottom of indicated excavation are unsatisfactory, excavate additional depth as directed to reach satisfactory soil-bearing condition. Backfill with sub-base material compacted as directed, to indicated excavation depth. H. Unless otherwise noted in the Contract Drawings, store excavated material (temporarily) near excavation, in manner that will not interfere with or damage excavation or other work. Do not store under trees (within drip-line). I. Retain excavated material that complies with requirements for backfill material. J. Dispose of excess or unsatisfactory excavated material(s) as directed by the Contract requirements and site conditions. K. Refer to the Contract requirements and site conditions for removal of large subsurface materials. 3.2 OEWA TERING A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. B. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase.2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. Maintain dry excavations for electrical work, by removing water. Protect excavations from inflow of surface water. Pump minor inflow of ground water from excavations; protect excavations from major inflow of ground water, by installing temporary sheeting and waterproofing. Provide adequate barriers that will protect other excavations and below-grade property from being damaged by water, sediment or erosion from or through electrical work excavations. 3.3 BASE PREPARATION A. Install subbase material to receive electrical work, and compact by tamping to form a firm base for the work. B. Provide finely-graded subbase material for equipment to be buried. C. Tamp fill to uniform compacted density. D. Where conduit crosses over areas which have been previously excavated to depths greater than required for conduit installation, provide suitable support that comply with details shown and Contract requirements. 3.4 BACKFILLING A. Backfill with approved backfill materials. B. Backfill with finely-graded subbase material to 6 IN above equipment to be buried. Backfill materials shall be soil materials free of clay, rock or gravel larger than 3/4IN, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter. C. Condition backfill material by either drying or adding water uniformly, to whatever extent may be necessary to facilitate compaction to required densities. Do not backfill with frozen soil materials. D. Backfill simultaneously on opposite sides of electrical work, and compact simultaneously; do not dislocate the work from installed positions. E. Backfill excavations in 12lN high courses of backfill material uniformly compacted using power-driven hand-operated compaction equipment. F. When backfilling excavations for electrical work, backfill to elevations matching finished grades. G. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18lN of column or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing. H. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling authorized by the Engineer. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of conduit systems. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE WORK A. Refer to Specification Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Materials and Methods 16050-3 0992-0197 SectionlVa Materials and Methods 16050-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .1.. I B. Miscellaneous Concrete Work 1. Concrete Grouting: Grout openings and recesses as indicated on the Contract Drawings and around all electrical work and other work that penetrates or adjoins all concrete work. Provide formwork where required, and tamp, screed and trowel surfaces. Cure grout as specified for concrete work. 2. Refer to Specification Sections for grouting of equipment base plates on foundations (with high-strength, non-shrinking grout), and similar grouting requirements not defined herein. C. Clean-Up: Upon completion of work, clean excess concrete and groutfrom adjacent areas and surfaces. Remove excess concrete and grout by proper methods of removal, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. 3.6 SUPPORT AND FASTENERS A. The Contractor shall furnish and install structural supports and fasteners for mounting and installing all electrical, lighting, alarm systems, instrumentation, communications and other equipment furnished under this Contract. B. Where the weight of equipment exceeds 75LBS and is supported from walls, ceilings, columns and/or beams, such structural supports, methods, and locations shall be approved in writing by a professional engineer currently registered in the State of the projects location. C. Concrete or Masonry Inserts 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the furnishing and installation of all conduit sleeves, anchor bolts, masonry inserts, and similar devices required for installation of equipment furnished under this Contract. 2. The Contractor shall furnish leveling channels for all switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, and similar equipment. The leveling channels shall be provided for installation in the equipment supporting pads. Coordination of the installation of these channels with the concrete pad is essential and required. Pad height shall be as required to maintain coverage of the reinforcement bars while not exceeding the maximum mounting heights requirements of the NEC. D. Support Fastening and Locations 1. All equipment fastened to structural steel; columns, beams, and trusses shall be made by approved clamps or welded. No holes shall be drilled in structural steel. 2. Where supports or hangers are required for heavy electrical equipment units exceeding 75LBS, a registered professional engineer shall check the structural members. Where required, additional sections shall be provided for a safe installation. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3. All holes in hung ceilings for support rods, conduits, and other equipment shall be made adjacent to ceiling supports where possible, to facilitate removal of ceiling panels. 4. For interior dry areas, a bracket and channel type support of galvanized steel construction shall be provided wherever required for the support of starters, switches, panels, and miscellaneous equipment. 5. For outdoor service or in indoor damp/wet process areas, the support system shall be made of either stainless steel, PVC coated rigid galvanized steel, aluminum or as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 6. All fastening hardware (bolts, nuts, washers, etc.) shall be approved stainless steel materials or as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 7. All supports shall be rigidly bolted together and braced to make a substantial supporting framework. Where possible, control equipment shall be grouped together and mounted on a single framework. Wherever this occurs, a provision shall be made for ready access to the wiring for connections to the equipment by means of boxes with screw covers. 8. Aluminum support members shall not be installed in direct contact with concrete. Stainless steel or non-metallic "spacers" shall be used to prevent contact of aluminum with concrete. 9. The Contractor is responsible for the design of supporting structures and shall submit design details to the Engineer for acceptance before proceeding with the fabrication and installation. 10. Wherever dissimilar metals come into contact, the Contractor shall isolate these metals as required with nylon washers, 9MIL polyethylene tape, or gaskets. END OF SECTION 0992-0197 Section IVa Materials and Methods 16050-5 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16106 - 480 VOLT SWITCHBOARD SERVICE ENTRANCE RATED ATS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install one (1) 480 volt front connected 2000 Amp service entrance rated A TS to interface with the existing Square-D 2000 Amp Switchboard as shown on the contract documents. B. Construction of the new A TS -3A on Switchboard 2 shall match the existing A TS installed on Switchboard 1. C. New A TS shall be interfaces with the existing 1750 KW generator and SCADA system similar to existing ATS-1 in the Blower Electrical building. D. Equipment furnished under this section shall be the responsibility of the Contractor 1.2 RELATED WORK A. Concrete for equipment pad is specified in Division 3. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, shop drawings and product data, for the following: 1. Equipment shop drawings showing elevation and plan views, conduit entrance spaces, nameplate data, bus arrangement, dimensions, weight, shipping splits and metering layouts. Indicate all options, special features, ratings and deviations from this Section. 2. Point-to-point compartment wiring diagrams for metering, relay, and control circuits. Show wire and terminal numbers. This diagram shall include the interface to A TS-2 (Main No.2). 3. Product data sheets and catalog numbers for circuit breakers, trip devices and protective relays. List all options, trip adjustments and accessories furnished specifically for this project. 4. Itemized bill of materials for metering, protective relays, accessories and control equipment. 5. Instruction and renewal parts books. 6. Itemized list of spare parts furnished specifically for this project, including quantities, description and part numbers. 7. Certified shop test reports. 8. Field test and inspection reports. Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa 480 Volt Switchboard Service Entrance Rated A TS 0992-0197 16106-1 1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Switchboard and components shall be designed, built and tested in accordance with the latest revision of the following standards: 1. UL891- UI Standard for Safety Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear. 2. NEMA SG.5 - Power Switchgear Assemblies. 3. NEMA SG.3 - Low voltage power circuit breakers. 4. ANSI C37-20.1 and related standards. 5. National Electrical Code (NEC) B. Solid-state circuitry shall meet or exceed the Transient Overvoltage Withstand Test per NEMA ISCI-109 and the Surge Withstand Capability Tests (SWC) per IEEE Standard 472 (ANSI C37.90A). In addition, where UL Standards exist for components, devices and/or assemblies, such standards shall apply. C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The equipment furnished under this Section shall be the product of a manufacturer who has produced this same type of equipment for a period of at least 10 consecutive years. B. Switchboard shall be designed, assembled and tested by the manufacturer of the circuit breakers used in the switchgear. C. All sections and devices shall be UL listed and labeled. Service equipment shall be UL labeled as suitable for use as service entrance equipment. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Furnish the following maintenance accessories for the switchboard. 1. Manual charging handle. 2. Full function breaker test kit. B. Provide the following spare parts in the quantities specified: 1. One dozen each of cover bolts, cage nuts and door fasteners. 2. One quart of touch-up paint. 3. One box (10 min.) Of each color and type of lens caps. 4. 10 pilot lamps of each size and voltage. 5. 10 control power fuses of each size. 6. 2 replacement sets of fuses of each size. C. Spare parts shall be boxed or packaged for long term storage and clearly identified on the exterior of the package. Identify each item with manufacturers name, description and part number. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa 480 Volt Switchboard Service Entrance Rated A TS 0992-0197 16106-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RATINGS A. Service: 480 volt, 3-phase, 3-wire, 60 Hz to match the existing Switchboards 1 and 2. B. The switchboard, A TS and protective devices shall have a fully rated, short circuit withstand rating of 65,000 rms symmetrical Amps. Systems employing series connected ratings shall not be used. Main, A TS and feeder devices shall be coordinated for selective tripping. C. The continuous current rating of each bus shall be 2000 Amps. The bus shall be designed to carry its rated continuous current in the specified ambient temperature without exceeding the equipment temperature rise limits. Bus bracing shall exceed the specified equipment short circuit rating. Line and load bus connections to feeder devices shall be rated to carry the full continuous current of the device frame. D. The switchboard shall be designed for continuous operation at its rated current in a 40 degree C ambient temperature. 2.2 CONSTRUCTION A. General: 1. Each switchboard shall be single-ended, NEMA Class 2, switchboard. The new A TS for switchboard No. 2 shall be individually mounted and utilize insulated case circuit breakers, for emergency power transfer. The feeder breakers in switchboard NO.2 shall be "main breaker". The feeder breakers in switchboard No. 1 shall be group mounted molded case breakers. The switchboards shall be Square D Company power style with type "NW' breakers or equal by Siemens. B. Structure: 1. Each switchboard shall be a completely assembled unit of self-supporting construction, with voltage and current ratings as indicated on the Drawings. Each switchboard shall be a free standing structure of bolted construction to rigidly support all devices and equipment. The sides shall be screw on code gauge steel plates, pan-type construction. The distribution protective devices shall be individually mounted with front hinged cover plates and all necessary buses and straps shall be provided. Load terminals of feeder devices shall be extended to the front. 2. Protective devices shall be arranged so they are individually removable and readily interchangeable from the front of the switchboard. Rotary operating handles or toggle switches for all protective devices shall be of the same design and shall be prominently labeled to indicate device ampere ratings, and color coded for device type. ON-OFF indication shall be clearly shown by prominent markings and handle position. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa 480 Volt Switchboard Service Entrance Rated A TS 0992-0197 16106-3 a. Instantaneous trip. b. Adjustable short-time and long-time delay trip. c. Integral, adjustable ground-fault trip. d. Trip indicating targets. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3. All bus bars shall be 98 percent conductivity copper with a current density of 1,000 amperes per square inch. Surfaces shall be tin-plated by the Alstan 70 (or comparable) process to have a uniform appearance, free of blisters. The bus structure shall be braced to withstand the stresses of a short circuit of 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical at the load terminals of the feeder device, and shall be mounted on supports of high impact nontracking insulating material. Bus bars shall be uniformly arranged to provide A-B-C sequence left to right (from front), front to rear and top to bottom. Main buses shall be rated 2000 amps. 4. A ground bus shall be provided running the full length of the switchboard, bolted to each vertical section. 5. All hardware used on conductors shall be zinc or cadmium plated, have a tensile strength of 120,000 psi. 6. The switchboards shall be provided with adequate means for lifting, and shall be capable of being rolled or moved into installation position and bolted directly to the floor without the use of floor sills. 7. All steel surfaces shall be chemically cleaned and treated to prevent moisture and rust under the paint film. The switchboard shall be painted with a heavy coat of ANSI No. 49 light gray enamel. . C. Main and Feeder Breakers: 1. The main and feeder breakers shall be of insulated case construction, with interrupting ratings of 65,000 amps (min.) at 480 volts, symmetrical. The feeder breakers shall be of molded case construction with interrupting ratings of 65,000 symmetrical. Current ratings are indicated on the Drawings. The breakers shall have temperature-insensitive integrally-mounted solid-state sensors, power supply, and trip coil, provided with adjustable, long-time and instantaneous trip settings, interpole phase barriers with manual trip button and position indicator. The trip button shall also permit mechanical simulation of overcurrent tripping for test purposes. The operating mechanism shall be manually operated to provide quick-make, quick-break operation. Breakers shall be manufactured in accordance with NEMA Standard AB1-1969, listed by Underwriters' Laboratories and shall be Square D Company, type "NW' or approved equal. 2. The following accessories shall be supplied: 3. The main breakers shall be mounted in a bolted construction. Auxiliary contacts shall be provided on the main breaker for remote monitoring. All Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa 480 Volt Switchboard Service Entrance Rated A TS 0992-0197 16106-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I spaces shown on the Drawings shall be completely equipped to receive a future breaker up to 1000 ampere rating. D. Instrumentation and Metering: . 1. Power Meters: a. Specified main & branch feeder units shall be equipped with a digital-metering device capable of communication on the network of choice. Meters shall be Square D POWERLOGIC 4000 series Circuit Monitor, or equivalent. The meter shall have 4-20 MA outputs for Current and Power. b. The meter shall have capability for measuring all three phases of Volts- Amps, KW, KWH, PF, for all three phases. The meter shall have wave form capture for 16 to 512 cycles of data at 512 samples/cycle and providing harmonic content up to the 255th harmonic for voltage and current on all three phases. The circuit monitor shall be accurate to .04% of readings +/- .025% of full scale for voltage and current metering and .08% of rating plus .025% for power." E. Miscellaneous Equipment: 1. Main circuit breakers shall be furnished with solid state ground sensors for tripping. 2. Selective tripping shall be furnished between main and feeder circuit breakers. Graphic indication of breaker coordination shall be furnished and the CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate proper coordination when complete. See 16050 for additional requirements. 3. Surge arrestors and protective capacitors, rated for 480 volt systems, shall be provided in Line side of A TS and main breaker cubicles. The arrestors shall be of the thy rite type equal to General Electric Company, Type 9L1SE M.OV. series or equal, and the capacitors shall be non-PCB filled, equal to General Electric Company, "CPD" series or equal. All arrestors shall be UL rated. 4. Provide surge suppressors as shown on the drawings. 2.3 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATINGS: A. All non-current carrying metal parts of the switchgear assembly shall be cleaned of all weld spatter and other foreign material and given a hot iron-phosphate chemical treatment. A zinc rich, heat cured, epoxy primer shall be applied to inhibit rust. B. Indoor equipment shall be painted with one finish coat of manufacturer's standard air dried enamel. Color shall be light grey ANSI 61. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa 480 Volt Switchboard Service Entrance Rated A TS 0992-0197 16106-5 1. Visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Ratio and polarity tests on current and voltage transformers. 3. Ground resistance test. 4. Insulation resistance tests (phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground). 5. Meter calibration 6. Circuit breaker contact resistance test. 7. Insulation power factor and resistance test for surge arresters. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I C. Unpainted non-current carrying parts shall receive protective zinc plating to prevent corrosion. Printed circuit boards shall be coated with a protective conformal epoxy. All device contacts shall be gold or silver plated. 2.4 SHOP TESTING A. Perform manufacturers standard production testing and inspection in accordance with ANSI standards. The manufacturer shall submit certified copies of test results to indicate proof of compliance with ANSI C37.50 and C37.51. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTAllATION A. The equipment shall be leveled and anchored directly to a concrete equipment pad or finished floor as shown on the Drawings. Provide hardware and metal shims for installation. Grout and caulk all voids beneath the equipment base. Anchor bolts shall be SIB-in stainless steel, minimum sized and installed in accordance with the manufacturer=s recommendation. B. Install the equipment in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions. C. Remove temporary lifting angles, lugs, and shipping braces. Touch-up damaged paint finishes. D. Make wiring interconnections between shipping splits. E. Install bus splice plates and torque the connections. F. Caulk seams, cracks, and openings in outdoor enclosures. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. A certified factory representative of the switchgear manufacturer shall inspect and test the installed equipment prior to energization. The switchgear manufacturer shall provide all material, labor, equipment and technical supervision to perform the tests and inspection. B. Equipment testing and inspection shall be performed before energizing the switchgear in accordance with NETA Standard AT5 and shall include the following. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa 480 Volt Switchboard Service Entrance Rated A TS 0992-0197 16106-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 8. Phasing check. 9. Primary current injection tests on each circuit. C. In the event of an equipment fault, notify the Engineer immediately. After the cause of the fault has been identified and corrected, a joint inspection of the equipment shall be conducted by the Contractor, Engineer, Owner and the equipment manufacturers factory service representative. Repair or replace the equipment as directed by the Engineer and Owner prior to placing the equipment back into service. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT A. The switchboard manufacturer shall provide the services of a factory trained service representative(s) for at least 4 days. The first trip shall be coordinated with the field testing. The second trip shall include any necessary follow-up or punch list work and technical instruction for the Owner's designated personnel. The manufacturer's service representative(s) shall demonstrate all operational features of the installed switchgear. B. The switchboard manufacturer's factory service representatives shall make the following test and adjustments: 1. Calibrate and test all circuit breaker trip devices, protective relays and controls per the final version of the Coordination Study specified in Section 16050. 2. Adjust and lubricate circuit breaker operating mechanisms and contacts. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove all rubbish and debris from inside and around the switchboard. Remove dirt, dust, or concrete spatter from the interior and exterior of the equipment using brushes, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint-free rags. Do not use compressed air. END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa 480 Volt Switchboard Service Entrance Rated A TS 0992-0197 16106-7 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16111 - CONDUIT AND RACEWAY PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary for furnishing, installing, connecting, testing and placing into service all raceway to include all conduits, conduit fittings, wireway, supports, etc. as required for a complete electric installation as specified herein and indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Conduit home runs for lighting, receptacle and other misc. circuits are not necessarily indicated on the Contract Drawings; however, the circuit numbers are shown. Conduit shall be furnished and installed for these circuits. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. In addition to the requirements specified in this section, the requirements of specification Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements, and the sections referenced therein shall be applied. B. Additional raceway from what is shown on the Contract Drawings may be required. Coordinate with the requirements of equipment provided under other Divisions of the specifications. 1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Raceway shall comply with the following applicable codes and standards as well as any others within the specifications and drawings. In the event of any conflict between these codes, regulations, standards, and Contract Documents, the most restrictive shall apply. 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. C80.1, Rigid Steel Conduit - Zinc-Coated. b. C80.3, Electrical Metallic Tubing - Zinc-Coated. c. C80A Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing. d. C80.5 Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit. e. C80.6 Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Structural Steel. b. A153, Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. c. A307, Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. d. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Nuts. . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Conduit and Raceway 16111-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Conduit and Raceway 16111-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I e. A569, Steel Carbon, Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. f. A570, Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality. g. A575, Merchant Quality Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars. h. A635, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Carbon, Hot-Rolled. i. 01784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. j. 01788, Standard Specification for Rigid Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastics. k. 02564, Solvent Cements for (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings. I. F512, Standard Specification for Smooth-Wall Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation. 3. ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc (ETL). 4. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. RN-1, Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. b. TC-2, Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80). c. TC-6, PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Ouct for Underground Installation. 5. National Electric Contractors Association: a. NECA 1: Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electric Code (NEC). b. 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery 7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc (UL): a. 1, Flexible Metal Conduit. b. 6, Rigid Metal Conduit. c. 6A, Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Aluminum. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I d. 209, Cellular Metal Floor Raceways and Fittings. e. 360, Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. f. 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment. g. 514, Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers. h. 514B, Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings. i. 651, Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit. j. 797, Electrical Metallic Tubing. k. 870, Wi reways , Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings. I. 886, Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. m. 1242, Intermediate Metal Conduit. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements. 2. Proposed routing of all site conduits including direct buried, concrete encased, and long run above ground conduits. 3. Proposed routing of conduits buried under floor slabs. 4. Proposed routing and details of construction, including conduit and rebar, of conduits embedded in floor slabs, columns, etc. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The material covered by this Specification is intended to be standard material of proven performance as manufactured by reputable firms. Raceways and appurtenances shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings. B. All equipment shall be UL listed and labeled for its intended service. C. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the listed manufacturers are acceptable. 2.2 RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT (RAC) A. Acceptable Manufacturers Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Conduit and Raceway 16111-3 0992-0197 Section IVa Conduit and Raceway 16111-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation 2. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 3. Wheatland Tube Company. B. RAC and associated fittings shall be manufactured from 6063 aluminum alloy in temper designation T-1. C. Standards 1. ANSI C80.5 2.3 PVC-COATED RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT (PVC-RGS) A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Thomas & Betts. 2. Perma-Cote. 3. Rob-Roy Ind. B. PVC-RGS shall have a minimum 40MIL polyvinyl chloride exterior coating. The coating shall be bonded to hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit conforming to ANSI C80.1. The bond between the polyvinyl chloride coating and the conduit surface shall be greater than the tensile strength of the coating. PVC-RGS shall have a nominal2MIL, minimum, urethane interior coating and a urethane coating on threads. The RGS conduit shall have an epoxy prime coating prior to application of polyvinyl chloride and urethane coatings. C. Female ends shall have a plastic sleeve extending a minimum of 1 pipe diameter or 21N, whichever is less beyond the opening. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be used with it. O. Standards: 1. ANSI C80.1. 2. NEMA RN-1. 2.4 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT (PVC) A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube and Conduit Corporation 2. Carlon 3. Cantex PVC shall be either Schedule 40 or Schedule-80. The polyvinyl-chloride plastic compound shall meet, as a minimum, ASTM 01784 cell classification PVC 12233-A, B, or C. PVC shall be rated for direct sunlight exposure, 900C wire, and fire retardant with low smoke emission. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 B. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. Standards: 1. ANSI C33.91. 2. NEMA TC-2. 3. UL651. 2.5 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Anamet, Inc. 2. Electri-Flex Company. 3. International Metal Hose Company. B. LFMC shall have a core formed of continuous, spiral wound, hot-dip galvanized steel strip with successive convolutions securely interlocked, contain an interwoven copper strip suitable as a grounding means, and have an extruded vapor and liquid tight polyvinyl chloride outer jacket positively locked to the steel core. C. Standard: 1. UL 360. 2.6 CONDUIT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Appleton. 2. Carlon. 3. Crouse-Hinds. 4. Killark. 5. az Gedney Company. 6. Perma-Cote. 7. RACa. 8. Rob-Roy Ind. 9. Steel City. 10. Thomas and Betts. 11. Western Plastics Company. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Conduit and Raceway 16111-5 0992-0197 ,Section IVa Conduit and Raceway 16111-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. Fittings for Use with RAC: 1. Materials: Following minimum requirements unless otherwise noted. a. Body: Copper-free aluminum with aluminum lacquer or aluminum enamel finish. b. Covers: Copper-free aluminum and gasketed. c. Gaskets: Neoprene or PVC. d. Insulators-phenolic, thermosetting: minimum 105 Deg C UL rating. e. Grounding saddles tin-plated copper or bronze suitable for use with copper and aluminum conductors. f. Bonding jumpers: Tinned copper flexible braid. g. Locknuts: Malleable iron, zinc plated. 2. All fittings: Threaded unless otherwise noted. 3. Conduit Hubs shall be cast aluminum with insulated throat. 4. Straight couplings: Same material and finish as the conduit with which they are used. 5. Mogul pulling elbows and tees: a. Die cast copper free aluminum. b. Rain tight. 6. Conduit seals: a. Drain and breather: Stainless steel or brass. b. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for use with the sealing fitting. 7. Standards: a. UL 467. b. UL 514B. C. Fittings for Use with RGS and IMC: 1. Materials: Following minimum requirements unless otherwise noted. a. Body: Malleable iron, zinc- or cadmium-plated; steel, hot-dipped galvanized; or steel zinc plated with aluminum lacquer or aluminum enamel finish. b. Covers: Malleable iron, zinc plated and gasketed. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase. 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I c. Gaskets: Neoprene or PVC. d. Insulators-phenolic, thermosetting: minimum 105 Deg C UL rating. e. Grounding saddles tin-plated copper or bronze suitable for use with copper and aluminum conductors. f. Bonding jumpers: Tinned copper flexible braid. g. Locknuts: Malleable iron, zinc plated. 2. All fittings: Threaded unless otherwise noted. 3. Conduit Hubs shall be cast aluminum with insulated throat. 4. Straight couplings: Same material and finish as the conduit with which they are used. 5. Expansion and/or Deflection couplings: a. 2 or 41N nominal straight-line conduit movement in either direction. b. 3D-degree nominal deflection from the normal in all directions. c. Watertight. d. Insulating bushing. e. End couplings/hubs - bronze; or steel zinc-plated with aluminum cellulose lacquer finish. f. Outer jacket-neoprene. g. Jacket clamps-stainless steel. h. Inner sleeve (when used) - molded plastic. 6. Service entrance heads: a. Weather resistant. b. Body: Malleable iron, hot-dipped galvanized or copper-free aluminum. 7. Mogul pulling elbows and tees. a. Die cast copper free aluminum. b. Rain tight. 8. Conduit seals: a. Drain and breather: Stainless steel or brass. b. Fiber and sealing compound: UL listed for use with the sealing fitting. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Conduit and Raceway 16111-7 0992-0197 0992-0197 Section IVa Conduit and Raceway 16111-8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 9. Standards: a. UL 6. b. UL 467. c. UL 514B. d. UL 1242. O. Fittings for Use with PVC-RGS: 1. The same material and construction as those fittings listed under paragraph "Fittings for Use with RGS and IMC"; and coated as defined under paragraph "PVC-RGS." E. Fittings for Use with PVC: 1. Fittings shall be of the same material, thickness, and construction as the conduits with which they are used. a. Standards: 1) UL651. 2) NEMA TC-2-1978. 2. Solvent cement for welding fittings shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the conduit and fittings. a. Shall not be more than 1 year past date of manufacture. b. Standard: ASTM 02564. F. Fittings for Use with LFMC: 1. Fittings shall meet the following minimum requirements unless otherwise noted: a. Body: Malleable iron, zinc-plated. b. Ferrule: Steel, zinc-plated. c. Locknuts and compression nuts: Malleable iron, zinc-plated. d. Sealing ring: Neoprene. 2. Standard: UL 514. 2.7 STRUT CHANNEL SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Allied Power-Strut Products Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I b. B-Line Systems c. Rob-Roy Industries d. Thomas & Betts e. Unistrut Building Systems B. All strut channel, clamps, fittings and fastener materials shall conform to those as shown on the Contract Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. All conduit, raceway, wireway and associated fittings shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations and shall not be stored exposed to sunlight or other UV rays. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall plan the layout of conduit and raceway systems so that when the work is complete it will exhibit good workmanship practices in accordance with NECA-1. B. Routing of Conduits and Raceways: 1. Conduit and Raceway runs, where shown, indicate the preferred location. Site conditions may affect actual routing. Contractor shall coordinate routing and measurement with other trades and with equipment suppliers. 2. Shall not interfere with, or prevent access to, piping, valves, ductwork, or other equipment for operation, maintenance and repair. 3. Wherever possible avoid routing conduits and raceways through areas of high ambient temperature or radiant heat. C. Size of Conduits and Raceways: 1. The size of conduits and raceways are normally shown on the Contract Drawings. If a size is not shown on the Contract Drawings, or if a minimum size is not stated in the Specifications, then the size of conduits and raceways shall be in accordance with the NEC. 2. Conduits shall not be smaller than 11N for underground installations and 3/41N elsewhere, unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings. D. Types of Conduits and Raceways: 1. Shall be installed as defined in the Contract Drawings. 2. As required by NFPA. 3. LFMC: Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Conduit and Raceway 16111-9 0992-0197 . Section IVa Conduit and Raceway 16111-10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I a. Install as the final conduit to motors, electrically operated valves, primary elements (instrumentation), and electrical equipment that is liable to vibrate. b. Shall not be used as a conduit run. c. Maximum length shall not exceed: 1) 361N to motors. 2) 241N to all other equipment. E. Provide all required openings in walls, floors, and ceilings for conduit penetration. 1. New construction: a. Sleeves and block outs: Set in masonry walls during erection. b. Sleeves and block outs: Set in concrete during forming. 1) Material: Not harmful to the concrete. 2) Not considered to replace structurally the displaced concrete. F. Conduit Runs: 1. All conduits within a structure shall be installed concealed unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings. 2. Total of Bends in a Conduit Run: a. Less than 270 degrees. b. Provide pull boxes, condulets, or pulling elbows or tees as needed. 3. Run in straight lines parallel to or at right angles to structural members or building lines. 4. Maintain minimum 21N separation between all conduits. 5. Maintain minimum 61N separation between instrumentation and power conduits. 6. Maintain minimum 121N separation from process, gas, air and water pipes. 7. Conduits and accessories embedded in concrete: a. Shall not be larger in outside diameter than one-third the thickness of the slab, column or beam. b. Place conduit and accessories after reinforcing steel has been laid. c. Shall not displace the reinforcement steel. d. Provide a minimum of 1-1/2IN of concrete cover around conduit. MarshallStreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I e. Do not run against reinforcing steel. f. Provide 21N minimum of spacing between conduits. g. Install expansion/deflection fittings wherever conduit spans structural or expansion joint. G. Field Bending of Conduits: 1. Utilize tools, equipment, methods and recommendations by the manufacturer to make all field bends. 2. The internal diameter of conduit shall not be reduced or distorted. H. Field Cutting and Threading Conduits: 1. Utilize tools, equipment, methods and recommendations by the manufacturer to field cut and thread conduit. 2. All field cut conduit shall be smooth and evenly chamfered on the inside. 3. All field threaded conduit shall be clean and degreased before applying a zinc rich paint. I. Terminating Conduits: 1. NEMA 1 enclosures: a. Top: Locknuts and insulated bushings. b. Side: Locknuts and insulated bushings. c. Bottom: Locknuts and insulated bushings. 2. NEMA 2/12/12K enclosures: a. Top: Sealing locknuts and insulated bushings. b. Side: Locknuts and insulated bushings. c. Bottom: Locknuts and insulated bushings. 3. NEMA 3/3R/3S/13 enclosures: a. Top: Threaded conduit hubs with insulated throats. b. Side: Sealing locknuts and insulated bushings. c. Bottom: Locknuts and insulated bushings. 4. NEMA 4/4X enclosures: a. Top: Threaded conduit hubs with insulated throats. b. Side: Threaded conduit hubs with insulated throats. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Conduit and Raceway 16111-11 0992-0197 0992-0197 Section IVa Conduit and Raceway 16111-12 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I c. Bottom: Threaded conduit hubs with insulated throats. 5. NEMA 5 enclosures: a. Top: Sealing locknuts with insulated throats. b. Side: Sealing locknuts and insulated bushings. c. Bottom: Locknuts and insulated bushings. 6. NEMA 6/6P enclosures: a. Top: Threaded conduit hubs with insulated throats or approved cable gland fittings. b. Side: Threaded conduit hubs with insulated throats or approved cable gland fittings. c. Bottom: Threaded conduit hubs with insulated throats or approved cable gland fittings. 7. NEMA 7/8/9 enclosures: a. Enclosures shall be provided with integral conduit hubs. J. Conduit Seal Installation: 1. In each conduit entering or leaving a Class I area. 2. In each conduit in a Class I Division 1 area entering or leaving an enclosure containing switches, circuit breakers, fuses, relays, resistors or other apparatus which may produce arcs, sparks or high temperature. 3. In each conduit 21N or larger in a Class I Division 1 area entering or leaving an enclosure containing terminals, splices and taps. 4. In each conduit in a Class I Division 2 area entering or leaving an enclosure required to be approved for use in Class I environments. 5. In each conduit in a Class II location between an enclosure required to be dust ignition-proof and an enclosure that is not required to be dust ignition-proof. 6. In each conduit in a corrosive area entering or leaving that area and entering or leaving an electrical equipment enclosure in that area. 7. So that the filler plug and drain is accessible. 8. Complete with approved sealing fiber and compound. K. Conduit Coatings: 1. The protective coating of conduits, fittings, and accessories shall be maintained. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I a. Repair PVC-RGS utilizing a patching compound, of the same material as the coating, provided by the manufacturer of the conduit; or a self-adhesive, highly conformable, cross-linked silicone composition strip, followed by a protective coating of vinyl tape. 1) The total nominal thickness: 40MIL. 2. Repair surfaces that will be inaccessible after installation prior to installation. L. Power Cable Pulling Preparation 1. Remove moisture and debris from conduit before power cables are pulled. 2. Pull mandrel with diameter nominally 1/41N smaller than the interior of the conduit, to remove obstructions. 3. Swab conduit by pulling a clean, tight-fitting rag through the conduit. 4. Tightly plug ends of conduit with tapered wood plugs or plastic inserts until power cables are pulled. 5. Only nylon or polyethylene rope shall be used to pull power cables in rigid non-metallic conduit systems. END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Conduit and Raceway 16111-13 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16115 - UNDERGROUND CONDUIT, MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes manholes; handholes; pull-boxes; and underground power, control, and instrumentation conduits and ductbanks. B. In addition to the requirements specified in this section, the requirements of specification Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements and the sections referenced therein shall be applied. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials (AASHTO). 2. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): a. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEe), 2008 Edition. B. Miscellaneous: 1. Contract Drawings indicate the intended location of manholes, handholes and pull-boxes; and routing of ductbanks and direct buried conduit. Field conditions may affect actual routing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Direct-buried conduit means individual (single) underground conduits without concrete encasement. B. Direct-buried ductbank means multiple underground conduits, in a common trench, without concrete encasement. C. Concrete encased ductbank means any underground conduit or combination of underground conduits encased in a common concrete envelope. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300 - Submittals and Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements. B. Fabrication and layout drawings: 1. Provide cross-sectioned sketch of each ductbank. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Underground Conduit, Manholes and Handholes 0992-0197 16115-1 a. Condux International, Inc. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I a. Dimension spacing between conduits. b. Dimension concrete envelope and reinforcing, where applicable. 2. Provide ductbank and direct-buried conduit profile. a. Dimension from grade to ductbank and direct buried conduit. b. Dimension from ductbank and direct buried conduit to other utilities in the route. 3. Certifications. 4. Test reports. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See Section 01300. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Precast manholes, handholes and pull-boxes: a. Oldcastle Precast b. Utility Vault Co. 2. Manhole and hand hole covers: a. Neenah. b. Utility Vault Co. 3. Cable racks: a. Unistrut. b. B-Line. c. Condux International, Inc. d. Underground Devices, Inc. 4. Cable pulling irons: 5. Ground rods and grounding equipment: a. See Section 16450 - Grounding and Bonding. Marshal/Street APCF Generator Upgrades,.Phase2 . Section IVa Underground Conduit, Manholes and Handho/es 0992-0197 16115-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 6. Ground wire: a. See Section 16450 - Grounding and Bonding. 7. Duct terminators: a. Condux International, Inc. 8. Conduit: a. See Section 16111- Conduit and Raceway. 9. Duct spacers: a. Underground Devices, Inc. b. Condux International, Inc. 10. Precast cable trench: a. Con cast b. Trenwa. 11. Warning Tape: a. W. H. Brady Company. b. Seton Nameplate Company. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Handholes and Pull-Boxes: 1. Fiberglass reinforced polymer concrete: a. Boxes and covers are required to conform to all test provisions of ANSI/SCTE 77 "Specification For Underground Enclosure Integrity" for Tier 15 applications at a minimum unless otherwise noted on the drawings. b. In no assembly can the cover design load exceed the design load of the box. c. All components in an assembly (box & cover) are manufactured using matched surface tooling. d. All covers are required to have a minimum 0.50 coefficient offriction in accordance with ASTM C 1028. 2. Pre-Cast steel reinforced concrete: a. Boxes are required to meet ASTM C 858 with 4000PSI minimum compressive strength concrete and designed for AASHTO H-20 loading unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings. . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Underground Conduit, Manholes and Handholes 0992-0197 16115-3 1) Heavy-duty type frames and covers made of cast iron, suitable for H-20 loading, and having machined bearing surfaces shall be used. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I b. Tongue-and-grove double sealed joints on mating edges of pre-cast components. The joints shall firmly interlock adjoining components and provide waterproof junctions and adequate shear transfer. Joints shall be sealed with approved watertight joint sealant as prescribed in the manufacturer's installation specifications and conforming to AASHTO M198, Type B. Sealing material shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. c. Knockout panels or pre-cast individual conduit openings may be used. Blockout panels are not acceptable. d. Cover: 2) The covers shall be of indented type with solid top design. 3) The upper side of each cover shall have the letters "Electrical", "Control", or "Communication" cast in integral letters no less than 2 inches high as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 3. Cast-In-Place: a. Comply with Section 03300 unless otherwise specified herein. b. Constructed as detailed on the Contract Drawings. c. Cover: 1) Heavy-duty type frames and covers made of cast iron, suitable for H-20 loading, and having machined bearing surfaces shall be used. 2) The covers shall be of indented type with solid top design. 3) The upper side of each cover shall have the letters "Electrical", "Control", or "Communication" cast in integral letters no less than 2 inches high as indicated on the Contract Drawings. d. Shall have an AASHTO live load rating of H-20, unless otherwise noted in the Contract Drawings or Specifications. B. Manholes: 1. Pre-Cast steel reinforced concrete: a. Boxes are required to meet ASTM C 858 with 4000PSI minimum compressive strength concrete and designed for AASHTO H-20 loading unless otherwise noted on the Contract Drawings. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Underground Conduit, Manholes and Handholes 0992-0197 16115-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I b. Tongue-and-grove double sealed joints on mating edges of pre-cast components. The joints shall firmly interlock adjoining components and provide waterproof junctions and adequate shear transfer. Joints shall be sealed with approved watertight joint sealant as prescribed in the manufacturer's installation specifications and conforming to MSHTO M198, Type B. Sealing material shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. c. Knockout panels or pre-cast individual conduit openings may be used. Blockout panels are not acceptable. d. Minimum interior dimensions shall be 4 feet Wide x 4 feet Long x 6 feet Tall. e. Cover: 1) Minimum access opening dimensions: a) Rectangular - 26-inch x 22-inch b) Round - 26 inches Diameter 2) Heavy-duty type frames and covers made of cast iron, suitable for H-20 loading, and having machined bearing surfaces shall be used. 3) The covers shall be of indented type with solid top design. 4) The upper side of each cover shall have the letters "Electrical", "Control", or "Communication" cast in integral letters no less than 2-inch high as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. Cast-In-Place: a. Comply with Section 03300 unless otherwise specified herein. b. Constructed as detailed on the Contract Drawings. c. Shall have an MSHTO live load rating of H-20, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. d. Minimum interior dimensions shall be 4 feet Wide x 4 feet Long x 6 feet Tall. e. Cover: 1) Minimum access opening dimensions: a) Rectangular - 26 inches x 22 inches b) Round - 26 inches Diameter Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Underground Conduit, Manholes and Handho/es 0992-0197 16115-5 2) Heavy-duty type frames and covers made of cast iron, suitable for H-20 loading, and having machined bearing surfaces shall be used. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3) The covers shall be of indented type with solid top design. 4) The upper side of each cover shall have the letters "Electrical", "Control", or "Communication" cast in integral letters no less than 2 inches high as indicated on the Contract Drawings. C. Cable Racks: 1. Hot-dipped galvanized hot-rolled steel; or Lexan. 2. 120 pounds minimum loading capacity. 3. Three-point locking to resist twisting. D. Cable Pulling Irons: 1. Hot-dipped galvanized steel. 2. 6000 pounds minimum pulling load. E. Ground Rods and Grounding Equipment: 1. See Section 16450 -Grounding and Bonding. F. Ground Wire: 1. See Section 16120 - Wire and Cable. G. Duct Terminators: 1. Window type. 2. ABS plastic. 3. Provide for conduit entrance. 4. Designed for installation into manhole, hand hole or pull-box walls for a watertight seal. 5. Sufficient space between terminator walls to allow for placement of rebar and concrete. H. Conduit: 1. See Section 16111 - Conduit and Raceway. I. Duct Spacers: 1. High density polyethylene or high impact polystyrene. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Underground Conduit, Manholes and Handholes 0992-0197 16115-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. Interlocking. 3. Provide 2-inch minimum spacing between conduits. J. Warning Tape: 1. Approved manufacturers and catalog numbers: a. W H Brady Company, Catalog S-10, #91296. 2. Material: Polyethylene. 3. Thickness: 3.5MIL. 4. Tensile strength: 1750PSI. 5. Size: 6 inches wide (minimum). 6. Legend: Preprinted and permanently imbedded: a. Message continuously printed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTAllATION A. General: 1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Comply with Section 16050 - Materials and Methods, for trenching, backfilling and compacting. 3. Buried conductor warning tape: a. See Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements. B. Manholes, Handholes and Pull-Boxes: 1. Shape: Manholes, handholes and pull-boxes may be either square or rectangular. 2. Size: a. Manholes shall have minimum interior dimensions of 48 x 48 inches with a minimum interior height of 72 inches unless other dimensions are detailed on the Contract Drawings. b. Handholds shall be sized for the number of conduits entering unless other dimensions are detailed on the Contract Drawings. 1) Minimum interior dimensions shall be 24 x 17 inches with a minimum depth of 36 inches. Marshal/Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 . Section IVa Underground Conduit, Manholes and Handho/es 0992-0197 16115-7 c. Pull-Boxes shall be sized for the number of conduits entering unless other dimensions are detailed on the Contract Drawings. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3. Precast or cast-in-place: a. Optional unless otherwise noted in the Contract Drawings or Specifications. 4. Precast manholes, hand holes and pull-boxes shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for "subject to occasional heavy vehicles." a. Do not use precast manholes handholes, pull-boxes in roadways. 5. For cast-in-place construction, comply with Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 6. Provide minimum 12 inches oftamped crushed rock or gravel prior to setting manhole, handhole or pull box. 7. Construct manholes, hand holes and pull-boxes approximately where shown on the Contract Drawings. Determine the exact locations after careful consideration has been given to location of other utilities, grading, and paving. a. Locations are to be approved by the Engineer prior to excavation and construction of manholes, handholes and pull-boxes. 8. Grout or seal all joints: a. For precast construction, comply with the manufacturer's instructions. b. For cast-in-place construction, comply with Section 03300 - Cast-in- Place Concrete. 9. Set frames and covers: a. For manholes, handholes and pull-boxes located in roadways, paint with two coats asphaltic paint before setting and set top of covers flush with finished surface of paving. b. For manholes, handholes and pull-boxes not located in roadways, set top of covers 2 inches above finished grade. Slope surrounding grade away from edge to insure water drains away from opening. c. Install sufficient number of concrete extensions between top of manhole, hand hole or pull-box frame as required to elevate cover to existing grade level. 10. Support cables on walls by cable racks: a. Equip cable racks with adjustable hooks: Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Underground Conduit, Manholes and Handholes 0992-0197 16115-8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1) Quantity of hooks as required by the number of conductors. 2) Minimum of two cable hooks per rack. b. Install a minimum of two racks on each wall in each manhole, hand hole and pull-box. c. Space cable racks so that both ends of cable splices will be supported horizontally. d. In manholes, install one spare hook on each rack. e. Install a cable-pulling iron in each wall opposite each ductbank entrance. 11. Grounding: In each manhole, drive copper ground rod into the earth and extend ground rod approximately 6 inches above finished floor. a. In precast structures, drill openings in floor for ground rod. b. Connect all metallic conduits, racks, and other metallic components to ground rod by means of#8AWG minimum tinned copper wire and approved grounding clamps. 12. Provide an 18-inch diameter sump in the bottom of each manhole and hand hole. 13. After installation is complete, backfill and compact soil around manholes and hand holes. C. Underground Conduits: 1. Concrete encased ductbank: a. Provide electrical duct system consisting of conduits completely encased in minimum 2 inches of concrete. b. For circuits 600V and below, install so that top of concrete encased duct, at any point, is not less than the minimum depths established by the NEC (Table 300-5 and exceptions): 1) PVC-RGS conduit: 24-inch. 2) PVC sch-40 conduit: 24-inch. 3) Under areas subject to vehicular traffic: a) All applications: 24-inch. 4) Unless a greater depth is detailed on the Contract Drawings. c. Under traffic areas (roadways, parking lots, etc.) and for a distance 10 feet either side of the traffic area, and elsewhere as defined on the Contract Drawings or specified, the concrete shall be reinforced in accordance with Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Underground Conduit, Manholes and Handho/es 0992-0197 16115-9 a) All applications: 24-inch. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I 2. Direct-buried duct bank: a. Provide electrical duct system consisting of conduits directly buried in earth. 1) Lay conduits on minimum 2 inches sand base completely encased by 2 inches of selected backfill containing no stones or other hard material larger than %-inch diameter. b. For circuits 600V and below, install so that the top selected backfill at any point, is not less than the minimum depths established by the NEC (Table 300-5 and exceptions). 1) PVC-RGS conduit: 24-inch. 2) PVC sch-80 conduit: 24-inch. 3) Under areas subject to vehicular traffic: a) All applications: 24-inch. 4) Unless a greater depth is detailed on the Contract Drawings. 3. Direct-buried conduit: a. Provide electrical duct system consisting of conduits directly buried in earth. 1) Lay conduit on minimum 2 inches sand base completely encased by 2 inches of selected backfill containing no stones or other hard material larger than %-inch diameter. b. For circuits 600V and below, install so that top of the selective backfill, at any point, is not less than the minimum depths established by the NEC (Table 300-5 and exceptions). 1) PVC-RGS conduit: 24-inch. 2) PVC sch-80 conduit: 24-inch. 3) Under areas subject to vehicular traffic: 4) Unless a greater depth is detailed on the Contract Drawings. 4. Underground conduits and ductbanks shall comply with the following: a. Minimum grade shall be 4 inches per 100 feet or as detailed on the Contract Drawings. 1) Low point shall be at one end of the conduit run. b. During construction and after conduit installation is complete; plug the ends of all conduits. . Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase, 2 Section IVa Underground Conduit, Manholes and Handholes 0992-0197 16115-10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I c. Provide conduit supports and separators of concrete, plastic, or other suitable nonmetallic, non-decaying material designed for that purpose. 1) Concrete encasement supports shall provide a uniform minimum clearance of 2 inches between the bottom of the trench and the bottom row of conduit. 2) Separators shall provide a uniform minimum clearance of 2 inches between conduits. 3) Place supports and separators for PVC conduit on maximum centers as indicated for the following trade sizes: a) 1-inch and less: 2 feet. b) 1-1/4 to 3-inch: 4 feet. c) 3-1/2 to 6-inch: 6 feet. 4) Place supports and separators for RGS conduit on maximum centers as indicated for the following trade sizes: a) 1-inch and less: 8 feet. b) 1-1/4 to 2-1/2-inch: 10 feet. c) 3-inch and larger: 12 feet. 5) Securely anchor conduits to supports and separators to prevent movement during placement of concrete or soil. 6) Do not place concrete or soil until conduits have been observed by the Engineer. d. Stagger conduit joints at intervals of 6 inches horizontally. e. Make conduit joints watertight and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1) Make plastic conduit joints by uniformly brushing a plastic solvent cement on inside of plastic coupling fitting and outside of conduit ends. Slip conduit and fitting together with a quick one-quarter turn twist to set joint tightly. f. Accomplish changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 5 degrees by long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 inches. 1) Sweep bends shall be made up of one curved section. g. Furnish manufactured bends at end of runs. . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 . Section IVa Underground Conduit, Manholes and Handholes 0992-0197 16115-11 1) Legend: "CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION" (1st line), "BURIED ELECTRIC LINE" (2nd line). I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1) Minimum radius of 18 inches for conduits less than 3-inch trade size and 36 inches for conduits 3-inch trade size and larger. h. After the conduit run has been completed, pull a standard flexible mandrel having a length of not less than 12 inches and a diameter approximately 'XI-inch less than the inside diameter of the conduit through each conduit. Then pull a brush with stiff bristles through each conduit to remove any foreign material left in conduit. i. Pneumatic rodding may be used to draw in pull-cords. 1) Install a 1/8-inch polypropylene pull-cord free of kinks and splices in all unused new ducts. 2) Extend pull-cord 3 feet beyond ends of conduit and fasten to prevent loss of pull-cord in conduits. j. Transition from PVC to RGS conduit with a minimum of3 feet priorto entering a structure or going above ground. 1) Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2) PVC conduit may be extended directly to pull, junction and transformer boxes; manholes and hand holes. k. Where conduits enter transformer boxes; manholes and hand holes: 1) Terminate PVC conduits in end bells. 2) Terminate PVC-RGS conduits in insulated bushings. D. Warning Tape: 1. Place warning tape in trench directly over ductbanks, direct-buried conduit, and direct-buried wire and cable. a. 6 inches below finished grade where conduit or ductbank is 12 inches or more below finished grade. b. 3 inches below finished grade where conduit or ductbank is less than 12 inches below finished grade. 2. Provide warning tape as follows: a. Electrical trenches and ductbanks or directly buried conduit: 2) Letters: 1-1/4-inch minimum. 3) Interval: Continuous. 4) Color: Red and black letters. Marshal/Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Underground Conduit, Manholes and Handholes 0992-0197 16115-12 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I b. Trenches and direct-buried or conduit encased telephone lines: 1) Legend: "CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION" (1st line), "BURIED TELEPHONE LINE" (2nd line). 2) Letters: 1-1/4-inch minimum. 3) Interval: Continuous. 4) Color: Orange with black letters. c. Trenches with direct-buried or conduit encased computer or SCADA system communications lines: 1) Legend: "CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION" (1st line), "BURIED COMPUTER LINE" (2nd line). 2) Letters: 1-1/4-inch minimum. 3) Interval: Continuous. 4) Color: Orange with black letters. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide the Owner with two sets of precast cable trench cover removal tools. END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Underground Conduit, Manholes and Handholes 0992-0197 16115-13 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE: 600 VOLT AND BELOW PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, connect, test, and place in satisfactory operating condition, ready for service, all cables and wires indicated on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein or required for proper operation of the installation, with the exception of internal wiring provided by electrical equipment manufacturers. The work of connecting cables to equipment, machinery, and devices shall be considered a part of this Section. All hardware, junction boxes, bolts, clamps, insulators, and fittings required for the installation of cable and wires system shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. B. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and other material required to substantiate conformance with the requirements set forth on the Contract Drawings and in Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements, and Section 01300 - Submittals. Shop drawings shall include, but not be limited to, detailed specifications and product data sheets for the power, control, and instrumentation cable required for this project. C. The wire and cable to be furnished and installed for this project shall be the product of manufacturers who have been in the business of manufacturing wire and cable for a minimum of ten (10) years. D. Reference Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01300, SUBMITTALS, the Contractor shall obtain from the wire and cable manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Reports of Certified Shop and Field Tests 3. Wiring Identification Methods. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable specification section. 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed material's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible Submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Wire and Cable: 600 Volt and Below 16120-1 0992-0197 "Section IVa Wire and Cable: 600 Volt and Below 16120-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Material specifications and product data sheets identifying all materials used and methods of fabrication. 2. Cable pulling calculations. 3. Wiring identification methods and materials. 1.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Each cable shall be identified as specified in Part 3, EXECUTION, of this Specification. 1.5 CABLE PULLING LUBRICANTS A. The Contractor shall submit a list with a minimum of four manufacturers standard lubricants which may be used interchangeably for each type of lubricant required. Lubricant shall be non-hardening type. 1.6 CABLE PULL CALCULATIONS A. The Contractor shall submit cable pulling calculations and shall be performed by a currently registered professional electrical engineer. The calculations shall define pulling tension and sidewall loading SWBP (sidewall bearing pressure) values for all cable installations rated 600V with #1/0A WG conductors and larger greater than 200 feet in length. The calculations for straight horizontal cable installations rated 600V with #1/0AWG conductors and larger less than 200 FT are not required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. The wire and cable covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of proven performance. Wire and cable shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as specified herein and shown on the Contract Drawings. Only one manufacturer for each cable type shall be permitted. 2.2 600V POWER WIRE AND CABLE A. 600V rated cable and wire shall consist of stranded, copper conductor with insulation rated XHHW-2, 900C for wet locations and THHN, 900C for dry or damp locations. B. Conductors shall be stranded copper per ASTM-B8, B-33 and B-189, Class B or C stranding contingent on the size unless otherwise specified. Minimum size wire shall be #12AWG. 2.3 600V CONTROL CABLE A. 600V rated control cable shall consist of stranded, copper conductor with insulation rated THWN, 750C for wet locations and THHN, 900C for dry or damp locations. The individual conductors of the multiple conductor cable shall be color coded for proper identification. Color coding shall be equal to ICEA S-68-514, Table K-1. Cables shall meet requirements of I EEE-383. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. Conductors shall be stranded copper per ASTM B-8 and B-33 or B-189, Class B or C stranding contingent on the size unless otherwise specified. Minimum wire size shall be #14AWG. 2.4 LIGHTING AND RECEPTACLE WIRE AND CABLE A. The lighting and receptacle branch circuit wire shall consist of stranded, copper conductors with insulation rated THWN, 750C for wet locations and THHN, 900C for dry or damp locations. B. Conductors shall be stranded copper per ASTM-B8, B-33 and B-189, Class B or C stranding contingent on the size unless otherwise specified. Minimum size wire shall be #12AWG. C. Lighting and receptacle cables and wire shall be manufactured by the General Cable Company, Southwire Cable Company or equal. 2.5 INSTRUMENTATION SIGNAL CABLE (STP) A. The instrumentation cable for analog signals shall be individually shielded twisted pair cable (STP) or individually shielded twisted multi-pair cable. Conductors shall be tin or alloy coated, soft, annealed copper, #16AWG minimum with a minimum of 19 strands with 600V rated insulation for 750C. Pairs shall have 100% coverage foil shields with a #18AWG tinned copper drain wire. Outer jackets shall be chromed polyvinyl chloride. B. Instrumentation cables to be direct buried shall be UL labeled for direct buried service. 2.6 DATA CABLE (CAT-6e) A. All data cables shall be ANSlfTlAlEIA 568 (Category 6e), #24AWG copper, plenum rated and ETL Type-CMP. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 600V CABLE INSTAllATION A. The cable and wires shall be installed as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. B. The cables shall be terminated in accordance with the cable and/or termination product manufacturer's instructions for the particular type of cable. C. To minimize oxidation and corrosion, wire and cable shall be terminated using an oxide-inhibiting joint compound recommended for "copper-to-copper" connections. D. Splices shall not be allowed in the underground duct, manhole and handhole systems. If splices are required, the Contractor shall obtain approval in writing from the Engineer prior to splicing. Exterior splicing material shall be heat shrink insulation HDT or equal. No "Butt-Splicing" of AC or DC circuit control conductors or instrumentation cable shall be allowed. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades,Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Wire and Cable: 600 Volt and Below 16120-3 0992-0197 Section IVa Wire and Cable: 600 Volt and Below 16120-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I E. Wire and Cable Sizes 1. The sizes of wire and cable shall be as shown on the Drawings, or if not shown, as approved by the Engineer. If required due to field routing, the size of conductors and respective conduit shall be increased so that the voltage drop does not exceed 3%. 2. Minimum wire size within control panels, motor control centers, switchboards and similar equipment shall be #12AWG for power and #14AWG for control. F. Number of Wires 1. The number of wires indicated on the Contract Drawings for the various control, indication, and metering circuits were determined for general schemes of control and for particular indication and metering systems. 2. The actual number of wires installed for each circuit shall, in no case, be less than the number required; however, the Contractor shall add as many wires as may be required for control and indication of the actual equipment selected for installation at no additional cost to the Owner. The addition of conductors shall be coordinated with and approved by the Engineer to avoid violations of the NEC regarding conduit fill. G. Wiring Identification 1. The Contractor shall meet with the Owner and/or Engineer to come to an agreement regarding wire and cable identification prior to developing a wire and cable schedule. 2. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a wire and cable schedule in an electronic spreadsheet type file format indicating the wire and cable tag number, to and from destinations, size, usage description, and device terminals. 3. All wiring shall be identified with a unique wire or cable tag number and shall be labeled at each termination. Tag numbers shall correspond with the accepted wire and cable schedule and shall not be duplicated. 4. Wire identification shall be accomplished through the use of a printer with white, polyolefin heat shrinkable wire marking sleeves. 5. All single-phase and three-phase wiring shall be color coded at each termination. The color coding is applicable to all power, control, alarm, signal, and instrumentation cables, and conductors. H. Cable Installation 1. All interior cable not protected by a compartment enclosure shall be run in conduit. I. Wiring Supplies 1. Only electrical wIring supplies manufactured under high standards of production and meeting the approval of the Engineer shall be used. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. Rubber insulating tape shall be in accordance with ASTM Des. 0119. Friction tape shall be in accordance with ASTM Des. 069. J. Training of Cable 1. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and material required to train cables around cable vaults within buildings and in manholes in the outdoor underground duct system. Sufficient length of cable shall be provided in each manhole and vault so that the cable can be trained and racked in an approved manner. In training or racking, the radius of bend of any cable shall be not less than the manufacturer's recommendation. All manhole cables shall be arc and fire-proofed. The training shall be done in such a manner as to minimize chaffing. K. Connections at Control Panels, Limit Switches, and Similar Devices 1. Where stranded wires are terminated at panels, and/or devices, connections shall be made by solderless lug, crimp type ferrule or solder dipped. 2. Where enclosure sizes and sizes of terminals at limit switches, solenoid valves, float switches, pressure switches, temperature switches, and other devices make 7-strand, #12AWG, wire terminations impractical, the Contractor shall terminate external circuits in an adjacent junction box of proper size and shall install #14AWG stranded wires from the device to the junction box in a conduit. The #12 AWG field wiring shall also be terminated in the same junction box to complete the circuit. L. Pulling Temperature 1. Cable shall not be flexed or pulled when the temperature ofthe insulation or of the jacket is such that damage will occur due to low temperature embrittlement. When cable will be pulled with an ambient temperature within a three day period prior to pulling of 400F or lower, cable reels shall be stored during the three day period priorto pulling in a protected storage area with an ambient temperature not lower than 550F and pulling shall be completed during the work day for which the cable is removed from the protected storage. M. Color Coding 1. Conductor insulation shall be color coded as follows: a) 480V AC Power: Phase A - BROWN Phase B - ORANGE Phase C - YELLOW Neutral- GREY b) 120/208V or 120/240V AC Power: Phase A - BLACK Phase B - RED Phase C - BLUE Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 . Section IVa Wire and Cable: 600 Volt and Below 16120-5 0992-0197 Section IVa Wire and Cable: 600 Volt and Below 16120-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Neutral - WHITE c) 120VAC Control: Ungrounded conductors - RED Ungrounded conductors, foreign source - YELLOW. d) 24VAC Control: All wiring - ORANGE e) 24VDC Power: Positive Lead - RED Negative Lead - BLACK f) 24VDC Control: Ungrounded conductors - BLUE Grounded conductors - BLUE wi WHITE stripe g) Equipment Grounding Conductor: All wiring - GREEN 2. Conductors #4AWG and smaller shall be factory color coded with a separate color for each phase and neutral, which shall be used consistently throughout the system. Larger cables shall be coded by the use of colored tape. 3.2 INSTRUMENTATION I DATA CABLE INSTALLATION A. Grounding of cable shield shall be accomplished at one end point only. B. A raceway containing instrumentation I data cable shall be installed to provide the following clearances: 1. Raceway installed parallel to raceway conductors energized at 480 through 208 volts shall be 18 IN and 208/120 volts shall be 12 IN. 2. Raceway installed at right angles to conductors energized at 480 volts or 120/208 volts shall be 6 IN. C. Where practical, raceways containing instrumentation I data cable shall cross raceway containing conductors of other systems at right angles. D. Where instrumentation I data cables are installed in panels, etc., the Contractor shall arrange wiring to provide maximum clearance between cables and other conductors. Instrumentation I data cables shall not be installed in same bundle with conductors of other circuits. E. Additional pull boxes shall be furnished and installed for ease of cable pulling and the cable manufacturer's recommended conduit fill factor shall be followed. Where required for specifically directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall moisture seal . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase. 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I the cables at all connections with OZ Gedney Type "CSB", or equal, sealing bushings. F. All cable, insulation and jacket shall have adequate strength to allow for it to be pulled through the conduit systems. Sufficient conductors shall be installed to provide space and serve future equipment where shown and specified. All conductors shall be color coded and all wires shall be suitably tagged with permanent markers at each end. 3.3 TESTING A. All testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 1. The following tests are required: 1. Shop Test a. Prior to the first shipment of each size of power, control, and telephone I data cable to be furnished and installed under this Contract, samples of each size of cable shall be subjected to complete physical and electrical factory production tests at the manufacturer's plant. Other cable and wiring shall be tested in accordance with the applicable ICEA Standards. Six copies of certified test data sheets shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to installation at the site. Subsequent shipment of each size of wire shall be covered by certificates of compliance which shall list Contractor's name, point of delivery, reel numbers, size of wire, length of wire, and date of shipment. Certificates shall attest the wires and cables comply with specification requirements and that wires and cables are equal in every respect to wires and cables which have been successfully tested. b. All test data or certificates shall be notarized and submitted. 2. Field Tests a. Field testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements specified in the General Conditions, Division 1, and Section 16010- Electrical, Basic Requirements. b. After installation, all wires and cables shall be tested for insulation levels and continuity. Insulation resistance between conductors of the same circuit and between conductor and ground shall be tested. Testing for insulation levels shall be as follows: 1) For 600V rated power and control cable, apply 1,000VDC from a Megaohmeter for all 600V wires and cables installed in lighting, control, power, indication, alarm and motor feeder circuits. Testing for continuity shall be "test light" or "buzzer". 2) 600V rated instrumentation signal cable shall be tested from conductor to conductor, conductor to shield, and conductor to ground using a volt-ohmmeter. The resistance value shall be 200 megaohms or greater. Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 . Section IVa Wire and Cable: 600 Volt and Below 16120-7 0992-0197 Section IVa Wire and Cable: 600 Volt and Below 16120-8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. Low voltage wires and cables shall be tested before being connected to motors, devices or terminal blocks. C. Voltage tests shall be made successively between each conductor of a circuit and all other conductors of the circuit grounded. D. If tests reveal defects or deficiencies, the Contractor shall make the necessary repairs or shall replace the cable as directed by the Engineer, without additional cost to the Owner. E. All tests shall be made by and at the expense of the Contractor who shall supply all testing equipment. END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16130 - OUTLET, PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Outlet, pull and junction boxes. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Contract and Bidding Requirements. 2. Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Refer to Section 16010- Electrical, Basic Requirements. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Refer to Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See Contract and Bidding Requirements. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. See Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Galvanized steel boxes: 2. Appleton Electric Co. 3. Steel City. 4. Raco. B. Corrosion-resistant boxes: 1. Hoffman Engineering Co. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes 16130-1 MaFshallStreet APCFGenerator Upgrades" Phase. 2 .'" "Section,IVa Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes 16130-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I>> I 2. Crouse-Hinds. C. Hazardous location boxes (Class I, II & III): 1. Appleton Electric Co. 2. Crouse-Hinds. 3. Killark. 4. O-Z/Gedney. D. Raintight and watertight boxes: 1. Appleton Electric Co. 2. Crouse-Hinds. E. Terminal boxes: 1. Hoffman Engineering Co. F. Exposed switch and receptacle boxes: 1. Appleton Electric Co. 2. Crouse-Hinds. 3. Killark. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Pull and Junction Boxes for Wet Areas: 1. Material: 14GA steel with polyester powder coating inside and out over phosphatized surfaces. a. Seams continuously welded, ground smooth, no knockouts. b. Stainless steel clamps on four sides. c. Flat cover with oil resistant gasket. d. NEMA 4 classification. e. UL listed. 2. Pull and Junction Boxes for Corrosive Areas: a. Material: 14GA steel with powdered epoxy resin coating inside and out or fiberglass reinforced polyester material. 3. Fiberglass-reinforced polyester boxes: a. Hinged door with latch and lockout. 0992-0197 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I b. Neoprene door gasket. c. Grounding bushing(s). d. NEMA 4X classification. e. UL listed. 4. Pull and Junction Boxes for Hazardous Areas: a. Material: Cast gray iron alloy or copper-free cast aluminum. b. Drilled and tapped openings or tapered threaded hub equipped. c. Flat bolted-down or threaded cover with neoprene gasket. d. Stainless steel hex head screws. e. Explosionproof, UL listed for Class 1 Groups C and D. 5. Large Pull and Junction Boxes (100 CU IN and larger): a. Located in wet and corrosive areas: 1) NEMA 4X with stainless steel screws. b. Type 304L welded stainless steel: 1) Constructed of 14GA 304L stainless steel with seams continuously welded, ground smooth with no knockouts. 2) Rolled lip around all sides. 3) Rigid handles for covers larger than 9SF or heavier than 25LBS. 4) Split covers when heavier than 25LBS. 6. Terminal Boxes: a. Galvanized 16GA steel box provided with plain blank screw cover, subpanel, and terminal points. b. Refer to Drawing for dimensions and number of terminals. c. Terminal blocks shall be screw-post barrier-type with white marker strip. d. Rated 20 ampere, minimum 600V. 7. Fiberglass Cable-Pulling Enclosure: a. Use: Access points to facilitate pulling of electrical cables in buried conduit runs. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes 16130-3 0992-0197 Section IVa, Outlet, Pull and Junction Boxes 16130-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I b. Size and quantity: As shown on Drawings. c. Type: Rectangular fiberglass composite, suitable for direct burial pedestrian traffic on top, -50 DegF, chemical, sunlight, and weather resistant. d. Provide matching top with "ELECTRIC" logo. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use cast metal boxes with threaded conduit hubs in hazardous areas. C. Use Type FS and FD boxes in wet areas and where exposed rigid aluminum conduit is required. D. Use epoxy resin coated, stainless steel, cast aluminum or fiberglass boxes for corrosive areas. E. Fill unused punched-out, tapped, or threaded hub openings with insert plugs of like material to maintain enclosure NEMA rating. F. Use outlet boxes sized to accommodate quantity of conductors enclosed. G. Use boxes sized to accommodate conduit tying into box. H. Install pull boxes or junction boxes in conduit runs where indicated or required to facilitate pulling of wires or making connections. I. Make covers of boxes accessible. J. Install pull boxes or junction boxes rated for the area classification. K. Install rigid conduit squarely into boxes that do not have hubs or are drilled and tapped. L. Install with locknut on the inside and outside with insulating bushing on inside. M. Install conduit into boxes with hubs, or that are tapped, using thread lubricant. N. Do not use back-to-back boxes on this Project. O. Seal all points of conduit entry into fiberglass cable-pulling enclosures for a waterproof installation. P. Support outlet boxes for incandescent fixtures and other ceiling-mounted devices in lay-in acoustical tile ceilings by bar hangers anchored to ceiling construction members which do not interfere with tile removal. a. Do not use meter boxes for junction boxes. END OF SECTION .. Marshall.StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase.2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Light switches, receptacles and device plates. 2. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 3. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract and Conditions. 4. Division 1 - General Requirements. 5. Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: B. Refer to Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: B. Refer to Section 01300 - Submittals and Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Light switches (except explosion proof): a. Hubbell. b. Slater. c. P&S. d. Arrow Hart. e. General Electric. f. Leviton. 2. Explosion proof light switches: a. Crouse-Hinds. b. Appleton Electric Co. c. Killark Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2, . 0992-0197 Section IVa Wiring Devices 16140-1 3. Door switches: a. General Electric. b. Slater. c. P&S. d. Arrow Hart. e. Micro-switch. 4. Receptacles (except explosion proof): a. Hubbell. b. Slater. c. P&S. d. Arrow Hart. e. General Electric. f. Leviton. 2.2 MATERIALS B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Section 01640 - Quality Control. A. Light Switches for Unclassified Areas: 2. Back and side wired. 1. Toggle type, quiet action, and specification grade with grounding terminal. 3. Solid silver cadmium oxide contacts. 4. One-piece switch arm rated 20A, 120/277VAC. 5. UL listed. 6. Color: Ivory. 7. Wall plate: Type 304 stainless steel. B. Receptacles for Unclassified Areas: 1. Straight blade, grounding type, GFIC specification grade. 2. Back and side wired with Wrap-around Bridge. 3. Rated 20A, 125VAC. 4. UL listed. 5. Color: a. For use on normal power: IVORY. b. For use on UPS systems: RED. c. For use on isolated ground systems: ORANGE. Marshal/Street APCF Generator Upgrades,. Phase.2 0992-0197 . ,Section IVa Wiring Devices 16140-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I ,I... I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 6. Wall plate: Type 304 stainless steel. C. Light Switches for Wet Areas: 1. Presswitch type, quiet action, specification grade, with grounding terminal. 2. Back and side wired. 3. Solid silver cadmium oxide contacts. 4. One-piece switch arm rated 20A, 120/277V AC. 5. UL listed. 6. Color: IVORY. 7. Wall plate: GREY weatherproof press-switch type. D. Receptacles for Outdoor and Wet Areas: 1. Straight blade, grounding type, GFIC specification grade. 2. Back and side wired with wrap around bridge. 3. Rated 20A, 125VAC. 4. UL listed. 5. Color: IVORY. 6. Wall plate: Weatherproof, cast aluminum, UL listed "IN USE" cover. E. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: 1. Straight blade, grounding type, specification grade. 2. Rated 20A, 125VAC. 3. UL listed. 4. Test and reset buttons. 5. Wall plate: Indoor or weatherproof "IN USE" as required. 6. Feed-thru type. F. Light Switches for Corrosive Areas: 1. Corrosion-resistant NEMA 4X enclosure with switch consisting of: a. Fiberglass reinforced polyester enclosure. b. Fiberglass reinforced polyester gasketed wall plate with built-in toggle lever switch with stainless steel shaft. 0992-0197 Section IVa . Wiring Devices 16140-3 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Wiring Devices 16140-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I c. Grounding bushing. d. Rated 20A, 125VAC. e. UL listed. f. Color: YELLOW. 2. Optional: Corrosion-resistant enclosure and switch consisting of: a. Cast copper-free aluminum "FS" or "FD" ridge type hub box. b. Toggle type, quiet action, and specification grade with grounding terminal. c. Rated 20A, 125VAC with solid silver cadmium oxide contacts. d. UL listed. e. Neoprene gasket. f. Cast aluminum cover with stainless steel screws and lever to activate switch. g. Color: YELLOW. G. Receptacles for Corrosive Areas: 1. Corrosion-resistant straight blade, grounding type, GFIC specification grade. 2. Back and side wired with Wrap-around Bridge. 3. Rated 20A, 125VAC. 4. UL listed. 5. Color: YELLOW. 6. Box: "FS" or "FD" ridge type cast hub box of copper-free aluminum. 7. Gasket: Neoprene. 8. Wall plate: Weatherproof, PVC, UL listed "IN USE" cover. H. Explosion-proof Light Switches for Use in Hazardous Areas: 1. Explosionproof, UL listed for Class I, Division 1 and 2,Groups B, C, and D; and Class II, Division 1 and 2 areas, Groups E, F, and G. 2. EDS factory sealed. 3. Malleable iron body and cover. 4. Aluminum sealing chamber. . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 5. Front operated handle with stainless steel shaft. 6. Rated 20A, 125V AC. 7. With grounding screw. I. Explosion-proof Receptacles for Use in Hazardous Areas: 1. Explosion-proof, UL listed for Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, and D; and Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F and G. 2. Factory-sealed malleable iron receptacle with spring-loaded cover. 3. Malleable iron mounting box. 4. Rated 20A, 125VAC. 5. "Dead-front" construction requiring plug to be inserted and rotated to activate receptacle. J. Thermostats: 1. Contacts close on falling temperature to cycle unit heater on rising temperature to cycle exhaust fan motor. 2. Rated 20A, 120VAC. 3. Range: 46-84 DegF scale. 4. Switch: AUTO/OFF/ON. 5. Provide subbase and mounting plate. 6. Provide standard outlet box for mounting thermostat. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Mount devices where indicated on the Contract Drawings and as scheduled in Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements. C. In masonry, concrete and frame construction, recess mount receptacles and light switches unless device precludes recessed mounting or unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. D. Where more than one receptacle is installed in a room, they shall be symmetrically arranged. E. Set switches and receptacles plumb and vertical to the floor. F. Set recess-mounted switches and receptacles flush with face of walls. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Wiring Devices 16140-5 0992-0197 G. Provide blank plates for empty outlets. END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 . Section IVa . Wiring Devices 16140-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I rl ' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16163 - DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Work covered by this section includes furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials required to install distribution switchboards where indicated. Distribution switchboards shall be dead front type, completely metal enclosed, self-supporting structures independent of wall supports. 1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING DATA A. The Contractor shall submit complete shop drawings and engineering data to the Engineer for review, comment and approval. 1.3 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall store and protect switchboards in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1.4 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor shall provide a 1-year guarantee against defective equipment and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Voltage rating shall be as indicated on the drawings. Switchboards shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form one rigid unit. The sides and rear shall be covered with removable screw-on plates. All edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. B. Equipment shall comply with the latest applicable standards of NEMA PB2 & U.L. 891. Equipment shall be UL labeled and Service Entrance shall be labeled where required. C. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchboard shall be furnished as required. All groups of control wires leaving the switchboard shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips. D. Switchboard shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of being rolled or moved into installation position and provided with contractor supplied floor sills to be set level. E. Furnish cable pull sections or top cable pull boxes where shown of the drawings complete with cable tie-down supports. Where cable pull section or pull boxes contain utility service cables provide utility acceptable sealing means. F. Switchboard shall be manufactured by Square D, Cutler-Hammer, or GE. Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2. . 0992-0197 Section IVa Distribution Switchboards 16163-1 0992-0197 Section/Va Distribution Switchboards 16163-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.2 BUSSING A. All bus bars shall be plated copper with bolted connections at joints. The switchboard(s) shall bear an UL integrated equipment rating as shown on the drawings. Main horizontal bus bars shall be mounted with all 3 phases arranged in the same vertical plane. Provide full capacity neutral where a neutral is indicated on the drawings. B. A ground bus shall be furnished firmly secured to each vertical section structure and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard. An incoming ground lug shall be furnished. Other ground lugs for feeder circuits shall also be supplied as shown in the schedules on the drawings. C. All hardware used on conductors shall be high-tensile strength and zinc plated. All terminals shall be of the anti-turn solderless type suitable for CU or AL cable of sizes indicated. 2.3 SWITCHBOARD TYPE A. Front Accessible Panel Mounted Feeder Devices: 1. All sections of the switchboard shall be 24 inches deep or greater. All sections of the switchboard shall align so that the back of the complete structure may be placed flush against a wall. 2. Construction shall allow maintenance of incoming line terminations, main device connections and all main bus bolted connections to be performed without rear access. The feeder or branch devices shall be removable from the front and shall be panel mounted with the necessary device line and load connection front accessible. 2.4 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. All protective devices shall be fixed insulated case circuit breakers. Frame ratings shall be 400,800, 1200, 1600, 2000,2500,3000, or 4000 amperes. All breakers shall be UL listed for application in their intended enclosures for 100% of their continuous ampere rating. B. Breakers shall be manually operated (MO) unless electrically operated (EO) is indicated on the drawings. The breaker control face plate shall include color- coded visual indicators to indicate contact OPEN and CLOSED positions as well as mechanism CHARGED and DISCHARGED positions. Manual control push buttons on the breaker face shall be provided for opening and closing the breaker. C. Insulated case circuit breakers shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity of 65,000 amperes RMS at rated voltage and a minimum short-time rating of 35,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. D. A selective override circuit shall be provided on breakers having short-time adjustments but without instantaneous adjustments that will allow selectivity up to its RMS symmetrical short-time rating. This selective override circuit shall allow the breaker to ride through a fully offset (asymmetrical) fault equal to its RMS symmetrical short-time rating in a system having an X1R ratio of 6.6 with a Marshal/Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase.2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I maximum single-phase peak current of 2.3 times the RMS symmetrical short- time rating. No deviations from this specification shall be acceptable. E. All breakers shall be provided with a true, two-step stored energy mechanism providing a maximum of five-cycle closing. All the energy required for closing the breaker shall be completely stored and held in readiness pending a release to close action. Manual operated breakers shall be convertible to electrical operation by insertion of an internally mounted motor operator without voiding UL label. Both manual and electrically operated breakers shall have multiple charge/close provisions providing the following possible sequence: Charge- close-recharge-open-close-open. As a safety feature, provisions shall be available to manually discharge the stored energy without closing the breaker. Anti-pump provisions shall be provided as standard for electrically operated breakers and optional for manual breakers with spring release solenoids. 2.5 TRIP UNITS A. Each insulated case circuit breaker shall be equipped with a solid-state tripping system consisting of three (3) current sensors, microprocessor-based trip device and flux-transfer shunt trip. Current sensors shall provide operation and signal function. The trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to provide the basic adjustable time-current protection functions. True RMS sensing circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined trip levels and time delay settings are reached. B. Interchangeable rating plugs shall establish the maximum continuous trip ratings of each circuit breaker. Rating plugs shall be fixed-type as indicated. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not interchangeable between frames, and interlocked such that a breaker cannot be closed and latched with the rating plug removed. C. Complete system selective coordination shall be provided by the addition of the following individually adjustable time-current curve shaping solid-state elements: 1. All breakers shall have adjustments for long delay pick-up and time. 2. Main and Feeders shall have individual adjustments for short delay pick- up and time, and include selective flat or 12t curve shaping. 3. Main and Feeders shall have an adjustable instantaneous pick-up. 4. Breakers, where indicated on the drawings, shall have individually adjustable ground fault current pick-up and time, and include selective flat or 12t curve shaping. D. The microprocessor-based trip unit shall have both powered and unpowered thermal memory to provide protection against cumulative overheating should a number of overload conditions occur in quick succession. E. Trip units shall include zone interlocking capability for the short-time delay and ground fault delay trip functions for improved system coordination. The zone interlocking system shall restrain the tripping of an upstream circuit breaker and Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 . Section IVa Distribution Switchboards 16163-3 0992-0197 . Section IVa " Distribution Switchboards 16163-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .. I allow the circuit breaker closest to the fault to trip with no intentional time delay. In the event that the downstream breaker does not trip, the upstream breaker shall trip after the pre-set time delay. F. For trip units that do not have an instantaneous adjustment, a discriminator circuit shall be provided to prevent the breaker being closed and latched onto a faulted circuit. G. Internal ground fault protection settings shall not exceed 1200 amperes. Provide neutral ground fault sensor for four-wire loads. H. The trip unit shall have an information system that utilizes battery backed-up LEDs to indicate mode of trip following an automatic trip operation. The indication of the mode of trip shall be retained after an automatic trip. A trip reset button shall be provided to turn off the LED indication after an automatic trip. A test pushbutton shall energize an LED to indicate battery status. I. The trip unit shall be provided with a representation of the time-current curve on the trip unit that indicates the protection function settings. The unit shall be continuously self-checking and provide LED indication that the internal circuitry is being monitored and is fully operational. J. The trip unit shall contain an integral test panel with a test selector switch and a test pushbutton. The test selector switch shall enable the user to select the values of test current within a range of available settings. The basic protection functions shall not be affected during test operations. The breaker shall be capable of being tested in either the TRIP or NO TRIP test mode. Provide a keyed receptacle for use with an optional auxiliary power module. The auxiliary power module shall allow the breaker trip unit to be tested with a 120-volt external power source. 2.6 NAMEPLATES A. Engraved nameplates shall be furnished for all mains and feeder circuits including control fuses and also for all indicating lights and instruments. Nameplates shall give item designation and circuit number as well as frame size and appropriate trip rating. Furnish Master Nameplate giving switchboard designation, voltage, ampere rating, short circuit rating, manufacturer's name, general order number and item number. 2.7 FINISH A. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the switchboard shall be properly cleaned and provided with a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating. Color and finish of the switchboard shall be manufacturer's standard and use the manufacturer's standard process. 2.8 INDOOR ENCLOSURE . A. Panel or group-mounted device structures shall have hinged wireway covers allowing easy access to load terminations. Marshall Str~et APCFGeneratorUpgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. Individually mounted feeder devices shall have bolted covers providing a dead front cover, yet allowing the device operating mechanism to extend through the cover for visual trip indication and operation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTS A. After assembly, the manufacturer's standard tests, including any NEMA standard tests, shall be performed. Witnessed tests shall be carried out when specified on the data sheet or purchase order. B. A functional test shall be performed on all metering, control, and protective relay circuits and devices. This shall be accomplished by introducing operating and tripping currents and voltages at the secondary terminals of the instrument transformers. The purchaser shall be notified before this test is performed. 3.2 MARKING AND SHIPPING A. Each separate component of the equipment shall be identified by the purchaser's requisition sheet number and item number by means of a cloth or metal tag securely wired to the component. B. Each housing enclosure for equipment such as circuit breakers, switches, and motor starters shall be provided with a permanently attached nameplate of laminated bakelite or a similar approved material. The name plate shall indicate the tagging or nomenclature shown in the equipment list, and shall be permanently mounted on the face of the enclosure where it will be clearly visible. Lettering shall be white on a black background and shall be at least % inch high. C. Equipment shall be packed to prevent damage to it during shipment. Movable parts such as contactors, relays, etc. shall be wedged to prevent movement. Small parts shall be shipped, bagged, boxed or otherwise protected against damage or loss. D. Each package, case, etc. as shipped shall, in addition to the address, be marked with the purchaser's requisition sheet and item number. Containers shall be marked to show the contents thereof. 3.3 REJECTION A. Equipment or parts thereof and material entering therein, indicating irremediable or injurious defects, improper fabrication, excessive repairs, or that it is not in accordance with the requirements of this specification, shall be subject to rejection. They shall also be subject to rejection if such conditions are discovered after acceptance of the item at the manufacturer's plant. END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades,< Phase 2 ' 0992-0197 ,Section IVa Distribution Switchboards 16163-5 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16231 - GENERATOR SETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK: A. This section shall consist of providing packaged electrical systems and associated controls with all required accessories as specified and shown on the plans. The equipment supplier must be the authorized distributor for each component of the products specified herein. The work includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, tests and training to provide a complete and workable power system, including the generator set and generator set controls, and the transfer switch and transfer switch controls, fuel tank system, and installation as shown on the plans, drawings, and specifications herein. It is the intent of these specifications to have a single source responsibility for the generator set, automatic transfer switch, and inter-related control. B. Any and all exceptions to the published specifications shall be subject to the approval of the engineer. C. The standby power system shall be finished by a single manufacturer who shall be responsible for the design, coordination and testing of the complete system. The entire system shall be installed as shown on the plans, drawings, and specifications herein. D. The equipment shall be produced by a manufacturer who has produced this type of equipment for a period of at least ten (10) years and who maintains a service organization available twenty-four (24) hours a day throughout the year. E. The equipment shall meet the minimum requirements of a level 2 system per NFPA 110, 2005 Edition. F. The specifications contained herein represent minimum requirements. Actual sizing of the generator shall be coordinated with the loads of the equipment supplied. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. It is the intent of this specification to secure an electrical power system that has been tested during design verification, production and at the final job site. All finished equipment shall be of the latest commercial design and will be complete with all of the necessary accessories for complete installation as shown on the plans, drawings and specifications herein. The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code, along with all applicable local codes and regulations. All equipment shall be new and of current production of a national firm that manufactures generator sets and controls, transfer switches, switchgear and assembles them as a complete and coordinated system. There will be one (1) source responsibility for warranty, parts, and service through a local representative with factory-trained servicemen. B. Refer to the Contract Drawings for additional requirements. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Generator Sets 16231-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Generator Sets 16231-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. In addition to the requirements specified in this section, the requirements of specification Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements and the sections referenced therein shall be applied. B. Section 16415 - Automatic Transfer Switches 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. The submittal shall include prototype test certification and specification sheets showing all standard and optional accessories to be supplied, schematic wiring diagrams, dimension drawings and interconnection diagrams identifying by terminal number, each required interconnection between the generator set, the transfer switch, and the remote monitoring/control devices if included elsewhere in these Contract Documents. B. The generator submittal shall include contact information for the twenty-four (24) hour parts and service organization. Generator submittals without this information will be rejected. C. Submit sizing calculations for generator and automatic transfer switch with respect to the actual equipment loads supplied as part of this contract. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS: A. The generator set shall conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards: 1. CSA C22.2, No. 14 - M91 Industrial Control Equipment. 2. EN50082-2, Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements, Part 2: Industrial. Generic Immunity 3. EN55011, Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics of Industrial, Scientific and Medical Equipment. 4. I EC8528 part 4. Control Systems for Generator Sets 5. IEC Std 801.2, 801.3, and 801.5 for susceptibility, conducted and radiated electromagnetic emissions. 6. IEEE446 - Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications 7. Mil Std 4610 -1993. Military Standard, Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics. 8. Mil Std 4620 - 1993. Military Standard, Measurement of Electromagnetic I nterference Characteristics. 9. NFPA70 - National Electrical Code. Equipment shall be suitable for use in systems in compliance to Article 700, 701, and 702. Marshall Street APCF GeneratorUpgradesl Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 10. NFPA99 - Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities 11. NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems. The generator set shall meet all requirements for Level 1 systems. Level 1 prototype tests required by this standard shall have been performed on a complete and functional unit, component level type tests will not substitute for this requirement. 12. UL2200. The generator set shall be listed to UL2200 or submit to an independent third party certification process to verify compliance as installed PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TOOLS, SUPPLIES AND SPARE PARTS A. Tools, supplies and spare parts shall be provided as specified in Section 16010 and as specified for each equipment item. In addition, the following items shall be provided. 1. Provide one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of the engine generator system. Package tools in a metal tool box with minimum of thirty percent (30%) spare space. 2. Two (2) of each type of fuel, oil or air filter provided. 3. Two (2) of each type of accessories belt provided 4. One (1) can of touch up enclosure paint 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. The generator sets shall be Caterpillar, or Cummins. Generator sets shall be rated for continuous standby use. B. The generator set for the Waste Water Treatment Plant Dewatering Building shall provide a minimum of 750 kW when operating at 277/480 volts, 0.8 power factor. The generator set shall be capable of this rating while operating in an ambient condition of 1 050F (40.50C) and 500 feet above sea level. C. Vibration isolators shall be provided between the engine-alternator and heavy- duty steel base 2.3 ENGINE A. The diesel engine shall operate at a governed speed of 1800 rpm. The engine shall be equipped with the following: 1. An electronic isochronous governor capable of +0.25% steady-state frequency regulation. 2. 24 Volt positive engagement solenoid shift-starting motor. ., Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Generator Sets 16231-3 0992-0197 0992-0197 Section IVa Generator Sets 16231-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I.. I 3. Automatic battery charging alternator with solid-state voltage regulation. 4. Positive displacement, full pressure lubrication oil pump, cartridge oil filters, dipstick and oil drain. 5. Dry-type replaceable air cleaner elements for heavy-duty applications. 6. Engine-driven or electric fuel transfer pump capable of lifting fuel 6 feet, fuel filters, and electric solenoid fuel shut-off valve. B. The turbocharged engine shall be fueled with NO.2 diesel C. The engine shall be liquid-cooled by a unit-mounted radiator, blower fan, water pump, and thermostats. This system shall properly cool the engine with up to 0.5 inches H20 static pressure on the fan in an ambient temperature up to 122 of / 50oC. D. The engine shall be EPA Tier 2 Certified minimum. 2.4 ALTERNATOR A. The generator shall be a synchronous, three phase, four pole, 2/3 pitch, form wound, double bearing, and IP23 drip proof. Bearing(s) shall be double shielded and maintenance free. The insulation system shall meet NEMA MG 1 and UL 1446 standards for Class H insulation. Generator temperature rise shall be limited to NEMA MG1 temperature limit of 80C at a 40C ambient. The excitation system shall enable the generator to sustain 300% of rated current for ten seconds during a fault condition and shall improve the immunity of the voltage regulator to non-linear distorting loads. B. The excitation system shall be of brush less construction controlled by a solid- state voltage regulator capable of maintaining voltage within +/- 2% at any constant load from 0% to 100% of rating. The regulator must be isolated to prevent tracking when connected to SCR loads, and provide individual adjustments for voltage range, stability and volts-per-hertz operations; and be protected from the environment by conformal coating. C. The generator set shall meet the transient performance requirements of ISO 8528-5, level G-3. D. The alternator excitation shall be of a permanent magnet exciter design. The alternator having a single maintenance-free bearing, shall be directly connected to the flywheel housing with a semi-flexible coupling between the rotor and the flywheel. 2.5 CONTROLS - GENERATOR SET MOUNTED A. Provide a fully solid-state, microprocessor based, generator set control. The control panel shall be designed and built by the engine manufacturer. The control shall provide all operating, monitoring, and control functions for the generator set. The control panel shall provide real time digital communications to all engine and regulator controls via SAE J 1939. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. Environmental: The generator set control shall be tested and certified to the following environmental conditions: 1. -40oe to + 700e Operating Range 2. 95% humidity non-condensing, 300e to 600C 3. IP22 protection 4. 5% salt spray, 48 hours, +380C, 36.8V system voltage 5. Sinusoidal vibration 4.38's RMS, 24-1000Hz 6. Electromagnetic Capability (89/336/EEC, 91/368/EEC, 93/44/EEe, 93/68/EEC, BS EN 50081-2, 50082-2) 7. Shock: withstand 158 C. Functional Requirements: The following functionality shall be integral to the control panel. 1. The control shall include a minimum 64 x 240 pixel, 28mm x 100mm, white backlight graphical display with text based alarm/event descriptions. 2. The control shall include a minimum of 3-line data display 3. Audible horn for alarm and shutdown with horn silence switch 4. Standard ISO labeling 5. Multiple language capability 6. Remote start/stop control 7. Local run/off/auto control integral to system microprocessor 8. Cooldown timer 9. Speed adjust 10. Lamp test 11. Push button emergency stop button 12. Voltage adjust 13. Voltage regulator V/Hz slope - adjustable 14. Password protected system programming D. Digital Monitoring Capability: The controls shall provide the following digital readouts for the engine and generator. All readings shall be indicated in either metric or English units . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades,> Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Generator Sets 16231-5 Marshal/Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Generator Sets 16231-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Engine a. Engine oil pressure b. Engine oil temperature c. Engine coolant temperature d. Engine RPM e. Battery volts f. Engine hours g. Engine crank attempt counter h. Engine successful start counter i. Service maintenance interval j. Real time clock k. Engine exhaust stack temperature I. Engine main bearing temperature 2. Generator a. Generator AC volts (Line to Line, Line to Neutral and Average) b. Generator AC current (Avg and Per Phase) c. Generator AC Frequency d. Generator kW (Total and Per Phase) e. Generator kVA (Total and Per Phase) f. Generator kVAR (Total and Per Phase) g. Power Factor (Avg and Per Phase) h. Total kW-hr i. Total kVAR-hr j. %kW k. % kV A I. % kV AR m. Generator bearing temperature I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I n. Generator stator winding temperature 3. Voltage Regulation a. Excitation voltage b. Excitation current E. Alarms and Shutdowns: The control shall monitor and provide alarm indication and subsequent shutdown for the following conditions. All alarms and shutdowns are accompanied by a time, date, and engine hour stamp that are stored by the control panel for first and last occurrence: 1. Engine Alarm/Shutdown a. Low oil pressure alarm/shutdown b. High coolant temperature alarm/shutdown c. Loss of coolant shutdown d. Overspeed shutdown e. Overcrank shutdown f. Emergency stop depressed shutdown g. Low coolant temperature alarm h. Low battery voltage alarm i. High battery voltage alarm j. Control switch not in auto position alarm k. Battery charger failure alarm 2. Generator Alarm/Shutdown a. Generator over voltage b. Generator under voltage c. Generator over frequency d. Generator under frequency e. Generator reverse power f. Generator overcurrent g. Voltage Regulator Alarm/Shutdown h. Loss of excitation alarm/shutdown Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section lVa Generator Sets 16231-7 0992-0197 Section IVa Generator Sets 16231-8 I I I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 ,I .. 1 L Instantaneous over excitation alarm/shutdown j. Time over excitation alarm/shutdown k. Rotating diode failure I. Loss of sensing m. Loss of PMG F. Inputs and Outputs 1. Programmable Digital Inputs: The Controller shall include the ability to accept eighteen (18) programmable digital input signals. The signals may be programmed for either high or low activation using programmable Normally Open or Normally Closed contacts. 2. Digital Outputs: The control shall include the ability to operate fourteen (14) programmable relay output signals, integral to the controller. The output relays shall be rated for 2A @ 30VDC and consist of six (6) Form A (Normally Open) contacts and two (10) Form C (Normally Open & Normally Closed) contacts. 3. Discrete Outputs: The control shall include the ability to operate two (2) discrete outputs, integral to the controller, which are capable of sinking up to 300mA. G. Maintenance: All engine, voltage regulator, control panel and accessory units shall be accessible through a single electronic service tool. The following maintenance functionality shall be integral to the generator set control. 1. Engine running hours display 2. Service maintenance interval (running hours or calendar days) 3. Engine crank attempt counter 4. Engine successful starts counter 5. 20 events are stored in control panel memory 6. Programmable cycle timer that starts and runs the generator for a predetermined time. The timer shall use 14 user-programmable sequences that are repeated in a 7-day cycle. Each sequence shall have the following programmable set points: a. Day of week b. Time of day to start c. Duration of cycle H. Remote Communications Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase, 2.. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. The control shall include Modbus RTU communications as standard via RS-485 half duplex with configurable baud rates from 2.4k to 57.6k. 2. The control shall provide Monitoring Software with the following functionality a. Provide access to all date and events on generator set communications network b. Provide remote control capability for the generator set c. Ability to monitor up to 12 generator sets d. Ability to communicate via Modbus RTU or remote modem I. Local Annunciation: Provide a local, control panel mounted, annunciator to meet the requirements of NFPA 110, Level 1. 1. Annunciators shall be networked directly to the generator set control 2. Local Annunciator shall include a lamp test pushbutton, alarm horn and alarm acknowledge pushbutton 3. Provide the following individual light indications for protection and diagnostics a. Overcrank b. Low coolant temperature c. High coolant temperature warning d. High coolant temperature shutdown e. Low oil pressure warning f. Low oil pressure shutdown g. Overs peed h. Low coolant level i. EPS supplying load j. Control switch not in auto k. High battery voltage I. Low battery voltage m. Battery charger AC failure n. Emergency stop Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Generator Sets 16231-9 0992-0197 Section IVa Generator Sets 16231-10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I o. Spare p. Spare J. Provide a remote annunciator to meet the requirements of NFPA 110, Level 1. 1. The annunciator shall provide remote annunciation of all points stated above and shall incorporate ring-back capability so that after silencing the initial alarm, any subsequent alarms will sound the horn. 2. Ability to be located up to 800 ft from the generator set 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. An one hundred percent (100%) rated line circuit breaker of 1200 amperes, 1200 amps sensor, 600 volt rated, molded case type, generator mounted for the Waste Water Treatment Plant Dewatering Building generator. B. Engine block heater. Thermostatically controlled and sized to maintain manufacturers recommended engine coolant temperature to meet the start-up requirements of NFPA-99 and NFPA-110, Level 1. C. A resettable line current sensing circuit breaker with inverse time versus current response shall be furnished which protects the generator from damage due to its own high current capability. This breaker shall not trip within the ten (10) seconds specified above to allow selective tripping of down-stream fuses or circuit breakers under a fault condition. This breaker shall not automatically reset, preventing restoration of voltage if maintenance is being performed. A field current-sensing breaker will not be acceptable. 1. Battery rack, and battery cables, capable of holding the manufacturer's recommended batteries, shall be supplied. 2. 12-volt lead-antimony battery(ies) capable of delivering the manufacturer's recommended minimum cold-cranking Amps required at OOF, per SAE Standard J-537, shall be supplied. 3. Automatic float and equalize battery charger with plus or minus one percent (+/- 1%) constant voltage regulation from no load to full load over plus or minus ten percent (+/-10%) AC input line variation, current limited during engine cranking and short circuit conditions, temperature compensated for ambient temperatures from -40oC to +60oC, five percent (5%) accurate voltmeter and ammeter, fused, reverse polarity and transient protected. 4. Two (2) flexible fuel lines rated at a minimum of 2570F and 100 psi ending in pipe thread. 5. Air cleaner restriction indicator to indicate the need for maintenance of the air cleaners. 6. Run Relay to provide a three-pole, double-throw relay with 10 amps at 250 VAC contacts for indicating that the generator is running. Marshall Street APCF. Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 7. Common Failure relay to remotely signal auxiliary faults, emergency stop, . high engine temperature, low oil pressure, overcrank, and overs peed via one single-pole, double-throw relay with 10 amps at 120 V AC contacts. 2.7 SILENCER EXHAUST AND EXHAUST PIPING (DEWATERING BUILDING GENERA TOR) A. A critical grade silencer, companion flanges, and flexible stainless steel exhaust fitting properly sized shall be furnished and installed according to the manufacturer's recommendation. Mounting shall be provided by the contractor as shown on the drawings. The silencer shall be mounted so that its weight is not supported by the engine nor will exhaust system growth due to thermal expansion be imposed on the engine. Exhaust pipe shall be stainless steel and insulated. Generator set supplier shall provide data to assist exhaust piping sizing to confirm that the exhaust piping is sufficient to ensure that exhaust backpressure does not exceed the maximum limitations specified by the engine manufacturer. 2.8 FUEL SYSTEM A. The fuel system shall be integral with the engine. In addition to the standard fuel filters provided by the engine manufacturer, there shall also be installed a primary fuel filter/water separator in the fuel inlet line to the engine. All fuel piping shall be black iron or flexible fuel hose rated for this service. No galvanized piping will be permitted. Flexible fuel lines shall be minimally rated for 300 degrees F and 100 psi. 2.9 DIESEL FUEL LINE A. The diesel fuel system shall be meet the requirements of and permitted with the Pinellas County Health Department (PCHD). B. The diesel fuel system shall be installed by Florida state Licensed Petroleum Storage System Specialty Contractor. C. Fuel line system shall be provided with valves, fittings, filters and protective devices as required by PCHD and also as shown on the contract documents. D. Double Walled Interconnecting Fuel Line System: 1. Double wall fuel line lines for fuel supply and return shall be supplied between the diesel tank and the generator. 2. The generator supplier shall size the fuel supply and return lines internal diameter so that the fuel can be pumped by the generator fuel pump for full generator capacity at all operational temperatures. 2.10 DOUBLE WALL FUEL OIL DAY TANK WITH RUPTURE CONTAINMENT A. Provide a 50 gallon double wall rectangular day tank with 135% outer rupture chamber constructed of reinforced 10 gauge steel, with channel side supports, 1" NPT drains for primary and secondary tank, 4" NPT inspection/emergency vent ports, visual fuel level gauge, vent cap, and a 2" lockable manual fill cap. Tank Marshal/Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Generator Sets 16231-11 0992-0197 .Section IVa Generator Sets 16231-12 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I interior shall be epoxy-coated and exterior shall be finished in an oil-resistant textured enamel. Day tank shall be per UL 142 specifications as manufactured by Phillips Pump LLC, Bridgeport CT. B. Tank connections shall include 1" fuel inlets, 1" NPT engine supply and engine return ports, required vent openings, 2" NPT manual fill, and 1" overflow port. Fuel oil supply inlet, engine return and engine supply ports shall have extended drop tubes to prevent surging in the day tank. C. Provide day tank level control probe arranged to monitor the fuel oil level. Probe shall be designed for installation in the top of the tank to control high-level alarm/return pump on, supply pumps off, lead supply pump on, low-level alarm/lag supply pump on and critical low-level conditions. D. Provide (2) fuel oil supply pumps with a capacity to allow operation of the generator at full power at any fuel level and to accommodate piping and fuel filter losses when operating with diesel fuel. Each pump shall be close coupled to an open drip-proof motor. Pumps and motors shall be mounted on tank top and hard-piped into tank top. Each supply pump suction shall include a normally closed solenoid valve which will open when that supply pump is engaged. E. Provide a fuel oil return pump. Pump shall be close coupled to an open drip- proof motor. Pump and motor shall be mounted on tank top and hard-piped into tank top. F. Provide in secondary containment a rupture basin float switch with alarm and pump shut down which functions upon detection of oil in the rupture basin. G. Provide a 3 foot high stand for day tank system in order to elevate the day tank system above flooding hazard. H. Provide pump set-mounted system control cabinet to monitor and control the fuel oil delivery system in response to day tank demand. Cabinet shall be completely pre-wired, tested and shipped as an integrated system to insure jobsite reliability and shall be capable of operating on 120 volt, single phase, 60 Hz electrical service. Control strategy shall be microprocessor-based. Enclosure shall be constructed of a minimum of 14 gauge steel, continuously welded and constructed to NEMA 1 standards. Cabinet interior and exterior shall be primed and finished in a durable chemical-resistant enamel suitable for industrial environments. PLC shall have sufficient I/O to accomplish all necessary control functions. The control strategy shall be burned into an EPROM at the factory, and shall be safeguarded against re-configuration by unauthorized or unqualified personnel. All cabinet front devices shall be identified by black phenolic labels with engraved white lettering. Cabinet shall consist of but not be limited to the following: * Microprocessor for pump control * Magnetic motor starter for each pump * Motor circuit breaker for each pump * Manual-Off-Auto illuminated mode selector switch for each pump * Press to test button for all alarms and indicating lights .. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I * Alarm silence / System reset and system test push-buttons * Alarm buzzer * Discrete output for common alarm to interface with the BMS or SCADA * System indicating alarms as follows: * (1) Power on light * (1) Day tank high level alarm * (1) Day tank low level alarm * (1) Day tank critical low level alarm * (1) Day tank rupture basin leak detected alarm I. Operation: As the fuel in the day tank is consumed by the generator and the level drops, the lead supply pump shall engage when the supply pump on float makes on drop. The lead supply pump shall remain engaged until the supply pump off float breaks on rise. The system will automatically alternate the supply pumps upon each successive demand call of the day tank. If a supply pump is removed for service or turned off, the system shall automatically select the opposite supply pump when called to engage per the demands of the day tanks. Low Level Alarm: If the fuel level continues to drop in the day tank while the lead supply pump is engaged, the lag supply pump on float will make on drop and the system will engage the lag supply pump. The alarm will sound and the system will display a low level alarm condition. Critical Low Level Alarm: If the fuel level continues to drop in the day tank with the lead and lag supply pumps engaged, the critical low level float will make on drop. The alarm will sound and the system will display a critical low level alarm condition. High Level Alarm: If fuel continues to rise in the day tank, the high level float will make on rise. The system will sound the alarm and display a high level warning. The supply pumps will be locked out until the alarm condition is cleared and the system is reset. Rupture Basin Leak Detected: If the leak sensor located in the day tank's rupture basin detects fuel, the system will sound the alarm and display a day tank rupture basin leak warning. The supply pumps will be locked out until the alarm condition is cleared and the system is reset. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TESTING A. To assure that the equipment has been designed and built to the highest reliability and quality standards, the manufacturer and/or local representative shall be responsible for three (3) separate tests: design prototype tests, final production tests and site tests. B. Design Prototype Tests: Components of the emergency system such as the engine/generator set, transfer switch, and accessories shall not be subjected to prototype tests since the tests are potentially damaging. Rather, similar design prototypes and preproduction models shall be subject to the following tests. 1. Maximum power (kW). 0992-0197 Section IVa Generator Sets 16231-13 . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa . Generator Sets 16231-14 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. Maximum motor starting (kVA) at thirty-five percent (35%) instantaneous voltage dip. 3. Alternator temperature rise by embedded thermocouple and/or by resistance method per NEMA MG1-32.40. 4. Governor speed regulation under steady-state and transient conditions. 5. Voltage regulation and generator transient response. 6. Harmonic analysis, voltage waveform deviation, and telephone influence factor. 7. Three-phase short circuit tests. 8. Alternator cooling air flow. 9. Torsional analysis to verify that the generator set is free of harmful torsional stresses. 10. Endurance testing. C. Production Tests: Each generator set shall be tested under varying loads with guards and exhaust system in place. Tests shall include: 1. Single-step load pickup. 2. Transient and steady-state governing. 3. Safety shutdown device testing. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Rated Power @ 0.8 PF 6. Maximum Power. 7. Upon request, arrangements to either witness this test will be made, or a certified test record will be sent prior to shipment. D. Site Tests: An installation check, start-up and load test shall be performed by the manufacturer's local representative. The Owner and Engineer shall be notified at least two (2) weeks prior of the time and date of the site test. Contractor shall provide fuel for testing. The tests shall include: 1. Fuel, lubricating oil and antifreeze shall be checked for conformity to the manufacturer's recommendations, under the environmental conditions present and expected. 2. Accessories that normally function while the set is standing by shall be checked prior to cranking the engine. These shall include: block heaters, battery charger, alternator strip heaters, remote annunciator, etc. . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3. Start-up under test mode to check for exhaust leaks, path of exhaust gases outside the building, cooling air flow, movement during starting and stopping, vibration during running, normal and emergency line-to-Iine voltage and frequency, and phase rotation. 4. Automatic start-up by means of simulated power outage to test remote- automatic starting, transfer of the load, and automatic shutdown. Prior to this test, all transfer switch timers shall be adjusted for proper system coordination. Engine coolant temperature, oil pressure, and battery charge level along with generator set voltage, amperes, and frequency shall be monitored throughout the test. 5. Load bank test. An external load bank shall be connected to the system to load the generator set to the nameplate kW rating. Generator shall operate into the load bank at rated power for a minimum of four hours. 6. Contractor shall provide a full tank of fuel at the completion of successful testing of the generator system. 3.2 WARRANTY & MAINTENANCE A. A five (5) year service agreement and warranty shall be provided and shall include complete corrective and preventative maintenance for five (5) years from the date of substantial completion. The service agreement shall include adjustment to the generator set, transfer switch and switchgear controls as required, and certification in the owner's maintenance log of repairs made and proper functioning of all systems. All required materials and labor shall be provided. Service agreement and warranty shall have no deductible. B. Optional warranties shall be available to extend Parts & Labor coverage to 5 or 10 years. C. The generator set manufacturer and its distributor shall maintain a twenty-four (24) hour parts and service organization within 100 miles of the project site. This organization shall be regularly engaged in a maintenance contract program to perform preventive maintenance and service on equipment provided. END OF SECTION 0992-0197 Section IVa Generator Sets 16231-15 ,Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16415 - AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section shall consist of providing a packaged electrical system and associated controls with all required accessories as specified and shown on the plans. The equipment supplier must be the authorized distributor for each component of the products specified herein. The work includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, tests and training to provide a complete and workable power system, including the generator set and generator set controls, and the transfer switch and transfer switch controls, and installation as shown on the plans, drawings and specifications herein. It is the intent of these specifications to have a single source responsibility for the generator set and automatic transfer switch. B. Any and all exceptions to the published specifications shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. C. The standby power system shall be finished by a single manufacturer who shall be responsible for the design, coordination, and testing of the complete system. The entire system shall be installed as shown on the plans, drawings, and specifications herein. D. The equipment shall be produced by a manufacturer who has produced this type of equipment for a period of at least ten (10) years and who maintains a service organization available twenty-four (24) hours a day throughout the year. E. The equipment shall meet the minimum requirements of a level 2 system per NFPA 110, 2005 Edition. F. Automatic transfer switch ATS-2A shall be provided in a NEMA 1 Enclosure. The automatic transfer switch shall be rated 1,000 Amp, 4 pole, 480V 3 Phase, 4 wire. G. Installation of new ATS shall allow either the new ATS or the existing ATS-1 to initiate generator operation. H. The specifications contained herein represent minimum requirements. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. It is the intent of this specification to secure an electrical power system that has been tested during design verification, production and at the final job site. All finished equipment shall be of the lasted commercial design and will be complete with all of the necessary accessories for complete installation as shown on the plans, drawings, and specifications herein. The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code, along with all applicable local codes and regulations. All equipment shall be new and of current production of a national firm that manufactures generator sets and controls, transfer switches, switchgear and assembles them as a complete and coordinated system. There will be one (1) source responsibility for warranty, parts and service through a local representative with factory-trained servicemen. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Automatic Transfer Switches 0992-0197 16415-1 0992-0197 . Section IVa Automatic Transfer Switches 16415-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. Refer to the Contract Drawings for additional requirements. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. In addition to the requirements specified in this section, the requirements of specification Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements and the sections referenced therein shall be applied. B. Section 16231 - Generator Sets 1.4 SUBMITTAL A. The submittal shall include prototype test certification and specification sheets showing all standard and optional accessories to be supplied, schematic wiring diagrams, dimension drawings, and interconnection diagrams identifying by terminal number, each required interconnection between the generator set and the transfer switch if it is included elsewhere in these specifications. B. Submit (6) copies of a detailed Operations and Maintenance Manual covering all components included as part of the Automatic Transfer Switch Equipment. 1.5 COMPLIANCE WITH CODES AND STANDARDS A. The A TS shall conform to the requirements of: 1. UL 1008--Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches 2. NFPA 70--National Electrical Code, including use in emergency and standby systems in accordance with Articles 517,700 3. NFPA 99--Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities 4. NFPA 110--Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems 5. IEEE Standard 446--Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems (Orange Book) 6. IEEE Standard 241--Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings (Gray Book) 7. NEMA Standard IC10 (formerly ICS 2-447) Automatic Transfer Switches. 8. UL 508 - Standard for industrial Control Equipment 9. EN61 000-4-5 Surge Immunity Class 4 (voltage sensing and programmable inputs only) 10. EN61 000-4-4 Fast Transient Immunity Severity Level 4 11. IEC Specifications for EMI/EMC Immunity as follows: a. CISPR 1 Radiated Emissions Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I b. IEC 1000-4-2, Electrostatic Discharge c. IEC 1000-4-3, Radiated Electromagnetic Fields d. IEC 1000-4-4, Electrical Fast Transient (Bursts) e. IEC 1000-4-5, Surge Voltage f. IEC 1000-4-6, Conducted RF Disturbances g. IEC 1000-4-8, Magnetic Fields h. IEC 1000-4-11, Voltage Variations and Interruptions 1.6 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTUERS A. Automatic transfer switches shall be by one of the following manufacturers: 1. ASCO Power Technologies 7000 Series, service entrance rated (407- 774-4565) 2. Onan - Cummins Power Command with service entrance breaker PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MECHANICALLY HELD TRANSFER SWITCH, SERVICE ENTRANCE RATED A. The transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The electrical operator shall be a momentarily energized, single-solenoid mechanism. Main operators which include overcurrent disconnect devices, linear motors or gears shall not be acceptable. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only two possible positions, normal or emergency. B. All transfer switch sizes shall use only one type of main operator for ease of maintenance and commonality of parts. C. The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by momentary outages, so that contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and contact temperature rise is minimized for maximum reliability and operating life. D. All main contacts shall be silver composition. Switches rated 600 amperes and above shall have segmented, blow-on construction for high withstand and close- on capability and be protected by separate arcing contacts. E. Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch without disassembly of operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors. Switches rated 600 amps and higher shall have front removable and replaceable contacts. All stationary and moveable contacts shall be replaceable without removing power conductors and/or bus bars. F. Designs utilizing components of molded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or parts thereof, which are not intended for continuous duty, repetitive switching or transfer between two active power sources are not acceptable. 0992-0197 Section IVa Automatic Transfer Switches 16415-3 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2. Parameter Sources Dropout I Trip Pickup I Reset I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I G. Where neutral conductors must be switched as shown on the plans, the ATS shall be provided with fully rated overlapping neutral transfer contacts. The neutrals of the normal and emergency power sources shall be connected together only during the transfer and retransfer operation and remain connected together until power source contacts close on the source to which the transfer is being made. The overlapping neutral contacts shall not overlap for a period greater than 100 milliseconds. H. Transfer switch for Dewatering Building MCC-8 shall be provided with a 1000 Amp Frame, 1000 Amp trip incoming line breaker with Ground fault Protection. Transfer switch shall be 4 Pole and service entrance labeled. 2.2 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLER A. The controller's sensing and logic shall be provided by a single built-in microprocessor for maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and the ability to communicate via Modbus RTU and an optional serial communication module. B. A single controller shall provide twelve selectable nominal voltages for maximum application flexibility and minimal spare part requirements. Voltage sensing shall be true RMS type and shall be accurate to :t 1 % of nominal voltage. Frequency sensing shall be accurate to :!: 0.2%. C. The controller shall be connected to the transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring harness. The harness shall include a keyed disconnect plug to enable the controller to be disconnected from the transfer switch for routine maintenance. D. All customer connections shall be wired to a common terminal block E. The controller shall meet or exceed the requirements for Electromagnetic Compatibility 2.3 ENCLOSURE A. The A TS shall be furnished in a NEMA type 1 enclosure unless otherwise shown on the plans. 2.4 CONTROLLER DISPLAY AND KEYPAD A. A four line, 20 character LCD display and keypad shall be an integral part of the controller for viewing all available data and setting desired operational parameters. B. All instructions and controller settings shall be easily accessible, readable and accomplished without the use of codes, calculations, or instruction manuals. 2.5 VOLTAGE, FREQUENCY AND PHASE ROTATION SENSING A. Voltage and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources (as noted below) shall be continuously monitored, with the following pickup, dropout, and trip setting capabilities (values shown as % of nominal unless otherwise specified): 0992-0197 Section IVa Automatic Transfer Switches 16415-4 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2, I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Undervoltage Overvoltage U nderfreq uency Overfrequency Voltage unbalance N&E,3<1> N&E,3<1> N&E N&E N&E 70 to 98% 102 to 115% 85 to 98% 102 to 110% 5 to 20% 85 to 100% 2% below trip 90 to 100% 2% below trip 1 % below dropout B. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within :!: 0.5% over an operating temperature range of -20oC to 60oC. C. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1 % increments either locally with the display and keypad or remotely via serial communications port access. D. The controller shall be capable (when activated by the keypad or through the serial port) of sensing the phase rotation of both the normal and emergency sources. The source shall be considered unacceptable if the phase rotation is not the preferred rotation selected (ABC or CBA). E. Source status screens shall be provided for both normal & emergency to pro-vide digital readout of voltage on all 3 phases, frequency, and phase rotation. 2.6 TIME DELAYS A. An adjustable time delay of 0 to 6 seconds shall be provided to override momentary normal source outages and delay all transfer and engine starting signals. Capability shall be provided to extend this time delay to 60 minutes by providing an external 24 VDC power supply. B. A time delay shall be provided on transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes, for controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency. C. Two time delay modes (which are independently adjustable) shall be provided on re-transfer to normal. One time delay shall be for actual normal power failures and the other for the test mode function. The time delays shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable. D. A time delay shall be provided on shut down of engine generator for cool down, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. E. A time delay activated output signal shall also be provided to drive an external relay(s) for selective load disconnect control. F. All time delays shall be adjustable in 1-second increments, except the extended parallel time, which shall be adjustable in .01 second increments. G. All time delays shall be adjustable by using the LCD display and keypad or with a remote device connected to the serial communications port. 2.7 ADDITIONAL FEATURES A. A three position momentary-type test switch shall be provided for the test I automatic I reset modes. The test position will simulate a normal source failure. 0992-0197 Section IVa Automatic Transfer Switches 16415-5 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section /Va Automatic Transfer Switches 16415-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I The reset position shall bypass the time delays on either transfer to emergency or retransfer to normal. B. A set of DPDT gold-flashed contacts rated 10 amps, 32 VDC shall be provided for a low-voltage engine start signal. The start signal shall prevent dry cranking of the engine by requiring the generator set to reach proper output, and run for the duration of the cool down setting, regardless of whether the normal source restores before the load is transferred. C. Auxiliary contacts, rated 10 amps, 250 VAC shall be provided consisting of one contact, closed when the A TS is connected to the normal source and one contact closed, when the ATS is connected to the emergency source. In addition provide contacts for source availability of both normal and emergency. D. LED indicating lights (industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided; one to indicate when the A TS is connected to the normal source (green) and one to indicate when the A TS is connected to the emergency source (red). E. LED indicating lights (industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided and energized by controller outputs. The lights shall provide true source availability of the normal and emergency sources, as determined by the voltage sensing trip and reset settings for each source. F. Provide the ability to select "commiUno commit to transfer" to determine whether the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if the normal source restores before the generator is ready to accept the load. G. Terminals shall be provided for a remote contact which opens to signal the ATS to transfer to emergency and for remote contacts which open to inhibit transfer to emergency and/or retransfer to normal. Both of these inhibit signals can be activated through the keypad or serial port. H. An Inphase monitor shall be provided in the controller. The monitor shall control transfer so that motor load inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents, and shall not require external control of power sources. The inphase monitor shall be specifically designed for and be the product of the A TS manufacturer. I. The controller shall be capable of accepting a normally open contact that will allow the transfer switch to function in a non-automatic mode using an external control device. J. Engine Exerciser: The controller shall provide an internal engine exerciser. The engine exerciser shall allow the user to program up to seven different exercise routines. At the end of the specified duration the switch shall transfer the load back to normal and run the generator for the specified cool down period. A 10- year life battery that supplies power to the real time clock in the event of a power loss will maintain all time and date information. K. System Status: The controller LCD display shall include a "System Status" screen which shall be readily accessible from any point in the menu by depressing the "ESC" key a maximum of two times. This screen shall display a clear description of the active operating sequence and switch position. Controllers that require multiple screens to determine system status or display Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I "coded" system status messages, which must be explained by references in the operator's manual, are not permissible. L. Self Diagnostics: The controller shall contain a diagnostic screen for the purpose of detecting system errors. This screen shall provide information on the status input signals to the controller which may be preventing load transfer commands from being completed. M. Communications Interface - The controller shall be capable of interfacing, through an optional serial communication module over Modbus. N. Data Logging - The controller shall have the ability to log data and to maintain the last 99 events, even in the event of total power loss. The following events shall be time and date stamped and maintained in a non-volatile memory: 1. Event Logging a. Data and time and reason for transfer normal to emergency. b. Data and time and reason for transfer emergency to normal. c. Data and time and reason for engine start. d. Data and time engine stopped. e. Data and time emergency source available. f. Data and time emergency source not available. 2. Statistical Data a. Total number of transfers. b. Total number of transfers due to source failure. c. Total number of days controller is energized. d. Total number of hours both normal and emergency sources available. O. Communications Module: An interface shall be installed in the A TS controller to enable Modbus communications. This module shall allow for the seamless integration of existing or new communication transfer devices. P. Ethernet Communication Card: Provide Ethernet Communication Card to allow for A TS monitoring of switch information including, time delays, switch position, source availability 2.8 WITHSTAND AND CLOSING RATINGS A. The A TS shall be rated to close on and withstand the available RMS symmetrical short circuit current at the A TS terminals with the type of overcurrent protection shown on the plans. B. The A TS shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1008 and be labeled in accordance with that standard's 1 % and 3 cycle, long-time ratings. A TS's which are not tested and labeled with 1 % and 3 cycle (any breaker) ratings and have series, or specific breaker ratings only, are not acceptable. C. For coordination purposes, A TS's 600 ampere and larger shall have short time withstand ratings as follows: 600-1200 Ampere 36,000 KAIC for 18 Cycles Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2. Section IVa Automatic Transfer Switches 0992-0197 16415-7 0992-0197 n .SectionJVa Automatic Transfer Switches 16415-8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1600-4000 Ampere 65,000 KAIC for 30 Cycles 2.9 TESTS AND CERTIFICATION A. The complete A TS shall be factory tested to ensure proper operation of the individual components and correct overall sequence of operation and to ensure that the operating transfer time, voltage, frequency and time delay settings are in compliance with the specification requirements. B. The ATS manufacturer shall be certified to ISO 9001 International Quality Standard and the manufacturer shall have third party certification verifying quality assurance in design/development, production, installation and servicing in accordance with ISO 9001. 2.10 SERVICE REPRESENTATION A. The A TS manufacturer shall maintain a national service organization of company-employed personnel located throughout the contiguous United States. Factory service technicians must be on call 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. In addition, the manufacturer shall have a service technician located within a 75- mile radius of the jobsite. Third party service centers do not met this requirement. B. The manufacturer shall maintain records of each switch, by serial number, for a minimum of 20 years. 2.11 WARRANTY A. The A TS shall be provided with the following warranty: 1. Five (5) Years Parts & Labor 2. Includes parts, labor, and associated travel/lodging expenses if required. 3. Ten (10) Years Main Contacts 4. Optional warranties shall be available to extend Parts & Labor coverage to 5 or 10 years. 2.12 POWER MANAGER A. Furnish load side A TS data monitors as shown to monitor all functions specified below. B. The Power Manager shall be accurate to 1 % measured, 2% computed values and display resolution to .1 %. Voltage and current for all phases shall be sampled simultaneously to assure high accuracy in conditions of low power factor or large waveform distortions (harmonics). . " ,Marshall StreetAPCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 " I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. Each Power Manager shall be capable of interfacing with an optional communications module to permit information to be sent to central location for display, analysis, and logging. D. The Power Manager shall be applied in 3-phase, three wire circuits. All CT's shall be mounted on the load side. E. All setup parameters required by the Power Manager shall be stored in non- volatile memory and retained in the event of a control power interruption. 1. The following metered readings shall be communicated by the Power Manager, via serial communication, when equipped with optional serial communications module: a. Current, per phase RMS and neutral (if applicable) b. Current Unbalance % c. Voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral d. Voltage Unbalance % e. Real power (KW), per phase and 3-phase total f. Apparent power (KVA), per phase and 3-phase total g. Reactive power (KVAR), per phase and 3-phase total h. Power factor, 3-phase total & per phase i. Frequency j. Accumulated Energy, (MWH, MVAH, and MVARH) k. Provide (8) solid state status inputs. I. Provide four (4) relay output contacts 2. The Power Manager shall be equipped with a continuous duty, long-life, 4 line x 20 character LCD backlit display to provide local access to the following metered quantities 3. Power Manager shall be provided with a Modbus output for interface with building Scada system. 2.13 SPARE PARTS A. The vendor shall include a listing of his recommended spare parts and unit prices. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SYSTEM A. Installation: 1. Automatic transfer system shall be provided with adequate lifting means for ease of installation of wall or floor mounted enclosures. 2. Provide access and working space as indicated or as required. B. Adjustments: Tighten assembled bolted connections with appropriate tools to manufacturer's torque recommendations prior to first energization. 3.2 INSTALLATION 0992-0197 Section IVa Automatic Transfer Switches 16415-9 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 . Section IVa Automatic Transfer Switches 16415-10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the contract drawings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide the services of a qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative to assist the contractor in installation and start-up of the equipment specified under this section. The manufacturer's representative shall provide technical direction and assistance to the contractor in general assembly of the equipment, connections and adjustments, and testing of the assembly and components contained therein. B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's field start-up report. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A qualified factory-trained manufacturer's representative shall certify in writing that the equipment has been installed, adjusted and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of the manufacturer's representative's certification. 3.5 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide a training session for up to five (5) Owner's representatives at a jobsite location determined by the owner. B. A manufacturer's qualified representative shall conduct the training session. The training program shall consist of the instruction on the operation of the assembly, circuit breakers and major components within the assembly. 3.6 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the contract drawings. B. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the Contractor. C. The equipment shall be installed and checked in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.7 FIELD SERVICE ORGANIZATION A. The manufacturer of the A TS shall also have a national service organization that is available throughout the contiguous United States and is available on call 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. END OF SECTION Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16430 - GENERATOR QUICK CONNECT ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install, where indicated, a free-standing, dead- front type low voltage Generator Quick Connection Assembly, utilizing generator lugs and receptacle connections as specified herein, and as shown on the Contract Drawings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. The low voltage distribution switchboards and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable following standards: 1. NEMA PB-2 2. UL Standard 891 1.3 SUBMITTALS - FOR CONSTRUCTION A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.04, and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process 2. Wiring diagrams 3. Certified production test reports 4. Installation information 5. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage details as specified 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The Generator Quick Connection Assembly shall be UL labeled. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided with each assembly shipped and shall include instruction leaflets, instruction bulletins and renewal parts lists where applicable, for the complete assembly and each major component. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 ., .. Section IVa Generator Quick-Connect Enclosure Assemblies 0992-0197 16430-1 B. General Electric I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton / Cutler-Hammer products C. Square-D The listing of specific manufacturers above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed above are not relieved from meeting these specifications in their entirety. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered only if pre-approved by the Engineer ten (10) days prior to bid date. 2.2 RATINGS A. The assembly shall be rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short- circuit conditions when connected directly to a power source having available fault current 65,000 amperes symmetrical as shown on the drawings. B. Voltage rating to be as indicated on the drawings. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Generator Quick Connect Assembly shall consist of a bussed system to Cam- Lock connectors to connect a back-up generator or a load test bank as shown on the Contract Drawings 2.4 BUS A. All bus bars shall be silver-plated copper. Bus ampacity of 400 to 4000 Amps shall be based on NEMA standard temperature rise criteria of 65 degrees Cover a 40 degrees C ambient (outside the enclosure). B. Provide a full capacity neutral bus where a neutral bus is indicated on the drawings. C. A copper ground bus (minimum 1/4 x 2 inch), shall be furnished firmly secured to each vertical section structure, and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard. D. All hardware used on conductors shall be high-tensile strength and zinc-plated. All bus joints shall be provided with conical spring-type washers. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgr:ade~1 Phase 2 " Section IVa Generator Quick-Connect Enclosure Assemblies 0992-0197 16430-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.5 WIRING/TERMINA TIONS A. The Generator Quick Connection Assembly shall be provided with mechanical lugs and earn-type receptacle assembly for connection of generator power phases (A, B, C), neutral and grounding conductors. All connections for phases, neutral, ground, etc., shall be clearly marked via labeling. Color Coding of connectors shall be Clearwater standard. B. Each single pole earn-type receptacle shall be rated for no less than 400 amps at 90 deg C. Multiple receptacles per phase, neutral, and ground shall be utilized when amperages over 400 are requested. Contact material of the receptacle shall be composed of brass. C. Cam-type receptacles must be suitable for use in outdoor environments. D. Single pole Cam-type receptacles shall be UL 498 listed for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles and UL 1691. E. Cam-type receptacles shall be compatible with established Owner standard equipment, utilizing Hubble connectors as listed below. 1. HBLSCO I Snap Covers (orange) 2. HBLSCW I Snap Covers (white) 3. HBLSCY I Snap Covers (yellow) 4. HBLSCGN I Snap Covers (green) 5. HBLSCBN I Snap Covers (brown) 6. HBLFRGN I Female Receptacle (green) 7. HBLFRBN I Female Receptacle (brown) 8. HBLFRO I Female Receptacle (orange) 9. HBLFRW I Female Receptacle (white) 10. HBLFRY I Female Receptacle. (yellow) 11. HBL400F - Female Camlok, compatible with HBL400M - Male Camlok. 2.6 ENCLOSURES A. Generator Quick Connection Assembly shall be provided in a stainless steel NEMA 4 enclosure. The quick connect devices shall be mounted on a stainless steel dead-front panel with a padlockable outer door to secure the connections when not in use. When the connectors are in use with the door open, the connection system shall meet NEMA 3R requirements. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Generator Quick-Connect Enclosure Assemblies 0992-0197 16430-3 END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.7 NAMEPLATES A. Engraved nameplates, mounted on the face of the assembly, shall be furnished for all main and feeder circuits as indicated on the drawings. Nameplates shall be laminated plastic, black characters on white background. Characters shall be 3/16-inch high, minimum. Nameplates shall give item designation and circuit number as well as frame ampere size and appropriate trip rating. Furnish master nameplate giving switchboard designation, voltage ampere rating, short-circuit rating, manufacturer's name, general order number, and item number. B. Control components mounted within the assembly shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer's wiring diagrams. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. A certified test report of all standard production tests shall be available to the Engineer upon request. 3.2 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide a training session for up to five (5) Owner's representatives for .2 normal workdays at a job site location determined by the owner. B. A manufacturer's qualified representative shall conduct the training session. The training program shall consist of instruction on operation of the assembly, and major components within the assembly. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's instructions, contract drawings and National Electrical Code. B. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by the Contractor. 3.4 WARRANTY A. The generator quick connect assembly shall be provided with a warranty which shall include all materials and labor for a period of one year from completion of the contract. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase.2 . Section IVa Generator Quick-Connect Enclosure Assemblies 0992-0197 16430-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING and BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install grounding systems complete in accordance with the minimum requirements established by Article 250 of the NEC. Article 250 of the NEC shall be considered as a minimum requirement for compliance with this Specification. B. Grounding of all instrumentation and control systems shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the manufacturer/system requirements and IEEE 1100-92, Powering and Grounding of Sensitive Electronic Equipment. Conflicts shall be promptly brought to the attention of the Engineer. C. In addition to the NEC requirements, building structural steel columns shall be permanently and effectively grounded: D. Reference Section 16010- Electrical, Basic Requirements. E. Additional requirements for grounding are shown on the Contract Drawings. 1.2 TESTING A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 1. The following tests are required: 1. Witnessed Shop Tests None required. 2. Field Tests Field testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements specified in the General Conditions, Division 1, and Section 16010 - Electrical Basic Requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01300, SUBMITTALS, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Reports of certified field tests. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable Specification section. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Grounding and Bonding 16450-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Grounding and Bonding 16450-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. Equipment specifications and product data sheets identifying all materials used and methods of fabrication. 2. Drawings and written description of how the Contractor intends to furnish and install the grounding system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. The equipment covered by these specifications shall be standard equipment of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Contract Drawings. 2.2 GROUND RODS AND GRID A. Ground rods shall be rolled to a commercially round shape from copper-clad steel manufactured by the molten-welding process or by the electro-formed process (molecularly bonded). They shall have an ultimate tensile strength of 75,000PSI and an elastic limit of49,000PSI. The rods shall be not less than 3/41N diameter by 10FT in length; and the proportion of copper shall be uniform throughout the length of the rod. The copper shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.0131 N at any point on the rod. B. The maximum resistance to ground of a driven ground rod shall not exceed 100HM under normally dry conditions. Where the resistance obtained with one (1) ground rod exceeds 1 OOHM, additional ground rods shall be installed not less than 10FT on centers. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non current-carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, grounding conductors in nonmetallic raceways and neutral conductors of wiring systems shall be grounded. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment and shall be extended to the point of entrance of the metallic water service. Connection to the water pipe shall be made by a suitable ground clamp or lug connection to a plugged tee. lfflanged pipes are encountered, connection shall be made with the lug bolted to the street side of the flanged connection. If there is not suitable metallic water service to the facility, the ground connection shall be made to the driven ground rods on the exterior of the building. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Where ground fault protection is employed, care shall be taken so that the connection of the ground and neutral does not interfere with the correct operation of the ground fault protection system. 2.3 FITTINGS A. Grounding connections to equipment shall be bolted. Cable end connections may be made by use of the crucible weld process or bolted type connectors. Bolted type connectors for this application shall consist of corrosion resistant copper alloy with silicone bronze bolts, nuts and lock-washers which are designed for this purpose. 2.4 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. A green, insulated equipment grounding conductor, which shall be separate from the electrical system neutral conductor, shall be furnished and installed for all circuits. Equipment grounding conductors shall be furnished and installed in all conduits. Use of conduits as the NEC required equipment grounding conductor is not acceptable. B. Where specified or shown a 31N strap shall be furnished and installed as the grounding conductor. 2.5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDS A. Equipment grounds shall be solid and continuous from a connection at earth to all distribution panelboards. Ground connections at panelboards, outlets, equipment, and apparatus shall be made in an approved and permanent manner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTAllATION A. Metal surfaces where grounding connections are to be made shall be clean and dry. Steel surfaces shall be ground or filed to remove all scale, rust, grease, and dirt. Copper and galvanized steel shall be cleaned with emery cloth to remove oxide before making connections. B. Ground Grid: 1. A main ground grid shall be provided for each structure and interconnecting structure grids consisting of driven ground rods. The ground rods shall be driven deep enough to obtain a ground resistance of not more than 100HM and shall be interconnected by the use of copper cable bus (31N strap minimum), or a bare copper conductor sized to the largest service entrance ground, welded to the rods by the crucible weld process. The grounding cables shall be installed after the excavations for the building have been completed and prior to the pouring of concrete for the footings, mats, etc. Copper "pigtails" shall be connected to the ground system and shall enter the buildings and structure from the outside and shall be connected to steel structures, and equipment as described in this Section and as required to provide a complete grounding system. 2. Grounding conductors shall be continuous between points of connection; splices shall not be permitted. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades. Phase 2 0992-0197 Section /Va Grounding and Bonding 16450-3 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa. Grounding and Bonding 16450-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3. Where conductors are exposed and subject to damage from personnel, traffic, etc., conductors shall be installed in PVC sch-80 raceway. 4. Connections to ground rods shall be exposed to permit maintenance and inspection for continuity and effectiveness of grounding system. 5. Where subsurface conditions do not permit use of driven ground rods to obtain proper ground resistance, rods shall be installed in a trench or plate electrodes shall be provided, as applicable and necessary to obtain proper values of resistance. 6. Conduit that enters equipment such as motor control centers, switchboards, switchgear, variable frequency drives, instrument and control panels, and similar equipment shall be bonded to the ground bus, where provided, and as otherwise required by the NEC. END OF SECTION 0992-0197 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16460 - DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and test transformers for power and lighting distribution systems as described herein, as shown on the Contract Drawings, and as required to complete the electrical installations. B. All equipment specified in this Section shall be furnished by the transformer manufacturer who shall be responsible for the suitability and compatibility of all included equipment. C. Reference Section 16010, Electrical Basic Requirements, and Section 09900 - Painting and Coatings. 1.2 TESTING A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 1. The following tests are required: None required. 1. Witnessed Shop Tests 2. Certified Shop Tests a. The transformers shall be given routine factory tests in accordance with the requirements of the ANSI and NEMA standards. Temperature rises may be certified from basic design. b. As a minimum, the following tests shall be made on all transformers: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 3. Field Tests Ratio tests on the rated voltage connection and on all tap connections. Polarity and phase-relation tests on the rated voltage connection. Applied potential tests. Induced potential tests. No-load and excitation current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. a. Field testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements specified in the General Conditions, Division 1, and Section 16010- Electrical Basic Requirements. 0992-0197 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Dry Type Transformers 16460-1 0992-0197 . Section IVa Dry Type Transformers 16460-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I b. After installation, the transformers shall be subjected to routine insulation resistance tests. The tests shall be made by the Contractor who shall also furnish the required testing equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 1, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 3. Spare Parts List. 4. Special Tools List. 5. Reports of Certified Shop Tests. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable specification section. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein, and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. Equipment specifications and product data sheets identifying all materials used and methods of fabrication. 2. Drawings showing clearly marked dimensions for each transformer. 3. Sample equipment nameplate diagram. D. The submittal information shall reflect the specific equipment identification number as indicated on the Contract Drawings. E. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met. Copies oftechnical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs, and similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment items that the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted. 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Division 1. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.6 TOOLS, SUPPLIES AND SPARE PARTS A. The transformers shall be furnished with all special tools necessary to disassemble, service, repair and adjust the equipment. All spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor. B. Spare parts lists, included with the shop drawing submittal, shall indicate specific sizes, quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1 lot of packing material" are not acceptable. C. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts inventory control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate number. Those parts which are identical for more than one size, shall have the same parts number. 1.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Each transformer shall be identified with the equipment tag number indicated on the Contract Drawings and the accepted shop drawings. A nameplate shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on each transformer. Nameplates shall be as specified in Section 16010- Electrical Basic Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Dry-type Transformers: a) Square D b) Cutler-Hammer c) General Electric d) Siemens-ITE 2.2 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS A. Furnish and install single-phase and three-phase general purpose, dry-type transformers, as specified herein and indicated on the Contract Drawings. The transformers shall be 60Hz, self-cooled, quiet-design insulated of the two winding type. B. The transformers shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed and shall bear the UL label. 0992-0197 Section IVa Dry Type Transformers 16460-3 . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section/Va Dry Type Transformers 16460-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. The primary windings shall be rated 480VAC for use on 3-phase, 3-wire systems and connected delta unless indicated otherwise on the Contract Drawings. KVA ratings shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. Furnish taps for transformers as follows: 1. 1 PH, 25 KVA and below: Two 5% FCBN. 2. 3 PH, 15 KVA and below: Two 5% FCBN. 3. 3 PH, 30 KVA and above: Two 2.5% FCAN and four 2.5% FCBN. All taps shall be full capacity rated. D. The ratings of the secondary windings shall be as indicated on the Contract Drawings. E. Transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at rated KVA, 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, with normal life expectancy as defined in IEEE 65 and ANSI C57.96. This performance shall be obtainable without exceeding 150 degrees Celsius average temperature rise by resistance or 180 degrees Celsius hot spot temperature rise in a 40 degrees Celsius maximum ambient and 30 degrees Celsius average ambient. The maximum coil hot spot temperature shall not exceed 220 degrees Celsius. All insulating materials shall be flame retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in ASTM Standard Test Method D 635. All insulating materials shall be in accordance with NEMA ST 20 Standard for a 220 degrees Celsius UL component recognized insulation system. F. Transformer coils shall be of the continuous wound copper construction and shall be impregnated with non hygroscopic, thermosetting varnish. G. Transformers shall have copper windings. H. All cores are to be constructed of high grade, nonaging, grain-oriented silicon steel with high magnetic permeability and low hysteresis and eddy current loses. Magnetic flux densities are to be kept well below the saturation point. The core laminations shall be tightly clamped and compressed with structural steel angles. The completed core and coil shall then be bolted to the base by means of vibration-absorbing mounts to minimize sound transmission. There shall be no metal-to-metal contact between the core and coil assembly and the enclosure. I. Indoor non-classified enclosures shall be made of heavy gauge steel and shall be degreased, cleaned, primed, and finished with a baked weather-resistant enamel. See painting requirements specified in this section. Outdoor enclosures or enclosures within a corrosive area shall be constructed of stainless steel and rated NEMA 4X. J. All transformers shall be equipped with a wiring compartment suitable for conduit entry and large enough to allow convenient wiring. The maximum temperature of the enclosure shall not exceed 90 degrees Celsius. Transformers shall be furnished with lugs of the size and quantity required and suitable for termination of the field wiring. Marshal/Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I K. The core of the transformer shall be visibly grounded to the enclosure by means of a flexible grounding conductor sized in accordance with applicable NEMA, IEEE, and ANSI standards. L. Transformers shall be mounted on neoprene-rubber isolation pads. The transformers shall not exceed the following ANSI sound levels: o to 9kVA 40 dB 10 to 50 kV A 45 dB 51 to 150 kV A 50 dB 151 to 300 KV A 55dB 301 to 500 KV A 60 dB 501 to 700 KV A 62 dB 701 to 1000 KVA 64dB 1001 to 1500 KVA 65 dB 2.3 PAINTING A. The exteriors of the transformer enclosures shall be painted as follows: 1. Factory painting: Surfaces shall be cleaned carefully and given a priming basic lead chromate. This shall be followed by two coats of an approved paint applied by brushing. 2. Field painting: After delivery and installation, but before transformers are placed in service, all factory-painted surfaces shall be carefully cleaned and all abrasions shall be repaired. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The transformers shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Contract Drawings and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. B. Conduit routed to and from the transformer shall be arranged for easy removal of the transformer. END OF SECTION 0992-0197 Section JVa Dry Type Transformers 16460-5 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install panelboards of voltage and current ratings as shown on the Contract Drawings. Panelboards shall be furnished with circuit breaker ratings, number of breakers, number of poles and locations conforming to the panelboard schedules on the Contract Drawings. B. Reference Section 16010- Electrical, Basic Requirements. 1.2 STANDARDS A. Panelboards shall conform to all applicable Federal, UL, and NEMA standards. Materials and components shall be new and conform to grades, qualities and standards as specified herein and shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Panelboards shall comply with the following industry standards: 1. UL Listing/Approval 2. UL Standards a. Panel boards - UL 67 b. Cabinets and Boxes - UL 50 3. National Electrical Code 4. NEMA Standard - PB1 1.3 TESTING A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 1. The following tests are required: 1. Witnessed Shop Tests None required 2. Field Tests Field testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements specified in the General Conditions, Division 1, and Section 16010- Electrical: Basic Requirements. 0992-0197 Section IVa Panelboards 16470-1 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2. 0992-0197 Section /Va Pane/boards 16470-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01300, SUBMITTALS, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings. 2. Reports of Certified Shop Tests. 3. Spare Parts List. 4. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable specification section. 1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete, or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. Material specifications and product data sheets identifying all materials used and methods of fabrication. 2. Complete assembly, layout, and installation drawings with clearly marked dimensions for each panel board. 3. Complete panelboard schedules indicating circuit designations and' connected loads as shown on the Contract Drawings for each panelboard. D. The submittal information shall reflect the specific equipment identification as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 1.6 TOOLS, SUPPLIES AND SPARE PARTS A. The panel boards and accessories shall be furnished with all special tools necessary to disassemble, service, repair, and adjust the equipment. For each panelboard, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner all spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer including two (2) molded case circuit breakers of each type, size, and rating used. B. Spare parts lists, included with the shop drawing submittal, shall indicate specific sizes, quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1 lot of packing material" are not acceptable. C. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts inventory control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I number. Those parts which are identical for more than one size shall have the same parts number. 1.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Each panelboard shall be identified with the identification tag number indicated on the Contract Drawings and the accepted shop drawings. A nameplate shall be securely affixed in a conspicuous place on each panelboard. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. The Equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Contract Drawings. 2.2 CONDUCTORS (MAIN BUS AND BRANCH CONNECTORS) A. All main bus shall be copper sized in accordance with UL standards to limit the temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 50 degrees C above a maximum ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. 2.3 LIGHTING PANELBOARDS A. General 1. The Lighting Panelboards, as defined by NEC or noted on drawings, shall be dead-front type with automatic trip-free, non-adjustable, thermal-overload, branch circuit breakers. Panelboards shall be ofthe configuration and rating as specified herein and indicated on the Contract Drawings. Panelboards shall be listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. 2. The Lighting Panelboards shall be equipped with a main breaker or main lugs complete with branch circuit breakers, as shown on the Contract Drawings. The panelboards shall be enclosed in a cabinet suitable for flush or surface mounting. Some panelboards shall be furnished and installed within motor control center structures as shown on the Contract Drawings. 3. Lighting Panel boards shall be fully rated and shall have a short circuit rating of 22kA symmetrical, minimum. In the event the results of the Contractor's short circuit fault analysis, as accepted by the Engineer, indicate that a higher short circuit rating of the panelboards is required, furnish complete panelboards with that higher rating. 4. Lighting Panelboards shall be furnished with transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) and filtering equipment as required in specification section 16671 and indicated on the Contract Drawings. The TVSS devices shall be UL labeled. 5. Subject to compliance with specifications Lighting Panelboards shall be Square-D Company, Eaton/Cutler-Hammer Electric Corporation, General Electric or equal. 0992-0197 Section /Va Pane/boards 16470-3 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section /Va Pane/boards 16470-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I B. Cabinets 1. Except for lighting panel boards installed in motor control centers, the cabinet shall be NEMA 12 (minimum) constructed of #12 U.S.S. code gauge galvanized steel. The door shall be fastened to the cabinet with concealed brass hinges and shall be equipped with flush-type catches and locks. All locks shall be keyed alike. The cabinet shall have wiring gutters on sides and shall be at least 20lN wide and 5-3/4IN deep. The Contractor shall provide an engraved nameplate for the panelboard. The nameplate shall include the panelboard designation, voltage, phase, wires, and bus rating. 2. An Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. inspection label shall appear on the interior of the cabinet. C. Bus Work 1. Main bus bars shall be of ample size so that a current density of not more than 1000A per square inch of cross section will be attained. This current density shall be based on the application of the full load connected to the panel plus approximately 25% of the full load for spare capacity. The main bus shall be full capacity as based on the preceding for the entire length of the panel so as to provide full flexibility of circuit arrangement. 2. Solid neutral bus bars are required. Ratings shall be in accordance with applicable standards. 3. A separate ground bus shall be provided with lugs for termination of equipment grounding conductors. 4. Branch bus work shall be rated to match the maximum branch circuit breaker which may be installed in the standard space. 5. All bus shall be plated copper. D. Circuit Breakers 1. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on, molded-case type conforming to NEMA Standard AB 1. Trip elements of circuit breakers shall be 20A unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings. Minimum branch circuit breaker shall be 100A frame for 60A and above except where shown otherwise on the Drawings or where a larger frame size is standard for the continuous current rating required. Breakers shall have an interrupting rating of 22kA symmetrical at 240VAC, minimum. All breakers shall have quick-make, quick-break, toggle mechanism for manual as well as automatic operation. Tandem or half-size breakers are not acceptable. 2. Where indicated, or where required by Code, circuit breakers for receptacle circuits shall be equipped with integrally mounted ground fault interrupters complete with "TEST" push button and shall be of a type which fit standard panel board spaces for the breaker continuous current rating required. 3. Instrument power panel branch circuit breakers set for control instrumentation, telephone, data, fire alarm or auxiliary equipment circuits requiring continuous operation shall be provided with a lock-on device. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 4. Circuit breakers used for fluorescent lighting circuit switching shall be approved for the purpose and shall be marked "SWD". Circuit breakers used for high intensity discharge lighting circuit switching shall be approved for the purpose and shall be marked "HID". Where required by Article 440 of the NEC, circuit breakers installed for air conditioning units shall be HACR type. E. Directories 1. Approved directories with glass or noncombustible plastic cover and with typewritten designations of each branch circuit, shall be furnished and installed in each panelboard. The Contractor shall maintain in each panel, during the duration ofthe Contract, a handwritten directory clearly indicating the circuit breakers in service. This directory shall be updated as work progresses, and final, typewritten directories, as specified above, shall be installed at the end of the project. Designations and circuit locations shall conform to the panelboard schedules on the Contract Drawings, except as otherwise authorized by the Engineer. 2. The Contractor shall provide directories identifying panel boards and indicating the size of the feeder (cable and conduit) serving the panel, circuit numbers, and a description of associated branch circuits including branch circuit trip and connected load for each circuit. 2.4 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS A. General 1. The Power Distribution Panel boards, as defined by NEC or noted on drawings, shall be of the configuration and rated as shown on the Contract Drawings. The panelboards shall be dead-front type with automatic trip-free, non-adjustable, thermal overload branch circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on molded case type conforming to NEMA Standard AB1. Trip elements of the circuit breakers shall be rated 20A unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings. The bus ratings shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. Panelboards shall be listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. 2. Power distribution panelboards shall be fully rated and shall have a short circuit rating of 25kA symmetrical, minimum. In the event the results of the Contractor's short circuit fault analysis, as accepted by the Engineer, indicate that a higher short circuit rating of the panelboards is required, furnish complete panelboards with that higher rating. 3. Power Distribution Panel boards shall be furnished with transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) and filtering equipment as required in specification section 16671 and indicated on the Contract Drawings. The TVSS devices shall be UL labeled. 4. Subject to compliance with specifications Power Distribution Panelboards shall be Square-D Company I-LINE, Eaton/Cutler-Hammer Electric Corporation Pow-R-Line 4 Series, General Electric or Equal. 0992-0197 Section IVa Pane/boards 16470-5 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section /Va Pane/boards 16470-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. Cabinets 1. Except for power panelboards installed in motor control centers, the cabinets shall be NEMA 12 (minimum) constructed of #12 U.S.S. code gauge galvanized steel. The door shall be fastened to the cabinet with concealed brass hinges and shall be equipped with flush-type catches and locks. All locks shall be keyed alike. The cabinet shall have wiring gutters on sides and shall be at least 20lN wide and 5-3/4IN deep. The Contractor shall provide nameplates for each panelboard. The nameplate shall include the panelboard designation, voltage, phase, wires, and bus rating. 2. An Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. inspection label shall appear on the interior of the cabinet. C. Bus Work 1. Main bus bars shall be of ample size so that a current density of not more than 1 ,OOOA per square inch of cross section will be attained. This current density shall be based on the application of the full load connected to the panel plus approximately 25% of the full load for spare capacity. The main bus shall be full capacity as based on the preceding for the entire length of the panel so as to provide full flexibility of circuit arrangement. 2. Solid neutral bus bars, where required, shall be provided. Ratings shall be in accordance with applicable standards. 3. A separate ground bus shall be provided with lugs for termination of equipment grounding conductors. 4. Branch bus work shall be rated to match the maximum branch circuit breaker which may be installed in the standard space. 5. All bus shall be plated copper. D. Circuit Breakers 1. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on, molded-case type conforming to NEMA Standard AB 1. Trip elements of circuit breakers shall be 20A unless otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings. Minimum branch circuit breaker shall be 100A frame for 60A and above except where shown otherwise on the Contract Drawings or where a larger frame size is standard for the continuous current rating required. Breakers shall have an interrupting rating of 25kA symmetrical at 480VAC, minimum. All breakers shall have quick-make, quick-break, toggle mechanism for manual as well as automatic operation. Tandem or half-size breakers are not acceptable. E. Directories 1. Approved directories with glass or noncombustible plastic cover, and with typewritten designations of each branch circuit, shall be provided in each panel. The Contractor shall maintain in each panel, during the duration of the Contract, a handwritten directory clearly indicating the circuit breakers in service. This directory shall be updated as work progresses, and final, typewritten directories, as specified ab?ve, shall be installed at the end of Marshal/Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I the project. Designations and circuit locations shall conform to the panel board schedules on the Contract Drawings, except as otherwise authorized by the Engineer. 2. The Contractor shall provide directories identifying panelboards and indicating the size of the feeder (cable and conduit) serving the panel, circuit numbers, and a description of associated branch circuits including branch circuit trip and connected load for each circuit. 2.5 PAINTING A. All metal surfaces of the panelboard enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned and given one prime of zinc chromate primer. All interior surfaces shall then be given one shop finishing coat of a lacquer ofthe nitro-cellulose enamel variety. All exterior surfaces shall be given three coats of the same lacquer. The color of finishing coats shall be light gray ANSI #61. B. Prior to final completion of the work, all metal surfaces of the equipment shall be cleaned thoroughly, and all scratches and abrasions shall be retouched with the same lacquer as used for shop finishing coats. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING A. The lighting panelboards, power distribution panelboards, and combination power units shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Contract Drawings and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. B. Panelboards shall be set true and plumb in all locations as shown on the Contract Drawings. The top of panelboard enclosure shall not exceed 6FT above finished floor elevation. C. Enclosures shall not be fastened to concrete or masonry surfaces with wooden plugs, conical plastic anchors. Appropriate cadmium plated or galvanized steel bolts shall be used with expansion shields or other metallic type concrete insert for mounting on concrete or solid masonry walls. Cadmium plated or galvanized steel toggle bolts shall be used for mounting on concrete block or other hollow masonry walls. Bolt diameter shall be as required considering the size and weight of the completed panelboard and enclosure to provide adequate structural support. D. The Contractor shall not use factory furnished knockouts with surface back boxes. The Contractor shall punch or drill required openings during installation and shall equip flush back boxes with manufacturer's standard pattern of knockouts. The Contractor shall equip cabinet doors exceeding 40lN height with vertical bolt three point locking mechanism. E. The Contractor shall install cabinets (and other enclosure products) in plumb with the building construction. Flush enclosures shall be installed so that the trim will rest against the surrounding surface material and around the entire perimeter of the enclosure. END OF SECTION 0992-0197 Section IVa Pane/boards 16470-7 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16475 - SAFETY I DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install separately mounted, individual disconnect switches as specified herein and indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. 16010 - Electrical Basic Requirements. 1.2 TESTING A. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the General Conditions and Division 1. The following tests are required: 1. Witnessed Shop Tests: None required. 2. Field Tests: Field testing shall be done in accordance with the requirements specified in the General Conditions, Division 1, and Section 16010 - Electrical, Basic Requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the procedures and requirements set forth in the General Conditions and Section 01300 - Submittals, the Contractor shall obtain from the equipment manufacturer and submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings 2. Spare Parts List a. Each submittal shall be identified by the applicable specification section. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Each submittal shall be complete in all respects, incorporating all information and data listed herein and all additional information required for evaluation of the proposed equipment's compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Partial, incomplete or illegible submittals will be returned to the Contractor without review for resubmittal. C. Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to: 1. Equipment specifications and product data sheets identifying all materials used and methods of fabrication. 2. Complete layout and installation drawings with clearly marked dimensions for each type/size/rating of disconnect switch. 3. Assembled weight of each unit. 0992-0197 Section IVa Safety / Disconnect Switches 16475-1 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Safety / Disconnect Switches 16475-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I D. The shop drawing information shall be complete and organized in such a way that the Engineer can determine if the requirements of these Specifications are being met. Copies oftechnical bulletins, technical data sheets from "soft-cover" catalogs, and similar information which is "highlighted" or somehow identifies the specific equipment items that the Contractor intends to provide are acceptable and shall be submitted. 1.5 TOOLS, SUPPLIES, AND SPARE PARTS A. The equipment shall be furnished with all special tools necessary to disassemble, service, repair, and adjust the equipment, and with all spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. B. One complete set of spare fuses for each ampere rating installed shall be furnished and delivered to the Owner at the time of final inspection. C. Spare parts lists, included with the shop drawing submittal, shall indicate specific sizes, quantities, and part numbers of the items to be furnished. Terms such as "1 lot of packing material" are not acceptable. D. Parts shall be completely identified with a numerical system to facilitate parts inventory control and stocking. Each part shall be properly identified by a separate number. Those parts which are identical for more than one size shall have the same parts number. 1.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Each equipment item shall be identified with a nameplate. The nameplate shall be engraved indicating the circuit number and equipment name with which it is associated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of proven performance as manufactured by reputable concerns. Equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Switches shall be manufactured by Square-D, Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Allen-Bradley, or Siemens. 2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty type and/or as specified in these Specifications. Switches shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Contract Drawings and as required by the NEC. Handles shall be lockable. B. Switches shall be NEMA Type HD, single throw, externally operated, fused or non- fused as required. Switches shall be of the poles, voltage, and ampere ratings as shown on the Contract Drawings. .. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. Disconnect Switches shall be provided in following enclosures as a minimum based one their location. Multiple ratings of enclosures may apply. 1. Indoor dry areas: NEMA 1A 2. Indoor damp areas: NEMA 12 3. Corrosive or indoor wet process areas: NEMA 4X 304 stainless steel or non- metallic. 4. Outdoor areas: NEMA 4X 304 stainless steel. 5. Hazardous areas: suitable for the Class, Division, and Group to suit the application. D. Disconnect switches shall be quick-make, quick-break and with an interlocked cover which cannot be opened when switch is in the "ON" position and capable of being locked in the "OPEN" position. E. A complete set of fuses for all switches shall be furnished and installed as required. Time-current characteristic curves of fuses serving motors or connected in series with circuit breakers shall be coordinated for proper operation. Fuses shall have voltage rating not less than the circuit voltage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTAllATION A. All disconnect switches to be mounted 601 N above the floor, at the equipment height where appropriate, or where shown otherwise. B. The Contractor shall furnish and install fuses of various types as required with the continuous ampere ratings as required or shown on the Contract Drawings. END OF SECTION 0992-0197 Section /Va Safety / Disconnect Switches 16475-3 Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary for furnishing, installing, connecting, testing and placing into satisfactory operation all light fixtures, lamps, contactors, controls, supports, etc. as required for a complete and operational lighting system as specified herein and indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Lighting shall be in accordance with the latest requirements of the Illuminating Engineering Society, and all lighting fixtures shall have the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label of approval. C. All wiring shall be placed in conduit and shall comply with the Specifications for conduit, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, wires and cables, grounding, and other Sections as set forth in these Specifications and as noted herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. In addition to the requirements specified in this section, the requirements of Section 16010 - Electrical Basic Requirements, and the sections referenced therein shall be applied. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall provide submittals as specified in Section 16010 - Electrical Basic Requirements. In addition, the following specific submittals items shall be provided. 1. Equipment specifications and product data sheets identifying all materials used and methods of fabrication. 2. Catalog cuts for each fixture type showing performance and construction details of standard fixtures, and complete working drawings showing all proposed construction details of special or modified standard fixtures. 3. Photometric curves 4. Photometric plans shall be provided if substitutions are made from the equipment shown or specified. Data shall be submitted electronically in an approved Engineer format. 5. Lamp data. 6. Ballast information. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Lighting 16500-1 0992-0197 Section IVa Lighting 16500-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 7. Catalog data including applicable coefficients of utilization tables, isolux chart of illumination on a horizontal plane, beam efficiency, horizontal and vertical beam spread, and beam lumens. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The equipment covered by this Specification is intended to be standard equipment of proven performance as manufactured by reputable firms regularly engaged in the manufacturing of lighting equipment, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. Equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices of the trade, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Manufacturer's catalog number and description in the fixture schedule on the Contract Drawings establishes a level of quality, style, finish, etc. The use of a catalog number describing the various types of fixtures shall be used as a guide only, and does not exclude all the required accessories or hardware that may be required for a complete installation. C. All products shall be UL listed and meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC). Electrical components shall be listed and labeled by U.L. 2.2 TOOLS, SUPPLIES, AND SPARE PARTS: A. Tools, supplies, and spare parts shall be provided as specified in Section 16010 - Electrical Basic Requirements, and as specified for each equipment item. In addition, the following items shall be provided. 1. The equipment shall be furnished with all special tools necessary to disassemble service, repair and adjust the equipment. All spare parts as recommended by the equipment manufacturer shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor. 2. A minimum two (2) or one (1) ballast for every ten (10) ballasts (of the same type) installed; whichever is greater. 3. A minimum of one (1) lamp for every five (5) lamps (of the same type) installed; whichever is greater. 2.3 LIGHTING CONTROLS A. The lighting systems shall be controlled as specified herein and indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Lighting contactors shall be furnished and installed for specific lighting control applications as specified herein and indicated on the Contract Drawings. _.Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase. 2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.4 PHOTOCELL SWITCHES A. Hermetically sealed cadmium sulfide cell with single-throw contacts rated 1800VA and 277V minimum. Unit mounted within vandal resistant, die-cast aluminum housing. Designed to turn on at level below 3 foot candles and off at 3 to 10 foot candles. A 15 second time delay to prevent switching from transient light sources. Temperature range -40 degrees F to +170 degrees F. Power consumption less than 1.4W average. 2.5 FIXTURES A. Fixture leads shall be as required by NEC and shall be grounded by the conduit connection to the fixture. B. All glassware shall be high quality, homogeneous in texture, uniform in quality, free from defects, of uniform thickness throughout and properly annealed. Edges shall be well rounded and free from chips or rough edges. C. Refer to the fixture schedule on the Contract Drawings. D. Subject to compliance with the specifications and submission of photometric plans for approval, the following manufactures may be substituted for those listed on the fixture schedule on the Contract Drawings: 1. Interior IExterior Lights a) Holophane b) Lithonia c) KIM Lighting d) GE Lighting 2.6 BALLASTS A. Where available, ballasts shall be as manufactured by the fixture manufacturer. Ballasts for fluorescent fixtures shall be rapid-start, high efficiency and high power factor, with certification by ETL, CBM and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Ballasts shall have copper windings. All ballasts for indoor fluorescent fixtures shall be equipped with an internal, thermally actuated automatic reclosing protection device. Ballasts shall be guaranteed against service failure for a period of two (2) years. Ballasts shall be rated "Class P" to agree with requirements of 410-73 (e) and other applicable articles of the NEC, to conform to the time schedule for this requirement, and shall be Class A sound rated. B. Ballasts for HID fixtures shall have copper windings and shall be high power factor, constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) (Le. lead type for high pressure sodium or peak lead type for metal halide), or constant wattage (CW) with certification by ETL, CBM and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. All ballasts for HID fixtures shall be Class "H" insulated, encapsulated for quiet operation, and shall have an integral thermal protector. MarshalJStreetAPCF .Generator Upgrades,.Phase 2 0992-0197 Section.IVa. Lighting 16500-3 0992-0197 Section IVa Lighting 16500-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I C. All outdoor fixtures and fixtures located in unheated areas shall be furnished and installed with ballasts rated for outdoor installation. D. Ballasts shall be as manufactured by Holophane, Universal, Advance, or equal. 2.7 LAMPS A. The Contractor shall furnish and install lamps in all fixtures. Lamps shall be of the following types: 1. Compact Fluorescent 120VAC 2. Fluorescent: Rapid-Start, Low Level Mercury 3. HID: Mercury Vapor, High Pressure Sodium, or Metal Halide B. Lamps shall be as manufactured by General Electric Company, Sylvania Lighting Equipment, Phillips Lighting Company, or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting fixtures shall be located symmetrically with architectural lines and landscape features as shown on the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall furnish and install the lighting fixtures to allow "convenient" access for maintenance such as cleaning, relamping, and other activities. The fixtures shall be installed to be accessed by a ladder. Where fixtures are shown in locations on the Contract Drawings where maintenance would be difficult, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer for direction. B. The Contractor shall provide and install all inserts, conduit, structural supports as required, lamps, ballasts, poles, wiring, and any other items required for a complete system. Contractor shall properly adjust and test, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the entire lighting system. The Contractor shall provide pigtails and flexible conduit connected to an outlet box where necessary or required resulting in a neat and complete installation. C. The Contractor shall protect all fixtures at all times from damage, dirt, dust, and the like. Before final acceptance, all fixtures and devices shall be cleaned of all dust, dirt or other material, be fully re-Iamped and in operating condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. D. The Contractor shall furnish and install all pendant trapezes and pendant stem hangers with durable swivel or equivalent trapeze hanger permitting normal fixture motion and self-alignment. Fixture pendants shall be Type UNJ ball type flexible hanger at the fixture and supports from a Type JBLX junction box with JBLX hub cover, or equal. Pendant lengths shall be adequate and adjusted to provide uniformity of installation heights above the reference datum. Stems shall be one-piece, with matching canopies and fittings. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase.2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I E. Fixtures located on the exterior of the building shall be provided with neoprene gasket and non-ferrous metal screws finished to match the fixtures. F. The finish or exposed metal parts of lighting fixtures and finish trims of all recessed lighting fixtures shall be as directed by the Engineer. G. The Contractor shall furnish and install recessed fixtures with a separate junction box concealed and located as to be accessible when fixture is removed. H. The Contractor shall furnish and install all boxes for lighting fixtures such that the box is not the sole support of the fixture. The boxes shall be offset to allow maintenance such that access to wiring within the box can be attained without having to consider supporting (holding) the fixture. I. All lighting units, when installed, shall be set true and be free of light leaks, warps, dents, and other irregularities. All hangers, cables, supports, channels, and brackets of all kinds for safely erecting this equipment in place, shall be furnished and erected in place by the Contractor. J. The Contractor shall install fixtures at mounting heights indicated on the Contract Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. In areas with exposed ducts and/or piping, installation of lighting fixtures shall be adapted to field conditions as determined by the Engineer. K. The Contractor shall support each fixture securely. Each fluorescent fixture shall be secured to the building structure. The Contractor shall not secure fixtures to the work of other trades, unless specified or noted otherwise, and shall not support fixtures to plaster. The Contractor shall furnish and install all steel members and supports as required to fasten and suspended fixtures from the structure. L. In all mechanical equipment areas, the Contractor shall install lighting fixtures on the ceiling after all piping and equipment therein has been installed. Exact locations for such fixtures may be determined by the Engineer on the site during the course of the work. M. Upon completion of work, and after indoor areas are broom clean, all fixtures shall be made clean and free of dust and all other foreign matter both on visible surfaces, and on surfaces that affect the lighting performance of the fixture including diffusers, lenses, louvers, reflectors, and lamps. N. All fixtures that require physical adjustment shall be so adjusted in accordance with the directions of the Engineer. The Contractor shall also adjust angular direction of fixtures and/or lamps, as directed. O. Relamping access shall require no special tools. All optical control surfaces such as lenses and reflectors shall be safely and securely attached to fixtures and shall be easily and quickly removed and replaced for cleaning without the use of tools. No fixture part that may be removed, for maintenance, shall be held in place by metal tabs that must be bent to remove said part. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 0992-0197 Section IVa Lighting 16500-5 P. Pole mounted fixtures shall be mounted on poles as designated in the fixture schedule or as indicated on the Contract Drawings. All metal poles shall be bonded to the site grounding system. Poles shall have adequate hand holes and weatherproof receptacles where indicated. Q. The Contractor shall furnish and install switches as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Switches shall be single pole, double pole, 3-way, or 4-way as required. Switches located outdoors or in wet indoor locations shall be installed in cast boxes complete with yellow, fiberglass weatherproof covers. Reference Section 16140 - Wiring Devices. R. The Contractor shall furnish and install time switches and photocells as specified herein or indicated on the Contract Drawings. Time switches shall be provided with a manual bypass switch controlling the lights locally and remotely. Time switches shall control contactors, relays, or direct controlling of one, two, or three lighting circuits, as indicated. The Contractor shall furnish and install photocells as specified herein or indicated on the Contract Drawings for automatic "ON/OFF" switching of outdoor lighting. END OF SECTION . Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase.2. Section IVa. 0" Lighting 16500-6 0992-0197 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16671 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) 1 kV OR LESS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIRMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) equipment having the electrical characteristics, ratings and modifications as specified herein and as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. The TVSS equipment shall provide effective high-energy protection against transient surges, temporary over voltages, voltage swells and high-frequency noise attenuation for power, control and telephone/data circuits 1 kV or less and as shown on the Contract Drawings. C. The TVSS units and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable UL standards. D. The TVSS equipment installation shall conform to local code requirements and the National Electric Code (NEC). E. All materials and workmanship shall be of the highest quality. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: B. NTRL: C. SCCR: D. SPD: 1. Type-I: 2. 3. 4. E. SVR: F. TOV: G. TVSS: ElectroMagnetic Interference Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Short Circuit Current Rating Surge Protection Device Permanently connected between the secondary of the utility transformer and the line or load side of the service entrance overcurrent device and intended to be installed without an external overcurrent device. Type-II: Permanently connected to the load side of the service entrance overcurrent device including branch circuit panels. Type-III: Connected from the electrical service panel to the point of utilization with a minimum conductor length of 30 FT. Type-IV: Component and/or component assemblies. Suppressed Voltage Rating Temporary Over Voltage Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor Marshall Street APCFGenerator Upgrades, Phase 2 . . Section IVa Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) 1kV or Less 0992-0197 16671-1 b) C62.43, IEEE Certified by NRTL as "Secondary Surge Arrestor", c) C62.45, IEEE Guide for Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I.. I 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a) C62.41, IEEE Guide for Surge Voltages in Low Voltage AC Power Circuits. 2. International Electrotechincal Commission (lEC): a) 61024, Protection of Structures against Lightning. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a) LS-1 (1992), Low Voltage Surge Protection Devices 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a) NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 285. 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL): a) 1283, Electromagnetic Interference Filters b) 1449, Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include unit dimensions, weights, installation instructions, wiring details, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnish specialties and accessories. Include the following documents: 1. Suppressed Voltage Rating. 2. Symmetrical Fault Current Withstand Ratings. 3. Provide independent third-party testing lab report indicating device is capable of surviving the specified number of 8x20 micro-second waveforms. 4. Spectrum Analysis based on MIL-STD-220A test procedures between 50 kHz and 200 kHz verifying the device noise attenuation equals or exceeds 50 dB at 100 kHz. 5. Survivability of multiple TOV events for Type-I and Type-II devices. B. Product Certificates: For TVSS/SPD devices, signed by third-party NRTL testing agencies certifying compliance with the following standards: Marshall StreetAPCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2. q.. .. - ___"_"'0< . Section IVa Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) 1kV or Less 0992-0197 16671-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I .1 I 1. UL 1283 2. UL 1449 Second Edition 2005 Revision 3. IEEE C62.34 Secondary Surge Arrestor 4. NEMA LS-1 (1992) Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices C. Qualification Data: Third-Party testing lab or U.S. Department of Labor/OSHA approved NRTL. D. Field Quality-Control test reports, including the following: 1. Test procedures used. Include single impulse testing data that matches label rating, including fuses or upstream breaker. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Failed test results and corrective actions taken to achieve requirements. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type or series of TVSS/SPD devices to include emergency, operation and maintenance manuals. F. Warranties: The manufacturer shall provide a full ten (10) year warranty from the date of installation against any TVSS/SPD device part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and any applicable national or local codes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. 2. Current Technology 3. Eaton/ Cutler Hammer 4. Innovative Technology 5. General Electric 6. Square-D 7. Approved Equivalent 2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SPD (TYPE-I) A. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable module with EMI filtering and the following features: Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades,.Phase 2 ...Section IVa . Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) 1kV or Less 0992-0197 16671-3 a) >1800 cycles at 180% of rated voltage to 0.7 OHM load b) Test Report included I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. The SPD unit tested at 200kA interrupting capacity (Ale). 2. The SPD unit shall provide overvoltage protection as follows: 3. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 4. Utilizing copper bus bars and bolted connections to phase buses, neutral bus and ground bus. 5. Utilizing wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus and ground bus. 6. Integral disconnect switch capable of passing full rated surge current. 7. Multiple suppression circuits with current sharing. 8. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 9. Monitoring system capable of the following: a) Number of transient surges, overvoltages and undervoltages. b) Neutral-to-ground voltage and current. c) EMI filter status. d) Percentage of protection available. 10. Audible alarm with silencing switch to indicate when protection has failed. 11. Dual set of dry contacts rated at 5A and 250VAC for remote monitoring of protection status. 12. Field testable with test data from factory provided comparison. 13. Field replaceable surge protection modules. B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating of 200 kA per mode. C. Connection Means: Permanent D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 480/277V, 3-Phase, 4-Wire, grounded wye circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Neutral: 800V for 480/277V 2. Line to Ground: 1000V for 480/277V 3. Neutral to Ground: 900V for 480/277V Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 , Section IVa Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (rvSS) 1kV or Less 0992-0197 16671-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 480V, 3-Phase, 3-Wire, delta circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Line: 1500V for 480V 2. Line to Ground: 2000V for 480V F. EMI noise rejection or attenuation values shall be in compliance with test and evaluation procedures outlined in NEMA LS-1 1992. 2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDI MCC SPD (TYPE-II) A. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable module mounted externally to the panelboard or MCC with EMI filtering and the following features: 1. Supplied with fuses rated at 200kA interrupting capacity (AI C). 2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 3. Utilizing copper bus bars and bolted connections to phase buses, neutral bus and ground bus. 4. Utilizing wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus and ground bus. 5. Integral disconnect switch capable of passing full rated surge current or dedicated fuse or breaker. 6. Multiple suppression circuits with current sharing. 7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 8. Monitoring system capable of the following: a) Number of transient surges, overvoltages and undervoltages. b) Neutral-to-ground voltage and current. c) Percentage of protection available. 9. Audible alarm with silencing switch to indicate when protection has failed. 10. Dual set of dry contacts rated at 5A and 250VAC for remote monitoring of protection status. 11. Field testable with test data from factory provided comparison. 12. Field replaceable surge protection modules. B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating of 150kA per mode. C. Connection Means: Permanent Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) 1kV or Less 0992-0197 16671-5 2. Line to Ground: 1500V for 480V I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I>,,, I D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 480/277V, 3-Phase, 4-Wire, grounded wye circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Neutral: 900V for 480/277V 2. Line to Ground: 900V for 480/277V 3. Neutral to Ground: 900V for 480/277V E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 480V, 3-Phase, 3-Wire, delta circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Line: 2000V for 480V F. EMI noise rejection or attenuation values shall be in compliance with test and evaluation procedures outlined in NEMA LS-1 1992. 2.4 LIGHTING PANELBOARD SPD (TYPE-II) A. Surge Protection Device Description: Modular design with field-replaceable module mounted externally to the panelboard with EMI filtering and the following features: 1. Supplied with fuses rated at 200kA interrupting capacity (AI C). 2. Fabrication using bolted compression lugs for internal wiring. 3. Utilizing copper bus bars and bolted connections to phase buses, neutral bus and ground bus. 4. Utilizing wire connections to phase buses, neutral bus and ground bus. 5. Integral disconnect switch capable of passing full rated surge current or dedicated fuse or breaker. 6. Multiple suppression circuits with current sharing. 7. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 8. Monitoring system capable of the following: a) Number of transient surges, overvoltages and undervoltages. b) Neutral-to-ground voltage and current. c) Percentage of protection available. 9. Audible alarm with silencing switch to indicate when protection has failed. 10. Dual set of dry contacts rated at 5A and 250VAC for remote monitoring of protection status. 11. Field testable with test data from factory provided comparison. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2.... ........ _.. wSection IVa Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (rvSS) 1kV or Less 0992-0197 16671-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 12. Field replaceable surge protection modules. B. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating of 80kA per mode. C. Connection Means: Permanent D. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 208/120V, 3-Phase, 4-Wire, grounded wye circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Neutral: 400V for 208/120V 2. Line to Ground: 500V for 208/120V 3. Neutral to Ground: 500V for 208/120V E. Protection modes and UL 1449 SVR for voltages of 240V, 3-Phase, 3-Wire, delta circuits shall be as follows: 1. Line to Line: 1 OOOV for 240V 2. Line to Ground: 800V for 240V F. EMI noise rejection or attenuation values shall be in compliance with test and evaluation procedures outlined in NEMA LS-1 1992. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTAllATION OF SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE (SPD) A. For Dual Rated Surge Protection (listed as both Surge Arrestor and SPD) for service entrance, product can be placed on either Line or Load side of the Service Entrance Equipment. 1. Provide and install circuit breakers or fuses as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. For all remaining SPD devices: 1. Provide and install circuit breakers or fuses as shown on the Contract Drawings. C. Install SPD devices for panelboards and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not connect neutral and ground leads together. D. SPD devices shall not be integrated with Switchgear or Panelboards as recommended by IEEE-1100, Section 8.4.2.5. E. All SPD devices shall have the raceway between the SPD and the switchgear enclosure sealed with approved fire sealant. The sealant shall prevent vapors from entering the switchgear enclosure. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section IVa Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) 1kV or Less 0992-0197 16671-7 END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.2 PLACING EQUIPMENT INTO SERVICE A. Do not energize or connect service entrance equipment, panel boards, control panels or telephone/data equipment to their sources until surge protection devices are installed and connected. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Contractor shall engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform inspections, field tests and adjustments to the equipment including all connections. Service Representative shall report results in writing to the Engineer. 1. Verify that the electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation instructions and requirements. 2. After installation of SPD devices but before circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 3. Complete installation checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Remove and replace malfunctioning SPD devices and retest as specified as above. Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Section JVa Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) 1kV or Less 0992-0197 16671-8 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I APPENDIX ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION Table of Contents: OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS . Instructions for Addendum to Agreement . ODP Agreement Form o Addendum to Agreement o Attachment "A" o Attachment "B" o Attachment "C" o Attachment "D" . Procedures for Sales Tax Savings, Requests to Requisition and Receiving/Invoicing . Request to Requisition Form . DISADV ANT AGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PROGRAM (DBE) DOCUMENTS . DAVIS-BACON ACT DOCUMENTS . BUY AMERICAN DOCUMENTS II_Section IVaI Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS 11_ Section IVaI Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I INSTRUCTIONS FOR ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE MARSHALL STREET APCF GENERATOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT # 07-0032-UT 1. The Contractor and the City, prior to the ordering of any materials, must complete the Addendum to Agreement for Construction of the Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 project. 2. Attachment "A" is to be completed by the Contractor and submitted with the Addendum. 3. Attachments "B", "C" and "D" relate to Owner-Furnished Materials that are part of the of a Subcontractor's Work. Attachments "B" and "C" would be completed for each Subcontractor responsible for materials as part of the Subcontractor's Work. 4. Submit two (2) original copies of the Addendum and Attachments to: City of Clearwater Attention: Ed Burke, Construction Project Coordinator Phone; 462-6126 Fax: 462-6989 P. O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 5. If you have any questions regarding this process please direct them to: Andrea Beane, Senior Accountant: 562-4950 ext. 7206 Fax: 562-4951 E-Mail: Andrea.Beane@myClearwater.com II_Section IVaI Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF MARSHALL STREET APCF GENERATOR UPGRADES. PHASE 2 CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT No. 07-0032-UT In reference to contract # dated , _ between City of Clearwater, the Owner, and , the Contractor, it is further AGREED as follows: 1. The Owner has reserved the right to purchase certain portions of the material for the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. 2. The attachments lettered "A", "8", and "C", attached hereto (as amended by notations thereon) and incorporated herein shall be executed by the Contractor and applicable Sub-contractors and the terms thereof shall govern the purchase of materials for the Project as determined by the Owner. 3. The contract price shall be reduced by the cost of the materials purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales tax as bid by the Contractor even if the cost is in excess of the cost for the materials as bid by the Contractor. However, for purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, the original contract amount shall be used. 4. The Contractor reserves the right to authorize payments for invoiced materials, prior to Owner's authorization process, as outlined in Attachment "0". 5. The Contractor will assist Owner in owner's direct purchase of materials for the project. However, owner acknowledges that Contractor's Sub-contractors nonetheless each reserves the right to purchase project materials directly, without Owner's prior approval and consequent power to eliminate reimbursement of sales tax. This addendum, upon its execution by both parties, is made an integral part of the aforementioned agreement. CITY OF CLEARWATER: CONTRACTOR: Date: Date: City Manager/Owner Contractor ATTEST: ATTEST: City Clerk (City's Corporate Seal) Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM: Carlos Colon Assistant City Attorney II_Section IVaI Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ATTACHMENT "A" FROM CITY OF CLEARWATER (OWNER) (CONTRACTOR) TO. OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET APC' GENERATOR UPGRADES. PHASE 2 PRO,JECT # 07-G032.UT 1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for material, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. The owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. Owner-purchasing of construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. 2. The Contractor shall provide the Owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Contractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. 3. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance ofthe goods at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Contractor. However, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into the project. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular material furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. 4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment A of this Contract. 5. The Contractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non-conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages. 6. The Contractor shall maintain records of all Owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into Contractor's Work from the stock of Owner-Furnished Materials in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any Owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. 7. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage-repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. II_Section IVai Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished Materials. 9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished Materials. 10. As invoices are received, Contractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during that delivery for use by the Contractor and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Contractor's records of materials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials. 11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within thirty (30) days of receipt of said goods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The Contractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Contractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Contractor at the Owner's direction, or may be turned over to the Contractor for salvage or disposal at the Contractor's option. 12. The Contractor shall be entitled to the benefits of any discounts attributable to the early payment of vendor invoices for materials furnished by the Owner pursuant to the Specifications. 13. The Contract between Contractor and Owner is hereby amended to clarify that Owner-Furnished Material shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining the Contract Sum due Contractor. II_Section IVaI Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ATTACHMENT "B" FROM TO (CONTRACTOR) (SUBCONTRACTOR) OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET APCF GENERATOR UPGRADES. PHASE 2 PRO.JECT # 07-G032.UT 1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for material, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Subcontractor's Work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Subcontractor's contract. Owner-Purchasing of construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include owner's Certification of Exemption number. 2. The Subcontractor shall provide the owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Subcontractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. 3. The Subcontractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Subcontractor. However, the Owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into the project. The Subcontractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Subcontractor for the particular material furnished. The Subcontractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Subcontractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Subcontractor. 4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Subcontractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Subcontractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Subcontractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment "A" of this Contract. 5. The Subcontractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and determine prior to incorporation into the Subcontractor's Work if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Subcontractor discovers defective or non-conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Subcontractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Subcontractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Subcontractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Subcontractor shall be responsible for all damages to the owner, resulting from Subcontractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages. 6. The Subcontractor shall maintain records of all owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into Subcontractor's Work from the stock of Owner-furnished Materials in its possession. The Subcontractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Subcontractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Subcontractor's Work. II_Section IVaI Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 I 7. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage-repair calls shall be forwarded to the Subcontractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or sub-subcontractor. I 8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Subcontractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner-Furnished Materials. I 9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Subcontractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Subcontractor agrees to promptly notify Owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner- Furnished Materials. I I 10. As invoices are received, Subcontractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during that delivery for use by the Subcontractor and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Subcontractor's records of materials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials. I 11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Subcontractor shall provide to the Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within fifteen (15) days of receipt of said goods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The Subcontractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Subcontractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Subcontractor at the Owner's direction, or may be turned over to the Subcontractor for salvage or disposal at the Subcontractor's option. I I I I I I I I I I I I II_Section IVaI Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ATTACHMENT "C" From To (CONTRACTOR) (SUBCONTRACTOR) PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET APC' GENERATOR UPGRADES. PHASE 2 PRO.JECT # 07-G032.UT This project qualifies the Owner to utilize its sales tax exemption for the purchase of materials used in the project. In order to do this, the City of Clearwater, Florida, (Owner) must pay for the materials directly. This shall be accomplished in the following manner: 1. Subcontracts will be issued by Contractor to Subcontractors in the usual manner, including sales tax. 2. Subcontractors will prepare their material orders and forward same to Contractor so that City of Clearwater (owner) purchase orders may be placed for these materials. 3. Contractor will return to the Subcontractor a copy of the City of Clearwater (owner) purchase order on behalf of the City of Clearwater (Owner). It shall read: To: Supplier For: Material per attached Subcontractor order, 4. The material supplier will then bill the City of Clearwater (Owner) c/o "Subcontractor" c/o Contractor. Subcontractor will approve invoice and send to Contractor who will submit same to City of Clearwater (Owner) for payment. 5. City of Clearwater (Owner) will then pay the invoice directly and the Subcontractor will be issued a deductive change order for the amount of the invoice plus sales tax. It is imperative that the Subcontractor approve the invoices and forward them to Contractor by the of each month for payment by the _' Those received after the _ will be processed in the next month's billing cycle. ll_Section IVaI Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I A TT ACHMENT "D" PROCEDURE FOR GENERATING SUB-CONTRACTOR DIRECT PURCHASE ORDERS FOR SALES TAX CREDITS 1. General Contractor will submit requisition for materials with vendor information required (see vendor application form), item description, quantity if applicable, price, etc. Also included will be the sales tax savings amount. 2. Architect will review the requisition, and forward to the project manager for approval and preparation of electronic purchase requisition. Requisition must contain project number as well as correct account number. 3. Project Manager will then request requisition approval from the Finance Director. 4. Purchasing will issue purchase order and will mail, fax, or otherwise distribute purchase order as requested. 5. A purchase order summary report will be maintained indicating the following: purchase order number, owner Certificate of Exemption number, vendor, total amount of P.O., total tax savings, amount previously requested, amount of current request, and remaining balance of P.O. This report will be updated and issued with each group of payment requests (monthly). 6. Payment requests with invoices must have receiving paperwork with authorized signatures and must be submitted for approval as indicated below: 7. Payment authorization sequence: invoices must be submitted for approval in the following order: a. General Contractor b. Architect c. Project Manager d. Engineering/City Manager e. Purchasing/for processing only f. Finance/for processing only 11_ Section IVal Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PROCEDURES FOR SALES TAX SAVINGS, REQUESTS TO REQUISITION and RECEIVING/INVOICING CITY OF CLEARWATER MARSHALL STREET APCF GENERATOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 PROJECT # 07-0032-UT Contractor: CEI: Addendum to AQreement for Construction: 1. See separate instructions for completing the Addendum to Agreement. Process procedures for tax savinas: 2. Completion of the Request to Requisition forms by Contractor. 3. Approved by CEI. Approver(s): 4. Original to Owner's Representative for processing of P.O. requisition. 5. Based on Request to Requisition forms a schedule will be prepared for the City's Purchasing Manager to reduce the Contractor's P.O. by the amount of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers. It is important to process as many material supplier Requests to Requisition as possible at one time thereby reducing the amount of changes necessary to Contractor's P.O. Construction contract will not change and the sum of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers plus the Contractor's P.O will represent the total contract commitment. Before sendinq to the Purchasinq Manaqer. the schedule will be forwarded to the Owner's Representative. CEI and Contractor's representative for approval. We will need the e-mail address for the Contractor's & CEl's contact person(s) for this process. 6. The estimated sales tax savings for each materials requisition will be deducted from the primary lines of Contractor's P.O. A related Sales Tax Savings line for each charge code will be added to the Contractor's P.O. No changes will be made to the sales tax savings lines until all materials are purchased, received, accepted and paid for unless additional materials purchases are necessary. 7. Closing of the sales tax savings line on the Contractor's P.O. can only be done through a change order (Recommendation is that it's done on the final C/O). Process procedures for request to requisition forms: General description is a brief recap (sewer lines and manholes; water lines; etc) Contractor should include their fax number as well as a contact number. In the description section of the Request to Requisition include any special delivery instructions. Indicate whether or not retainage is to be withheld. City's standard is 5%. Include the address where the supplier is to mail invoices. Where applicable, shipping and handling costs should be listed as a line item on the request to requisition. 7. City staff will complete the charge code line. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Procedures where a detailed line item proposal has been received from the ODP supplier: a. On the request to requisition summarize the materials to be ordered by type of system (stormwater, streets, water, sewer, reclaimed, etc) giving the total dollar amount per for each system. Leave 2 line spaces between each system to allow for the addition of the City's charge code. b. Attach the supplier's proposal to be mailed as an attachment to the purchase order. Attachment should include estimated Quantities and types of materials. Cost information is optional. II_Section IVaI Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 I Procedures where a detailed line item proposal is not available: c. Provide quantities and detailed descriptions of the items to be ordered, per unit and total cost as the City's P.O. will be sent directly to the Materials Supplier. d. Materials on each request to requisition should be grouped in relation to the major billing line items on Contractor's P.O. Leave 2 spaces between each group, as the City will add the appropriate charge codes. 8. The requesting official will be the Contractor's official with authority to procure materials. Contractor's authorized procurer(s): 9. The official approving that the materials requested meet the design specifications will be authorized personnel from the CEI only. Authorized approvers: I I I I NOTE: Any materials ordered by the contractor that are not included on the City's issued purchase order or any amounts ordered that exceed the amounts on the City issued purchase order MUST be separately ordered pursuant to a purchase order directly between the supplier and the contractor. These materials MUST be invoiced separately from the materials supplied pursuant to the City issued purchase order. Another option would be to submit an additional ReQuest to ReQuisition to increase the amount of the OOP purchase order for that supplier. I I Process procedures for receivinQ and invoicina: I 1. Upon receipt of materials, Contractor's representative will verify the materials are in usable condition and the quantity received. 2. The Materials Suppliers will be instructed on the City's P. O. to send their original invoice to the Contractor to the attention of 3. Contractor must sign off on the invoice to approve the payment and, if no receiving report is attached, must indicate on the invoice that all materials were received in usable condition. Any discrepancies with the invoice are to be resolved between the Contractor and the Materials Supplier. If the invoice is in error, it can be corrected by the Contractor before forwarding for payment under the following conditions: a. A corrected supplier's invoice can be paid up to the amount of the originally issued invoice but not in excess of that amount. b. None of the original data on the invoice can be obliterated. If it is the City will return the invoice for replacement by a corrected one from the supplier. c. If the corrections cause the invoice amount to exceed the original billed amount, the excess must be invoiced separately by the supplier and is to have the same support documentation and/or approvals as all other invoices to be paid. 4. Supplier invoices for retainage amounts, if any has been withheld, are not required support documentation but must follow the approval process as all other invoices. 5. After approval the Contractor will forward the original invoice and any attachments to City of Clearwater's Owner Representative: I I I I I I City of Clearwater Construction Division Attn: Perry Lopez 410 N. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33755 6. After approval and verification of the materials received the Owner's Representative will forward the original invoice and any attachments to the appropriate City department for payment processing. 7. Steps 1 through 7 will be followed for each materials receipt and invoice. 8. Materials purchase P.O.s can be closed only upon completion of the materials acquisition and at the approval of the Contractor. 9. Upon closing of a materials purchase P.O. any unused balance will be added back to the appropriate I I I I II_Section IVaI Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I line(s) on Contractor's P.O. Closina of Contractor's P.O.: 1. All Materials Suppliers' P.O.'s must be closed prior to the final change order and closing of the Contractor's P.O. II_Section IVaI Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I u. o >- ..... () PUBLIC WORKS REQUEST TO REQUISITION STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER General Item Description: Vendor: Street Address: City/State/Zip: Phone No: Receiving Location (Ship to): Street Address: City/State/Zip: Requested by: Phone Number: Date Needed by: Expense Code: (City will complete) Units Detailed Description Price Per Line # Quantity ($, etc.) (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) Each Total Date: Date: Requesting Official Approving Official Title and Organization - Contractor Title and Organization - CEI. Services Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted C.E.&1. Firm and to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention according to City of Clearwater's Records Management Program. Page 1 of 2 II_Section IVaI Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 PUBLIC WORKS I I I I I I I I I u.. o >- .... o REQUEST TO REQUISITION STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER (Continuation page) Requested by: Phone Number: Date Needed by: Expense Code: Units Detailed Description Price Per Line # Quantity ($, etc.) (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) Each Total Page 2 of 2 I I I I I I I I Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted C.E.&1. Firm and to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention according to City of Clearwater's Records Management Program. 11_ Section IVaI Appendix.doc 10/9/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DBE) PROGRAM DOCUMENTS I OMS CONTROL NO. APPROVED: APPROVAL EXPIRES: 2090-0030 05101/2008 01/31/2011 I I U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY MBEIWBE UTILIZATION UNDER FEDERAL GRANTS, COOPERATIVE AGREEMENTS, AND INTERAGENCY AGREEMENTS I PART 1. (Reports are reQuired even if no procurements are made during the reporting period.) 1A FEDERAL FISCAL YEAR 1 B. REPORTING PERIOD (Check ALL appropriate boxes) 200_ D 1st (Oct-Dec) D 2nd (Jan-Mar) D 3rd (Apr-Jun) D 4th (Jul-Sep) D Annual D Check if this is the last report for the project (Project completed). 1C. REVISION OF A PRIOR REPORT? Y BRIEFLY DESCRIBE THE REVISIONS YOU ARE MAKING: or N Year: Quarter: 2A EPA FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE OFFICE ADDRESS 3A RECIPIENT NAME AND ADDRESS (ATTN: DBE Coordinator) . . 2B. EPA DBE COORDINATOR 2C. PHONE: 3B. RECIPIENT REPORTING CONTACT: 3C. PHONE: Name: Name: E-mail: Fax: E-mail: Fax: 4A FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE AGREEMENT ID NUMBER 4B. FEDERAL FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE PROGRAM TITLE or CFDA (SRF State Recipients, refer to Instructions for Completion of blocks NUMBER: 4A, 5A and 5C.) 5A TOTAL ASSISTANCE AGREEMENT AMOUNT 5B. If NO procurement and NO accomplishments were made this reporting period, check and (SRF State Recipients, refer to Instructions for Completion of blocks skip to Block NO.7. (Procurements are all expenditures through contract, order, purchase, 4A, 5A and 5C.) lease or barter of supplies, equipment, construction, or services needed to complete Federal EPA Share: $ assistance programs. Accomolishments, in this context, are procurements made with MBEs and/or WBEs. Recipient Share: $ D 5C. Total Procurement and MBEIWBE Accomplishments This Reporting Period (Only include amount not reported in any prior reporting period) Were sub-awards issued under this assistance agreement? Yes_ No_ Were contracts issued under this assistance agreement? Yes_ No_ Total Procurement Amount $ (Include total dollar values awarded by recipient, sub-recipients and SRF loan recipients.) Actual MBEIWBE Procurement Accomplished: (Include total dollar values awarded by recipient, sub-recipients, SRF loan recipients and Prime Contractors.) Construction Eauioment Services SUDolies Total $MBE: $WBE: 6. COMMENTS: (If no MBE/WBE procurements were accomplished during the reporting period, please explain what steps you are taking to achieve the MBEIWBE Program requirements specified in the terms and conditions of the Assistance Agreement.) 7. NAME OF RECIPIENT'S AUTHORIZED TITLE REPRESENTATIVE 8. SIGNATURE OF RECIPIENT'S DATE AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE EPA FORM 5700-52A available electronically at htto:/Iwww.eoa.aov/osb0/odfs/5700 52a.odf I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - - - - ---------- MBEIWBE PROCUREMENTS MADE DURING REPORTING PERIOD EPA Financial Assistance Agreement Number: - - - - - 1. Procurement Made By 2. Business 3. $ Value of 4. Date of 5. Type of 6. Name/Address/Phone Number of MBEIWBE Enterprise Procurement Award Product or Contractor or Vendor M MID DNY ServicesA Recipient Sub- Prime Minority Women (Enter Code) Recipient and/or SRF Loan Recipient i ! ! i i Type of product or service codes: 1 = Construction 2 = Supplies 3 = Services 4 = Equipment Note: Refer to Terms and conditions of your Assistance Agreement to determine the frequency of reporting. Recipients are required to submit MBENVBE reports to EPA beginning with the Federal fiscal year quarter the recipients receive the award, continuing until the project is completed. EPA FORM 5700-52A - (Approval Expires 01/31/11) I I I I I I I Instructions: A. General Instructions: MBEIWBE utilization is based on Executive Orders 11625,12138, 12432, P.L. 102-389 and EPA Regulations Part 30 and 31. EPA Form 5700-52A must be completed by recipients of Federal grants, cooperative agreements, or other Federal financial assistance which involve procurement of supplies, equipment, construction or services to accomplish Federal assistance programs. Recipients are required to report 30 days after the end of each federal fiscal quarter or annually, per the terms and conditions of the financial assistance agreement. Submission dates are January 30, April 30, July 30, and October 30. The submission date for annual reports is October 30. MBEIWBE program requirements, including reporting, are material terms and conditions of the financial assistance agreement. I I I I I I I I I B. Definitions: Procurement is the acquisition through contract, order, purchase, lease or barter of supplies, equipment, construction or services needed to accomplish Federal assistance programs. A contract is a written agreement between an EPA recipient and another party (also considered "prime contracts") and any lower tier agreement (also considered "subcontracts") for equipment, services, supplies, or construction necessary to complete the project. This definition excludes written agreements with another public agency. This definition includes personal and professional services, agreements with consultants, and purchase orders. A minority business enterprise (MBE) is a business concern that is (1) at least 51 percent owned by one or more minority individuals, or, in the case of a publicly owned business, at least 51 percent of the stock is owned by one or more minority individuals; and (2) whose daily business operations are managed and directed by one or more of the minority owners. U.S. citizenship is required. Recipients shall presume that minority individuals include Black Americans, Hispanic Americans, Native Americans, Asian Pacific Americans, or other groups whose members are found to be disadvantaged by the Small Business Act or by the Secretary of Commerce under section 5 of Executive order 11625. The reporting contact at EPA can provide additional information. I A woman business enterprise (WBE) is a business concern that is, (1) at least 51 percent owned by one or I I more women, or, in the case of a publicly owned business, at least 51 percent of the stock is owned by one or more women and (2) whose daily business operations are managed and directed by one or more of the women owners. Business firms which are 51 percent owned by minorities or women, but are in fact managed and operated by non- minority individuals do not qualify for meeting MBEIWBE procurement goals. U.S. Citizenship is required. The following affirmative steps for utilizing MBEs and WBEs must be documented. Such documentation is subject to EPA review upon request: 1. Include of MBEslWBEs on solicitation lists. 2. Assure that MBEslWBEs are solicited once they are identified. 3. Divide total requirements into smaller tasks to permit maximum MBEIWBE participation, where feasible. 4. Establish delivery schedules which will encourage MBEIWBE participation, where feasible. 5. Encourage use of the services of the U.S. Department of Commerce's Minority Business Development Agency (MBDA) and the U.S. Small Business Administration to identify MBEs/WBEs. 6. Require that each party to a subgrant, subagreement, or contract award take the affirmative steps outlined here. C. Instructions for Part I: 1a. Specify Federal fiscal year this report covers. The Federal fiscal year runs from October 1st through September 30th (e.g. November 29,2005 falls within Federal fiscal year 2006) 1 b. Check applicable reporting box, quarterly or annually. Also indicate if this is the last report for the project. 1 c. Indicate if this is a revision to a previous year or quarter, and provide a brief description of the revision you are making. 2a-c. Please refer to your financial assistance agreement for the mailing address of the EPA financial assistance office for your agreement. The "EPA DBE Reporting Contact" is the DBE Coordinator for the EPA Region from which your financial assistance agreement was originated. For a list of DBE Coordinators please refer to the EPA OSDBU website at www.epa.gov/osdbu. Click on "Regional Contacts" for the name of your coordinator. 3a-c. Identify the agency, state authority, university or other organization which is the recipient of the Federal financial assistance and the person to contact concerning this report. 4a. Provide the Assistance Agreement or Interagency Agreement number assigned by EPA. A separate report must be submitted for each Assistance Agreement or Interagency Agreement. *For SRF recipients: In box 4a list numbers for ALL open Assistance Agreements. SRF recipients will report activity for all Agreements on one form. 4b. Refer back to Assistance Agreement document for this information. 5a. Provide the total amount of the Assistance Agreement which includes Federal funds plus recipient matching funds and funds from other sources. *For SRF recipients only: SRF recipients will not enter an amount in 5a. Please leave 5a blank. 5b. Self-explanatory. 5c. State whether or not sub-awards and/or subcontracts have been issued under the assistance agreement by indicating "yes" or "no". Provide the total dollar amount of all contracts/procurements awarded this reporting period by the recipient and all sub-recipients, and SRF loan recipients. For example: Actual dollars for procurement from the procuring office; actual contracts let from the contracts office; actual goods, services, supplies, etc., from other sources including the central purchasing/ procurement centers). Where requested, also provide the total dollar amount of all MBEIWBE procurement awarded during this reporting period by the recipient, sub- recipients, SRF loan recipients, and prime contractors in the categories of construction, equipment, services and supplies. These amounts include the Federal, State and local shares in the procurement awards. I *For SRF recipients only: In 5c please enter the I total procurement amount for the quarter under all of your SRF Assistance Agreements. The figure I reported in this section is not directly tied to an individual Assistance Agreement identification number. (SRF state recipients report state procurements in this section) I 6. If there were no MBEIWBE accomplishments this reporting period, please briefly explain what steps you are taking in furtherance of the MBEIWBE I requirements specified in the terms and conditions of the Assistance Agreement. 7. Name and title of official administrator or I designated reporting official. 8. Signature and month, day year report submitted. I D. Instructions for Part II: For each MBEIWBE procurement made under this I assistance agreement during the reporting period, provide the following information: 1. Check whether this procurement was made by I the recipient, sub-recipientlSRF loan recipient, or the prime contractor. 2. Check either the MBE or WBE column. If a firm I is both an MBE and WBE, the recipient may choose to count the entire procurement towards EITHER its MBE or WBE accomplishments. The I recipient may also divide the total amount of the procurement (using any ratio it so chooses) and count those divided amounts toward its MBE and I WBE accomplishments. If the recipient chooses to divide the procurement amount and count portions toward its MBE and WBE accomplishments, please state the appropriate I amounts under the MBE and WBE columns on the form. The combined MBE and WBE amounts for that MBEIWBE contractor must not exceed the "Value of the Procurement" I reported in column #3 3. Dollar value of procurement. I 4. Date of award, shown as month, day, year. Date of award is defined as the date the contract or I procurement was awarded, not the date the contractor received payment under the awarded contract or procurement, unless payment occurred on the date of award. (Where direct I purchasing is the procurement method, the date of award is the date the purchase was made) I I I I 5. Using codes at the bottom of the form, identify type of product or service acquired through this procurement (eg., enter 1 if construction, 2 if supplies, etc). I I 6. Name, address, and telephone number of MBE/WSE firm. I ""This data is requested to comply with provisions mandated by: statute or regulations (40 CFR Part 30 and 31); OMS Circulars; or added by EPA to ensure sound and effective assistance management. Accurate, complete data are required to obtain funding, while no pledge of confidentiality is provided. I I The public reporting and recording burden for this collection of information is estimated to average I hour per response annually. Burden means the total time, effort, or financial resources expended by persons to generate, maintain, retain, or disclosure or provide information to or for a Federal agency. This includes the time needed to review instructions; develop, acquire, install, and utilize technology and systems for the purposes of collecting, validating, and verifying information, processing and maintaining information, and disclosing and providing information; adjust the existing ways to comply with any previously applicable instructions and requirements; train personnel to be able to respond to a collection of information; search data sources; complete and review the collection of information; and transmit or otherwise disclose the information. An agency may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMS control number. I I I I I I Send comments on the Agency's need for this information, the accuracy of the provided burden estimates, and any suggested methods for minimizing respondent burden, including through the use of automated collection techniques to the Director, OPPE Regulatory Information Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (2136), 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW, Washington, D.C. 20460. Include the OMS Control number in any correspondence. Do not send the completed form to this address. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I EP A Office of Small Business Programs (Formerly the Office of Small and Disadvantaged Business Utilization "OSDBU") New Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program "Increasing Opportunities for Disadvantaged Businesses under EPA financial Assistance Agreements" What is The Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program? . It is EPA's policy that recipients of EPA financial assistance through grants and cooperative agreements award a "fair share" of subagreements to small, minority and women-owned businesses. Since each is a separate entity, the objective is to assure that each of these business entities is given the opportunity to participate in subagreements awards under EPA financial assistance agreements. This policy applies to all subagreements for equipment, supplies, construction and services under all EPA grants, cooperative agreements, and lAGs. . The EPA Office of Small Business Programs (OSBP) is responsible for establishing policy and providing procedural guidance for the utilization of small, minority and women- owned businesses under the Agency's financial assistance programs through its Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Program, formally the Minority Business Enterprise and Women-owned Business Enterprise Program (MBEjWBE). . The DBE Program is an outreach, education, and goaling program designed to increase the participation of DBEs in procurements funded by EPA assistance agreements. The EPA DBE Program encompasses many of the components of the former MBE/WBE Program and includes many new features. Why Does the Program Exist? I I I I . The program was mandated by congress in response to the large number of procurement opportunities available through assistance agreements vs. Contracts. At EPA, assistance agreement dollars are approximately four times as much as contract dollars. The statutory authority for the program is as follows: . Public Law 101-549, Nov 15, 1990 (clean air act): To the extent practicable, not less than 10% made available to DBEs. . Public Law 102-389, Oct 6, 1992 (clean water act): To the fullest extent possible, at least 8% made available to socially and economically disadvantaged concerns, including HBCUs and women. How We Achieve the Purpose of the Program? I Recipients of EPA financial assistance agreements are required to seek, and encouraged to utilize small, minority, and women-owned businesses for their procurement needs under the financial assistance agreement. This is done through the inclusion of terms and conditions in the financial assistance agreement. The key functional components of the DBE Program are as follows: Fair Share Objectives Six Good Faith Efforts and Contract Administration Requirements MBEjWBE Reporting MBEjWBE Certification I I I Old MBEjWBE Program New DBE Program I I I I I I I I I I How does the new DBE Program compare with the old MBEjWBE Program in each functional component? Overall Old MBEjWBE Program New DBE Program Known as the Minority-Owned Business Enterprise and Women-Owned Business Enterprise (MBE/WBE) Program. Now known as the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Program. MBEs and WBEs are a part of the larger universe of DBEs. Fair Share Obiectives Recipients must negotiate fair share objectives Recipients must negotiate fair share objectives with the with the Agency. Agency. Proposed fair share objectives and supporting documentation must be submitted within 120 days after the acceptance of the assistance award. For Superfund grants, fair share objectives must For all grants, fair share objectives must be negotiated be negotiated before funds may be expended before funds may be expended for procurement under for procurement under the financial assistance the financial assistance agreement. agreement. Fair share objectives must be based on an No Change availability analysis, disparity study, or other supporting data and documentation. Fair share objectives will remain in effect for 3 No Change fiscal years, unless there are significant changes to the data supporting the fair share objectives. Recipients may adopt the fair share objective of No Change. Recipients will affirm the acceptance of the another recipient. other recipient's fair share objective in the grant terms and conditions. No exemptions to the fair share objectives The following are exemptions from the fair share objective requirement. requirements: . Grant and loan recipients receiving a total of $250K or less in EPA financial assistance in a given fiscal year. . Tribal recipients of Performance Partnership Eligible grants under 40 CFR Part 35, Subpart B. - There is a 3-year phase in period for the requirement to negotiate fair share goals for Tribal and Insular Area recipients. . Recipients of Technical Assistance Grants. I I I I I I I I I I I The Six Good Faith Efforts and Contract Administration Requirements I I I Old MBE/WBE Program New DBE Program I I I I Following the "Six Affirmative Steps" under 40 The "Six Good Faith Efforts" combine the "Six Affirmative CFR Part 31, and the Six Positive Efforts under 40 Steps" and the "Six Positive Efforts" and are still required CFR Part 30 were required by all grantees. by all grantees. The substance of the efforts has not changed. No protections for DBE Subcontractors Several mechanisms are in place to protect DBE Subcontractors: . 30 day payment provision, notifications of DBE terminations, and continuing the Six Affirmative Steps after termination of a DBE. . Completion of 3 new forms to prevent "bait and switch" tactics. None of these new forms are completed, or submitted by the grant recipient. These forms are filled out by the recipient's prime contractors and subcontractors. No mechanism for recipients to develop and Recipients are now required to create and maintain a maintain their own list of DBEs bidders list. There is a $250K exemption from this requirement. MBE/WBE Reportina Old MBE/WBE Program New DBE Program I I I I All recipients, including Tribes and trust territories, No Change must report MBE/WBE accomplishments on EPA Form 5700-52A. The following recipients report on an annual basis: No Change . Recipients of Continuing Environmental Program Grants under 40 CFR Part 35, Subpart A; . Recipients under 40 CFR Part 35, Subpart B. , . General Assistance Program (GAP) grants for tribal governments and intertribal consortia; and . Institutions of higher education, hospitals and other non-profit organizations receiving financial assistance agreements under 40 CFR Part 30. The following recipients report on a quarterly Recipients who reported quarterly under the old basis: program, now report on a semi-annual basis. . Recipients of financial assistance agreements that capitalize revolving loan funds; and . All other recipients not specified as "annual reporters". Self-certified MBEs and WBEs can be counted MBEs and WBEs must be certified in order to be counted I I I I I I I I I I toward a recipient's accomplishments. toward a recipient's accomplishments. MBE/WBE Certification Old MBE/WBE Program New DBE Program MBEs and WBEs self-certify their status. MBEs and WBEs must be certified by EPA, SBA, DOT, or by state, local, Tribal, or private entities whose certification criteria match EPA's. *States are not required to develop or implement a new certification program. Self-certified MBEs and WBEs can be counted MBEs and WBEs must be certified in order to be toward a recipient's MBE/WBE accomplishments counted toward a recipient's MBE/WBE when reporting on EPA Form 5700-52A accomplishments. Who do I contact for more information? I I I 202-566-2605 patrick.kimberly@eoa.gov 202-566-2496 zamoieri.oaula@eoa.aov 202-566- 1510 oeterson.samuel@eoa.gov I I I I The EPA OSBP Headquarters Indirect Procurement Team: Kimberly Patrick, Team leader: Paula Zampieri, Program Analyst: Samuel Peterson, SEE Program Analyst: Regional MBE/WBE Coordinators: Region 1 - Valerie Bataille: Region 2 - Michele Junker Region 3 - Romona McQueen Region 4 - Josephine Brown Region 5 - Adrianne Callahan Region 6 - Debora Bradford Region 7 - Chester Stovall Region 8 - Marshell Pullman Region 9 - Joe Ochab Region 10 - Greg luchey EPA Headquarters - Veronica Squirrell 617 -918- 1674 bataille.valerie@eoa.aov 21 2-637-341 8 junker.michele@epa.gov 215-814-5155 mcaueen.romona@eoa.oov 404-562-9672 brown.ioseohine@epa.oov 312-353-5556 callahan.adrianne@eoa.gov 214-665-7406 bradford.debora@eoa.oov 91 3-551 -7549 stovall.chester@eoa.gov 303-312-6499 pullman.marshell@epa.gov 415-972-3761 ochab.ioe@eoa.oov 206-553-2967 luchev.oreo@eoa.oov 202-564-5347 squirrell.veronica@eoa.oov I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I FAIR SHARE OBJECTIVES Program Comparison Old MBE/WBE Program New OBE Program I Recipients must negotiate fair share objectives Recipients must negotiate fair share objectives with the with the Agency. Agency. Proposed fair share objectives and supporting documentation must be submitted within 120 days after the acceptance of the assistance award. For Superfund grants, fair share objectives must For all grants, fair share objectives must be negotiated be negotiated before funds may be expended before funds may be expended for procurement under for procurement under the financial assistance the financial assistance agreement. agreement. Fair share objectives must be based on an No Change availability analysis, disparity study, or other supporting data and documentation. Fair share objectives will remain in effect for 3 No Change fiscal years, unless there are significant changes to the data supporting the fair share objectives. Recipients may adopt the fair share objective of No Change. Recipients will affirm the acceptance of the another recipient. other recipient's fair share objective in the grant terms and conditions. No exemptions to the fair share objectives The following are exemptions from the fair share objective requirement. requirements: . Grant and loan recipients receiving a total of $250K or less in EPA financial assistance in a given fiscal year. . Tribal recipients of Performance Partnership Eligible grants under 40 CFR Part 35, Subpart B. - There is a 3-year phase in period for the requirement to negotiate fair share goals for Tribal and Insular Area recipients. . Recipients of Technical Assistance Grants. I I I I I I I What are Fair Share Objectives? I . A fair share objective is goal based on the capacity and availability of qualified, certified MBEs and WBEs in the relevant geographic market for the procurement categories of construction, equipment, services, and supplies.. .compared to the number of all qualified entities in the same market for the same procurement categories, adjusted, as appropriate, to reflect the level of MBE and WBE participation expected absent the effects of discrimination. I I I . A fair share objective is not a Quota. · A recipient cannot be penalized for not meeting its fair share objectives. I What is the process for negotiating fair share objectives? I · A recipient must submit its proposed MBE and WBE fair share objectives and supporting documentation to its designated Regional MBEjWBE Coordinator within 120 days after its acceptance of its financial assistance award. I · EPA must respond in writing to the recipient's submission within 30 days of receipt, either agreeing with the submission or providing initial comments for further negotiation. Failure to respond within this time frame may be considered as agreement by EPA with the fair share objectives submitted by the recipient. I · MBE and WBE fair share objectives must be agreed upon by the recipient and EPA before funds may be expended for procurement under the recipient's financial assistance agreement. I I · Fair Share Objectives will remain in effect for three fiscal years unless there are significant changes to the data supporting the fair share objectives. I Under the new DBE Program, may I adopt the Fair Share Objective of another recipient? · Yes! Recipients may use the approved fair share objective of another recipient with the same or similar relevant geographic buying market, purchasing the same or similar items. I · Recipients who normally accept the negotiated fair share objective of the state in which they are located, can continue to do so. This will be done by affirming the acceptance of the fair share objective in the grant terms and conditions. However, they may also elect to negotiate their own fair share objectives. I I How do I determine a fair share objective? There are many methods that can be used to formulate a fair share objective. For more information on methods, please refer to the DBE Program Manual which can be found at www.epa.gov/osdbu. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Fair Share Goals Set October 1, 2006 Region.4 Kentucky Construction 0.70% 7.60% Supplies 3.70% 4.60% Services 1.20% 16.30% Goods/Equipment 1.20% 1.10% Combined Florida DEP Construction 9.00% 3.00% Supplies Services Goods/Equipment Combined Florida Construction 20.00% 20.00% Hillsborough County Supplies 10.00% 10.00% Services 10.00% 10.00% Professional Services 10.00% 10.00% Combined South Carolina Construction 3.60% 2.40% Supplies 9.00% 9.00% Services 11.00% 11.00% Goods/Equipment 10.00% 10.00% Combined Tennessee Construction 2.60% 2.60% Supplies 5.20% 5.20% Services 5.20% 5.20% Goods/Equipment 5.20% 5.20% Combined Mississippi Construction Non-SRF Programs Supplies 7.70% 3.40% Services 1.10% 2.20% Goods/Equipment 6.80% 5.10% Combined Supplies 7.00% Services 7.00% Goods/Equipment 7.00% Combined 5.00% 9.00% 9.00% 9.00% 10.00% I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Region 4 Fair Share Goals Set October 1, 2006 North Carolina le~ig~~nt ~"of I,~.,,' !. ~ .~ MaE % _aE % Construction Supplies Services Goods/Equipment Professional Services 8. 00% 7.00% 7.00% 7.00% 4.00% Supplies Services Goods/Eq u ipment Combined 1 11 .00% 30.00% 20.00% I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I MBEjWBE Reporting "Measuring the Effectiveness of the Program" Program Comparison Old MBE/WBE Program New DBE Program Recipients must report MBE/WBE accomplishments No Change on EPA Form 5700-52A. The following recipients report on an annual basis: No Change . Recipients of Continuing Environmental Program Grants under 40 CFR Part 35, Subpart A; . Recipients under 40 CFR Part 35, Subpart B. , . General Assistance Program (GAP) grants for tribal governments and intertribal consortia; and . Institutions of higher education, hospitals and other non-profit organizations receiving financial assistance agreements under 40 CFR Part 30. The following recipients report on a quarterly Recipients who reported quarterly under the old basis: program, now report on a semi-annual basis. . Recipients of financial assistance agreements that capitalize revolving loan funds; and . All other recipients not specified as "annual reporters". Self-certified MBEs and WBEs can be counted MBEs and WBEs must be certified in order to be toward a recipient's accomplishments. counted toward a recipient's accomplishments. What is the Purpose of MBE/WBE Reporting? The purpose of MBE/WBE reporting is to monitor the grant recipient's . Accomplishments in Utilizing MBEs and WBEs; . Adherence to the Good Faith Efforts (i.e., outreach to MBEs, WBEs, and other DBEs); and . Progress in Achieving MBE and WBE Goals. What are the Grant Recipient's Responsibilities for MBE/WBE Reporting? . Complete & submit EPA Form 5700-52A for each reporting period at a frequency specified in the grant agreement, to the appropriate EPA office and personnel as identified in their financial assistance agreement. . Submit "negative reports" (e.g., reports where there were no MBEs or WBEs utilized, or no procurement expenditures of any kind were made during the reporting period). I . Collect and retain/document data on MBE, WBE, and Total Procurement expenditures made for the grant project up to the "Total Assistance Agreement Amount" (i.e., the grantee's total budget). I . Report procurement expenditures from Q.[l sources [i.e., the EPA grant recipient, sub- recipients, loan recipients (and the prime contractors of all three entities)]. I What are the reporting frequencies and due dates? I Annual Reporters: . Recipients of Continuing Environmental Program Grants under 40 CFR Part 35, Subpart A; . Recipients under 40 CFR Part 35, Subpart B; . General Assistance Program (GAP) grants for tribal governments and intertribal consortia; and . Institutions of higher education, hospitals and other non-profit organizations receiving financial assistance agreements under 40 CFR Part 30. . Annual Reporters must submit their completed EPA Form 5700-52A to EPA within 30 days of the end of the annual reporting period (October 30th). I I I I Semi-Annual Reporters: . Recipients of financial assistance agreements that capitalize revolving loan funds; and . All other recipients not specified as "annual reporters". . Semiannual ReDorters must submit their completed EPA Form 5700-52A to EPA within 30 days of the end of the semiannual reporting period (April 30th and October 30th). I I What must be considered in counting MBE/WBE participation? I . MBEs & WBEs must be officially certified as such, in order to claim/report them as MBE/WBE on EPA Form 5700-52A. (See Certification Fact Sheet) . MBEs and WBEs may not act as Brokers or Passive conduits of funds. . A MBE or WBE Trucker must serve a "commercially-useful" function. . The amount counted towards a MBE or WBE Prime Contractor may not exceed 100% of contract value. . To be claimed 100% MBE or WBE, a Prime Contractor who is MBE or WBE may not sub- award more than 49% of its contract value to non-MBE/WBE. I I I MBE/WBE Reporting Under Revolving Loan Programs I . EPA financial assistance recipients that capitalize Revolving Loan Programs need only report "Total Procurement Dollars" in the amount of loans equal or up to the capitalization grant amount. . Entities receiving identified loans must submit their MBE/WBE participation reports/data to the EPA grant recipient (rather than to EPA). . EPA financial assistance recipients that capitalize Revolving Loan Programs must ensure that they receive procurement reports from revolving loan recipients in time to meet EPA's MBE/WBE Reporting deadlines. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I MBE/WBE Certification "Maintaining the Integrity of the Program" Program Comparison Old MBE/WBE Program New DBE Program MBEs and WBEs self-certify their status. MBEs and WBEs must be certified by EPA, SBA, DOT, or by state, local, Tribal, or private entities whose certification criteria match EPA's. *States are not required to develop or implement a new certification program. Self-certified MBEs and WBEs can be counted MBEs and WBEs must be certified in order to be toward a recipient's MBE/WBE accomplishments counted toward a recipient's MBE/WBE when reporting on EPA Form 5700-52A accomplishments. What Are DBEs, MBEs and WBEs? . Disadvantaqed Business Enterprises (DBEs) are . entities owned and/or controlled by a socially and economically disadvantaged individuals as described by Title X of the Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 (42 U.S.C 7601 note) (10% statute), and Public Law 102-389 (42 U.S.C 4370d) (8% statute), respectively; · a Small Business Enterprise (SBE); · a Small Business in a Rural Area (SBRA); · a labor Surplus Area Firm (LSAF); or . a Historically Underutilized Business (HUB) Zone Small Business Concern, or a concern under a successor program. . Minoritv Business Enterprises (MBEs) are entities that are at least 51 % owned and/or controlled by a socially and economically disadvantaged individual as described by Title X of the Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 (42 U.S.C 7601 note), and Public Law 102- 389 (42 U.S.C 4370d), respectively. . Women's Business Enterprises (WBEs) are entities that are at least 51 % owned and/or controlled by women (under the 10% and 8% statutes). Who is responsible for certifying MBE and WBE firms? EPA OSDBU Headquarters will be responsible for implementing and processing the certification of MBE/WBE firms. Regional DBE coordinators will assist by providing forms to interested firms and fielding general questions. The states have no responsibility to implement or maintain a certification program for EPA. Does EPA accept other certifications? Yes. Under the new DBE Program entities can no longer self-certify. EPA will accept certifications from: . SBA and DOT (with U.S. citizenship); . Tribal, State and local governments, as long as their standards for certification meet or exceed our own; and I . Independent private organization certifications as long as their standards for certification meet or exceed our own. I If and entity holds one of these certifications, it is considered acceptable for establishing MBE or WBE status under EPA's DBE Program, and application for EPA certification is not needed. I What are the EPA MBEjWBE certification requirements? I . In order to be certified by EPA, an entity must first attempt to be certified by SBA or DOT, or a Tribal, State, or local government, or by an independent private organization, and be unsuccessful in that attempt. I . To qualify as a MBE or WBE under EPA's programs an entity must establish that it is at least 51 % owned and/or controlled by socially and economically disadvantaged individuals who are of good character and are citizens of the United States. I . An individual claiming economic disadvantaged status must have an initial and continued personal net worth of less than $750,000. I What does the certification process entail? I . Applications are filed with EPA OSDBU. Applications can be obtained from EPA OSDBU, from regional DBE Coordinators, and from EPA OSDBU's website, www.eoa.Qov/osdbu . The application includes the following: I o An attestation to the accuracy and truthfulness of the information on the application form by sworn affidavit, or an unsworn declaration executed under penalty of perjury of the laws of the United States. o The application must include evidence demonstrating that the entity is owned and/or controlled by one or more individuals claiming disadvantaged status, along with certifications or narratives regarding the disadvantaged status of such individuals. o The application must include documentation of a denial of certification by a Federal agency, State government, local government, Indian Tribal government, or independent private organization, if applicable. I I I I . Once applications are filed, EPA OSDBU will advise each applicant within 15 days, whether the application is complete and suitable for evaluation and, if not, what additional information or action is required. I . EPA OSDBU will make its certification decision within 30 days of receipt of a complete and suitable application package. I How does Certification affect a firm's participation in the overall DBE program? I . In order for a firm to be counted towards a recipient's Minority Business Enterprise and Women Business Enterprise utilization, a firm must be certified. I . Non-certified MBEs and WBEs may be used by recipients for their procurement needs. However, those firms cannot be counted toward their MBE/ WBE accomplishments. . DBE Program outreach efforts apply to all DBEs, not just MBEs and WBEs. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Good Faith Efforts What is the Purpose of the Good Faith Efforts? The Good Faith Efforts are methods employed by all EPA financial assistance agreement recipients to ensure that disadvantaged business enterprises (D8Es) have the opportunity to compete for procurements funded by EPA financial assistance funds. What Are the Good Faith Efforts? .:. Ensure DBEs are made aware of contracting opportunities to the fullest extent practicable through outreach and recruitment activities. For Indian Tribal. State and local government recipients, this will include placing DBEs on solicitation lists and soliciting them whenever they are potential sources. .:. Make information on forthcoming opportunities available to DBEs and arrange time frames for contracts and establish delivery schedules, where the requirements permit, in a way that encourages and facilitates participation by DBEs in the competitive process. This includes, whenever possible, posting solicitations for bids or proposals for a minimum of 30 calendar days before the bid or proposal closing date. .:. Consider in the contracting process whether firms competing for large contracts could subcontract with DBEs. For Indian Tribal, State and local Government recipients, this will include dividing total requirements, when economically feasible, into smaller tas~s or quantities to permit maximum participation by DBEs in the competitive process. .:. Encourage contracting with a consortium of DBEs when a contract is too large for one of these firms to handle individually. .:. Use the services and assistance of the SBA and the Minority Business Development Agency of the Department of Commerce. ..:. If the prime contractor awards subcontracts, require the prime contractor to take the steps in paragraphs (a) through (e) of this section. What are the New Contract Administration Provisions? When the DBE rule goes into effect, there are a number of new provisions designed to prevent unfair practices that adversely affect DBEs. Those provisions are as follows: .:. A recipient must require its prime contractor to pay its subcontractor for satisfactory performance no more than 30 days from the prime contractor's receipt of payment from the recipient. .:. A recipient must be notified in writing by its prime contractor prior to any Form Requirement Provided By Completed By Submitted To I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I termination of a DBE subcontractor for convenience by the prime contractor. .:. If a DBE subcontractor fails to complete work under the subcontract for any reason, the recipient must require the prime contractor to employ the Six Good Faith Efforts jf soliciting a replacement subcontractor. .:. A recipient must require its prime contractor to employ the Six Good Faith Efforts even if the prime contractor has achieved its fair share objectives. What are the New Forms Associated With the New Contract Administration Provisions? EPA Form 6100-2 - DBE Program Subcontractor Participation Form. This form gives a DBE subcontractor the opportunity to describe the work the DBE subcontractor received from the prime contractor, how much the DBE subcontractor was paid and any other concerns the DBE subcontractor might have. EPA Form 6100-3 - DBE Program Subcontractor Performance Form. This form captures an intended subcontractors description of work to be performed for the prime contractor and the price of the work submitted to the prime. EPA Form 6100-4 - DBE Program Subcontractor Utilization Form. This form captures the prime's intended use of an identified DBE subcontractor, and the estimated dollar amount of the subcontract. EPA Form 6100-2 Recipients required Prime Contractors DBE Subcontractors EPA ORE Coordinator to have pnme contractors provide fomI to Subcontractors EPA Form 6100-3 Recipient>; required Prime Contractors DBE Subcontractors Recipients as part of to have prune bid or proposal contractors provide package form to Subcontractors EPA Form 6100-4 Recipients required Recipients Prime Contractors Recipients as part of to have pnme bid or proposal contractors package complete the form I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ~ 2 OMB Control No: 2090-0030 Approved: 05/01/2008 Approval Expires: 01/31/2011 Environmental Protection Agency Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program DBE Subcontractor Participation Form NAME OF SUBCONTRACTOR' PROJECT NAME ADDRESS CONTRACT NO. TELEPHONE NO. EMAIL ADDRESS PRIME CONTRACTOR NAME Please use the space below to report any concerns regarding the above EP A-funded project U, reason for termination by prime contractor, late payment, etc.). AMOUNT CONTRACT ITEM OF WORK OR DESCRIPTION OF SERVICES RECEIVED FROM SUBCONTRACTOR ITEM NO. THE PRIME CONTRACTOR WAS PAID BY PRIME CONTRACTOR Subcontractor Signature Title/Date 'Subcontractor is defined as a company, firm, joint venture, or individual who enters into an agreement with a contractor to provide services pursuant to an EP A award of financial assistance. EPA FORM 6100-2 (DBE Subcontractor Participation Form) I ~ 2 OMB Control No: 2090-0030 Approved: 05/01/2008 Approval Expires: 01/31/2011 I Environmental Protection Agency I Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program DBE Subcontractor Participation Form I I The public reporting and recordkeeping burden for this collection of information is estimated to average fifteen (15) minutes. Burden means the total time, effort, or financial resources expended by persons to generate, maintain, retain, or disclose or provide information to or for a Federal agency. This includes the time needed to review instructions; develop, acquire, install, and utilize technology and systems for the purposes of collecting, validating, and verifying information, processing and maintaining information, and disclosing and providing information; adjust the existing ways to comply with any previously applicable instructions and requirements; train personnel to be able to respond to a collection of information; search data sources; complete and review the collection of information; and transmit or otherwise disclose the information. An agency may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number. I I I I Send comments on the Agency's need for this information, the accuracy of the provided burden estimates, and any suggested methods for minimizing respondent burden, including the use of automated collection techniques to the Director, Collection Strategies Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (2822), 1200 Pennsylvania Ave., NW, Washington, D.C. 20460. Include the OMB control number in any correspondence. Do not send the completed EP A DBE Subcontractor Participation Form to this address. I I I I I I I I I EPA FORM 6100-2 (DBE Subcontractor Participation Form) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ... St OMB Control No: Approved: Approval Expires: 2090-0030 05/01/2008 01/31/2011 Environmental Protection Agency Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program DBE Subcontractor Performance Form NAME OF SUBCONTRACTORl PROJECT NAME ADDRESS BIDfPROPOSAL NO. TELEPHONE NO. E-MAIL ADDRESS PRIME CONTRACTOR NAME CONTRACT ITEM OF WORK OR DESCRIPTION OF SERVICES BID TO PRICE OF WORK ITEM NO. PRIME SUBMITTED TO PRIME CONTRACTOR Currently certified as an MBE or WBE under EPA's DBE Program? _ Yes _ No Signature of Prime Contractor Date Print Name Title Signature of Subcontractor Date Print Name Title 'Subcontractor is defined as a company, firm, joint venture, or individual who enters into an agreement with a contractor to provide services pursuant to an EP A award of financial assistance. EP A FORM 6100-3 (DBE Subcontractor Performance Form) I ~ St OMB Control No: Approved: Approval Expires: 2090-0030 05/01/2008 01/31/2011 I Environmental Protection Agency I Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program DBE Subcontractor Performance Form I I The public reporting and recordkeeping burden for this collection of information is estimated to average fifteen (15) minutes. Burden means the total time, effort, or financial resources expended by persons to generate, maintain, retain, or disclose or provide information to or for a Federal agency. This includes the time needed to review instructions; develop, acquire, install, and utilize technology and systems for the purposes of collecting, validating, and verifying information, processing and maintaining information, and disclosing and providing information; adjust the existing ways to comply with any previously applicable instructions and requirements; train personnel to be able to respond to a collection of information; search data sources; complete and review the collection of information; and transmit or otherwise disclose the information. An agency may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number. I I I Send comments on the Agency's need for this information, the accuracy of the provided burden estimates, and any suggested methods for minimizing respondent burden, including the use of automated collection techniques to the Director, Collection Strategies Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (2822), 1200 Pennsylvania Ave., NW, Washington, D.C. 20460. Include the OMB control number in any correspondence. Do not send the completed EP A DBE Subcontractor Performance Form to this address. I I I I I I I I I I EPA FORM 6100-3 (DBE Subcontractor Performance Form) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ~ St OMB Control No: Approved: Approval Expires: 2090-0030 05/01/2008 01/31/2011 Environmental Protection Agency Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program DBE Subcontractor Utilization Form BIDfPROPOSAL NO. PROJECT NAME NAME OF PRIME BIDDERfPROPOSER E-MAIL ADDRESS ADDRESS TELEPHONE NO. FAX NO. The following subcontractorsl will be used on this project: COMPANY NAME, ADDRESS, PHONE TYPE OF WORK TO BE ESTIMATE CURRENTLY NUMBER, AND E-MAIL ADDRESS PERFORMED D DOLLAR CERTIFIED AMOUNT AS AN MBE OR WBE? I certify under penalty of perjury that the forgoing statements are true and correct. In the event of a replacement of a subcontractor, I will adhere to the replacement requirements set forth in 40 CFR Part 33 Section 33.302(c). Signature of Prime Contractor Date Print Name Title 'Subcontractor is defined as a company, firm, joint venture, or individual who enters into an agreement with a contractor to provide services pursuant to an EP A award of financial assistance. EPA FORM 6100-4 (DBE Subcontractor Utilization Form) I Environmental Protection Agency OMB Control No: Approved: Approval Expires: 2090-0030 05/01/2008 01/31/2011 I ... 2 I Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program DBE Subcontractor Utilization Form I I The public reporting and recordkeeping burden for this collection of information is estimated to average fifteen (15) minutes. Burden means the total time, effort, or financial resources expended by persons to generate, maintain, retain, or disclose or provide information to or for a Federal agency. This includes the time needed to review instructions; develop, acquire, install, and utilize technology and systems for the purposes of collecting, validating, and verifying information, processing and maintaining information, and disclosing and providing information; adjust the existing ways to comply with any previously applicable instructions and requirements; train personnel to be able to respond to a collection of information; search data sources; complete and review the collection of information; and transmit or otherwise disclose the information. An agency may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to, a collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number. I I I Send comments on the Agency's need for this information, the accuracy of the provided burden estimates, and any suggested methods for minimizing respondent burden, including the use of automated collection techniques to the Director, Collection Strategies Division, U.s. Environmental Protection Agency (2822), 1200 Pennsylvania Ave., NW, Washington, D.C. 20460. Include the OMB control number in any correspondence. Do not send the completed EP A DBE Subcontractor Utilization Form to this address. I I I I I I I I I I EPA FORM 6100-4 (DBE Subcontractor Utilization Form) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 15904 Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. 59/Wednesday, March 26, 200a/Rules and Regulations which guides the Coast Guard in complying with the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA) (42 U.S.C. 4321-4370f), and have concluded that there are no factors in this case that would limit the use of a categorical exclusion under section 2.B.2 of the Instruction. Therefore, this rule is categorically excluded, under figure 2-1, paragraph (34)(g), ofthe Instruction, from further environmental documentation. Under figure 2-1, paragraph (34)(g), of the Instruction, an "Environmental Analysis Check List" and a "Categorical Exclusion Determination" are not required for this rule because it concerns an emergency situation of less than 1 week in duration. List of Subjects in 33 CFR Part 165 Harbors, Marine safety, Navigation (water), Reporting and recordkeeping requirements, Security measures, and Waterways. . For the reasons discussed in the preamble, the Coast Guard amends 33 CFR part 165 as follows: PART 165-REGULATED NAVIGATION AREAS AND LIMITED ACCESS AREAS . 1. The authority citation for part 165 continues to read as follows: Authority: 33 D.S.C. 1226, 1231; 46 D.S.C. Chapter 701; 50 D.S.C. 191, 195; 33 CFR 1.05-1,6.04--1,6.04-6, and 160.5; Pub. L. 107-295,116 Stat. 2064; Department of Homeland Security Delegation No. 0170.1. .2. Add temporary S 165.TOI-0173 to read as follows: ~ 165. T01-0173 Safety Zone: Longwood Events Wedding Fireworks Display, Boston Harbor, Boston, MA. (a) Location. The following area is a safety zone: All waters of Boston Harbor, from surface to bottom, within a four hundred (400) yard radius ofthe fireworks launch site located in Boston Harbor at approximate position 42021'42"N,07102'36"W. (b) Effective Date. This rule is effective from 8:45 p.m. through 9:45 p.m. on March 29, 2008. (c) Definitions. (1) Designated representative means a Coast Guard Patrol Commander, including a Coast Guard coxswain, petty officer, or other officer operating a Coast Guard vessel or a Federal, State, or local officer designated by or assisting the Captain of the Port (COTP). (2) [Reserved] (d) Regulations. (1) In accordance with the general regulations in section 165.23 ofthis. part, entry into or movement within this zone by any person or vessel is prohibited unless authorized by the Captain of the Port (COTP), Boston or the COTP's designated representative. (2) The safety zone is closed to all vessel traffic, except as may be permitted by the COTP or the COTP's designated representative. (3) Vessel operators desiring to enter or operate within the safety zone must contact the COTP or the COTP's designated representative to obtain permission by calling the Sector Boston Command Center at 617-223-5761. Vessel operators given permission to enter or operate in the safety zone must comply with all directions given to them by the COTP or the COTP's designated representative. Dated: March 12, 2008. Gail P. Kulisch, Captain, U.S. Coast Guard, Captain of the Port, Sector Boston. [FR Doc. E8-6149 Filed 3-25-08; 8:45 am] BilLING CODE 4910-15-P ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY 40 CFR Parts 30, 31, 33, 35, and 40 [Docket ID NO. EPA-HQ-OA-2002--D001; FRL-8545-9] RIN 209D-AA38 Participation by Disadvantaged Business Enterprises in Procurement Under Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Financial Assistance Agreements AGENCY: Environmental Protection Agency. ACTION: Final rule. SUMMARY: This action will harmonize EPA's statutory Disadvantaged Business Enterprise procurement objectives with the United States Supreme Court's decision in Adarand Constructors, Inc. v. Pena, 515 U.S. 200 (1995). In that case, the Supreme Court extended strict judicial scrutiny to federal programs that use racial or ethnic criteria as a basis for decision making. Remedying discrimination is recognized as a compelling government interest, and this rule is promulgated on the understanding that the statutory provisions authorizing its adoption were enacted for that remedial purpose. This rule sets forth a narrowly tailored EP A program to serve the compelling government interest of remedying past and current racial discrimination through agency-wide DBE procurement objectives..EPA.intEmds to evaluate the propriety of the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise program in 7 years through subsequent rulemaking. This rule also revises EPA's Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women's Business Enterprise (WBE) program and renames it EP A's Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Program. EP A is removing existing MBE/WBE specific provisions in regulations for grants and agreements with institutions of higher education, hospitals, and other non- profit organizations; and uniform administrative requirements for grants and cooperative agreements to state and local governments, state and local assistance, and research and demonstration grants, and is consolidating and adding to these provisions in this new regulation. This rule affects only procurements under EP A financial assistance agreements. This rule does not apply to direct Federal procurement actions. If you are a recipient of an EP A financial assistance agreement or an entity receiving an identified loan under a financial assistance agreement capitalizing a revolving loan fund, this rule may affect you. DATES: This final rule is effective May 27,2008. ADDRESSES: EPA has established a docket for this action under Docket ID No. EPA-HQ-OA-2002-0001. All documents in the docket are listed on the www.regulations.govWeb site. Although listed in the index, some information is not publicly available, e.g., CBI or other information whose disclosure is restricted by statute. Certain other material, such as copyrighted material, is not placed on the Internet and will be publicly available only in hard copy form. Publicly available docket materials are available either electronically through www.regulations.govor in hard copy at the HQEPA Docket Center, EPA/DC, EPA West, Room 3334,1301 Constitution Ave., NW., Washington, DC 20004. The Public Reading Room is open from 8:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding legal holidays. The telephone number for the Public Reading Room is (202) 566-1744, and the telephone number for the Office of Environmental Information is (202) 566-1752. FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT: Kimberly Patrick, Attorney Advisor, Office ofthe Administrator, Office of Small and Disadvantaged Business Utilization (OSDBU) by phone at (202) 566-2605, bye-mail at patrick.kimberly@epa.gov, or by fax at (202) 566-0548; or Cassandra Freeman, . . Deputy Director, .office of-the Administrator, OSDBU by phone at Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. 59/Wednesday, March 26, 200a/Rules and Regulations 15905 (202) 566-1968, bye-mail at freeman.cassandra@epa.gov, or by fax at (202) 566-0266. Both can be reached by mail to OSDBU, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, NW., mail code 1230T, Washington, DC 20460. SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION: The contents of this final rule are listed in the following outline: Contents of the Final Rule I. General Information A. Does This Rule Apply to Me? B. What are the Statutory Authorities for this Final Rule? II. Background III. Overview of Final Rule IV. Summary of Response to Public Comments V. Statutory and Executive Order Reviews A. Executive Order 12866: Regulatory Planning and Review B. Paperwork Reduction Act C. Regulatory Flexibility Act D. Unfunded Mandates Reform Act E. Executive Order 13132: Federalism F. Executive Order 13175: Consultation and Coordination With Indian Tribal Governments G. Executive Order 13045: Protection of Children From Environmental Health and Safety Risks H. Executive Order 13211: Actions That Significantly Affect Energy Supply, Distribution, or Use I. National Technology Transfer and Advancement Act of 1995 J. Executive Order 12898: Federal Actions To Address Environmental Justice in Minority Populations and Low-Income Populations K. Congressional Review Act I. General Information A. Does This Rule Apply to Me? If you are a recipient of an EP A financial assistance agreement, or an entity receiving an identified loan under a financial assistance agreement capitalizing a revolving loan fund, or a minority-owned, woman-owned, or small business, this rule may affect you. If you have any questions regarding the applicability of this action to a particular entity, consult the person listed in the preceding FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT section. B. What Are the Statutory Authorities for This Final Rule? EPA's primary statutory authorities for this final rule are: 1. Public Law 102-389 (42 U.S.C. 4370d), a 1993 appropriations act ("EPA's 8% statute"), which provides: The Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency shall, hereafter, to the fullest extent possible, ensure that at least 8 per centum ofFederalfu.nding for prime and subcontracts awarded in support of authorized programs, including grants, loans and contracts for wastewater treatment and leaking underground storage tanks grants, be made available to business concerns or other organizations owned or controlled by socially and economically disadvantaged individuals (within the meaning of section 8(a)(5) and (6) of the Small Business Act (15 U.S.C. 637(a)(5) and (6)), including historically black colleges and universities. For purposes of this section, economically and socially disadvantaged individuals shall be deemed to include women * * *; and 2. Public Law 101-549, Title X of the Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 7601 note) ("EPA's 10% statute"), which states: In providing for any research relating to the requirements of the amendments made by the Clean Air Act Amendments which use funds of the Environmental Protection Agency, the Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency shall, to the extent practicable, require that not less than 1 0 percent of the total Federal funding for such research will be made available to disadvantaged business concerns. Nothing in this title shall permit or require the use of quotas or a requirement that has the effect of a quota in determining eligibility' . . Other legal authorities and Executive Orders regarding this final rule include Public Law 99-499, the Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986; Public Law 100-590, the Small Business Administration Reauthorization and Amendment Act of 1988; Executive Order 12138, "Creating a National Women's Business Enterprise Policy and Prescribing Arrangements for Developing, Coordinating and Implementing a National Program for Women's Business Enterprise," issued May 18, 1979; Executive Order 11625, "Prescribing Additional Arrangements for Developing and Coordinating a National Program for Minority Business Enterprise," issued October 13, 1971; and Executive Order 12432, "Minority Business Enterprise Development," issued July 14, 1983. II. Background EPA's current Minority Business Enterprise/Woman-owned Business Enterprise ("MBE/WBE") program has three major components designed to ensure that minority and women-owned businesses have the opportunity to participate in procurements funded by EP A financial assistance agreements. Those components are as follows: 1. Negotiating Fair Share Goals: The current MBE/WBE program requires all recipients of EP A financial assistance agreements to negotiate goals with the Agency for the utilization of MBEs/ WBEs for procurements funded by EP A financial assistance agreements. The goals are based on disparity studies or availability analyses showing the availability of MBEs or WBEs in the financial assistance recipient's relevant geographic buying market. These goals do not operate as quotas. 2. Using the "Six Positive Efforts" or "Six Affirmative Steps": The "Six Positive Efforts" or "Six Affirmative Steps" are measures designed to ensure MBEs and WBEs are considered in a financial assistance recipient's procurement practices, and they contain measures a recipient may undertake to make procurements more open to MBEs and WBEs. 3. Reporting Accomplishments: Under the current MBE/WBE program, recipients of EP A financial assistance agreements are required to report on their accomplishments with the program using EPA Form 5700-52A. Reporting is the tool we use to assess whether or not the program is effective and actually translating into increased opportunities for MBEs and WBEs. EP A's MBE/WBE Program is currently implemented through: (1) Existing MBE and WBE provisions scattered throughout 40 CFR parts 30, 31,35 and 40; (2) Grant conditions; and (3) The Agency's "Guidance for the Utilization of Small, Minority, and Women's Business Enterprises in Assistance Agreements." In 1995, the Supreme Court's decision in Adarand Constructors, Inc. v. Federico Pena, Secretary of Transportation, 515 U.S. 200 ("Adarand"), extended strict judicial scrutiny to federal affirmative action programs that use racial or ethnic criteria as a basis for decisionmaking. In other words, such programs must be based on a compelling governmental interest, for example, remedying the effects of discrimination, and must be narrowly tailored to accomplish that interest. Following the Adarand decision, in 1996, the Department of Justice (DOn began a review of affirmative action programs in the Federal Government. In response to this review, the Department of Transportation (DOT), whose DBE program mirrored EPA's MBE/WBE program, revised its program for participation of DBEs in procurements under DOT's financial assistance agreements to comply with the Adarand decision (See 64 FR 5096). This final rule reflects EPA's efforts to similarly comply. Remedying discrimination is recognized as a compelling government interest, and this rule is promulgated on the understanding that the statutory provisions authorizing its adoption were enacted for that remedial purpose. This I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 15906 Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. 59/Wednesday, March 26, 200B/Rules and Regulations I rule sets forth a narrowly tailored EP A program to serve the compelling government interest of remedying past and current racial discrimination through agency-wide DBE procurement objectives. EPA intends to evaluate the propriety of the Disadvantaged Business Enterprise program in 7 years through subsequent rulemaking This final rule requires recipients to use race/gender-neutral measures to ensure DBEs have meaningful opportunities to bid on recipient- sponsored procurements. It does not require recipients to use race/gender- conscious measures. However, if a recipient elects to use such measures, the recipient should satisfy itself that the measure meets all applicable legal requirements, including those established in Adarand. Because this rule only requires race/gender-neutral measures, it should not be subject to strict judicial scrutiny. Even so, we believe this rule is narrowly tailored to achieve a compelling governmental interest consistent with Adarand. EPA worked collaboratively on this rulemaking with various program offices within the Agency, the EP A Office of General Counsel, and the EP A Regions. We also held discussions with other Federal agencies, including SBA and DOT whose DBE programs are in some ways similar to ours, or have undergone changes similar to the ones we are implementing. EPA has also collaborated with the Civil Rights Division of DO] throughout the rulemaking process. III. Overview of Final Rule This rulemaking removes all ofEPA's current MBE/WBE fair share objectives and good faith efforts regulatory provisions and replaces them with DBE provisions to be codified in the new 40 CFR part 33. In addition, this rule supersedes inconsistent provisions of previous guidance documents for EP A's former MBE and WBE Program, including, but not limited to, EPA's "Guidance for Utilization of Small, Minority, and Women's Business Enterprises in Procurement Under Assistance Agreements" (the 1997 Guidance), 62 FR 45645. There are six substantive changes this rule will make to the way the program currently operates. Those changes involve: (1) Certification of minority and women-owned businesses; (2) the six good faith efforts; (3) contract administration requirements; (4) negotiation of fair share goals; (5) recordkeeping and reporting .. .. requirements; .and..( 6) .new.requirements . for Tribal and insular area fair share I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I negotiations. The specific changes are summarized as follows: 1. Certification Under the current MBE/WEE program EP A recognizes Small Business Administration (SBA) certifications, or certifications by a State or other Federal Agency, or self-certifications. EP A currently does not require WBEs to be certified. Under the new DBE program promulgated today, in order to be counted as an MBE or WBE under an EP A financial assistance agreement, an entity will have to be certified as such. EP A will require an MBE/WBE to first seek certification by a federal agency (e.g., the Small Business Administration (SBA), the Department of Transportation (DOT)), or by a State, locality, Indian Tribe, or independent private organization provided their applicable criteria match those under section 8(a) (5) and (6) of the Small Business Act and SBA's applicable 8(a) Business Development Program regulations. EP A will only consider certifying firms that cannot get certified by one of these entities. Requiring firms to first seek certification from other sources is beneficial for the business entity because an EP A certification is limited in that it would only be accepted by EP A. Certifications from other sources have broader applications. Also, requiring firms to first seek certification from other sources reduces the burden on the Agency associated with processing certifications. The creation and implementation of an EP A certification program is necessary because the statutory authority for EPA's program includes classifications of businesses that are not currently certified by other sources. Businesses that fall within these classifications would potentially have no other option for certification to participate in EPA's DBE program. EPA anticipates that the following types of entities will have to be considered for certification by EP A: 1. Disabled American-owned firms; 2. Private and voluntary organizations controlled by individuals who are socially and economically disadvantaged; 3. Women-owned and minority owned-businesses who cannot get certified under DOT or SBA size criteria (EP A does not have size criteria) or by a State Government, local Government, Indian Tribal Government or independent private organization; 4. Businesses owned or controlled by socially and economically . disadvantaged. individuals (note-SBA and DOT require an entity to be owned and controlled by socially and economically disadvantaged individuals. However, the statutory authority for EPA's DBE program requires ownership or control, Public Law 102-389); and 5. Women-owned business enterprises. EP A certifications will last for three years as long as the certified entity files an annual affidavit affirming that no changes in circumstances have occurred which affected the entity's status as an MBE or WBE. Appeal procedures are provided for entities denied MBE or WBE certification, or anyone who disagrees with EPA's decision to certify an entity as an MBE or WEE. 2. Six Good Faith Efforts The good faith efforts are activities by a recipient and its prime contractor to increase DBE awareness of procurement opportunities through race/gender neutral efforts. Race/gender neutral efforts are ones which increase awareness of contracting opportunities in general, including outreach, recruitment and technical assistance. For purposes of simplification, EP A has combined the" Six Positive Efforts" of 40 CFR 30.44 (b) applicable to institutions of higher education, hospitals and other non-profit organizations with the "Six Affirmative Steps" of 40 CFR 31.36(e) applicable to State, Local and Indian Tribal Government recipients and renamed them the six "good faith efforts.". 3. Contract Administration Requirements The rule adds additional contract administration requirements which are intended to prevent any "bait and switch" tactics at the subcontract level by prime contractors which may circumvent the spirit of the DBE Program as well as other related requirements. Some of these requirements include provisions intended to ensure that subcontractors receive prompt payment from prime contractors. In addition, this proposal would require a recipient to be notified in writing before its prime contractor could terminate a DBE subcontractor for convenience and then perform the work itself. Furthermore, when a DBE subcontractor is terminated or fails to complete its work under the subcontract for any reason, the recipient must require the prime contractor to make good faith efforts if the prime contractor chooses to hire another subcontractor. A recipient must also require its prime contractor to continue to make the good _ faith.effortscevenjf the fair share objectives in subpart D ofthe rule have Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. S9/Wednesday, March 26, 2008/Rules and Regulations 15907 been met. Finally, this rule provides for three new forms which are required if there are DBE subcontractors involved in a procurement. 4. Negotiation of Fair Share Goals {and $250,000 Exemptions} This rule codifies EPA's procedures for negotiating fair share goals with financial assistance recipients. The process for such negotiations is currently implemented through guidance, as well as through terms and conditions incorporated into EP A financial assistance agreements. This rulemaking keeps the current basic approach, with some fine tuning, including a provision which would exempt a recipient of a financial assistance agreement of $250,000 or less for any assistance agreement, or of more than one financial assistance agreement with a combined total of $250,000 or less in EP A funds in anyone year, from the fair share objective negotiation requirement. In addition, eligible program grants which can be included in Performance Partnership Grants to Tribal and Tribal consortia recipients will be exempt from the fair share negotiation requirement due to the nature of these program grants and the unique nature of eligible recipients. Superfund Technical Assistance Grants (TAG's) would be exempt due to the nature of their funding cycles. A recipient under the Clean Water State Revolving Fund, the Drinking Water State Revolving Fund, and the Brownfields Clean-Up Revolving Loan Fund is not required to apply the fair share objective requirements to an entity receiving an identified loan in an amount of $250,000 or less. 5. Recordkeeping and Reporting Requirements Currently, all financial assistance agreement recipients must report on a quarterly basis, except for recipients of continuing environmental program grants, and institutions of higher education, hospitals and other non- profit organizations receiving financial assistance awards under 40 CFR part 30, who report on an annual basis. This rule will reduce the reporting frequency to semi-annually for all recipients who currently report on a quarterly basis. This rule also requires all financial assistance recipients, and recipients of loans under CWSRF, DWSRF, or BCRLF Programs to create and maintain a bidders list. There is an exemption from this requirement for recipients receiving grants or loans of $250,000 or less for any single assistance agreement or loan, or of more than one financial assistance agreement or loan with a combined total of $250,000 or less in EPA funds in any one year. 6. New Requirement for Tribal and Trust Territory Fair Share Negotiations EP A does not currently negotiate fair share goals with Indian Tribal Government and Trust Territory recipients. This rule will require such recipients to negotiate fair share goals. Therefore, under the rule such recipients will have a three year phase- in period to adjust to the regulatory change. In the interim, they will still have to comply with the other requirements of this rule. IV. Summary of Response to Public Comments Excluding changes in wording to increase clarity, there are only four substantive changes reflected in this final rule. Those changes, along with a breakdown of the number and type of comments received, are below: Number of Comments Received: 126 Primary areas of public concern Number of Percent of comments all comments Certification ..................................................................................................................................... ......................... General (wording and clarification) .................. .......... ..................... .............. ....... ....... ....... ...... .................... ............ Good Faith Efforts ... ........ .......... ................................ ............. ....... ........... ... ....... ........ ...... ...................... .............. ... Subcontracting Provisions ................................................................................................................................... .... Bidders List ..................................................................................................................................... ......................... 23 18 16 13 14 11 12 9 11 9 Major Revisions Based on Public Comment {not including wording or clarification}: 1. ~ 33.105-Enforcement Provisions There were several comments concerning enforcement of the rule. A number of comments stated that there are no "teeth" in the program and that more policing of the program will be needed to insure compliance with the requirements of the rule. While the text of the rule mentions that EP A can take remedial action for non-compliance, it does not clearly state what those actions are. In an effort to show more "teeth," this section has been revised to include some of the remedial measures EP A can take if a recipient fails to comply with the requirements of the rule. 2. ~ 33.302-Subcontractor Provisions Public comment requested that EP A specify the number of days within .which.a prime must pay its subcontractor after payment by the recipient. In an effort to curtail the practice of excessively late subcontractor payments, the rule establishes maximum of 30 days by which a prime contractor must pay its subcontractor, after payment by the grant recipient. 3. ~ 33.501-Bidders List Many comments were received requesting clarification about the contents, purpose and duration ofthe bidders list. The purpose of the Bidders List is to provide the recipient and entities receiving identified loans who conduct competitive bidding with a more accurate database of the universe of MBE!WBE and non-MBE!WBE prime and subcontractors. The bidders list is intended to be a list of all firms that are participating, or attempting to participate, on EPA assisted contracts. The list must include all firms that bid on prime contracts, or bid or quote on subcontracts underEP Aassisted projects, including both MBE!WBEs and non-MBE!WBEs. The bidders list is designed to also aid recipients in their efforts to comply with the "six good faith efforts," by creating a source of MBEs and WBEs that can be relied upon to increase the inclusion of MBEs and WBEs in the recipient's procurement practices. Section 33.501(b) ofthe rule has been revised to read as follows: A recipient of a Continuing Environmental Program Grant or other annual grant must create and maintain a bidders list. In addition, a recipient of an EPA financial assistance agreement to capitalize a revolving loan fund also must require entities receiving identified loans to create and maintain a bidders list if the recipient of the loan is subject to, or chooses to follow, competitive bidding requirements. The purpose of a bidders list is to provide the recipient and entities receiving identified loans who conduct competitive bidding with as accurate a database as possible about the universe of MBE/WBE and non-MBE/WBE prime and subcontractors. The list must include all firms that bid or quote on prime contracts or bid QF.quote.onsubcontracts under EP A assisted projects, including both MBE/WBEs I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 15908 Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. 59/Wednesday, March 26, 200B/Rules and Regulations I and non-MBE/WBEs. The bidders list must be kept until the grant project period has expired and the recipient is no longer receiving EPA funding under the grant. For entities receiving identified loans, the bidders list must be kept until the project period for the identified loan has ended. The following information must be obtained from all prime and subcontractors: (lJ Entity's name with point of contact; (2J Entity's mailing address, telephone number, and e-mail address; (3J The procurement on which the entity bid or quoted, and when; and (4J Entity's status as an MBE/WBE or non- MBE/WBE. In response to internal concerns regarding the application of the bidders list requirement, we have created an exemption to this provision. The exemption found at S 33.501(c) is as follows: A recipient of an EPA financial assistance agreement in the amount of $250,000 or less for any single assistance agreement, or of more than one financial assistance agreement with a combined total of $250,000 or less in anyone fiscal year, is exempt from the paragraph (bJ ofthis section requirement to create and maintain a bidders list. Also, a recipient under the CWSRF, DWSRF, or BCRLF Program is not required to apply the paragraph (bJ of this section bidders list requirement of this subpart to an entity receiving an identified loan in an amount of $250,000 orIess, or to an entity receiving more than one identified loan with a combined total of $250,000 or less in anyone fiscal year. This exemption is limited to the paragraph (b J ofthis section bidders list requirements of this subpart. 4. S 33.502-Reporting In response to internal and external comments, this section of the rule has been revised to require semiannual reporting for all recipients who currently report on a quarterly basis. All recipients who report annually will continue to do so. A section-by-section analysis of the rule, addressing public comments in detail, can be found on the public docket for this rule making under Docket ill No. EPA-HQ-OA-2002- 0001, at www.regulations.gov. V. Statutory and Executive Order Reviews A. Executive Order 12866: Regulatory Planning and Review Under Executive Order (EO) 12866 (58 FR 51735, October 4,1993), this action is a "significant regulatory action." This rule reflects and raises legal or policy issues arising out of legal mandates. This rule has a direct impact on contracting funded by EP A financial assistance agreements. There is ... substantial puhlic interest concerning " programs to ensure nondiscrimination I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I in federally assisted contracting, as well as policy concerns. This rule also affects a wide variety of parties, including all EPA financial assistance programs, and the DBE and non-DBE contractors that perform work under them. As a "significant regulatory action," EP A submitted this action to the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) for review under EO 12866 and any changes made in response to OMB recommendations have been documented in the docket for this action. Based on currently available information about costs that may be associated with complying with this rule (e.g., costs to obtain MBE or WBE certification), EPA believes that this rule will not have an annual effect on the economy of $100 million or more. Therefore, EP A did not prepare a regulatory impact statement for this rule. R. Paperwork Reduction Act The Office of Management and Budget (OMB) has approved the information collection requirements contained in this rule under the provisions of the Paperwork Reduction Act, 44 U.S.C 3501 et seq. and has assigned OMB control number 2090-0030. This ICR is for the purpose of ensuring that EP A's statutory DBE procurement goal requirements are implemented in harmony with the United States Supreme Court's decision in Adarand Constructors, Inc. v. Pena, 115 S. Ct. 2097 (1995). The requirements to complete EP A Forms 6100-2-DBE Program Subcontractor Participation Form, 6100-3-DBE Program Subcontractor Performance Form, and 6100--4-DBE Program Subcontractor Utilization Form, are intended to prevent any "bait and switch" tactics at the subcontract level by prime contractors which may circumvent the spirit of the DBE Program. The requirements to complete the EP A DBE Certification Application (EP A Form 6100-1a) (Sole Proprietorship), the EP A DBE Certification Application (EPA Form 6100-1b) (Limited Liability Company), the EPA DBE Certification Application (EPA 6100-1c) (Partnerships), the EPA DBE Certification Application (EPA Form 6100-1d) (Corporations), the EPA DBE Certification Application (EPA Form 6100-1e) (Alaska Native Corporations), the EPA DBE Certification Application (EPA Form 6100-1f) (Tribally Owned Businesses), the EPA DBE Certification Application (EPA Form 6100-1g) {private ,and Voluntary. OrganizatiOl:lS) ,>~' the EP A DBE Certification Application (EPA Form 6100-1h) (Concerns owned by Native Hawaiian Organizations), and the EP A DBE Certification Application (EPA Form 6100-1i) (Concerns Owned by Community Development Corporations), as applicable, would be required to be completed by an entity seeking to be counted as a minority business enterprise (MBE) or women's business enterprise (WBE) under EP A's DBE Program, which cannot get certified as an MBE or WBE by the SBA or DOT under their respective programs or by an Indian Tribal Government or independent private organization consistent with EPA's 8% or 10% statute as applicable. Responses to the collection of information will be mandatory. EP A's legal authorities for the DBE Program are Public Law 102-389, a 1993 appropriations act (42 U.S.C. 4370d) (EPA's 8% statute), and Public Law 101-549, Title X ofthe Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 (42 U.S.c. 7601 note) (EPA's 10% statute). Other legal authorities and Executive Orders include Public Law 99--499, the Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986; Public Law 100-590, the Small Business Administration Reauthorization and Amendment Act of 1988; Executive Order 12138, "Creating a National Women's Business Enterprise Policy and Prescribing Arrangements for Developing, Coordinating and Implementing a National Program for Women's Business Enterprise," issued May 18, 1979; Executive Order 11625, "Prescribing Additional Arrangements for Developing and Coordinating a National Program for Minority Business Enterprise," issued October 13,1971; and Executive Order 12432, "Minority Business Enterprise Development," issued July 14, 1983. EP A may make available to the public any information concerning EPA's DBE Program where the release of which is not prohibited by Federal law or regulation, including EP A's Confidential Business Information regulations at 40 CFR part 2, subpart B. The total labor burden and costs to MBEs and WBEs for certification under State, Tribal and Insular Area funding programs is estimated to total $8,750,300, with 168,275 burden hours and 6,731 MBE and WBE entities affected for the three-year period of the ICR. The estimated annual burden per response is 25 hours; the number of respondents is estimated at 2,244 at an average annual labor burden and cost per MBE and WBE of $1300. The average annual burden and costs are , estimated ,by.spreading the first year. cost over the three-year period of the I Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. S9/Wednesday, March 26, 200B/Rules and Regulations 15909 I ICR, yielding a total annual average burden of 56,092 hours and $2,916,767 in costs. The total labor burden and costs to all EPA grant and loan recipients that would have to perform an availability analysis to meet the requirements of the proposed rule and other paperwork requirements are estimated to be $16,509,500 with 825,475 burden hours and 3,115 entities affected for the three- year period of the ICR. The estimated annual burden hours for all responses is 275,158, and the annual number of respondents is estimated at 1,038. The annual cost for all respondents would be $5,503,167. The cost per respondent is estimated at $5,250 (each respondent is estimated to perform an availability analysis once every three years) and is estimated to take 265 hours at $20/hour. EPA assumed there were no additional start-up costs or capital expenditures. Burden means the total time, effort, or financial resources expended by persons to generate, maintain, retain, or disclose or provide information to or for a Federal agency. This includes the time needed to review instructions; develop, acquire, install, and utilize technology and systems for the purposes of collecting, validating, and verifying information, processing and maintaining information, and disclosing and providing information; adjust the existing ways to comply with any previously applicable instructions and requirements; train personnel to be able , to respond to a collection of information; search data sources; complete and review the collection of information; and transmit or otherwise disclose the information. An agency may not conduct or sponsor, and a person is not required to respond to a collection of information unless it displays a currently valid OMB control number. The OMB control numbers for EPA's regulations in 40 CFR are listed in 40 CFR part 9. In addition, EP A is amending the table in 40 CFR part 9 of currently approved OMB control numbers for various regulations to list the regulatory citations for the information requirements contained in this final rule. C. Regulatory Flexibility Act This rule is not subject to the Regulatory Flexibility Act (RFA), which generally requires an agency to prepare a regulatory flexibility analysis for any rule that will have a significant economic impact on a substantial number of small entities. The RFA m. _ applies, only.to rules subject to notice- and-comment rulemaking requirements under the Administrative Procedure Act (AP A) or any other statute. As a grants- related rule, this rule is not subject to the notice and comment requirements of the APA, 5 U.S.C. 553(a)(1), Nor is there any other statute which requires EP A to undergo notice and comment for this rulemaking. It is important to note that EPA's DBE Program is aimed at improving contracting opportunities for small businesses owned and controlled by socially and economically disadvantaged individuals, among others (e.g., Historically Black Colleges and Universities, etc.). Accordingly, EP A believes that this rule will impact a substantial number of small entities. D, Unfunded Mandates Reform Act Title II of the Unfunded Mandates Reform Act of 1995 (UMRA), Public Law 104-4, establishes requirements for Federal agencies to assess the effects of their regulatory actions on State, local, and tribal governments and the private sector. Under section 202 of the UMRA, EPA generally must prepare a written statement, including a cost-benefit analysis, for proposed and final rules with "Federal mandates" that may result in expenditures by State, local, and tribal governments, in the aggregate, or to the private sector of $100 million or more in anyone year. Before promulgating an EP A rule for which a written statement is needed, section 205 of the UMRA generally requires EP A to identify and consider a reasonable number of regulatory alternatives and adopts the least costly, most cost- effective or least burdensome alternative that achieves the objectives of the rule. The provisions of section 205 do not apply when they are inconsistent with applicable law. Moreover, section 205 allows EP A to adopt an alternative other than the least costly, most cost-effective or least burdensome alternative if the Administrator publishes with the final rule an explanation why that alternative was not adopted. Before EP A establishes any regulatory requirements that may significantly or uniquely affect small governments, including tribal governments, it must have developed under section 203 of the UMRA a small government agency plan. The plan must provide for notifying potentially affected small governments, enabling officials of affected small governments to have meaningful and timely input in the development of EP A regulatory proposals with significant Federal intergovernmental mandates, and informing, educating and advising small governments. on compliance with the regulatory requirements. This rule contains no Federal Mandates (under the regulatory provisions of Title II of the UMRA) for State, local, or tribal governments or the private sector. The UMRA excluded from the definition of "Federal intergovernmental mandate" duties that arise from conditions of federal assistance. Thus, today's rule is not subject to the requirements of section 202 and 205 of the UMRA. Pursuant to section 203 of the UMRA, EP A has also determined that this rule contains no regulatory requirements that might significantly or uniquely affect small governments. With the exemptions at the $250,000 level or less from compliance with the fair share objective requirements, EP A believes that there would be minimal impacts on small entities, including small government jurisdictions. Additionally, under this rule, small entity recipients will be able to use appropriate State Agency-negotiated MBE/WBE objectives if such recipients solicit bids/offers from substantially the same relevant geographic market as that State Agency. Therefore, this rule does not meet the threshold test for application of section 203 of UMRA. E, Executive Order 13132: Federalism Executive Order 13132, entitled "Federalism" (64 FR 43255, August 10, 1999), requires EPA to develop an accountable process to ensure "meaningful and timely input by State and local officials in the development of regulatory policies that have federalism implications." "Policies that have federalism implications" is defined in the Executive Order to include regulations that have "substantial direct effects on the States, on the relationship between the national government and the States, or on the distribution of power and responsibilities among the various levels of government," This rule does not have "federalism implications," as defined in the Executive Order. It will not have substantial direct effects on the States, on the relationship between the national government and the States, or on the distribution of power and responsibilities among the various levels of government, as specified in Executive Order 13132. Because this rule conditions the use of federal assistance, it will not impose substantial direct compliance costs on State and local governments. Thus, the requirements of section 6 of the Executive Order do not apply to this rule. In the spirit of Executive Order 13132 and .consistent with EP A policy to promote communications between EP A I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I., I I I 15910 Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. 59/Wednesday, March 26, 200B/Rules and Regulations I and State and local governments, EPA toward meeting MBE/WBE objectives. In specifically solicited comment on the addition, the rule will have the proposed rule from State and local following impacts on tribes/tribally officials. Stakeholders, including owned businesses: representatives from State government First, a business owned by a federally agencies, State government recognized tribal government would organizations and local governments, have to file an annual affidavit with were given an opportunity to comment EPA certifying no change in its MBE on the proposed rule which was status, pursuant to S 33.210 of this rule. published in the Federal Register on Second, a business owned by a July 24,2003, during the 180-day Federally recognized tribal government comment period. Public hearings were will have to be recertified every three also held in several states across the years as meeting SBA's applicable 8(a) country to discuss the proposed rule criteria to be eligible to be counted in and to encourage comment. the future towards meeting the MBE/ WBE fair share objectives, pursuant to F. Executive Order 13175 Consultation S 33.208. and Coordination With Indian Tribal Third, a business owned by a Governments federally recognized tribal government, Executive Order 13175, entitled if it is not already certified in "Consultation and Coordination with accordance with SBA's applicable 8(a) Indian Tribal Governments" (65 FR criteria, may have to incur costs to be 67249, November 9, 2000), requires EP A certified ifthere is no tribal certifier to develop an accountable process to available and the other certifying entity ensure "meaningful and timely input by charges for its services. tribal officials in the development of Fourth, a tribe as a recipient of EP A regulatory policies that have tribal financial assistance will have to be implications." EP A has concluded that notified in writing before any this final rule will have tribal termination of a DBE subcontractor for implications. However, it will neither convenience is made by its prime impose substantial direct compliance contractor, pursuant to S 33.303(a). costs nor preempt tribal law. Those Fifth, consistent with other Federal implications are as follows: and tribal laws, a tribe will have to Tribes receiving an EPA financial require its prime contractor, after the assistance agreement of more than tribe has unsuccessfully sought to apply $250,000 for any single assistance Indian preference consistent with the agreement, or of more than one financial Indian Self-Determination and assistance agreement with a combined Education Assistance Act, to employ the total of more than $250,000 in anyone good faith efforts described in S 33.301 fiscal year (excluding Performance if a DBE subcontractor fails to complete Partnership Grant eligible grants to work under a subcontract for any reason tribes and intertribal consortia under 40 and the prime contractor solicits a CFR part 35, subpart B) will have to replacement subcontractor, pursuant to negotiate fair share objectives with EP A s 33.303(b). unless they choose to adopt MBE and Sixth, consistent with other Federal WBE objectives of another EP A and tribal Laws, a tribe will have to recipient consistent with the final rule. require its prime contractor, after it has Those tribes required to negotiate fair unsuccessfully sought to apply Indian share objectives with EPA will have a preference consistent with the Indian phase-in period of up to three years in Self-Determination and Education which to do so; their fair share Assistance Act, to employ the good faith objectives will remain in effect for three efforts described in S 33.301 even if it fiscal years after they have been has achieved its fair share objectives approved by EP A, unless there are under subpart D of the rule, pursuant to significant changes to the data S 33.303(c). supporting the fair share objectives. Seventh, a tribe will have to require Some tribally owned businesses its prime contractors to provide EPA (businesses that a Federally recognized Form 6100-2-DBE Program tribal government owns or in which it Subcontractor Participation Form, EPA has a majority share) will not be eligible Form 6100-3-DBE Program to be counted towards meeting the Subcontractor Performance Form and MBE/WBE fair share objectives if they EPA Form 610Q-4-DBE Program do not meet the applicable SBA 8(a) Subcontractor Utilization Form to all of criteria, e.g., see 13 CFR 124.109(b). Of its DBE subcontractors, pursuant to course, tribes may continue to do sections 33.303(e), (f) and (g), business with tribally owned or other respectively. companies which do not meet the Eighth, a tribal recipient that conducts .", applicable SBA8.(a).criteria, they simply. .procurements.wilLhave, to create and~ _ .. would not count such procurements maintain a bidders list in accordance I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ,I I with S 33.501(b). The purpose of this list is to provide recipients as accurate a database as possible about the universe of MBE/WBE and non-MBE/WBE prime and subcontractors who seek to work on procurements under EP A financial assistance agreements. The following information must be obtained from all such prime and subcontractors: (1) Entity's name with point of contact; (2) entity's mailing address, telephone number, and e-mail address; (3) the procurement on which the entity bid or quoted, and when; and (4) entity's status as an MBE/WBE or non-MBE/WBE. EP A consulted with tribal officials and/ or representatives of tribal governments early in the process of developing this regulation to permit them to have meaningful and timely input into its development. This rule has been under development for the past several years. The meaningful and timely input of Tribal officials and/or representatives into the development of this rule is as follows: On February 2-4,1999, EPA invited tribal recipients of EP A grants and cooperative agreements to an EP A/State/ Tribal Annual Conference in Albuquerque, New Mexico. During this conference, EPA representatives discussed a number of issues relating to the rule under development with the general audience. In addition, EP A representatives met separately with tribal officials and/or representatives to discuss issues of concern to tribes. EP A posted a staff draft of the proposed rule, dated June 19, 2000, on EPA's Internet Web site to solicit public comment. On June 27-30, 2000, the Agency held its EP A/State/Tribal Annual Conference in Albuquerque, New Mexico. Again, EPA invited tribal recipients ofEPA financial assistance agreements to attend. During the June, 2000 conference, agency representatives discussed in detail the June 19, 2000 staff draft of the rule, which had been posted on EPA's Web site. EP A solicited comments on the staff draft of the rule from conference participants. Tribal officials and/or representatives attended that conference as well. As of June 30, 2001, EPA received a total of 17 written comments on the staff draft from Indian tribes. During the development of this rule EP A representatives made a number of oral presentations to the Tribal Operations Committee (TOC) on the rule's progress and solicited input. The TOC is comprised of 19 national tribal representatives from the nine EP A Regions that have federally recognized tribes and EPA Senior Management; its role is to provide input into EP A . decision making affecting Indian. Country. On November 29, 2000, EPA I Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. S9/Wednesday, March 26, 200B/Rules and Regulations 15911 I representatives met with the TOC at the EPA Tribal Caucus Regional Joint meeting in Miami, Florida, to discuss the staff draft rule and to obtain further tribal input into the rulemaking process. Starting in November, 2000, EPA invited tribal recipients ofEPA grants and cooperative agreements to participate in outreach sessions held in cities around the country in order to discuss the staff draft rule. EPA further solicited tribal input into the rulemaking at meetings with tribal officials/representatives at the Department of the Interior 2001 Conference on the Environment hosted by the Bureau of Indian Affairs on March 13-15, 2001, in Albuquerque, New Mexico and at the Reservation Economic Summit and American Indian Business Trade Fair (RES 2001) in Anaheim, California, on March 20, 2001. EP A further solicited tribal input in another meeting with the TOC on April 24, 2001, in Miami, Florida. As part of its ongoing tribal coordination on this rule, EP A held meetings with tribal officials to discuss the staff draft rule in Boston, Massachusetts on April 11, 2001 and in Seattle, Washington on May 23, 2001. EP A held further coordination meetings with tribal officials to discuss a draft of this Rule in Ocean Shores, Washington during the week of January 28, 2002. On July 24, 2003, the proposed rule was published in the Federal Register, with a 180-day comment period. After the rule was published in the Federal Register, EPA held 10 tribal meetings across the country to solicit comments and suggestions on the final rule. EP A has considered tribal concerns and written comments in the final rule. A summary of the nature of tribal concerns and EP A's response follows: 1. Applicability of the Rule to Tribes Awards of Grants and Cooperative Agreements to tribes are currently governed by 40 CFR part 31 ,"Uniform Administrative Requirements for Grants and Cooperative Agreements to State and Local Governments." These are government wide requirements that have been in effect since 1988. Among other entities subject to the regulations are governments. The definition of "Government" in 40 CFR 31.3 includes * * * a federally recognized Indian tribal government." Many requirements contained in this rule are not new but rather are the same requirements contained in 40 CFR part 31, with which many tribes already have been complying. For example, the reporting and recordkeeping requirements are .. already. applicable. tolndian.tribes. In.._ addition, neither EPA's statutory 10% MBE/WBE procurement objective requirements for research relating to the requirements of the Clean Air Act, nor EPA's statutory 8% MBE/WBE procurement objective requirements for all other programs, exempt tribes. Therefore, tribes are not exempt from this rule, because it promotes the utilization of all disadvantaged entities in procurement under EP A financial assistance agreements, including tribally owned businesses and businesses owned by a member(s) of a tribe. 2. Trigger for Fair Share Negotiations The issue of increasing the dollar amount of the trigger requiring compliance with the fair share objective requirements and the corresponding availability analysis was of special concern to tribes awarded General Assistance Program grants. Comments also expressed the view that availability analysis preparation requirements should apply only to tribes spending 90% or more of their grants on outside procurement. Other tribes expressed the view that preparing availability analyses is too costly for them, especially for smaller tribes. In response to concerns raised by tribes, the trigger requiring compliance with the fair share objective requirements has been increased to $250,000 from the $100,000 threshold contained in an earlier draft of the rule. Also because of the nature of eligible program grants which can be included in Performance Partnership Grants (PPGs) to tribes under 40 CFR part 35, subpart B, and the unique nature of eligible recipients, the Agency is exempting PPG eligible program grants to tribes under 40 CFR part 35, subpart B from the fair share negotiation requirements. Accordingly, only tribes receiving an EP A financial assistance agreement of more than $250,000 for any single assistance agreement, or of more than one financial assistance agreement with a combined total of more than $250,000 in anyone fiscal year (excluding PPG eligible program grants under 40 CFR part 35, subpart B), will have to comply with the fair share objective requirements. The Agency believes that this change effectively addresses the concerns by setting a uniform standard applicable to all recipients, including tribes, rather than, for example, setting a standard based on amounts spent by tribes on outside procurement, which could pose implementation difficulties. EPA believes that most tribes will not have to comply with the fair share objective ...requirements.under the finaLrule... because they will fall under the $250,000 exemption or the exemption for PPG eligible program grants under 40 CFR part 35, subpart B. Finally, EPA believes that a number of tribes which otherwise would have to negotiate fair share objectives may elect instead to apply the objectives of another recipient in accordance with the requirements of the rule. The rule will also provide tribes with a three-year phase-in period to comply with the fair share negotiation requirement. 3. Reporting and Recordkeeping Requirements Some tribes expressed concerns that keeping records of and reporting purchases for EP A funded grants would impose a heavy burden on tribal governments. Instead, they suggested basing reporting on the amount of money the tribe received rather than on the amount of money it spent on outside supplies and services. EP A considered these concerns and concluded that 40 CFR part 31 already requires tribes to comply with part 31's recordkeeping and reporting requirements, which included MBE/ WBE recordkeeping and reporting. The Agency believes that basing requirements on amounts received rather than on amounts spent would be an inaccurate measurement of MBE/ WBE procurement utilization. EP A currently requires financial assistance recipients to report MBE/WBE accomplishments based on dollars spent on MBE/WBE procurements. Therefore, EP A is not adopting the suggested change. However, because of comments received requesting a reduction in the burden created by quarterly reporting, EP A has reduced the reporting requirement to semi-annually for recipients who currently report on a quarterly basis. Recipients who currently report annually will continue to do so. 4. Compliance With the Good Faith Efforts Requirements One comment objected to having to advertise in newspapers; a comment was also made that EP A should investigate alternative mechanisms that encourage a tribe to seek out MBEs/ WBEs during the procurement process without incurring an unreasonable financial burden. Section 7(b) ofthe Indian Self- Determination and Education Assistance Act requires tribal governments to solicit tribally-owned businesses and/or businesses owned by a member(s) of a tribe, before undertaking the six good faith efforts. . _Tribes are. currently..subj.ectto 40 CFR part 31, which requires them to make I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Ic-- I 15912 Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. 59/Wednesday, March 26, 200B/Rules and Regulations good faith efforts to ensure that DBEs are used whenever possible. EP A is changing this requirement. EP A does not believe that the good faith effort requirements are unduly burdensome. 5. Phase-In Period One comment expressed a concern about the timing ofthe phase-in period and the maximum amount of time needed for the requirement to be implemented. EPA believes that the three-year phase-in period, which begins after the final rule's effective date, allows tribes sufficient time to prepare for and comply with the requirements of the rule. As required by section 7(a), EPA's Tribal Consultation Official has certified that the requirements of the Executive Order have been met in a meaningful and timely manner. A copy of the certification is included in the docket for this rule. G. Executive Order 13045: {Protection of Children From Environmental Health Risks and Safety Risks} Executive Order 13045: "Protection of Children from Environmental Health Risks and Safety Risks" (62 FR 19885, April 23, 1997) applies to any rule that: (1) Is determined to be "economically significant" as defined under Executive Order 12866, and (2) concerns any environmental health or safety risk that EP A has reason to believe may have a disproportionate effect on children. If the regulatory action meets both criteria, EP A must evaluate the environmental health or safety effects of the planned rule on children and explain why the planned regulation is preferable to other potentially effective and reasonably feasible alternatives considered by the Agency. EPA interprets Executive Order 13045 as applying only to those regulatory actions that are based on health or safety risks, such that the analysis required under section 5-501 of the Order has the potential to influence the regulation. This rule is not subject to Executive Order 13045 because it does not establish an environmental standard intended to mitigate health or safety risks. H. Executive Order 13211: Actions That Significantly Affect Energy Supply, Distribution, or Use This rule is not a "significant energy action" as defined in Executive Order 13211, "Actions Concerning Regulations That Significantly Affect Energy Supply, Distribution, or Use" (66 FR 28355 (May ....22, 200l)).because itis..not.likely. to have a significant adverse effect on the supply, distribution, or use of energy. EPA has concluded that this rule is not likely to have any adverse energy effects. /. National Technology Transfer and Advancement Act As noted in the proposed rule, section 12(d) of the National Technology Transfer and Advancement Act of 1995 ("NTTAA"), Public Law 104-113, 12(d) (15 U.S.C. 272 note) directs EPA to use voluntary consensus standards in its regulatory activities unless to do so would be inconsistent with applicable law or otherwise impractical. Voluntary consensus standards are technical standards (e.g., materials specifications, test methods, sampling procedures, and business practices) that are developed or adopted by voluntary consensus standards bodies. The NTTAA directs EPA to provide Congress, through OMB, explanations when the Agency decides not to use available and applicable voluntary consensus standards. This rule does not involve technical standards. Therefore, EPA is not considering the use of any voluntary consensus standards. /. Executive Order 12898: Federal Actions To Address Environmental Justice in Minority Populations and Low-Income Populations Executive Order (EO) 12898 (59 FR 7629 (Feb. 16, 1994)) establishes federal executive policy on environmental justice. Its main provision directs federal agencies, to the greatest extent practicable and permitted by law, to make environmental justice part of their mission by identifying and addressing, as appropriate, disproportionately high and adverse human health or environmental effects of their programs, policies, and activities on minority populations and low-income populations in the United States. EP A has determined that this final rule will not have disproportionately high and adverse human health or environmental effects on minority or low-income populations because it does not affect the level of protection provided to human health or the environment. K. Congressional Review Act The Congressional Review Act, 5 U.S.c. 801 et seg., as added by the Small Business Regulatory Enforcement Fairness Act of 1996, generally provides that before a rule may take effect, the agency promulgating the rule must submit a rule report, which includes a copy ofthe rule, to each House of the ...Congress-andtotheComptroller General ofthe United States. EPA will submit a report containing this rule and other required information to the U.S. Senate, the U.S. House of Representatives, and the Comptroller General of the United States prior to publication of the rule in the Federal Register. A Major rule cannot take effect until 60 days after it is published in the Federal Register. This action is not a "major rule" as defined by 5 U.S.C. 804(2). This rule will be effective May 27,2008. List of Subjects 40 CFR Part 30 Environmental protection, Administrative practice and procedure, Grant programs-environmental protection, Reporting and recordkeeping requirements. 40 CFR Part 31 Accounting, Administrative practice and procedure, Grant programs, Indians, Intergovernmental relations, Reporting and recordkeeping requirements. 40 CFR Part 33 Grant programs-environmental protection. 40 CFR Part 35 Grant programs-environmental protection, Grant programs-Indians, Hazardous waste, Indians, Intergovernmental relations, Reporting and recordkeeping requirements. 40 CFR Part 40 Research and Demonstration Grants- Projects involving construction. Dated: March 18, 2008. Stephen L. Johnson, Administrator. . For the reasons set oulin the preamble, title 40, chapter I of the Code of Federal Regulations is amended as follows: PART 3Q-[AMENDED] . 1. The authority citation for part 30 continues to read as follows: Authority: 7 V.S.C. 135 et seq.; 15 V.S.C. 2601 et seq.; 33 V.S.C. 1251 et seq.; 42 V.S.C. 241, 242(b), 243, 246, 300f, 300j-1, 300j-2, 300j-3; 1857 et seq.; 6901 et seq., 7401 et seq.; OMB circular A-110 (64 FR 54926, October 8, 1999). S 30.44 [Amended] . 2. Section 30.44 is amended by removing and reserving paragraph (b). PART 31-[AMENDED] . 3. The authority citation for part 31 continues to read as follows: .. . Authorityl.7U.S.C. .136 etseq,;o15u'S.C. 2601 et seq.; 20 V.S.C. 4011 et seq.; 33 V.S.C. Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. 59/Wednesday, March 26, 200B/Rules and Regulations 15913 I I 1251 et seq. and 1401 et seq.; 42 D.S.C. 300f et seq., 6901 et seq., 7401 et seq., and 9601 et seq. ~31.36 [Amended] .4. Section 31.36 is amended by removing and reserving paragraph (e). PART 33-[ADDED] . 5. Part 33 is added as follows: PART 33-PARTICIPATION BY DISADVANTAGED BUSINESS ENTERPRISES IN UNITED STATES ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY PROGRAMS Subpart A-General Provisions Sec. 33.101 What are the objectives of this part? 33.102 When do the requirements of this part apply? 33.103 What do the terms in this part mean? 33.104 Maya recipient apply for a waiver from the requirements of this part? 33.105 What are the compliance and enforcement provisions of this part? 33.106 What assurances must EPA financial assistance recipients obtain from their contractors? 33.107 What are the rules governing availability of records, cooperation, and intimidation and retaliation? Subpart B-Certification 33.201 What does this subpart require? 33.202 How does an entity qualify as an MBE or WBE under EPA's 8% statute? 33.203 How does an entity qualify as an MBE or WBE under EPA's 10% statute? 33.204 Where does an entity become certified under EP A's 8% and 10% statutes? 33.205 How does an entity become certified by EPA? 33.206 Is there a list of certified MBEs and WBEs? 33.207 Can an entity reapply to EPA for MBE or WEE certification? 33.208 How long does an MBE or WBE certification from EP A last? 33.209 Can EPA re-evaluate the MBE or WBE status of an entity after EP A certifies it to be an MBE or WBE? 33.210 Does an entity certified as an MBE or WBE by EP A need to keep EP A informed of any changes which may affect the entity's certification? 33.211 What is the process for appealing or challenging an EP A MBE or WBE certification determination? 33.212 What conduct is prohibited by this subpart? Subpart C-Good Faith Efforts 33.301 What does this subpart require? 33.302 Are there any additional contract administration requirements? 33.303 Are there special rules for loans under EP A financial assistance agreements? 33.304 ...Must-a,Nati~e.ArnericaIl (either..as an individual, organization, Tribe or Tribal Government) recipient or prime contractor follow the six good faith efforts? Subpart D-Fair Share Objectives 33.401 What does this subpart require? 33.402 Are there special rules for loans under EP A financial assistance agreements? 33.403 What is a fair share objective? 33.404 When must a recipient negotiate fair share objectives with EPA? 33.405 How does a recipient determine its fair share objectives? 33.406 Maya recipient designate a lead agency for fair share objective negotiation purposes? 33.407 How long do MBE and WBE fair share objectives remain in effect? 33.408 Maya recipient use race and/or gender conscious measures as part of this program? 33.409 Maya recipient use quotas as part of this program? 33.410 Can a recipient be penalized for failing to meet its fair share objectives? 33.411 Who may be exempted from this subpart? 33.412 Must an Insular Area or Indian Tribal Government recipient negotiate fair share objectives? Subpart E-Recordkeeping and Reporting 33.501 What are the recordkeeping requirements of this part? 33.502 What are the reporting requirements of this part? 33.503 How does a recipient calculate MBE and WBE participation for reporting purposes? Appendix A to Part 33-Terms and Conditions Authority: 15 D.S.C. 637 note; 42 D.S.C. 4370d, 7601 note, 9605(f); E.G. 11625, 36 FR 19967,3 CFR, 1971 Comp., p. 213; E.G. 12138,49 FR 29637,3 CFR, 1979 Comp., p. 393; E.G. 12432,48 FR 32551,3 CFR, 1983 Comp., p. 198. Subpart A-General Provisions ~ 33.1 01 What are the objectives of this part? The objectives of this part are: (a) To ensure nondiscrimination in the award of contracts under EP A financial assistance agreements. To that end, implementation of this rule with respect to grantees, sub-grantees, loan recipients, prime contractors, or subcontractors in particular States or locales-notably those where there is no apparent history of relevant discrimination-must comply with equal protection standards at that level, apart from the EP A DBE Rule's constitutional compliance as a national matter; (b) To harmonize EPA's DBE Program objectives with the U.S. Supreme Court's decision in Adarand . Canstructors, Inc..v. Pena,. 515. U.S. 200. (1995); (c) To help remove barriers to the participation of DBEs in the award of contracts under EP A financial assistance agreements; and (d) To provide appropriate flexibility to recipients ofEPA financial assistance in establishing and providing contracting opportunities for DBEs. ~33.102 When do the requirements of this part apply? The requirements of this part apply to procurement under EP A financial assistance agreements performed entirely within the United States, whether by a recipient or its prime contractor, for construction, equipment, services and supplies. ~33.103 What do the terms in this part mean? Terms not defined below shall have the meaning given to them in 40 CFR part 30, part 31 and part 35 as applicable. As used in this part: A vailability analysis means documentation of the availability of MBEs and WBEs in the relevant geographic market in relation to the total number of firms available in that area. A ward official means the EP A Regional or Headquarters official delegated the authority to execute financial assistance agreements on behalf of EP A. Broker means a firm that does not itself perform, manage or supervise the work of its contract or subcontract in a manner consistent with the normal business practices for contractors or subcontractors in its line of business. Business, business concern or business enterprise means an entity organized for profit with a place of business located in the United States, and which operates primarily within the United States or which makes a significant contribution to the United States economy through payment of taxes or use of American products, materials or labor. Construction means erection, alteration, or repair (including dredging, excavating, and painting) of buildings, structures, or other improvements to real property. and activities in response to a release or a threat of a release of a hazardous substance into the environment, or activities to prevent the introduction of a hazardous substance into a water supply. Disabled American means, with respect to an individual, permanent or temporary physical or mental impairment that substantially limits one or more of the major life activities of such an individual; a record of such an . im pairment;.or. being.regarded. as having such an impairment. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ..--..-..1..... I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I 15914 Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. 59/Wednesday, March 26, 200B/Rules and Regulations Disadvantaged business enterprise (DBE) means an entity owned or controlled by a socially and economically disadvantaged individual as described by Public Law 102-389 (42 U.S.C. 4370d) or an entity owned and controlled by a socially and economically disadvantaged individual as described by Title X of the Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 (42 U.S.C. 7601 note); a Small Business Enterprise (SBE); a Small Business in a Rural Area (SBRA); or a Labor Surplus Area Firm (LSAFJ, a Historically Underutilized Business (HUB) Zone Small Business Concern, or a concern under a successor program. Disparity study means a comparison within the preceding ten years of the available MBEs and WBEs in a relevant geographic market with their actual usage by entities procuring in the categories of construction, equipment, services and supplies. Equipment means items procured under a financial assistance agreement as defined by applicable regulations (for example 40 CFR 30.2 and 40 CFR 31.3) for the particular type of financial assistance received. Fair share objective means an objective expressing the percentage of MBE or WBE utilization expected absent the effects of discrimination. Financial assistance agreement means grants or cooperative agreements awarded by EP A. The term includes grants or cooperative agreements used to capitalize revolving loan funds, including, but not limited to, the Clean Water State Revolving Loan Fund (CWSRF) Program under Title VI of the Clea):l Water Act, as amended, 33 U.S.C. 1381 et seq., the Drinking Water State Revolving Fund (DWSRF) Program under section 1452 ofthe Safe Drinking Water Act, 42 U.S.C. 300j-12, and the Brownfields Cleanup Revolving Loan Fund (BCRLF) Program under section 104 ofthe Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. 9604. Good faith efforts means the race and/ or gender neutral measures described in subpart C of this part. Historically black college or university (HBCU) means an institution determined by the Secretary of Education to meet the requirements of 34 CFR part 608. HUBZone means a historically underutilized business zone, which is an area located within one or more qualified census tracts, qualified metropolitan counties, or lands within the external boundaries of an Indian reservation. '. HUBZone smalL business concern means a small business concern that appears on the List of Qualified HUBZone Small Business Concerns maintained by the Small Business Administration. Identified loan means a loan project or set-aside activity receiving assistance from a recipient of an EPA financial assistance agreement to capitalize a revolving loan fund, which: (1) In the case ofthe CWSRF Program, is a project funded from amounts equal to the capitalization grant; (2) In the case of the DWSRF Program, is a loan project or set-aside activity funded from amounts up to the amount of the capitalization grant; or (3) In the case of the BCRLF Program, is a project that has been funded with EP A financial assistance. Insular area means the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico or any territory or possession of the United States. Joint venture means an association of a DBE firm and one or more other firms to carry out a single, for-profit business enterprise, for which the parties combine their property, capital, efforts, skills and knowledge, and in which the DBE is responsible for a distinct, clearly defined portion of the work of the contract and whose share in the capital contribution, control, management, risks, and profits of the joint venture are commensurate with its ownership interest. Labor surplus area firm (LSAF) means a concern that together with its first-tier subcontractors will perform substantially in labor surplus areas (as identified by the Department of Labor in accordance with 20 CFR part 654). Performance is substantially in labor surplus areas if the costs incurred under the contract on account of manufacturing, production or performance of appropriate services in labor surplus areas exceed 50 percent of the contract price. Minority business enterprise (MBE) means a Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) other than a Small Business Enterprise (SBE), a Labor Surplus Area Firm (LSAF), a Small Business in Rural Areas (SBRA), or a Women's Business Enterprise (WBE). Minority institution means an accredited college or university whose enrollment of a single designated group or a combination of designated groups (as defined by the Small Business Administration regulations at 13 CFR part 124) exceeds 50% of the total enrollment. Native American means any individual who is an American Indian, Eskimo, Aleut, or Native Hawaiian. ...Recipientmeansan entity. that receives an EP A financial assistance agreement or is a sub-recipient of such agreement, including loan recipients under the Clean Water State Revolving Fund Program, Drinking Water State Revolving Fund Program, and the Brownfields Cleanup Revolving Loan Fund Program. Services means a contractor's labor, time or efforts provided in a manner consistent with normal business practices which do not involve the delivery of a specific end item, other than documents (e.g., reports, design drawings, specifications). Small business, small business concern or small business enterprise (SBE) means a concern, including its affiliates, that is independently owned and operated, not dominant in the field of operation in which it is bidding, and qualified as a small business under the criteria and size standards in 13 CFR part 121. Small business in a rural area (SBRA) means a small business operating in an area identified as a rural county with a code 6-9 in the Rural-Urban continuum Classification Code developed by the United States Department of Agriculture in 1980. Supplies means items procured under a financial assistance agreement as defined by applicable regulations for the particular type of financial assistance received. United States means any ofthe several States, the District of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico and any other territories and possessions of the United States. Women's business enterprise (WBE) means a business concern which is at least 51 % owned or controlled by women for purposes of EPA's 8% statute or a business concern which is at least 51 % owned and controlled by women for purposes for EP A's 10% statute. Determination of ownership by a married woman in a community property jurisdiction will not be affected by her husband's 50 percent interest in her share. Similarly, a business concern which is more than 50 percent owned by a married man will not become a qualified WBE by virtue of his wife's 50 percent interest in his share. ~ 33.1 04 May recipients apply for a waiver from the requirements of this part? (a) A recipient may apply for a waiver from any of the requirements of this part that are not specifically based on a statute or Executive Order, by submitting a written request to the Director of the Office of Small and Disadvantaged Business Utilization. (b) The request must document ..... .. . _ .speciaLor exceptional.circumstances. .."._ ... ..... ". .,..... that make compliance with the I Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. 59/Wednesday, March 26, 200a/Rules and Regulations 15915 I requirement impractical, ~ncluding a specific proposal addressmg how the recipient intends to achieve t~e . objectives of this part as descrIbed m S 33.101. The request must sh~w that: (1) There is a reasonable basis to conclude that the recipient could achieve a level of MBE and WBE participation consistent ~ith ~he objectives of this part usmg different or innovative means other than those that are provided in subparts CorD of this part; (2) Conditions in the recipient's jurisdiction are appropriate for implementing the reques!; and . (3) The request is conSistent With applicable law. (c) The OSDBU Director has the authority to approve a recipient's request. If the OSDBD Dir~ct?r grants a recipient's request, the recipie~t may administer its program as proVided m the request, subject to the following conditions: (1) The recipient's level of MBE and WBE participation continues to be consistent with the objectives of this part; . . . (2) There is a reasonable hmitatiOn on the duration of the recipient's modified program; and (3) Any other conditions the OSDBU Director makes on the grant of the waiver. (d) The OSDBD Director may end a program waiver at any ti~e upo~ ~otice to the recipient and reqUIre a reCipient to comply with the provisions of this part. The OSDBU Director may also extend the waiver if he or she determines that all requirements of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section. continue to be met. Any such extenSiOn shall be for no longer than the period originally set for the duration of the program waiver. ~33.105 What are the compliance and enforcement provisions of this part? If a recipient fails to comply with any of the requirements of this part, EP A may take remedial action under 40 CFR parts 30, 31 or 35, as appropriate, or any other action authorized by law, including, but not limited to, enforcement under 18 D.S.C. 1001 and/ or the Program Fraud Civil Remedies Act of 1986 (31 U.S.C. 3801 et seq.). Examples of the remedial actions under 40 CFR parts 30, 31, and 35 include, but are not limited to: (a) Temporarily withholding cash payments pending c~rr~ction of the deficiency by the reCipIent or more severe enforcement action by EP A; (b) Disallowing all or part ofthe cost . of. theactivi ty. or .8.ctionnotin compliance; (c) Wholly or partly suspending or terminating the current award; or (d) Withholding further awards for the project or program. ~ 33.1 06 What assurances must E~A financial assistance recipients obtain from their contractors? The recipient must ensure that each procurement contract it awards contains the term and condition specified in Appendix A to this part concerning compliance with the requirements of this part. The recipient must also ensure that this term and condition is included in each procurement contract awarded by an entity receiving an identified loan under a financial assistance agreement to capitalize a revolving loan fund. ~33.107 What are the rules governing availability of records, cooperation, and intimidation and retaliation? (a) Availability of records. (1) In responding to requests for information concerning any aspect ofEPA's DBE Program, EP A complies with the provisions of the Federal Freedom of Information and Privacy Acts (5 D.S.C. 552 and 552a). EPA may make available to the public any information concerning EPA's DBE Program release of which is not prohibited by Federal law or regulation, including EP A's Confidential Business Information regulations at 40 CFR part 2, subpart B. (2) EPA recipients shall safeguard from disclosure to unauthorized persons information that may reasonably be considered as confidential business information, consistent with Federal, state, and local law. (b) Cooperation. All participants in EPA's DBE Program are required to cooperate fully and promptly with EP A, EPA Private Certifiers and EPA recipients in reviews, investigations, and other requests for information. Failure to do so shall be a ground for appropriate action against the party involved in accordance with S 33.105. (c) Intimidation and retaliation. A recipient, contractor, or any other participant in EPA's DBE Program must not intimidate, threaten, coerce, or discriminate against any individual or firm for the purpose of interfering ~ith any right or privileg~ secur~~ ?y thIS part. Violation of thIS prohIbItion shall be a ground for appropriate action against the party involved in accordance with S 33.105. Subpart B-Certification ~ 33.201 What does this subpart require? (a) In order to qualify and participate as an MBE or WBE prime or .. subcontractor.for.EP A recipients under. EPA's DBE Program, an entity must be properly certified as required by this subpart. (b) EPA's DBE Program is primarily based on two statutes. Public Law 102- 389,42 U.S.C. 4370d, provides for an 8% objective for awarding contracts under EP A financial assistance agreements to business concerns or other organizations owned or controlled by socially and economically . disadvantaged individuals, includmg HBCUs and women ("EPA's 8% statute"). Title X ofthe Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990,42 D.S.C. 7601 note, provides for a 10% objecti~e for. awarding contracts under EP A fmancIal assistance agreements for research . relating to such amendments to busmess concerns or other organizations owned and controlled by socially and economically disadvantaged individuals ("EPA's 10% statute"). ~ 33.202 How does an entity qualify as an MBE or WBE under EPA's 8% statute? To qualify as an MBE or WBE under EPA's 8% statute, an entity must establish that it is owned or controlled by socially and economically disadvantaged individuals who are of good character and citizens of the United States. An entity need not demonstrate potential for success. (a) Ownership or control. "Ownership" and "control" shall have the same meanings as set forth in 13 CFR 124.105 and 13 CFR 124.106, respectively. (See als? 13 CFR 12~.109 for special rules apph.cable to Indi.an tribes and Alaska Native Corporations; 13 CFR 124.110 for special rules applicable to Native Hawaiian Organizations) . (b) Socially disadvantaged individual. A socially disadvantaged individual is a person who has been subjected ~o racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bIas because of his or her identity as a member of a group without regard to his or her individual qualities and as further defined by the implementing regulations of section 8(a)(5) of the Small Business Act (15 D.S.C. 637(a)(5); 13 CFR 124.103; see also 13 CFR 124.109 for special rules applicable to Indian tribes and Alaska Native Corporations; 13 ~FR 124.110 !or special rules apphcable to Native Hawaiian Organizations). (c) Economically disadvantaged individual. An economically disadvantaged individual is a social.lr disadvantaged individual whose abIhty to compete in the fr~e ~n~erprise s~stem is impaired due to dImIlllshed capItal and credit opportunities, as compared to others in the same business area who are .not socially .disadvantaged.and as.. further defined bysection 8(a)(6) of the I I I I I 1 I I I I I I 1 I I I., I I I 15916 Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. 59/Wednesday, March 26, 200B/Rules and Regulations I Small Business Act (15 U.S.C. 637(a)(6)) and its implementing regulations (13 CFR 124.104). (See also 13 CFR 124.109 for special rules applicable to Indian tribes and Alaska Native Corporations; 13 CFR 124.110 for special rules applicable to Native Hawaiian Organizations). Under EPA's DBE Program, an individual claiming disadvantaged status must have an initial and continued personal net worth of less than $750,000. (d) HBGU. An HBCU automatically qualifies as an entity owned or controlled by socially and economically disadvantaged individuals. (e) Women. Women are deemed to be socially and economically disadvantaged individuals. Ownership or control must be demonstrated pursuant to paragraph (a) of this section, which may be accomplished by certification under ~ 33.204. I I I I I ~ 33.203 How does an entity qualify as an MBE or WBE under EPA's 10% statute? To qualify as an MBE or WBE under EPA's 10% statute, an entity must establish that it is owned and controlled by socially and economically disadvantaged individuals who are of good character and citizens ofthe United States. (a) Ownership and control. An entity must be at least 51 % owned by a socially and economically disadvantaged individual, or in the case of a publicly traded company, at least 51 % of the stock must be owned by one or more socially and economically disadvantaged individuals, and the management and daily business operations of the business concern must be controlled by such individuals. (See also 13 CFR 124.109 for special rules applicable to Indian tribes and Alaska Native Corporations; 13 CFR 124.110 for special rules applicable to Native Hawaiian Organizations). (b) Socially disadvantaged individual. A socially disadvantaged individual is a person who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias because of his or her identity as a member of a group without regard to his or her individual qualities and as further defined by the implementing regulations of section 8(a)(5) of the Small Business Act (15 U.S.c. 637(a)(5); 13 CFR 124.103; see also 13 CFR 124.109 for special rules applicable to Indian tribes and Alaska Native Corporations; 13 CFR 124.110 for special rules applicable to Native Hawaiian Organizations). (c) Economically disadvantaged individual. An economically ." "..disachrantagedindividual is.a socially... disadvantaged individual whose ability I I I I I I I I I I I to compete in the free enterprise system is impaired due to diminished capital and credit opportunities, as compared to others in the same business area who are not socially disadvantaged and as further defined by section 8(a)(6) of the Small Business Act (15 U.S.C. 637(a)(6)) and its implementing regulations (13 CFR 124.104). (See also 13 CFR 124.109 for special rules applicable to Indian tribes and Alaska Native Corporations; 13 CFR 124.110 for special rules applicable to Native Hawaiian Organizations). Under EP A's DBE Program, an individual claiming disadvantaged status must have an initial and continued personal net worth of less than $750,000. (d) Presumptions. In accordance with Title X of the Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990,42 U.S.C. 7601 note, Black Americans, Hispanic Americans, Native Americans, Asian Americans, Women and Disabled Americans are presumed to be socially and economically disadvantaged individuals. In addition, the following institutions are presumed to be entities owned and controlled by socially and economically disadvantaged individuals: HBCUs, Minority Institutions (including Tribal Colleges and Universities and Hispanic-Serving Institutions) and private and voluntary organizations controlled by individuals who are socially and economically disadvantaged. (e) Individuals not members of designated groups. Nothing in this section shall prohibit any member of a racial or ethnic group that is not designated as socially and economically disadvantaged under paragraph (d) of this section from establishing that they have been impeded in developing a business concern as a result of racial or ethnic discrimination. (f) Rebuttal of presumptions. The presumptions established by paragraph (d) ofthis section may be rebutted in accordance with ~ 33.209 with respect ~33.205 How does an entity become to a particular entity if it is reasonably certified by EPA? established that the individual at issue (a) Filing an application. In is not experiencing impediments to accordance with ~ 33.204, an entity may developing such entity as a result of the apply to EP A's Office of Small and individual's identification as a member Disadvantaged Business Utilization of a specified group. (EPA OSDBU) for certification as an (g) Joint ventures. MBE or WBE. EPA's Regional Offices (1) A joint venture may be considered will provide further information and owned and controlled by socially and required application forms to any entity economically disadvantaged interested in MBE or WBE certification. individuals, notwithstanding the size of The applicant must attest to the such joint venture, if a party to the joint accuracy and truthfulness of the venture is an entity that is owned and information on the application form. controlled by a socially and This shall be done either in the form of economically disadvantaged individual, an affidavit sworn to by the applicant . ..andthat. entity..owns.51% of the.joint " before.a.person.who is. authorized by...... venture. state law to administer oaths or in the (2) As a party to a joint venture, a person who is not an economically disadvantaged individual, or an entity that is not owned and controlled by a socially and economically disadvantaged individual, may not be a party to more than two awarded contracts in a fiscal year solely by joint venture with a socially and economically disadvantaged individual or entity. i 33.204 Where does an entity become certified under EPA's 8% and 10% statutes? (a) In order to participate as an MBE or WBE prime or subcontractor for EP A recipients under EPA's DBE Program, an entity must first attempt to be certified by the following: (1) The United States Small Business Administration (SBA), under its 8(a) Business Development Program (13 CFR part 124, subpart A) or its Small Disadvantaged Business (SDB) Program, (13 CFR part 124, subpart B); (2) The United States Department of Transportation (DOT), under its regulations for Participation by Disadvantaged Business Enterprises in DOT Programs (49 CFR parts 23 and 26); or (3) an Indian Tribal Government, State Government, local Government or independent private organization in accordance with EPA's 8% or 10% statute as applicable. (2) Such certifications shall be considered acceptable for establishing MBE or WBE status, as appropriate, under EPA's DBE Program as long as the certification meets EPA's U.S. citizenship requirement under ~ 33.202 or ~ 33.203. (3) An entity may only apply to EP A for MBE or WBE certification under the procedures set forth in ~ 33.205 ifthat entity first is unable to obtain MBE or WBE certification under paragraphs (a) (1) through (3) ofthis section. (b) [Reserved]. Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. 59/Wednesday, March 26, 200B/Rules and Regulations 15917 form of an unsworn declaration executed under penalty of perjury of the laws of the United States. The application must include evidence demonstrating that the entity is owned or controlled by one or more individuals claiming disadvantaged status under EPA's 8% statute or owned and controlled by one or more individuals claiming disadvantaged status under EPA's 10% statute, along with certifications or narratives regarding the disadvantaged status of such individuals. In addition, the application must include documentation of a denial of certification by a Federal agency, State government, local government, Indian Tribal government, or independent private organization, if applicable. (b) Application processing. EPA OSDBU will advise each applicant within 15 days, whenever practicable, after receipt of an application whether the application is complete and suitable for evaluation and, if not, what additional information or action is required. EP A OSDBU shall make its certification decision within 30 days of receipt of a complete and suitable application package, whenever practicable. The burden is on the applicant to demonstrate that those individuals claiming disadvantaged status own or control the entity under EPA's 8% statute or own and control the entity under EPA's 10% statute. (c) Ownership and/or control determination. EPA OSDBU first will determine whether those individuals claiming disadvantaged status own or control the applicant entity under EPA's 8% statute or own and control the applicant entity under EPA's 10% statute. IfEPA OSDBU determines that the applicant does not meet the ownership and/or control requirements of this subpart, EP A OSDBU will issue a written decision to the entity rejecting the application and set forth the reasons for disapproval. (d) Disadvantaged determination. Once EP A OSDBU determines whether an applicant meets the ownership and/ or control requirements of this subpart, EP A OSDBU will determine whether the applicable disadvantaged status requirements under EPA's 8% or 10% statute have been met. If EP A OSDBU determines that the applicable disadvantaged status requirements have been met, EP A OSDBU shall notify the applicant that it has been certified and place the MBE or WBE on EP A OSDBU's list of qualified MBEs and WBEs. If EP A OSDBU determines that the applicable disadvantaged status requirement:Lha:\lfLnot been mat, EP A . OSDBU will reject the entity's application for certification. EP A OSDBU will issue a written decision to the entity setting forth EPA OSDBU's reasons for disapproval. (e) Evaluation standards. (1) An entity's eligibility shall be evaluated on the basis of present circumstances. An entity shall not be denied certification based solely on historical information indicating a lack of ownership and/or control of the firm by socially and economically disadvantaged individuals at some time in the past, if the entity currently meets the ownership and/or control standards of this subpart. (2) Entities seeking MBE or WBE certification shall cooperate fully with requests for information relevant to the certification process. Failure or refusal to provide such information is a ground for denial of certification. (3) In making its certification determination, EP A OSDBU may consider whether an entity has exhibited a pattern of conduct indicating its involvement in attempts to evade or subvert the intent or requirements of the DBE Program. (4) EPA OSDBU shall not consider the issue of whether an entity performs a commercially useful function in making its certification determination. Consideration of whether an entity performs a commercially useful function or is a regular dealer pertains solely to counting toward MBE and WBE objectives as provided in subpart E of this part. (5) Information gathered as part of the certification process that may reasonably be regarded as proprietary or other confidential business information will be safeguarded from disclosure to unauthorized persons, consistent with applicable Federal, State, and local law. (6) To assist in making EPA OSDBU's certification determination, EP A OSDBU itself may take the following steps: (i) Perform an on-site visit to the offices of the entity. Interview the principal officers of the entity and review their resumes and/or work histories. Perform an on-site visit to local job sites if there are such sites on which the entity is working at the time of the certification investigation. Already existing site visit reports may be relied upon in making the certification; (ii) If the entity is a corporation, analyze the ownership of stock in the entity; (iii) Analyze the bonding and financial capacity of the entity; (iv) Determine the work history of the . _.entity, including. contracts ithas received and work it has completed; (v) Obtain a statement from the entity ofthe type of work it prefers to perform for EPA recipients under the DBE Program and its preferred locations for performing the work, if any; and (vi) Obtain or compile a list of the equipment owned by or available to the entity and the licenses the entity and its key personnel possess to perform the work it seeks to do for EPA recipients under the DBE Program. ~ 33.206 Is there a list of certified MBEs and WBEs? EP A OSDBU will maintain a list of certified MBEs and WBEs on EP A OSDBU's Home Page on the Internet. Any interested person may also obtain a copy of the list from EPA OSDBU. ~33.207 Can an entity reapply to EPA for MBE or WBE certification? An entity which has been denied MBE or WBE certification may reapply for certification at any time 12 months or more after the date of the most recent determination by EP A OSDBU to decline the application. ~33.208 How long does an MBE or WBE certification from EPA last? Once EPA OSDBU certifies an entity to be an MBE or WBE by placing it on the EP A OSDBU list of certified MBEs and WBEs specified in ~ 33.206, the entity will generally remain on the list for a period of three years from the date of its certification. To remain on the list after three years, an entity must submit a new application and receive a new certification. ~33.209 Can EPA re-evaluate the MBE or WBE status of an entity after EPA certifies it to be an MBE or WBE? (a) EPA OSDBU may initiate a certification determination whenever it receives credible information calling into question an entity's eligibility as an MBE or WBE. Upon its completion of a certification determination, EP A OSDBU will issue a written determination regarding the MBE or WBE status of the questioned entity. (b) IfEPA OSDBU finds that the entity does not qualify as an MBE or WBE, EP A OSDBU will decertify the entity as an MBE or WBE, and immediately remove the entity from the EP A OSDBU list of certified MBEs and WBEs. (c) IfEPA OSDBU finds that the entity continues to qualify as an MBE or WBE, the determination remains in effect for three years from the date of the decision under the same conditions as if the ...elltity.had.beengrantedMBKor.WBK certification under ~ 33.205. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ..-".~I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 15918 Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. 59/Wednesday, March 26, 200B/Rules and Regulations ~33.210 Does an entity certified as an MBE or WBE by EPA need to keep EPA informed of any changes which may affect the entity's certification? (a) An entity certified as an MBE or WEE by EP A OSDBU must provide EP A OSDBU, every year on the anniversary of the date of its certification, an affidavit sworn to by the entity's owners before a person who is authorized by state law to administer oaths or an unsworn declaration executed under penalty of perjury of the laws of the United States. This affidavit must affirm that there have been no changes in the entity's circumstances affecting its ability to meet disadvantaged status, ownership, and/or control requirements of this subpart or any material changes in the information provided in its application form. Failure to comply may result in the loss of MBE or WBE certification under EPA's DBE Program. (b) An entity certified as an MBE or WBE by EPA OSDBU must inform EPA OSDBU in writing of any change in circumstance affecting the MBE's or WBE's ability to meet disadvantaged status, ownership, and/or control requirements of this subpart or any material change in the information provided in its application form. The MBE or WBE must attach supporting documentation describing in detail the nature of such change. The notice from the MBE or WBE must take the form of an affidavit sworn to by the applicant before a person who is authorized by State law to administer oaths or of an unsworn declaration executed under penalty of perjury of the laws of the United States. The MBE or WBE must provide the written notification within 3D calendar days of the occurrence of the change. ~ 33.211 What is the process for appealing or challenging an EPA MBE or WBE certification determination? (a) An entity which has been denied MBE or WEE certification by EP A OSDBU under S 33.20.5 or S 33.20.9 may appeal that denial. A third party may challenge EPA OSDBU's determination to certify an entity as an MBE or WBE under S 33.20.5 or S 33.20.9. (b) Appeals and challenges must be sent to the Director of OSDBU at Environmental Protection Agency, 120.0. Pennsylvania Avenue, NW., Mail Code 123DT, Washington, DC 20.460.. ~33.212 What conduct is prohibited by (c) The appeal or challenge must be this subpart? sent to the Director of OSDBU (Director) An entity that does not meet the ~ 33.302 Are there any additional contract within 90. days of the date of EP A eligibility criteria of this subpart may administration requirements? OSDBU's MBE or WEE certification not attempt to participate as an MBE or (a) A recipient must require its prime determination. The Director may accept WBE in contracts awarded under EP A contractor to pay its subcontractor for an appeal or challenge filed later than financial assistance agreements or be satisfactory performance no more than .90. day.s.after the_date.ofEPA OSDBU's_ _,."countedas.such.by.anEPA recipient. . ....3.o.days fromthe.primecontractor:s.. ." ._'-...... .._._..". MBE or WEE certification determination An entity that submits false, fraudulent, receipt of payment from the recipient. if the Director determines that there was good cause, beyond the control of the appellant or challenger, for the late filing of the appeal or challenge. (d) No specific format is required for an appeal or challenge. However, the appeal or challenge must include information and arguments concerning why EPA OSDBU's MBE or WBE certification determination should be reversed. For challenges in which a third party questions EPA OSDBU's determination to certify an entity as an MBE or WBE under S 33.20.5 or S 33.20.9, the third party must also send a copy of the challenge to the entity whose MBE or WBE certification is being questioned. In addition, the Director shall request information and arguments from that entity as to why EP A OSDBU's determination to certify the entity as an MBE or WBE should be upheld. (e) The Director makes his/her appeal or challenge decision based solely on the administrative record and does not conduct a hearing. The Director may supplement the record by adding relevant information made available by any other source, including the EP A Office of Inspector General; Federal, State, or local law enforcement authorities; an EPA recipient; or a private party. (f) Consistent with Federal law, the Director shall make available, upon the request of the appellant, challenger or the entity affected by the Director's appeal or challenge decision, any supplementary information the Director receives from any source as described in paragraph (e) ofthis section. (g) Pending the Director's appeal or challenge decision, EP A OSDBU's MBE or WBE certification determination remains in effect. The Director does not stay the effect of its MBE or WBE certification determination while he/she is considering an appeal or challenge. (h) The Director shall reverse EP A OSDBU's MBE or WBE certification determination only if there was a clear and significant error in the processing of the certification or if EP A OSDBU failed to consider a significant material fact contained within the entity's application for MBE or WBE certification. (i) All decisions under this section are administratively final. or deceitful statements or representations, or indicates a serious lack of business integrity or honesty, may be subject to sanctions under S 33.10.5. Subpart C-Good Faith Efforts ~ 33.301 What does this subpart require? A recipient, including one exempted from applying the fair share objective requirements by S 33.411, is required to make the following good faith efforts whenever procuring construction, equipment, services and supplies under an EP A financial assistance agreement, even if it has achieved its fair share objectives under subpart D of this part: (a) Ensure DBEs are made aware of contracting opportunities to the fullest extent practicable through outreach and recruitment activities. For Indian Tribal, State and Local and Government recipients, this will include placing DBEs on solicitation lists and soliciting them whenever they are potential sources. (b) Make information on forthcoming opportunities available to DBEs and arrange time frames for contracts and establish delivery schedules, where the requirements permit, in a way that encourages and facilitates participation by.DBEs in the competitive process. This includes, whenever possible, posting solicitations for bids or proposals for a minimum of 3D calendar days before the bid or proposal closing date. (c) Consider in the contracting process whether firms competing for large contracts could subcontract with DBEs. For Indian Tribal, State and local Government recipients, this will include dividing total requirements when economically feasible into smaller tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by DBEs in the competitive process. (dj Encourage contracting with a consortium of DBEs when a contract is too large for one of these firms to handle individually. (e) Use the services and assistance of the SBA and the Minority Business Development Agency of the Department of Commerce. (f) If the prime contractor awards subcontracts, require the prime contractor to take the steps in paragraphs (a) through (e) of this section. Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. 59/Wednesday, March 26, 200B/Rules and Regulations 15919 (b) A recipient must be notified in writing by its prime contractor prior to any termination of a DBE subcontractor for convenience by the prime contractor. (c) If a DBE subcontractor fails to complete work under the subcontract for any reason, the recipient must require the prime contractor to employ the six good faith efforts described in S 33.301 if soliciting a replacement subcontractor. (d) A recipient must require its prime contractor to employ the six good faith efforts described in S 33.301 even if the prime contractor has achieved its fair share objectives under subpart D of this part. (e) A recipient must require its prime contractor to provide EPA Form 6100- 2-DBE Program Subcontractor Participation Form to all of its DBE subcontractors. EPA Form 6100-2 gives a DBE subcontractor the opportunity to describe the work the DBE subcontractor received from the prime contractor, how much the DBE subcontractor was paid and any other concerns the DBE subcontractor might have, for example reasons why the DBE subcontractor believes it was terminated by the prime contractor. DBE subcontractors may send completed copies of EPA Form 6100-2 directly to the appropriate EP A DBE Coordinator. CD A recipient must require its prime contractor to have its DBE subcontractors complete EPA Form 6100-3-DBE Program Subcontractor Performance Form. A recipient must then require its prime contractor to include all completed forms as part of the prime contractor's bid or proposal package. (g) A recipient must require its prime contractor to complete and submit EP A Form 6100-4-DBE Program Subcontractor Utilization Form as part of the prime contractor's bid or proposal package. (h) Copies ofEPA Form 6100-2-DBE Program Subcontractor Participation Form, EPA Form 6100-3-DBE Program Subcontractor Performance Form and EPA Form 6100-4-DBE Program Subcontractor Utilization Form may be obtained from EPA OSDBU's Home Page on the Internet or directly from EP A OSDBU. (i) A recipient must ensure that each procurement contract it awards contains the term and condition specified in the Appendix concerning compliance with the requirements of this part. A recipient must also ensure that this term and condition is included in each procurement contract awarded by an entity receiving an identified loan under ."." aJinancial assistance.agreementto capitalize a revolving loan fund. ~ 33.303 Are there special rules for loans under EPA financial assistance agreements? A recipient of an EPA financial assistance agreement to capitalize a revolving loan fund, such as a State under the CWSRF or DWSRF or an eligible entity under the Brownfields Cleanup Revolving Loan Fund program, must require that borrowers receiving identified loans comply with the good faith efforts described in S 33.301 and the contract administration requirements of S3.302. This provision does not require that such private and nonprofit borrowers expend identified loan funds in compliance with any other procurement procedures contained in 40 CFR part 30, part 31, or part 35, subpart 0, as applicable. ~ 33.304 Must a Native American (either as an individual, organization, Tribe or Tribal Government) recipient or prime contractor follow the six good faith efforts? (a) A Native American (either as an individual, organization, corporation, Tribe or Tribal Government) recipient or prime contractor must follow the six good faith efforts only if doing so would not conflict with existing Tribal or Federal law, including but not limited to the Indian Self-Determination and Education Assistance Act (25 U.S.c. 450e), which establishes, among other things, that any federal contract, subcontract, grant, or subgrant awarded to Indian organizations or for the benefit of Indians, shall require preference in the award of subcontracts and subgrants to Indian organizations and to Indian- owned economic enterprises. (b) Tribal organizations awarded an EP A financial assistance agreement have the ability to solicit and recruit Indian organizations and Indian-owned economic enterprises and give them preference in the award process prior to undertaking the six good faith efforts. Tribal governments with promulgated tribal laws and regulations concerning the solicitation and recruitment of Native-owned and other minority business enterprises, including women- owned business enterprises, have the discretion to utilize these tribal laws and regulations in lieu of the six good faith efforts. If the effort to recruit Indian organizations and Indian-owned economic enterprises is not successful, then the recipient must follow the six good faith efforts. All tribal recipients still must retain records documenting compliance in accordance with S 33.501 and must report to EP A on their accomplishments in accordance with S 33.502. (el Any.recipient, whether or. not" Native American, of an EP A financial assistance agreement for the benefit of Native Americans, is required to solicit and recruit Indian organizations and Indian-owned economic enterprises and give them preference in the award process prior to undertaking the six good faith efforts. If the efforts to solicit and recruit Indian organizations and Indian-owned economic enterprises is not successful, then the recipient must follow the six good faith efforts. (d) Native Americans are defined in S 33.103 to include American Indians, Eskimos, Aleuts and Native Hawaiians. Subpart D-Fair Share Objectives ~ 33.401 What does this subpart require? A recipient must negotiate with the appropriate EP A award official or his/ her designee, fair share objectives for MBE and WBE participation in procurement under the financial assistance agreements. ~ 33.402 Are there special rules for loans under EPA financial assistance agreements? A recipient of an EPA financial assistance agreement to capitalize revolving loan funds must either apply its own fair share objectives negotiated with EPA under S 33.401 to identified loans using a substantially similar relevant geographic market, or negotiate separate fair share objectives with entities receiving identified loans, as long as such separate objectives are based on demonstrable evidence of availability of MBEs and WBEs in accordance with this subpart. If procurements will occur over more than one year, the recipient may choose to apply the fair share objective in place either for the year in which the identified loan is awarded or for the year in which the procurement action occurs. The recipient must specify this choice in the financial assistance agreement, or incorporate it by reference therein. ~ 33.403 What is a fair share objective? A fair share objective is an objective based on the capacity and availability of qualified, certified MBEs and WEEs in the relevant geographic market for the procurement categories of construction, equipment, services and supplies compared to the number of all qualified entities in the same market for the same procurement categories, adjusted, as appropriate, to reflect the level of MBE and WEE participation expected absent ..,the effects of discrimination. A fair share objective is not a quota. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ",I.,." I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ...1 1 15920 Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. S9/Wednesday, March 26, 200B/Rules and Regulations 933.404 When must a recipient negotiate fair share objectives with EPA? A recipient must submit its proposed MBE and WBE fair share objectives and supporting documentation to EP A within 120 days after its acceptance of its financial assistance award. EP A must respond in writing to the recipient's submission within 30 days of receipt, either agreeing with the submission or providing initial comments for further negotiation. Failure to respond within this time frame may be considered as agreement by EP A with the fair share objectives submitted by the recipient. MBE and WBE fair share objectives must be agreed upon by the recipient and EP A before funds may be expended for procurement under the recipient's financial assistance agreement. 933.405 How does a recipient determine its fair share objectives? (a) A recipient must determine its fair share objectives based on demonstrable evidence of the number of certified MBEs and WBEs that are ready, willing, and able to perform in the relevant geographic market for each of the four procurement categories (equipment, construction, services, and supplies). The relevant geographic market is the area of solicitation for the procurement as determined by the recipient. The market may be a geographic region of a State, an entire State, or a multi-State area. Fair share objectives must reflect the recipient's determination of the level of MBE and WBE participation it would expect absent the effects of discrimination. A recipient may combine the four procurement categories into one weighted objective for MBEs and one weighted objective for WBEs. (b) Step 1. A recipient must first determine a base figure for the relative availability of MBEs and WBEs. The following are examples of approaches that a recipient may take. Any percentage figure derived from one of these examples should be considered a basis from which a recipient begins when examining evidence available in its jurisdiction. (1) MBE and WBE Directories and Census Bureau Data. Separately determine the number of certified MBEs and WBEs that are ready, willing, and able to perform in the relevant geographic market for each procurement category from a MBE/WBE directory, such as a bidder's list. Using the Census Bureau's County Business Pattern (CBP) database, determine the number of all qualified businesses available in the market that perform work in the same procurement category. Separatel ydivide the number of MBEs and WBEs by the number of all businesses to derive a base figure for the relative availability of MBEs and WBEs in the market. (2) Data from a Disparity Study. Use a percentage figure derived from data in a valid, applicable disparity study conducted within the preceding ten years comparing the available MBEs and WBEs in the relevant geographic market with their actual usage by entities procuring in the categories of construction, equipment, services, and supplies. (3) The Objective of Another EPA Recipient. A recipient may use, as its base figure, the fair share objectives of another EP A recipient if the recipient demonstrates that it will use the same, or substantially similar, relevant geographic market as the other EP A recipient. (See S 33.411 for exemptions from fair share objective negotiations). (4) Alternative Methods. Subject to EP A approval, other methods may be used to determine a base figure for the overall objective. Any methodology chosen must be based on demonstrable evidence of local market conditions and be designed to ultimately attain an objective that is rationally related to the relative availability of MBEs and WBEs in the relevant geographic market. (c) Step 2. After calculating a base figure, a recipient must examine the evidence available in its jurisdiction to determine what adjustment, if any, is needed to the base figure in order to arrive at the fair share objective. (1) There are many types of evidence that must be considered when adjusting the base figure. These include: (i) The current capacity of MBEs and WBEs to perform contract work under EP A financial assistance agreements, as measured by the volume of work MBEs and WBEs have performed in recent years; (ii) Evidence from disparity studies conducted anywhere within the recipient's jurisdiction, to the extent it is not already accounted for in the base figure; and (iii) If the base figure is the objective of another EP A recipient, it must be adjusted for differences in the local market and the recipient's contracting program. (2) A recipient may also consider available evidence from related fields that affect the opportunities for MBEs and WBEs to form, grow and compete. These include, but are not limited to: (i) Statistical disparities in the ability of MBEs and WBEs to get the financing, bonding and insurance required to participate; and (ii) Data on employment, self- employment, education, training and union apprenticeship programs, to the extent it can be related to the opportunities for MBEs and WBEs to perform in the program. (3) If a recipient attempts to make an adjustment to its base figure to account for the continuing effects of past discrimination (often called the "but for" factor) or the effects of another ongoing MBE/WBE program, the adjustment must be based on demonstrable evidence that is logically and directly related to the effect for which the adjustment is sought. 9 33.406 Maya recipient designate a lead agency for fair share objective negotiation purposes? If an Indian Tribal, State or local Government has more than one agency that receives EPA financial assistance, the agencies within that Government may designate a lead agency to negotiate MBE and WBE fair share objectives with EP A to be used by each of the agencies. Each agency must otherwise negotiate with EP A separately its own MBE and WBE fair share objectives. 933.407 How long do MBE and WBE fair share objectives remain in effect? Once MBE and WBE fair share objectives have been negotiated, they will remain in effect for three fiscal years unless there are significant changes to the data supporting the fair share objectives. The fact that a disparity study utilized in negotiating fair share objectives has become more than ten years old during the three-year period does not by itself constitute a significant change requiring renegotiation. 933.408 Maya recipient use race and/or gender conscious measures as part of this program? (a) Should the good faith efforts described in subpart C of this part or other race and/or gender neutral measures prove to be inadequate to achieve an established fair share objective, race and/or gender conscious action (e.g., apply the subcontracting suggestion in S 33.301(c) to MBEs and WBEs) is available to a recipient and its prime contractor to more closely achieve the fair share objectives, subject to S 33.409. Under no circumstances are race and/or gender conscious actions required by EP A. (b) Any use of race and/or gender conscious efforts must not result in the selection of an unqualified MBE or WBE. 933.409 Maya recipient use quotas as part of this program? A recipient is not permitted to use ..quotas. in procurements. under EPA's 8% or 10% statute. I Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. 59/Wednesday, March 26, 200B/Rules and Regulations 15921 I ~33.410 Can a recipient be penalized for failing to meet its fair share objectives? A recipient cannot be penalized, or treated by EP A as being in noncompliance with this subpart, solely because its MBE or WBE participation does not meet its applicable fair share objective. However, EPA may take remedial action under S 33.105 for a recipient's failure to comply with other provisions of this part, including, but not limited to, the good faith efforts requirements described in subpart C of this part. ~33.411 Who may be exempted from this subpart? (a) General. A recipient of an EPA financial assistance agreement in the amount of $250,000 or less for any single assistance agreement, or of more than one financial assistance agreement with a combined total of $250,000 or less in anyone fiscal year, is not required to apply the fair share objective requirements of this subpart. This exemption is limited to the fair share objective requirements of this subpart. (b) Clean Water State Revolving Fund (CWSRF) Program, Drinking Water State Revolving Fund (DWSRF) Program, and Brownfields Cleanup Revolving Loan Fund (BCRLF) Program Identified Loan Recipients. A recipient under the CWSRF, DWSRF, or BCRLF Program is not required to apply the fair share objective requirements of this subpart to an entity receiving an identified loan in an amount of $250,000 or less or to an entity receiving more than one identified loan with a combined total of $250,000 or less in anyone fiscal year. This exemption is limited to the fair share objective requirements of this subpart. (c) Tribal and Intertribal Consortia recipients of program grants which can be included in Performance Partnership Grants (PPGs) under 40 CFR Part 35, Subpart B. Tribal and Intertribal consortia recipients of PPG eligible grants are not required to apply the fair share objective requirements of this subpart to those grants. This exemption is limited to the fair share objective requirements of this subpart. (d) Technical Assistance Grant (TAG) Program Recipients. A recipient of a TAG is not required to apply the fair share objective requirements of this subpart to that grant. This exemption is limited to the fair share objective requirements of this subpart. ~33.412 Must an Insular Area or Indian Tribal Government recipient negotiate fair share objectives? .. n...... .Ihe..requirements. in this. subpart " regarding the negotiation of fair share objectives will not apply to an Insular Area or Indian Tribal Government recipient until three calendar years after the effective date ofthis part. Furthermore, in accordance with S 33.411(c), tribal and intertribal consortia recipients of program grants which can be included in Performance Partnership Grants (PPGs) under 40 CFR part 35, subpart B are not required to apply the fair share objective requirements of this subpart to such grants. (3) The procurement on which the entity bid or quoted, and when; and (4) Entity's status as an MBE/WBE or non-MBE/WBE. (c) Exemptions. A recipient of an EPA financial assistance agreement in the amount of $250,000 or less for any single assistance agreement, or of more than one financial assistance agreement with a combined total of $250,000 or less in anyone fiscal year, is exempt from the paragraph (b) of this section requirement to create and maintain a bidders list. Also, a recipient under the CWSRF, DWSRF, or BCRLF Program is not required to apply the paragraph (b) of this section bidders list requirement of this subpart to an entity receiving an identified loan in an amount of $250,000 or less, or to an entity receiving more than one identified loan with a combined total of $250,000 or less in anyone fiscal year. This exemption is limited to the paragraph (b) of this section bidders list requirements of this subpart. I I I Subpart E-Recordkeeping and Reporting I ~ 33.501 What are the record keeping requirements of this part? (a) A recipient, including those recipients exempted under S 33.411 from the requirement to apply the fair share objectives, must maintain all records documenting its compliance with the requirements of this part, including documentation of its, and its prime contractors', good faith efforts and data relied upon in formulating its fair share objectives. Such records must be retained in accordance with applicable record retention requirements for the recipient's financial assistance agreement. (b) A recipient of a Continuing Environmental Program Grant or other annual grant must create and maintain a bidders list. In addition, a recipient of an EP A financial assistance agreement to capitalize a revolving loan fund also must require entities receiving identified loans to create and maintain a bidders list ifthe recipient of the loan is subject to, or chooses to follow, competitive bidding requirements. (See e.g., S 33.303). The purpose of a bidders list is to provide the recipient and entities receiving identified loans who conduct competitive bidding with as accurate a database as possible about the universe of MBE/WBE and non-MBE/ WBE prime and subcontractors. The list must include all firms that bid or quote on prime contracts, or bid or quote subcontracts on EPA assisted projects, including both MBE/WBEs and non- MBE/WBEs. The bidders list must only be kept until the grant project period has expired and the recipient is no longer receiving EP A funding under the grant. For entities receiving identified loans, the bidders list must only be kept until the project period for the ~ 33.503 How does a recipient calculate identified loan has ended. The MBE and WBE participation for reporting following information must be obtained purposes? from all prime and subcontractors: (a) General. Only certified MBEs and (1) Entity's name with point of WBEs are to be counted towards MBE/ contact; WBE participation. Amounts of MBE d.. ,eo' ..(2).Entity.:S.mailing address, telephone... ancLWBE .participation are. calculated as. 0'" ...,.. number, and e-mail address; a percentage of total financial assistance I I ~ 33.502 What are the reporting requirements of this part? MBE and WBE participation must be reported by all recipients, including those recipients exempted under S 33.411 from the requirement to apply the fair share objectives, on EPA Form 5700-52A. Recipients of Continuing Environmental Program Grants under 40 CFR part 35, subpart A; recipients of Performance Partnership Grants (PPGs) under 40 CFR part 35, subpart B; General Assistance Program (GAP) grants for tribal governments and intertribal consortia; and institutions of higher education, hospitals and other non-profit organizations receiving financial assistance agreements under 40 CFR part 30, will report on MBE and WBE participation on an annual basis. All other financial assistance agreement recipients, including recipients of financial assistance agreements capitalizing revolving loan funds, will report on MBE and WBE participation semiannually. Recipients of financial assistance agreements that capitalize revolving loan programs must require entities receiving identified loans to submit their MBE and WBE participation reports on a semiannual basis to the financial assistance agreement recipient, rather than to EP A. I I I I I I I I I I..... I I I 15922 Federal Register/Vol. 73, No. S9/Wednesday, March 26, 200B/Rules and Regulations I agreement project procurement costs, which include the match portion of the project costs, if any. For recipients of financial assistance agreements that capitalize revolving loan programs, the total amount is the total procurement dollars in the amount of identified loans equal to the capitalization grant amount. (b) Ineligible project costs. If all project costs attributable to MBE and WBE participation are not eligible for funding under the EP A financial assistance agreement, the recipient may choose to report the percentage of MBE and WBE participation based on the total eligible and non-eligible costs of the project. (c) Joint ventures. For joint ventures, MBE and WBE participation consists of the portion of the dollar amount of the joint venture attributable to the MBE or WBE. If an MBE's or WBE's risk of loss, control or management responsibilities is not commensurate with its share of the profit, the Agency may direct an adjustment in the percentage of MBE or WBE participation. (d) Central Purchasing or Procurement Centers. A recipient must report MBE and WBE participation from its central purchasing or procurement centers. (e) Brokers. A recipient may not count expenditures to a MBE or WBE that acts merely as a broker or passive conduit of funds, without performing, managing, or supervising the work of its contract or subcontract in a manner consistent with normal business practices. (1) Presumption. If 50% or more of the total dollar amount of a MBE or WBE's prime contract is subcontracted to a non-DBE, the MBE or WBE prime contractor will be presumed to be a broker, and no MBE or WBE participation may be reported. (2) Rebuttal. The MBE or WBE prime contractor may rebut this presumption by demonstrating that its actions are consistent with normal practices for prime contractors in its business and that it will actively perform, manage and supervise the work under the contract. (f1 MBE or WBE Truckers/Haulers. A recipient may count expenditures to an MBE or WEE trucker/hauler only if the MBE or WEE trucker/hauler is performing a commercially useful function. The following factors should be used in determining whether an MBE or WBE trucker/hauler is performing a commercially useful function: (1) The MBE or WBE must be responsible for the management and supervision of the entire trucking/ hauling operation for which it is responsible on a particular contract, and there cannot be a contrived arrangement I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I for the purpose of meeting MBE or WBE objectives. (2) The MBE or WBE must itself own and operate at least one fully licensed, insured, and operational truck used on the contract. Appendix A to Part 33-Term and Condition Each procurement contract signed by an EP A financial assistance agreement recipient, including those for an identified loan under an EP A financial assistance agreement capitalizing a revolving loan fund, must include the following term and condition: The contractor shall not discriminate on the basis ofrace, color, national origin or sex in the performance of this contract. The contractor shall carry out applicable requirements of 40 CFR part 33 in the award and administration of contracts awarded under EPA financial assistance agreements. Failure by the contractor to carry out these requirements is a material breach of this contract which may result in the termination of this contract or other legally available remedies. PART 35-[AMENDED] Subpart E-[Amended] . 6. The authority citation for part 35, subpart E, continues to read as follows: Authority: Sees. 109(b), 201 through 205, 207, 208(d), 210 through 212, 215 through 217, 304(d)(3), 313, 501, 511, and 516(b) of the Clean Water Act, as amended, 33 D.S.C. 1251 et seq. ~ 35.936-7 [Removed] . 7. Section 35.936-7 is removed. ~ 35.938-9 [Amended] . 8. Section 35.938-9 is amended by removing and reserving paragraph (b)(2). Subpart K-[Amended] . 9. The authority citation for part 35, subpart K, continues to read as follows: Authority: Sees. 205(m), 501(a) and title VI of the Clean Water Act, as amended, 42 D.S.C. 1285(m], 33 D.S.C. 1361(a), 33 D.S.C. 1381-1387. ~35.3145 [Amended] . 10. Section 35.3145 is amended by removing paragraphs (d) and (e). Subpart L-[Amended] . 11. The authority citation for part 35, subpart L, continues to read as follows: Authority: Section 1452 of the Safe Drinking Water Act, as amended, 42 D.S.C. 300j-12. ~ 35.3575 [Amended] . 12.Section 35.3575(d) is removed and reserved. Subpart M-[Amended] . 13. The authority citation for part 35, subpart M, continues to read as follows: Authority: 42 D.S.C. 9617(e); sec. 9(g), E.G. 12580,52 FR 2923, 3 CFR, 1987 Comp., p. 193. ~35.4170 [Amended] . 14. Section 35.4170(b) is removed and reserved. ~ 35.4205 [Amended] . 15. Section 35.4205(g) is removed. ~ 35.4240 [Amended] . 16. Section 35.4240(e) is removed and reserved. Subpart Q-[Amended] . 17. The authority citation for part 35, subpart 0, continues to read as follows: Authority: 42 D.S.C. 9601 et seq. ~ 35.6015 [Amended] . 18. Section 35.6015(a) is amended by removing the definitions for "Minority Business Enterprise (MBE)" and "Women's Business Enterprise (WBE)". ~ 35.6550 [Amended] .19. Section 35.6550(a)(8) is removed and reserved. ~ 35.6580 [Amended] . 20. Section 35.6580 is removed. ~35.6610 [Amended] . 21. Section 35.6610(c) is removed and reserved. ~ 35.6665 [Removed] . 22. Section 35.6665 is removed. PART 4G-[Amended] . 21. The authority citation for part 40 is revised to read as follows: Authority: 7 D.S.C. 136 et seq.; 15 D.S.C. 260get seq.; 33 D.S.C. 1254 et seq. and 1443; 42 D.S.C. 241 et seq., 300f et seq., 1857 et seq., 1891 et seq., and 6901 et seq. ~ 40.145-3 [Amended] .22. Section 40.145-3(c) is removed and reserved. [FR Doc. E8-6003 Filed 3-25-08; 8:45 am] BILLING CODE 65~Q-P I I I I I DAVIS-BACON ACT DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 10. FEDERAL LABOR STANDARDS PROVISIONS (Davis-Bacon Act, Copeland Act, and Contract Works Hours & Safety Standards Act) The Project to which the construction work covered by this contract pertains is being assisted by the United States of America and the following Federal Labor Standards Provisions are included in this Contract pursuant to the provisions applicable to such Federal assistance. A.1.( I) Minimum Wages. All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR Part 3), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section 1 (b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1 )(iv); also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs, which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein; provided, that the employer=s payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(1)(ii) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. (ii) (a) Any class of laborers or mechanics which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. EPA shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits; therefore, only when the following criteria have been met: (1) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and (2) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (3) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (b) If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and EPA or its designee agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by EPA or its designee to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, employment Standards Administration, U. S. Department of Labor, Washington, D. C. 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise EPA or its designee or will notify EPA or its designee within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB control number 1215-0140.) ( c) In the event that the Contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the Classification or their representatives, and EPA or its designee do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designed for fringe benefits, where appropriate), EPA or its designee shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of EPA or its designee, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advise EPA or its designee or will notify EPA or its designee within the 30-day period that the additional time is necessary. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215- 0140. ) (d) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to subparagraphs (1 )(b) or ( c) of this paragraph, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (iii) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. (iv) If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program. Provided, that the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215-0140.) 2. Withholding. EPA or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other Federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees and helpers employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee or helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the contract, EPA, or its designee may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant,or owner~(take such aCtion as may beriecessary tocause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ..I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I violations have ceased. EPA or its designee may, after written notice to the contractor, disburse such amounts withheld for and on account of the contractor or subcontractor to the respective employees to whom they are due. The Comptroller General shall make such disbursements in the case of direct Davis-Bacon Act contracts. 3.( i) Payrolls and Basic Records. Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in Section 1 (b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1 )(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in Section 1 (b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Numbers 1215-0140 and 1215-0017). (ii)(a) The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to EPA or its designee if the agency is a party to the contract, but if the agency is not such a party, the contractor will submit the payrolls to the applicant, sponsor, or owners, as the case may be, for transmission to EPA or its designee. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR Part 5.5(a)(3)(I). This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for this purpose and may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents (Federal Stock Number 029-005-00014-1), U. S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under OMB Control Number 1215- 0149). (b) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a Statement of Compliance, signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: (1) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR Part 5.5 (a)(3)(I) and that such information is correct and complete; (2) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in 29 CFR Part 3; (3) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. ( c) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Option Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the Statement of Compliance required by paragraph A. 3(ii)(b) of this section. (d) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under Section 1001 of Title 18 and Section 231 of Title 31 of the United States Code. (iii) The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph A.3(1) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of EPA or its designee or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, EPA or its designee may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR Part 5.12. 4.( i) Apprentices and Trainees. (i) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U. S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman=s hourly rate) specified in the contractor=s or subcontractor=s registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I registered program for the apprentice=s level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with the determination. In the event the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (ii) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U. S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee=s level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program the contract will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (iii) Equal Employment Opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended, and 29 CFR Part 30. 5. Compliance with Copeland Act Requirements. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR Part 3 which are incorporated by reference in this contract. 6. Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor will insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as EPA or its designee may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contract shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR Part 5.5. 7. Contract Termination, Debarment. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. 8. Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act Requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR Parts 1, 3 and 5 are herein incorporated by referenced in this contract. 9. Disputes Concerning labor Standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR Parts 5, 6 and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and EPA or its designee, the U. S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. 10.( i) Certification of Eligibility. By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor=s firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of Section 3(a) of the Da"is-Becon Act 0~./.29 CFR 5.12(a)(1) or..to be awarded EPA contracts or participate in EPA programs pUr~uant to Executive Order 12949. (ii) No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of Section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1) or to be. awarded EPA contracts or participate in EPA programs pursuant to Executive Order 12549. (iii) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U. S. Criminal Code, 18 U. S. C. 1001. Additionally, U. S. Criminal Code, Section 1010, Title 18, U. S. C., Federal Housing Administration transactions, provides in part Whoever, for the purpose of. . .influencing in any way the action of such Administration. . .makes, utters or publishes any statement, knowing the same to be false. . .shall be fined not more than $5,000 or imprisoned not more than two years, or both. 11. Complaints, Proceedings, or Testimony by Employees. No laborer or mechanic to whom the wage, salary, or other labor standards provisions of this contract are applicable shall be discharged or in any other manner discriminated against by the contractor or any subcontractor because such employee has filed any complaint or instituted or caused to be instituted any proceeding or has testified or is about to testify in any proceeding under or relating to the labor standards applicable under this contract to his employer. B. Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. As used in the paragraph, the terms laborers and mechanics include watchmen and guards. (1) Overtime requirements. No contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. (2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, the contractor and I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I any subcontractor responsible therefore shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph. (3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. EPA or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contract, or any other Federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph. (4) Subcontracts. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in subparagraph (1) through (4) of this paragraph and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in subparagraphs (1) through (4) of this paragraph. C. Health and Safety (1) No laborer or mechanic shall be required to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health and safety as determined under construction safety and health standards promulgated by the Secretary of Labor by regulation. (2) The contractor shall comply with all regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor pursuant to Title 29 Part 1926 (formerly part 1518) and failure to comply may result in imposition of sanctions pursuant to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Public Law 91-54.83 State 96). (3) The contractor shall include the provisions of this Article in every subcontract so that such provisions will be binding on each subcontractor. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract as the Secretary of Housing and Urban Development or the Secretary of Labor shall direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. 11. Guidance to Contractor for Compliance with labor Standards Provisions a) Contracts with Two Wage Decisions If the contract includes two wage decisions, the contractor, and each subcontractor who works on the site, must submit either two separate payrolls (one for each wage decision) or one payroll which identifies each worker twice and the hours worked under each wage decision. One single payroll, reflecting each worker once, may be submitted provided the Contractor uses the higher rate in the wage decisions for each identical job classification. However, where a job classification is not listed in a wage decision and is needed for that portion of the work, the classification must be added to the wage decision. A worker may not be paid at the rate for a classification using the hourly rate for that same classification in another wage decision. After the additional classification is approved, the contractor may pay the higher of the two rates and submit one payroll, if desired. b) Complying with Minimum Hourly Amounts 1) The minimum hourly amount due to a worker in each classification is the total of the amounts in the Rates and Fringe Benefits (if any) columns of the applicable wage decision. 2) The contractor may satisfy this minimum hourly amount by any combination of cash and bona fide frinQe benefits, regardless of the individual amounts reflected in the Rates and Fringe Benefits columns. 3) A contractor payment for a worker which is required by law is not a fringe benefit in meeting the minimum hourly amount due under the applicable wage decision. For example, contractor payments for FICA or unemployment insurance are not a fringe benefit; however, contractor payments for health insurance or retirement are a fringe benefit. Generally, a fringe benefit is bona fide if (a) it is available to most workers and (b) involves payments to a third party. 4) The hourly value of the fringe benefit is calculated by dividing the contractor=s annual cost (excluding any amount contributed by the worker) for the fringe benefit by 2080. Therefore, for workers with overtime, an additional payment may be required to meet the minimum hourly wages since generally fringe benefits have no value for any time worked over 40 hours weekly. (If a worker is paid more than the minimum rates required by the wage decision, this should not be a problem. As long as the total wages received by a worker for straight time equals the hours worked times the minimum hourly rate in the wage decision, the requirement of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts has been satisfied.) c) Overtime For any project work over 40 hours weekly, a worker generally must be paid 150% of the actual hourly cash rate received, not the minimum required by the wage decision. (The Davis-Bacon and Related Acts only establishes minimum rates and does not address overtime; the Contract Work Hours Act contains the overtime requirement and uses basic rate of pay as the base for calculation, not the minimum rates established by the Davis- Bacon and Related Acts.) d) Deductions Workers who have deductions, not required by law, from their pay must authorize these deductions in writing. The authorization must identify the purpose of each deduction and the amount, which may be a specific dollar amount or a percentage. A copy of the authorization must be submitted with the first payroll containing the deduction. If deducted amounts increase, another authorization must be submitted. If deducted amounts decrease, no revision to the original authorization is needed. Court-ordered deductions, such as child support, may be identified by the responsible payroll person in a separate I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I document. This document should identify the worker, the amount deducted and the purpose. A copy of the court order should be submitted. e) Classifications Not Included in the Wage Decision If a classification not in the wage decision is required, please advise the owner=s representative in writing and identify the job c1assification(s) required. In some instances, the State agency may allow the use of a similar classification in the wage decision. Otherwise, the contractor and affected workers must agree on a minimum rate, which cannot be lower than the lowest rate for any trade in the wage decision. Laborers (including any subcategory of the laborer classification) and truck drivers are not considered a trade for this purpose. If the classification involves a power equipment operator, the minimum cannot be lower than the lowest rate for any power equipment operator in the wage decision. The owner will provide forms to document agreement on the minimum rate by the affected workers and contractor. The U.S. Department of Labor (USDOL) must approve the proposed classification and rate. The contractor may pay the proposed rate until the USDOL makes a determination. Should the USDOL require a higher rate, the contractor must make wage restitution to the affected worker(s) for all hours worked under the proposed rate. f) SupeNisory Personnel Foremen and other supeNisory personnel who spend at least 80% of their time supeNising workers are not covered by the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts. Therefore, a wage decision will not include such supeNisory classifications and their wages are not subject to any minimums under the Davis-Bacon and Related Act or overtime payments under the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. However, foremen and other supeNisory personnel who spend less than 80% of their time engaged in supeNisory activities are considered workers/mechanics for the time spent engaged in manual labor and must be paid at least the minimum in the wage decision for the appropriate classification(s) based on the work performed. g) Sole Proprietorships /Independent Contractors / Leased Workers The nature of the relationship between a prime contractor and a worker does not affect the requirement to comply with the labor standards provisions of this contract. The applicability of the labor standards provisions is based on the nature of the work performed. If the work performed is primarily manual in nature, the worker is subject to the labor standards provisions in this contract. For example, if John Smith is the owner of ABC Plumbing and performs all plumbing work himself, then Mr. Smith is subject to the labor standards provisions, including minimum wages and overtime. His status as owner is irrelevant for labor standards purposes. If a worker meets the IRS standards for being an independent contractor, and is employed as such, this means that the worker must submit a separate payroll as a subcontractor rather than be included on some other payroll. The worker is still subject to the labor standards provisions in this contract, including minimum wages and overtime. If a contractor or subcontractor leases its workers, they are subject to the labor standards provisions in this contract, including minimum wages and overtime. The leasing firm must submit payrolls and these payrolls must reflect information required to determine compliance with the labor standards provisions of this contract, including a classification for each worker based on the nature of the work performed, number of regular hours worked, and number of overtime hours worked. h) Apprentices I Helpers A worker may be classified as an apprentice only if participating in a federal or state program. Documentation of participation must be submitted. Generally, the apprentice program specifies that the apprentice will be compensated at a percentage of journeyman rate. For Davis-Bacon Act purposes, the hourly rate cannot be lower than the percentage of the hourly rate for the classification in the applicable wage decision. If the worker does not participate in a federal or state apprentice program, then the worker must be classified according to duties performed. This procedure may require classification in the trade depending on tools used, or as a laborer if specialized tools of the trade are not used. The contractor may want to consult with the Wage and Hour Division of the U.S. Department of Labor located in most large cities regarding the appropriate classification. Presently, no worker may be classified as a helper. As with apprentices not participating in a formal apprentice program, the worker must be classified according to duties performed and tools used. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I BUY AMERICAN DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I BUY AMERICAN CERTIFICATION Section 1605 of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act states that: "None of the funds appropriated or otherwise made available by this Act may be used for a project for the construction, alteration, maintenance, or repair of a public building or public work unless all of the iron, steel, and manufactured goods used in the project are produced in the United States." To meet this requirement, the undersigned hereby certifies that all of the material, equipment and accessories which are to be incorporated into the (Name of Construction Contract) to be partially funded by monies from the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act, has been manufactured from domestic construction material as defined by 40 CFR 35.936-13(D). Name of Contractor Date Signature of Authorized Official Title I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents: CONTRACT BOND ... .... .......................................... ... .... ...... ............................................ ...... ..... 1 CONTRACT....................... ..... .......... ..... ..................................... ............... ................................... 3 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL P A YlVIENT .....................................................6 PROPOSAL BOND ........ ................................................... ...... ..................................................... 7 AFFIDAVIT ..................... ..... ..... ....... ...................................... ...................................................... 8 NON -CO LL U SI 0 N f\ FFIDA VIT ......................... ........... ...... .......................................... ........... 8 PRO PO SAL.............................. ............. ................................... ........ ...... ....................................... 8 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET ................................................................... 8 BIDDER'S PRO pas f\ L ......................................................... ...................................................... 8 15 ScctionV CIw092W9c!,,( - - Page i <) 2-1'2008 ------- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I FRONT PAGE OF PUBLIC PAYMENT BOND Florida Statute 255.05 BOND NO. 0081003 CONTRACTOR: Brandes Design Build, Inc. 2151 NE Coachman Road Clearwater FL 33765 727-445-7544 SURETY: Westfield Surety Company 1 Park Circle Westfield Center, OH 44251 330-887-0980 AGENT: Nielson, Wojtowicz & Associates, Inc. 1126 Central Avenue St. Petersburg, FL 33701 (727) 209-1803 OBLIGEE: City of Clearwater 100 South Myrtle Ave., Suite 200 Clearwater, FL 33756 PROJECT: 07-0032-UT; Marshall Street Advanced Pollution Control Facility Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 1605 Harbor Drive., Clearwater, FL. -- 1 THIS BOND IS GIVEN TO COMPLY WITH SECTION 255.05 FLORIDA STATUTES, AND ANY ACTION INSTITUTED BY A CLAIMANT UNDER THIS BOND FOR PAYMENT MUST 1 BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NOTICE AND TIME LIMITATION PROVISIONS IN SECTION 255.05(2),FLORIDA STATUES. 1 I" It .1,: Oi- I BOND NUMBER: 0081003 CONTRACT BOND 1 STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF PINELLAS 1 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we BRANDES DESIGN~BUILD. INC. Contractor and W~Sl'F1ELD INSURANCE COMPANY (Surety) whose home address is 1 Park Circle Westfield Center, Ohio 44251 -. ---- . 1 HEREINAFTER CALLED THE 'I Surety II , are held and finnly bound into the City of Clearwater, 1 Florida (hereinafter called the nOwner") in the penal sum of: ONE MILLION, ONE HUNDRED FOUR THOUSAND TWO HUNDRED TWENTY DOLLARS AND EIGHTY-TWO CENTS ($1,104,220.82) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administratorsl 1 successors, and assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written Gontract, dated the q""" J, day of ~I ' 2010 entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for: 1 MARSHALL STREET ADVANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITY GENERATOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 - (07-0032..UT) ',I , , 1 NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the one-year guarantee of matedal and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract 1 documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Fonn of Proposal, Fonn of Contract, Form of Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General COllditions and Technical Specifications) and the Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be 1 made in said Plan.s and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save hannless the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements 011 the part of the said Contractol' agents 1 or employees, in the execution or perfomlance of said contract, including en-om in the plans fumish~d by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractorll or IlContractors" shall promptly make payments to all persons supplyillg him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or 1 indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prOSeC\ltion of the work provided for in said Contract, this obligat.ion sha1l be void, otherwise, the Contractor and Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner al1Y difference between the sum to which the I said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and tbat which the Owner may be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otheIVIise, & any damages, direct or indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain 011 aCCOUl1t of such work" or 011 account of 1 the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of said contract. 1 I 1;',1 ! , , i i :, !i' ,:j ; " E , " ,! JI ,: l t ':.;, . 1 , r~ : ~;l H . ~I ,I 'I , !I " jl " :1 ji ,I' ,; I' a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully copied herein. 1 : i;, , "J " ' "'I! ) ; !1) I: ' I . '" '''I "I' :: :j , , -I " I~ H i) "'\ ~I ; '1j lt~ ~, 'n' ii":' ':1:' , ,i ~l:'! I 1 ; : Page I , I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I il II CONTRACT BOND (2) And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors, administrators, and 'as'signs~'jolnt]y 'and severally, illaf"tney"wiU amply and 'fully profecCtfie said Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or servants or the improper performance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material fumished or work done; as aforesaid, or otherwise. And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further hind themselves, their successors, heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material fumished for the work, embraced by said Contract. And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the tenus of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall. in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals ofthe parties hereto t day of . 2010 By: W stfield Insurance Company SURETY By: Cathy Knoke ;Y-IN"FACT and Flori a Licensed Resident Agent Kevin Wojtowicz n/a Page 2 I THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY SUPERCEDES ANY PREVIOUS POWER BEARING THIS SAME . POWER # AND ISSUED PRIOR TO 10/07/0B, FOR ANY PERSON OR PERSONS NAMED BELOW. I General Power of Attorney CERTIFIED COPY I POWER NO. 099478200 Westfield Insurance Co. Westfield National Insurance Co. Ohio Farmers Insurance Co. Westfield Center, Ohio Know All Men by These Presents, That WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, corporations, hereinafter referred to individually as a 'Company' and collectively as 'Companies: duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Ohio, and haVing its principal office in Westfield Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these presents make, constitute and appoint KEVIN WOJTOWICZ, GLENN ARVANITIS, JENNIFER STEPHENS, JOHN R. NEU, JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY of ST. PETERSBURG and State of FL its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings, or other instruments or contracts of suretyship- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ LIMITATION: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEFICIENCY, MORTGAGE GUARANTEE, OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONDS. and to bind any of the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seal of the applicable Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in the premises. Said appointment is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each of the WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY: "Be It Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any Secretary or any Fidelity & Surety Operations Executive or other Executive shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint anyone or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions: The Attorney-In-Fact. may be given full power and authority for and in the name of and on behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements of indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's Iiabiiity thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such Attorney-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary." "Be It Further Resolved, that the signature of any such designated person and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." (EaCh adopted at a meeting held on February 8, 2000). In Witness Whereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COM PANY have caused these presents to be signed by their Senior Executive and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed this 07th day of OCTOBER A.D., 200B . ..,--.............", Corporate /., ~UR.( ....... Seals" '^ '~..-....."C'~'" #_~,.. -. ,..- '\. Affixed J Iit/ -.. '\ () '\ tSfSl!J(Y i;l ~ Oft: M.MJ...: "'J ' ~~. i,b. \ "'.... ~ ..,~ I ~~ .............. !ooi"~ '.J State of Ohio .........--" County of Medina ss.: On this 07th day of OCTOBER A.D., 200B , before me personally came Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr. to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say, that he resides in Medina, Ohio; that he is Senior Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seals of said Companies; that the seals affixed to said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies; and that he signed his name thereto by like order. ;6kL Notarial ,,,''''''Iff,.,, ~ . Seal ......,..," \ A l ,.."...."'" .". Affixed h~~~\W~i;\ ( ~.:~A"~"\) \. ~lii; :~'~~~;.,~~~e~~';;,ANot ~~:;S~W;4~~2'hioU::~;'ed Code) .... .q ~ 0 -l' .... ...... E: 0 F.....' ,..........,......, I, Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Companies, which is still in full force and effect; and furthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect. In Witness Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Westfield Center, Ohio, this A.D., ~......~u..'" ~.4""~~U R.(k....... " '^ 'l\ ...-..... c...'~ ,-~~. ". ,. \. J...y.' -.. ........... ,..,.' "". \ t~f Sl! J( Y :"il ~ Oft: L.M.L.! ~J ' ~~. I.... \ "'.... ~ i"~ I ~~ ................. ~~ ,...........~ I I I I I I I I I I I I State of Ohio County of Medina I I I I BPOAC2 (combined) (06-02) sS.: \.",t"UIt'''''",~ ", :<;\ONAI.. /I\,r" ,." ~;""""""";S'/"" :'0' .~-:. tiff \~l :LL: SEAL :0: ~\n~ ]mE "t \~':'. .:8 f \~ ................... ""...., """1.,"17,1111.'.1,'...... ~ ..........."",1: ...... \"sa ""'" .....:...c;,. ......~,....,... ~..~. _........,.~ f i!t'A"'TEREij"~'b \ =0: :~= ~~\ 1848 /~J \", . ......~....... .~.l """8,. ".,.......... ",....."... WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY ;Pc. By: Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., Senior Executive day of .,"111""'1 ~..\\'~\ONAl /"'" .." ~I:-.........;.:-)t& .... .:'0." ...~--:._ 2 iJJ! ....~~ :iL: SEAL :0: ~\n~ ]mE ~~". .:8f \~ ................... ",...., "'t" * ".,,\ "'"'tlll''' . ......oJ...t"" ....... \"sa """'" ....:...c;,. ......~..,... /~. _........,.~ fi/t'A"'TEREii~'b \ =0: :~= ~~" 1848 /~l \, '9 ......::--....... .~~ ""'''''' ....,........ '1,..,;........",.. ~-" LJ, ~iLdc'et~ S.ad." I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACT This CONTRACT made and entered into this <t.~ day of , 2010 by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporat n, herei fter designated as the "City", and BRANDES DESIGN-BUILD, INC. of the City of CLEARWATER County of PINELLAS and State of FLORIDA hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undeliake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration ofthe sums of money as herein after set f01ih to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, fumish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: MARSHALL STREET ADVANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITY GENERA TOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 - (07-0032-UT) FOR THE SUM OF: ONE MILLION, ONE HUNDRED FOUR THOUSAND TWO HUNDRED TWENTY DOLLARS AND EIGHTY- TWO CENTS ($1,104,220.82) In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB-CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES. Page 3 - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACT (2) In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or termination; rates of payor other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be perfonned by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then furiher agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1.000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per !illY. shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perfonn all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the tenm and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such perfonnance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the perfonnance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional secUlity bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a forn1 satisfactory to it. Page 4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACT (3) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: ~~ -g .~-:1I' William B. Home, II City Manager Countersigned: By 3-~ tilled Frank Hibbard, , Mayor-Councilmember Approved as to form (Contractor must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual.) (Contractor) By: (SEAL) (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name. and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by AffidaVIt. show his authority to bind the Corporation). Page 5 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT (CORPORA TION FORM) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF PINEL LAS On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn, deposes and says: That he is the (TITLE) of BRANDES DESIGN- BUILD, INC. a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located at 2151 N. E. COACHMAN ROAD, CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 33765 (herein, the "Contractor"). That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of ,2010, with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as Owner, and that the Contractor was to perfonn the construction of: MARSHALL STREET ADVANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITY GENERATOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 - (07-0032-UT) That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors, laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work against the described property. That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) in full satisfaction and discharge of said contract. That the Owner is hereby released fi'om any claim which might arise out of said Contract. The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set for1h in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes. Swom and subscribed to before me BRANDES DESIGN-BUILD, INC. AFFIANT This _ day of , 2010 BY: NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: PRESIDENT Page 6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PROPOSAL BOND (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENT: That we, the undersigned, Brandes Desiqn-Build. Inc. 8S Principal, and Westfield Insurance Company as Surety, are held and finnly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Ten Percent of Amount Bid DoUars ($ 10% ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractors total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of Brandes Desi~n-Build, Inc. as Principal, and Westfield Insurance Company as Surety, for workspedfied as: Marshall Street APCF Generator Up~rades, Phase 2 Contract #07-0032-UT all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided heretofore, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the fuff amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Signed this October 2009 . day of 20th (Principal must indicate whether corporation, partnership, company or individual.) Corporation The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title; the person signing for a corporation must, by affidavit. show his authority to bind the corporation. ~DmpanY Kelln Wojtowiz AttorneY-ln-F act I General Power of Attorney I CERTIFIED COPY I POWER NO. 099478200 Westfield Insurance Co. Westfield National Insurance Co. Ohio Farmers Insurance Co. Westfield Center, Ohio Know All Men by These Presents, That WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY. corporations, hereinafter referred to individually as a 'Company' and collectively as 'Companies: duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Ohio, and having its principal office in Westfield Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these presents make, constitute and appoint KEVIN WOJTOWICZ. GLENN ARVANITIS, JENNIFER STEPHENS, JOHN R. NEU, JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY of ST. PETERSBURG and State of FL its true and lawful Attorney(s)-In-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred In its name, place and stead, to execute, .acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings, or other instruments or contracts of suretyship- - . . . . - - - - ,- - - - - - . . . . . . - . - - - . - - - - - - - - . - - . - - - - - - - - . - - - - - . - - - - - - - LIMITATION: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEFICIENCY, MORTGAGE GUARANTEE, OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONDS. ' and to bind any of the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as If such bonds were signed by the President. sealed with the corporate seal of the applicable Company and duly attested by its Secretary. hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attorney(s)-In-Fact may do In the premises. Said appointment is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each of the WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY: -Be It Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any Secretary or any Fidelity & Surety Operations Executive or other Executive shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint anyone or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions: The Attorney-in-Fact. may be given full power and authority for and in the name of and on behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements of indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such Attorney-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary.- -Be it Further Resolved. that the signature of any such designated person and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." (EaCh adopted at a meeting held on February 8, 2000). In Witness Whereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COM PANY have caused these presents to be signed by their Senior Executive and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed this 07th day of OCTOBER A.D., 200B . ............IU~.,.,., Corporate ,.......~!.Ufl.(~........ Seals ;' () ~",'-'''....c~'\. AffIxed .. ....,..' ~ .... ()-=- iflj.' ....0\ IStSEX! i:i:l : ...: .ti.L f"\OJ ' ~~. ih \. 1'.... '- ....$ J 0:.... '.............. .t-~ ....... ./ State of Ohio ........................ County of Medina ss.: On this 07th day of OCTOBER A.D., 2008 , before me personally came Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr. to me known, who, being by me duiy sworn, did depose and say, that he resides in Medina, Ohio; that he is Senior Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL !NSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seals of said Companies; that the seals affixed to said instrument are sucn corporate seals; that they were so affixed by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies; and that he signed his nad!Jme there, to b: like order. ~. Nota ri al ",,'....1.....,.... __ Sea! ",,,,,, \ A l ~......, Affixed ;;'~~~\iiiiJt;\ (~'E:~'~~':) : ~,J \.11I.>- ,.1....0 . -<l -?-.' .....,....,./: 01'" ~......, ,.....Iun.tt..'.' i, Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL iNSLRANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY. do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct cooy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Companies, which is still in full force and effect; and fu~hermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Jirec:ors, set out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect. In Witness Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Westfield Center, Ohio, this 20 day of October ~,~~," 2009 ......lA!. "" /",\!. U ft.(~''''"" {" () \....-.......~~ ..'-.. j ..Y'" ""V ". 0 <- ,:;:::: '0 \ ~~fSl"!XY i~} \ ~~. Ml-U.t i~ J \. 1'.... ~ ..'~ J f',,,, -.........."..,.... ./"~ .... _/ '~441~ I I I I I I I I I I I State 0' Ch'o County of Medina I I I I I BPOAC2 (combined) (06-02) ss.: ",,,\11""'" ",,,,,""'-<,ONAl./"',, ,'''''1'-'........../1;0' '" f~...... .....~i~% ~I-: SEAL :m: \~......... ."../~/ ""'1 * ,t"'''' "'H."""I - ...........lI"", ...... \tlSUR ;>" ./~~.......-.~",\ ~~." - ",('I' ~ f ~/t'ft~TER[D""S ~ ::...-:: :lI:~ .c, .~- \~... 1848 /~j \.., . .......~.......... .~..~ """,,,,. "............ ""'",,,.,, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY By: Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., Senior Executive William J. Kahelin, A rney at Law, Notary Public My Commission Does ~;ot Expire (Sec. 147.03 Ohio Revised COde) "",\IHH" ",,'\\'~\ONAl. ;t"", .' ~I'- .' ....... ./1;0' ", /'0 ..... .....v1"-... /11/ ....'Z ~ : LL; SEAL :(): ~{~.,...... .."./~/ I"", * '1"\" "'Ulllll'" .,..... ,,"'\~IS';; """""" ,..':6.1:.. .....:~ft..... ..'~' _ .......;,0,-__ '~. .... - f~/C'ft~TfREi\S) =C::l: :~= \~" 1848 /~f \<.......:':"...<:;-~ """i,l"".,,'- ~. ~I ~;"l~t,t~ S<cr<la" - I I 'I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ((~~:~.::'\.;, rry [is) WI <::/ \:0 lr' 11 AFFIDA VIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF PINELLAS ) Kevin M. Klaus being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is Secretary of Brandes Design-Bui ld, Inc. a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: 2151 NF. rn~rhmrln Rn Street & Number Clearwater City Pinellas Florida County State Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of Brandes Design-Build, Inc. (Name of Corporation) Affiant further says that Robert I. Smith IS Vice President (Officer's Name) (Title) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for Brandes Design~Build, Inc. for said corporation by virtue of By Laws _ (state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution Directors. Ifby Resolution give date f Sworn to before me this 1 7 day of November ~~ otary Public \0 Cl\'\,(; ~ 0 \ e.... ame of Notary ''ffi'i~'''v'rlJ;;'',. NANCY COLE j::' t\ MY CO~ISSION . DO 1191 937 ~;..:,:" /,.'1 EXP "J'JfiTl l erial No., if any ] 5 _SectionVJ~lw092309.doc Page 8 of I 5 9/24/2008 - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF PINELLAS ) Robert I. Smith being, fIrst duly sworn, deposes and says that he is Vice President of Brandes Design-Build, Inc. the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not fmancially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fIx the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fIx any overhead, profIt or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof. ---- Sworn to and subscribed before me this ~ day of November ,20_09_ NANCY COLE MY COMMISSION. 00 891937 EXPIRes: Sipt&f1iblir 21,201a B~ood Thru Notary Public U~ '- ] 5 _Section V _ Clw092309.doc Page 9 of 15 9/24/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PROPOSAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for MARSHALL STREET APCF GENERATOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 PROJECT #: 07-0032-UT and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked MARSHALL STREET APCF GENERATOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 PROJECT #: 07-0032-UT Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required -to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PROPOSAL (2) If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of CleatWater, Florida, and the tmdersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the tmdersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amotmt of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on Bid Bond 10% Bank, for the sum of ($ ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount). The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub-contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: ADDRESSES: Kevin M.Klaus, President Palm Harbor Florida Robert I. Smith, Vice President Clearwater, Florida Signature of Bid (The bidder must indicate whether€rpor~artnership, Company or Individual). 15_SectionV _Clw092309.doc Page I ] of 15 9/24/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PROPOSAL (3) The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, he must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation. Principal: Brandes Design-Build, Inc. By: Title: Vice President Robert I. Smith Business Address of Bidder: 2151 NE Coachman Road City and State: Clearwater, FL Zip Code 33 765 Dated at3DlS , this 17 day of November , A.D., 20 09. --... 15_SectionV _Clw092309doc Page 12 of 15 9/24/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET APCF GENERA TOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 PROJECT #: 07-0032-UT Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. 1 Date: 11/02/2009 Addendum No. 2 Date: 11/13/09 Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: "- Addendum No. Date: 15_SectionV _Clw092309doc Page 13 of 15 Inc. (Title of Officer) 11/17/2009 (Date) 9/24/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: MARSHALL STREET APCF GENERATOR UPGRADES, PHASE 2 PROJECT #: 07-0032-UT Bid he Description Qty Units U nit Price Total 1 LS $38 DDD.Db $ 3 g DDD. DD 2 LS $ ') 300- $ i./ YJ OO,Do 3 EA $ /3 ~ ?'i3,St> $ J 3 g '1 q 3.S () 3a LS $ 'l 3')1.~1 $ ? 371 6/ 4 EA $ [if OD,DO $ 1'1 '100,00 4a LS $ 1/'I.DO $ 7/t-()D 5 LS $ J 71 300.1O $ 1193tJ6,()(J 6 LS $ /30 Lloo.(X) $ /3 {J '1 ()O I 0 0 7 EA $ 43;;"OD,OD $ 4 j).() 0 , de 7a 1 LS $ to Y'J ./} 0 8 1 LS $ 9 Generator U Owner's Contingency (10% of Subtotal Items 1-8 1 $/00 3g;}./7/--- .. Generator U. rades Total Items 1-9 $ / /D L/ JC4 ~J- ':~:,.' "'-..' -'C-, ,.:_.~~',':-,........"":,'_I,':"_,::,,,-::_, _':'- ,._-::..t:-~:~~";.:,:,~<":i.;':>,;,:,\'.r.""". -", '_':-'.':1 ,,"C' ,_~,.-. AMERi:lPA'N~ :.(]Q~~:R;Y'l\iN':PREINVESTME~\F;A1C.f['FUND'~NC; ADM;Il'slIS'l'RA~.PION 10 ARRA Fundin Administration 1 LS $ 10.00 $ 10,00 Owner's Contingency (10% of Subtotal 11 Item 10 1 LS $ 1.00 $ ARRA Fundin Administration Total Items 10-11 $ 1.00 11.00 SUB-TOTAL ITEMS 1-8 & 1 0 TOTAL 10% CONTINGENCY ITEMS 9 & 11 BIDDER's GRAND TOTAL ITEMS 1-11 $ I 66 3 ~3f), J/ $ / 00 3~3.. 7/ $1 1 () tf 8- ';At> , ~ d--- CONTRACTOR: BRANDES DESIGN-BUILD, INC. BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL $ I, / b '-I I (J'Jb/i:d.-- f / (N um bers) 15 SecilonV _Clw092309,doc Page 14 of 15 9/24/2008 - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ~~J~~~ tJ-~~ (Words) THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS IDS TOTAL BID BASED ON illS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. TIDS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. -... IS Section V Clw092309.doc - - Page IS of ] 5 9/24/2008 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - BUY AMERICAN CERTIFICATION Section 1605 of the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act states that: "None of the funds appropriated or othenuise made available En} this Act may be used for a project for the constnlction, alteration, maintenance, or repair of a public building or public work unless all of the iron, steel, and manufactured goods used in the project are produced in the United States." To meet this requirement, the undersigned hereby certifies that all of the material, equipment and accessories which are to be incorporated into the (Name of Construction Contract) to be partially funded by monies from the American Recovery and Reinvestment Act, has been manufactured from domestic construction material as defined by 40 CFR 35.936-13(D). 11/17/2009 Date Vice President TiUe --. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ATTACHMENT TO BIDDER'S PROPOSAL SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS Project: Marshall Street APCF Generator Upgrades, Phase 2 Project The Contractor proposes that the items of major equipment named herein will be supplied by the Manufacturers and Suppliers set forth below as written by the Contractor (circle one), unless changes are specifically authorized by the Owner. If Manufacturers and Suppliers have not been determined, list all potential Manufacturers and Suppliers. Preliminary acceptance of equipment listed by the Manufacturer's name and model shall not in any way constitute a waiver of the specifications; final acceptance will be based on full conformity with the specifications covering the equipment. Section Item 16231 Dewatering Building Generator 16415 Dewatering Building A TS 16106 Blower MCC Building A TS Manufacturer/Supplier Cate ill Cummins a. ASCO Power Technolo b. Onan-Cummins S re D Siemens BIDDER'S PROPOSAL ATTACHMENT EQUIPMENT LIST I I STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION I CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD 1940 NORTH MONROE STREET TALLAHASSEE FL 32399-0783 (850) 487-1395 I I KLAUS, KEVIN MICHEAL BRANDES DESIGN-BUILD INC 2151 NE COACHMAN RD CLEARWATER FL 33765 I I I Congratulations I With this license you become one of the nearly one million Floridians licensed by the Department of Business and Professional Regulation. Our professionals and businesses range from architects to yacht brokers, from I boxers to barbeque restaurants, and they keep Florida's economy strong. ~TA IT OF FLORIDA . D~~AR:r-M~NT OF EROFE'SSIONAL .~:;~)~~ . "'''<l1GC 0 6 27 7 3 AC# 3 8 0 5 7 . . ','>; ,:", r,',' B:OS~~S.s'Z~) REGUL~T"fbN';'/"'" :.A, --," A~~.~ Every day we work to improve the way we do business in order to serve you better. For information about our services, please Jog onto www.myfloridalicense.com. There you can find more information about our divisions and the regulations that I impact you, subscribe to department newsletters and learn more about the Department's initiatives. "_ '~: :':t~ 06/03/08 CY7!1 0 54':fl)' :,=\:\0, C~~:rIFIJ:!:D GENERAL CONTRACTPR 'D~\:;;K:!r~'[Jg,.KEVIN MICH~. .? 1::.:-:=~tANi>ES DESIGN-BUILD INC '. '(';".':" ,~ Our mission at the Department is: License Efficiently, Regulate Fairly. We I constantly strive to serve you better so that you can serve your customers. Thank you for doing business in Florida, and congratulations on your new license! ."...., IS CERTIFIED under t:.he provisions of ch.489..J J<xpLratioo date. AUG 31, 20'10' LOB060'300553 I I DETACH HERE J'~~( j .....:..;~, , . .:} it~~\:t/!;';' ;~;~ ~}~(:i ~n~ ;~<~ ';:S'(i ./{@t~~>- i2f~ ~!~~~". ",;')',,; .~,ts. i~I('i~:!~ (01'~: ~{..,f~j,TT ~JW'T.~ ..~~....,..~ ell,,', 6;,:)) ~~'g:.-lf~ i(~~-'::. ;A,{;f:-;. ~~ l12.{ :- J." '! '~~J STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS LICENSING BOARD 1940 NORTH MONROE STREET TALLAHASSEE FL 32399-0783 (850) 487-1395 I I I NIX, TOMMY HOWARD BRANDES DESIGN-BUILD, INC DBA SOUTHERN INDUSTRIAL ELECTRIC, 2151 NE COACHMAN RD CLEARWATER FL 33764 I 'ongratulationS! With this license you become one of the nearly one million Floridians licensed by the Department of Business and Professional Regulation. .~r professionals and businesses range from architects to yacht brokers, from rxers to barbeque restaurants, and they keep Florida's economy strong. Every day we work to improve the way we do business in order to serve you better. f,r information about our services, please log onto www.myfloridalicense.com. here you can find more information about our divisions and the regulations that pact you, subscribe to department newsletters and learn more about the epartment's initiatives. lur mission at the Department is: License Efficiently, Regulate Fairly. We nstantly strive to serve you better so that you can serve your customers. hank you for doing business in Florida, and congratulations on your new license! STATE OF FLORIDA AC# 3885180 .' DEP!kRTMEkT'P-F'BuSr;IES~~JA mi~::~;:,~,.^: PROF;E~ $::tONA:L '~'i~;:e:Gtlt;.a.'.' ~ '\(fN.i;.~\~'.~.:)'~.:5;f . ''''-':'1;0~; 'i{(i.:. ;.;( . 7ti!:c 000:1,9..9'2 07/ 31/118 ''k~:~~~0.1,ii14-3i@ '--1:';.,."" - -..J~.' . . ." >e'.' "'~'~(r.:,',i:"--'~::.;'-' "}~(rJr::iJI;; C~RTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR N;P~, TOMMY Ho.WARD .' '..~;';1 ~:- . B~ES DESI,GN -BUILD, :t-~qfl:pBf~bt., IS CERTIFIED under the provisions of Ch.~89 FS Expiration date, AUG,;,31 i 20itO "IiO,807:~tp14'?:.'5"';.", I I I DETACH HERE I){~~ 8'~4~,l ~fQ \,:?1'c,Ti/ }'<,J\ ~.",\ , . ..\~;Ss~).\~E:Afp:Fif LO RI D J.\ -5::-L:.. , :--'l;-:-.:..)i!:1i _ .~)~I'~:':,,;~'~~J:\~!;,"~~~~~':: _ '~"~:.... _:-~,'-,;,_,;: ._-~'_._ : .:. "--':"~'_'. ~,~'~~'~':<:" DE~:AR.~ii~:.~~~;;~ (~O~S$'.i\)N]l.L REGULATION.'" ,.t.V"i~h ~t;'~f, t >,r&~/' 'W7i~T.~:'. ~~f~~'RS~~~1(cE~~!Ir{G BOARD .sE(;A#L6;~t7,i~~fl~~~; ~'1:''''E:'''1'; 'ror/.'';:~'" '''~'r{, . ""{,',::i','c""-'l" t; : .. . 'Vol...... . 2(:~"':0'- l E~"/' .... ,~ " ,._-:""-:--,\;>~~~" -' ,)' 0 . .~\;al r08 _' .8'Qil~t443"Hf E~ltfiLQ;}.<J"::';'~' ,~~~" id...jf=.}$.,';C.'.~.., .'_.}[Fi....:~..:.;.Li.;i,.I~..:~.Q...W..'......:. ' ~. .,:~.;r ir~.:.~.:.;.01, r: -..::'.' .~.~ '_ :. e i/)i.oeW,CO',,"?;:ISi.)!~E>~Ii'IF'-~~)}' ~~;(;11<: -J ':". l~~~:!.!~:~:.:~~~~~~~..~:!~l~ .. .... ~~. *;'{i:f9~;)~~~?"'J(~~~".': ...~l1'!;~'~US'~!'AL I fHi~i'i~M:~ 'if ~~~t,~;)]\i~~"'~':<)' '"!'i'd' EI.l'cr~;p", CLEARWATER L FL 3~'T6:4" ':"""":, I.'i!i' !~~~ftif~i~f~~ll ~f~j(fljiJ~IJ '1f~~1f' ,::."..... I. ".It. ",.. .',. '. ....."". '. " ,. )' "'.7"'." ~i.P _ .0;i:.J~{~.,.. R)~'.~:'" ,[~".-...J:,:t;: 'l' ':C::r::;~':~{(;' 'fF"~;''',''"," ';')(1/ "~(:lJ:ltrlBPl:JW~~rdQUIREg)'el{ .'i " CHARLES W. DRAGO,' ',' <:'SECRETARY''':, . . . ~- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ~6~' >>:.... .s:......-... .j~~~LOI'T!I(X"""" ,\~_\ ~i,'.'''.Ir.;.".fl.7~ 4..~..'. ##~~";. ...::-...,-- ,II -:. .0'" ,lY~.....' / ':..~.. Qc:,"".), -_=.- '<c~ ..r:-:. =- QI,j ..if't1-:. = ;:;:: ~ ~:?'..t?+ - .'~~\' -:.. ~rlJ;."'..m"'~~~~'" ...........)1TH\.,1... I,,,.., CITY OF CLEARWATER POST OFFICE Box 4748, CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 33758-4748 TELEPHONE a2l) 462-6126 FAX (27) 462-6989 PUBUC SERVICES DEPARTMENT Brandes Design-Build, Inc. Attn: Ms. Susanne La Rosa 2151 N.E. Coachman Road Clearwater, Florida 33765 April 21, 2009 Re: Pre-Qualification to Bid - City of Clearwater Dear Ms. La Rosa: The City of Clearwater has pre-qualified your firm for construction in Clearwater as shown below: Maximum Project Bid Value: $5,000,000.00 Approved for the following construction categories Asphaltic Concrete Resurfacing; Commercial Swimming Pools Concrete Flat work (Curbs, Walks, Courts, Etc.) Construction Management Services; Demolition Excavation/Site Work; Horizontal Directional Drilling Industrial Painting; Roadway & Parking Lot Construction Sanitary Pump Stations; Sanitary & Storm Sewers; Stormwater Management Construction; Wastewater/Water Treatment Facilities; Water & Force Mains; Well Construction Pre-Qualification Expires: June 08, 2011 Bid limits have been established based upon information submitted. The Public Services Director reserves the right to adjust the maximum project bid value and construction type during the two-year approval period on the basis of direct work experience. This pre-qualification applies to standard types of construction projects. Projects requiring special expertise or unusually difficult construction may require separate pre-qualifications. Inasmuch as the financial statement you submitted has served our purpose we are returning it to you at this time. u interest and look forward to receiving your bids on City of Clearwater projects. Gary . Johnson, CGC Public Services Director /ae Attachment @ cc: Pre-qualification file "EQUAL EMPLOYMENT AND AFFIRMATfVE ALTJO~ EMPLOYER" ---- I I ACORDw CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE OP 10 L3 f DATE (NWDDIYYYY) BRAND 02 03/12109 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE ~wn & Brown of F1orida, Inc. HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND. EXTEND OR I O. Box 15519 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THe POLICIES BELOW. ~ampa FL 33684-5519 Phone: 813-226-1300 Fax: 813-226-1313 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAlC# INSURED INSURER A: Bituminous Casua1ty CO I. Brandes Design Bui1d1Inc, INSURER B: Bridgefield Emplovers Ins. 10701 DBA So~thern Industr al INSURER C: Trave1ers Prop Cas of Amer 25674 Electr c 2151 NE Coachman Rd INSURER D: Clearwater FL 33765 I ~ INSURER E: OVERAGES THE POUCIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOO INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REOUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR ~Y PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POlICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POUCIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. TR ~~[ TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER rD'A'TE lu~ -DATE'IMWDDrfVl. UUITS GENERAL UA8/UTY EACH OCCURRENCE $1.000 000 r I-- 03/13/09 ~~~~s lEI oa:urencel ~ COMMERCIAl GENERAL L1ABIUTY CLP3262215 03/13/10 $ 50 000 '-- tJ CLAIMS MADE [R] OCCUR MED EXP (Any anI person) $ 5 000 X Contractua1 Liab PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $1. 000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2. 000,000 I I-- GENt AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMPIOP AGG $ 2, 000, 000 h POLlCY Iil r~ n LOC ~OMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 r ~ ANY AUTO CAP3528744 03/13/09 03/13/10 rEI Iccldent) ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY - $ SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) - HIRED AUTOS BODilY INJURY II I-- $ f-- NON-DWNED AUTOS ! (Per accident) i -- , ~ i PROPERTY DAMAGE $ I (Per accident) II GARAGE L1ABIUTY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ R ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $ AUTO ONLY: AGG $ EXCESSlUMBREllA UABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $5 000 000 I !J OCCUR 0 CLAIMS MADE CUP2582028 03/13/09 03/13/10 AGGREGATE $5 000 000 $ ::l DEDUCTIBLE $ I X RETENTION s10,000 $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND X I TORY LIMITS I IUJ~- EMPLOYERS' lIABILITY 83031655 03/13/09 03/13/10 $1,000,000 At-N PROPRIETORlPARTNERlEXECUTlVE E.l. EACH ACCIDENT OFFICERlMEMBER EXClUDED? E.l. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $1. 000, 000 , ~~rc:I~tS~~V'lS1~~s below E.l. DISEASE - POUCY LIMIT $1. 000,000 OTHER BIdrs Risk/Inst Fl QT6609280A712 03/13/09 03/13/10 Max Lmt $3,000,000 Reporting Form Oed $5,000 RIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BV ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISlONS I - .. TIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION BRIGGS SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 010 DAYS WRmEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL ""POSE NO OBLIGATION OR liABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. A RIZED REPR . I For Bid Purpose Only IRD 25 (2001/08) @ACORD CORPORATION 1988